Transitional Specifi - OEC Business Interiors

TransitionalProducts and Surface MaterialsSpecification GuideWhat’s New?What’s New information is now availableon the in2.steelcase.com Web site. Go toWhat’s New, then Show News by Category,then Incentives, Pricing, Promotions.cSee the Specification Guide Library:Reference Guide for information about whereto find products.AvailabilityElectronic price list updated withrelease 160.A (U.S.) and 136.A (Canada),dated January 17, 2005.Items indicated with an G are on the2005 culling list and scheduled for deletionNovember 18, 2005.Items indicated with an GG are scheduledfor deletion June 17, 2005.Introduction 2SpecifyingActivity Products 3Answer 11Avenir 29Context 59Elective Elements 69I-Line Moveable Walls 153Montage 259Seating 303Secant Options 329Series 9000 333Storage Products 377Turnstone Furniture 417Wood Casegoods and Tables—Stow Davis 429Wood Seating 445Surface Materials 455Resources 457Style Number Index 458cFor a list of all trademarks,refer to the lastpage of this specificationguide.For Canadian PricingCalculate in the followingorder to avoid roundingerrors:• Multiply the base priceand each option by 1.38.• Round each to thenearest dollar.• Add base and optionsfor total list price.

Introduction.This Transitional Specification Guide containsproducts and surface materials that are beingmaintained for existing customers onlyand are likely to be phased out over time. It isexpected that each of these Transitional itemswill enter the existing deletion process when andif a decision is made to discontinue production.A list of products and surface materials identifiedfor deletion is included on Product Info. See the“Culling List With Alternatives.” Product Info is anelectronic collection of specification guides inAcrobat PDF (Portable Document Format). WithProduct Info, you can scan, search, and print anypage on virtually any computer. You can accessthese files at the Steelcase.com Web site or MySales Online at in2.Steelcase.com. New customersor existing customers with newprojects should be selecting productsand materials from specification guidesother than the Transitional SpecificationGuide..This guide will be reprinted on something closeto an annual basis but it is strongly suggestedthat you reference Product Info.The idea is to give you—our customers, designers,specifiers and dealers—additional time toprepare for change. With this kind of advancenotice, we’ll be able to help you:– make smooth transitions to alternativeselections– avoid selections that may be phased outover time– be more informed and confident about thelong-term plans for our products and surfacematerials..2 Transitional Specification Guide

Activity ProductsActivity ProductsAuxiliary Surfaces 4Carts34"H Cart 5Carts with Worksurface 6Carts with Slatwall Panel 7Accessories 8Transitional Specification Guide 3

Auxiliary SurfacesPersonal TableStandard Includes• Worksurface: laminate• Sides: vinyl, with a default color-coordinated insert• Two legs with casters: paint price group 1, 2, or 3Required to Specify1 Style number2 Laminate color number for top3 Paint color number for legscSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Specification InformationDDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD W H dNumber dPriced d d24" 42" 26 1 ⁄2" UAT2442N $782d d dFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.4 Transitional Specification Guide

34"H Cart34"H CartStandard IncludesSpecification Information• Worksurface and platform: laminate• Worksurface and platform sides: vinyl, with adefault color-coordinated insert• Structure and shelves: paint price group 1, 2, or 3• 2 1 ⁄4"-diameter, dual-wheel casters: black onlyDDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD W H dNumber dPriced d d22 1 ⁄4" 22 1 ⁄4" 34" UAC2224 $933d d dRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Laminate color number for worksurface3 Paint color number for structurecSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Activity ProductsFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 5

Carts with WorksurfaceTip: Carts without doors donot have a back panel.Standard IncludesRequired to Specify• Worksurface: laminate1 Style number• Worksurface sides: vinyl, with a default2 Laminate color number for worksurfacecolor-coordinated insert3 Paint color number for structure,• Structure, shelves, cable tray, and doors andshelves, cable tray, doors, and backback panel, if selected: paint price group 1panel• Lock, if selected, keyed random: 9201 Polished Chrome 4 Options, if selected (see below)• 4"-diameter dual wheel casters with locking mechanisms: cSee Surface Materials in the electronicblack nylon onlyprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurfaceWorksurfaceMaterials • Open Line laminate +$ 60 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.plus cost of laminateCart without doors• Paint price group 1 No cost Specify paint color number.• Paint price group 2 +$ 74 Specify paint color number.• Paint price group 3 +$125 Specify paint color number.Cart with doors• Paint price group 1 No cost Specify paint color number.• Paint price group 2 +$126 Specify paint color number.• Paint price group 3 +$215 Specify paint color number.Lock andLockKeying • Ember Chrome No cost Specify with 9250 Ember Chrome lock.Keying• Factory- and field-installed keyingcSee Storage Specification Guide.Related • Tote cPage 8ProductsSpecification InformationDDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD W H dNumber dBased d dPriced d dWithout Doors24" 30" 40" UAC3040 $129524" 48" 40" UAC4840 $1544d d dWith Doors24" 30" 40" UAC3040L $154424" 48" 40" UAC4840L $1922d d dFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.6 Transitional Specification Guide

Carts with Slatwall PanelCarts with Slatwall Panel53"HStandard IncludesRequired to Specify• Structure, adjustable shelves, pull-out shelf,1 Style numberand slatwall: paint price group 12 Paint color number for structure• Handrail: black only3 Options, if selected (see below)• Flip-chart-mounting pegcSee Surface Materials in the electronic• 4"-diameter dual wheel casters with locking mechanisms: price list.black nylon onlyActivity Products64 3 /4"HTip: 53"H cart can accommodatesecure storage onone side. 65"H cart canaccommodate secure storageon one side or bothsides.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurfaceCartMaterials • Paint price group 1 No cost Specify paint color number.• Paint price group 2 +$ 53 Specify paint color number.• Paint price group 3 +$125 Specify paint color number.Related • Tote cPage 8Products • Adjustable shelf cPage 8• Lockable storage cPage 9Specification InformationDDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD W H dNumber dBased d dPriced d d19" 30" 53" UAC3053 $152230" 30" 64 3 ⁄4" UAC3065 $1922d d dFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 7

AccessoriesLockable StorageStandard Includes• Door: paint price group 1• Pull: black• Lock, keyed random: 9201 Polished ChromeRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for door3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Activity ProductsOptions U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurfaceLockable storageMaterials • Paint price group 1 No cost Specify paint color number.• Paint price group 2 +$13 Specify paint color number.• Paint price group 3 +$29 Specify paint color number.Lock andLockKeying • Ember Chrome No cost Specify with 9250 Ember Chrome lock.Keying• Factory- and field-installed keyingcSee Storage Specification Guide.Specification InformationDDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD W dNumber dBased d dPriced d d30" 12" UALS30 $139d d dTransitional Specification Guide 9

10 Transitional Specification Guide

AnswerPanelsGlass Window Kits 12Pass-Thru Window Kits 13WorksurfacesBridge, Scoop, and Wave Worksurfaces 14Transaction Countertops 17Angled Peninsula Worksurfaces for Use with Kick 18Spanner Worksurfaces for Use with Kick 19Curved Linking Worksurfaces for Use with Kick 20Worksurface Supports 21Worksurface Accessories 22Worksurface Wiring and Cabling 23StorageMobile Pedestal Cap 24Answer Fillers 26Pathways Fillers 27Pencil Tray 28AnswerTransitional Specification Guide 11

Glass Window Kitsfor Panel BuildupsStandard Includes• Glass window: 6500 Clear Glass• Frame and trim: plasticRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Color number for glass:6500 Clear Glass3 Plastic color number for frame and trim:6000 Black6654 Sand (Vanadium)6697 FogSpecification Information12"H 24"H 36"H 48"HDWidth DStyle DU.S. DStyle DU.S. DStyle DU.S. DStyle DU.S.d dNumber dPrice dNumber dPrice dNumber dPrice dNumber dPriced d d d d d d d d24" TS71224WG $364 TS72424WG $485 TS73624WG $703 TS74824WG $105430" TS71230WG $392 TS72430WG $514 TS73630WG $755 TS74830WG $113336" TS71236WG $419 TS72436WG $544 TS73636WG $807 TS74836WG $121242" TS71242WG $447 TS72442WG $577 TS73642WG $860 TS74842WG $129148" TS71248WG $473 TS72448WG $630 TS73648WG $914 TS74848WG $137160" TS71260WG $545 N.A. N.A. N.A.72" TS71272WG $611 N.A. N.A. N.A.d d d d d d d d dFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.12 Transitional Specification Guide

Pass-Thru Window Kitsfor Panel BuildupsPass-Thru Window KitsStandard Includes• Pass-thru window• Frame and trim: plasticRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Plastic color number for frame and trim:6000 Black6654 Sand (Vanadium)6697 FogcSee Surface Materials in theelectronic price list.Tip: Field-installed insertcan be added.Specification Information12"H 24"H 36"HAnswerDWidth DStyle DU.S. DStyle DU.S. DStyle DU.S.d dNumber dPrice dNumber dPrice dNumber dPriced d d d d d d24" TS71224WP $240 TS72424WP $320 TS73624WP $46530" TS71230WP $259 TS72430WP $339 TS73630WP $49836" TS71236WP $277 TS72436WP $359 TS73636WP $53342" TS71242WP $295 TS72442WP $381 TS73642WP $56848" TS71248WP $311 TS72448WP $416 TS73648WP $60460" TS71260WP $366 N.A. N.A.72" TS71272WP $410 N.A. N.A.d d d d d d dFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 13

Bridge WorksurfacesWDTip: Bridge worksurfacescan be freestanding if C-legsare used.Standard Includes• Worksurface: laminate• 3 mm radius profile edge on user’s side: vinyl default• Side and back edges: vinyl default• Cable scallopsRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Laminate color number forworksurface3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in theelectronic price list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurface • Wood veneer worksurface with +$242 Specify with wood worksurface andMaterials wood edge select wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood +$ 20 Specify with Customiz stain.cSee Surface Materials ReferenceManual.• Full-fill finish +$ 41 Specify with full-fill finish and selectwood color number.cSee Surface Materials in theelectronic price list.• Accent laminate +$ 60 cSee Surface Materials ReferenceManual.• Open Line laminate +$ 60 cSee Surface Materials Referenceplus cost of laminate Manual.Related • Worksurface legs and supports cSee Answer Specification Guide.Products • Cantilever cSee Answer Specification Guide.• Side support bracket cPage 21Specification InformationDDepth DWidth DStyle DU.S.d d dNumber dBased d d dPriced d d d30" 42" TS73042BR $38130" 48" TS73048BR $445d d d dBridge Worksurfaces42" 48"30" 30"1081 sq. in. 1237 sq. in.For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.14 Transitional Specification Guide

Scoop WorksurfaceScoop WorksurfaceDWTip: Cantilever, ordered separately,is required to supportcenter of scoopworksurface.cSee Answer SpecificationGuide.Tip: Reinforcing channel(TS772RC) is availableto add support to worksurfacesthat have 72" or moreof unsupported kneespaceand which will be heavilyloaded; must be orderedseparately.cPage 21Standard Includes• Worksurface: laminate• 3 mm radius profile edge on user’s side: vinyl default• Side and back edges: vinyl default• Cable scallopsRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Laminate color number forworksurface3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in theelectronic price list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurface • Wood veneer worksurface with +$464 Specify with wood worksurface andMaterials wood edge select wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood +$ 42 Specify with Customiz stain.cSee Surface Materials ReferenceManual.• Full-fill finish +$ 84 Specify with full-fill finish and selectwood color number.cSee Surface Materials in theelectronic price list.• Accent laminate +$ 60 cSee Surface Materials ReferenceManual.• Open Line laminate +$ 60 cSee Surface Materials Referenceplus cost of laminate Manual.Related • Worksurface legs and supports cSee Answer Specification Guide.Products • Cantilever cSee Answer Specification Guide.• Side support bracket cPage 21AnswerSpecification InformationDDepth DWidth DStyle DU.S.d d dNumber dBased d d dPriced d d d30" 96" TS73096SP $744d d d dScoop Worksurface96"30"2721 sq. in.For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 15

Wave WorksurfacesDWTip: Remember to order sidesupports separately.cPage 21Standard Includes• Worksurface: laminate• 3 mm radius profile edge on user’s side: vinyl default• Single post leg: paint• Corner bracket: black paint• Side and back edges: vinyl default• Cable scallopsRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Laminate color number forworksurface3 Paint color number for singlepost leg4 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in theelectronic price list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurface • Wood veneer worksurface with +$490 Specify with wood worksurface andMaterials wood edge select wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood +$ 42 Specify with Customiz stain.cSee Surface Materials ReferenceManual.• Full-fill finish +$ 84 Specify with full-fill finish and selectwood color number.cSee Surface Materials in theelectronic price list.• Accent laminate +$ 60 cSee Surface Materials ReferenceManual.• Open Line laminate +$ 60 cSee Surface Materials Referenceplus cost of laminate Manual.Supports • Standing-height single post leg +$ 19 Specify with standing-height singlepost leg.• Double post leg +$179 Specify with double post leg.• Standing-height double post leg +$229 Specify with standing-height.double post leg.Related • Worksurface legs and supports cSee Answer Specification Guide.ProductsSpecification InformationDDepth DWidth DStyle DU.S.d d dNumber dBased d d dPriced d d d36" 84" TS73684WV $ 94536" 96" TS73696WV $1016d d d dWave Worksurfaces84" 96"30" 36" 30" 36"2566 sq. in. 2873 sq. in.For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.16 Transitional Specification Guide

Transaction CountertopsPanel SupportedTransaction CountertopsWDStandard Includes• Countertop: laminate• Slight radius profile edge: vinyl default• Top caps: paint• Support brackets: black paint onlyRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Laminate color number forcountertop3 Paint color number for top caps4 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in theelectronic price list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurface • Wood veneer worksurface with +$258 Specify with wood worksurface andMaterials wood edge select wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood Prices below Specify with Customiz stain.cSee Surface Materials ReferenceManual.• Full-fill finish Prices below Specify with full-fill finish and selectwood color number.cSee Surface Materials in theelectronic price list.• Accent laminate +$ 60 cSee Surface Materials ReferenceManual.• Open Line laminate +$ 60 cSee Surface Materials Referenceplus cost of laminate Manual.AnswerTip: Top cap not availablein full-fill finish.Top cap• Wood +$ 91 Specify with wood top cap and selectwood color number.• Customiz stain on wood No cost Specify with Customiz stain.Specification InformationDDepth DWidth DStyle DU.S. DOptionsd d dNumber dBase d(Add $ tod d d dPrice dBase Price)d d d d dd d d d dCustomiz dFull-Filld d d d dStain dFinish16" 32 3 ⁄4" TS71636TC $256 +$20 +$29916" 38 3 ⁄4" TS71642TC $275 +$20 +$29916" 44 3 ⁄4" TS71648TC $294 +$20 +$29916" 56 3 ⁄4" TS71660TC $317 +$30 +$318d d d d d dFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 17

Angled Peninsula Worksurfaces for Use with KickStandard Includes• Worksurface: laminate• 3 mm radius profile edge on user’s side: vinyl default• Double post leg: paint• Attachment hardware: black paintRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Laminate color number forworksurface3 Paint color number for doublepost leg4 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in theelectronic price list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurface • Wood veneer worksurface with +$309 Specify with wood worksurface andMaterials wood edge select wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood +$ 42 Specify with Customiz stain.cSee Surface Materials ReferenceManual.• Full-fill finish +$ 84 Specify with full-fill finish and selectwood color number.cSee Surface Materials ReferenceManual.• Accent laminate +$ 60 cSee Surface Materials ReferenceManual.• Open Line laminate +$ 60 cSee Surface Materials Referenceplus cost of laminate Manual.Supports • Standing-height double post leg +$ 51 Specify with standing-height doublepost leg.Related • Cantilever cSee Answer Specification Guide.Products • Side support bracket cPage 21Specification InformationDDepth DWidth DStyle DU.S.d d dNumber dBased d d dPriced d d dDDWWith Double Post Leg Only26" 48" TS72648APK $74826" 60" TS72660APK $77032" 48" TS73248APK $74832" 60" TS73260APK $770d d d dAngled Peninsula Worksurfaces with Double Post Leg Only48" 60" 48" 60"26"26"32" 32"1248 sq. in. 1560 sq. in. 1536 sq. in. 1920 sq. in.For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.18 Transitional Specification Guide

Spanner Worksurfaces for Use with KickSpanner Worksurfacesfor Use with KickTip: Remember to specifycantilevers to attachspanner worksurface toadjacent worksurfaces.Standard Includes• Worksurface: laminate• 3 mm radius profile edge on user’s side: vinyl default• Double-post leg: paintRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Laminate color number forworksurface3 Paint color number for leg4 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in theelectronic price list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurface • Wood veneer worksurface with +$309 Specify with wood worksurface andMaterials wood edge select wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood +$ 30 Specify with Customiz stain.cSee Surface Materials ReferenceManual.• Full-fill finish +$ 60 Specify with full-fill finish and selectwood color number.cSee Surface Materials ReferenceManual.• Accent laminate +$ 60 cSee Surface Materials ReferenceManual.• Open Line laminate +$ 60 cSee Surface Materials Referenceplus cost of laminate Manual.AnswerLegs • Standing-height double post leg +$ 50 Specify with standing-height doublepost leg.• Substitute leg package with two +$188 Specify with post leg.post legs and two post legs withcasters to make freestandingspanner table in the fieldRelated • Worksurface legs and supports cSee Answer Specification Guide.ProductsSpecification InformationWDDDepth DWidth DStyle DU.S.d d dNumber dBased d d dPriced d d dSpanner Worksurfaces with One Double Post Leg25 1 ⁄2" 50" TS750HRK $59831 1 ⁄2" 62" TS762HRK $683d d d dSpanner Worksurfaces with One Double Post Leg50" 62"25 1 /2" 31 1 /2"1275 sq. in.1953 sq. in.For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 19

Curved Linking Worksurfaces for Use with KickStandard Includes• Worksurface: laminate• 3 mm radius profile edge on user’s side: vinyl default• Single post leg on curved linking worksurface: paintRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Laminate color number forworksurface3 Paint color number for leg4 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in theelectronic price list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurface • Wood veneer worksurface with +$242 Specify with wood worksurface andMaterials wood edge select wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood +$ 12 Specify with Customiz stain.cSee Surface Materials ReferenceManual.• Full-fill finish +$ 24 Specify with full-fill finish and selectwood color number.cSee Surface Materials ReferenceManual.• Accent laminate +$ 60 cSee Surface Materials ReferenceManual.• Open Line laminate +$ 60 cSee Surface Materials Referenceplus cost of laminate Manual.Supports • Standing-height single post leg +$ 19 Specify with standing-height singlepost leg.Specification InformationDDepth DDepth DStyle DU.S.dLeft dRight dNumber dBased d d dPriced d d dLRTip: Remember to ordercantilevers to connectcurved linking worksurfacesto adjacent worksurfaces.cSee Answer SpecificationGuide.26" 26" TS72626LK $49626" 32" TS72632LK $51732" 26" TS73226LK $51732" 32" TS73232LK $517d d d dCurved Linking Worksurfaces26"32"26"26" 26"32"32"32"676 sq. in. 832 sq. in. 832 sq. in. 1024 sq. in.TS72626LK TS72632LK TS73226LK TS73232LKFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.20 Transitional Specification Guide

Worksurface SupportsWorksurface SupportsStandard Includes• Side support bracket: black paint• Reinforcing channel: black paintRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for C-leg bracket,cantilever, and center support panelcSee Surface Materials in theelectronic price list.Specification InformationDDimensions DStyle DU.S.d dNumber dPriced d dSide Support Bracket to Connect Worksurface to PanelN.A. N.A. TS70WPC $31d d dReinforcing Channel72"W TS772RC $98d d dAnswerTip: Use the 72"W reinforcingchannel when more than72" of scoop worksurface isunsupported.For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 21

Worksurface AccessoriesPedestal-to-Modesty Panel Filler10 7 /8"Standard Includes• Filler: paintRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for fillercSee Surface Materials in theelectronic price list.Tip: Filler must be attachedto single-post leg and 20"Dor 26"D pedestal.Tip: If stacking two modestypanels, order two fillers.Specification InformationDStyledNumberdDU.S.dPricedTS7MPP $35ddFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.22 Transitional Specification Guide

Worksurface Wiring and CablingWorksurfaceWiring and CablingCable Storage TrayStandard Includes• Cable storage tray: black paint onlyRequired to SpecifyStyle numberSpecification InformationDStyledNumberdDU.S.dPricedTS7CST $31ddAnswerFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 23

Mobile Pedestal Cap GField-Installed KitTip: For use with “TS7”Series Answer pedestalsmanufactured prior toFebruary 2004.Standard Includes• Cushion upholstery: fabric price group 1• Retractable handle: 9201 Polished Chrome only• Template for installationRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Fabric color number for cushionupholstery3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in theelectronic price list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurfaceUpholsteryMaterials • Fabric price group 1 No cost Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 2 +$ 10 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 3 +$ 33 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 4 +$ 41 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 5 +$ 50 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 6 +$ 72 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 7 +$ 85 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 8 +$125 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 9 +$160 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 10 +$195 Specify fabric color number.• Leather price group +$500 Specify leather color number.cSee Surface Materials in theelectronic price list.• Customer’s own material +$ 15 cSee Surface Materials Reference(COM) or Customer’s ownManual to specify.leather (COL)Specification InformationDDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD W dNumber dBased d dPriced d dFor Use with Answer Box File Mobile Pedestal (TS7MOBILE)20" 15" CAP1520 G $315d d dFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.24 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

Mobile Pedestal Cap GFor Use with 22"D Mobile PedestalsMobile Pedestal CapTip: For use with “TS7”Series Answer pedestalsmanufactured prior toFebruary 2004.Standard Includes• Cushion upholstery: fabric price group 1• Retractable handle: 9201 Polished Chrome only• Template for installationRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Fabric color number for cushionupholstery3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in theelectronic price list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurfaceUpholsteryMaterials • Fabric price group 1 No cost Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 2 +$ 10 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 3 +$ 33 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 4 +$ 41 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 5 +$ 50 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 6 +$ 72 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 7 +$ 85 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 8 +$125 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 9 +$160 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 10 +$195 Specify fabric color number.• Leather price group +$500 Specify leather color number.cSee Surface Materials in theelectronic price list.• Customer’s own material +$ 15 cSee Surface Materials Reference(COM) or Customer’s ownManual to specify.leather (COL)AnswerSpecification InformationDDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD W dNumber dBased d dPriced d dFor Use with Answer Box File Mobile Pedestal (TS7L248BFM)22" 15" CAP1522 G $315d d dFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List25Last order entry November 18, 2005

Answer Fillersfor Use with Answer System Panels and WorksurfacesStandard Includes• Filler: paintRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for fillercSee Surface Materials in theelectronic price list.Tip: For use with “TS7”Series Answer pedestalsmanufactured prior toFebruary 2004.Specification InformationDDepth DStyle DU.S.d dNumber dPriced d dFiller to Close Gap Between Back of Panel, Pedestal, or Lateral File24" TS724FLR $3730" TS730FLR $37d d dFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.26 Transitional Specification Guide

Pathways FillersFor Use with Pathways Technology Wall and/or Universal Systems and Freestanding WorksurfacesPathways FillersStandard Includes• Filler: paintRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for fillercSee Surface Materials in theelectronic price list.On-moduleOff-moduleTip: On-module filler can onlybe used with Answer panels.Pathways Technology Wallpanels can be used with bothon-module and off-modulefillers.Specification InformationDDepth DStyle DU.S.d dNumber dPriced d dOff-Module24" UPF24OM $3730" UPF30OM $37d d dAnswerFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 27

Pencil Tray GStandard Includes• Pencil tray: black plastic onlyRequired to SpecifyStyle numberSpecification InformationDStyledNumberdDU.S.dPricedFor Use with 20"D and 26"D Pedestals and Mobile PedestalsTS7BDPT G $21ddFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.28 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

AvenirPanelsHigh-Performance Acoustical Panels 301 1 /8" WorksurfacesRectangular Worksurfaces 32Corner Worksurfaces 33Panel-Supported Radius-End Tables 34Transaction Worksurfaces 35Worksurface Supports and BracketsTie Plate 36Worksurface Fillers 36Pedestals with 100 and 200 Series PullsFreestanding Pedestals 38Worksurface-Supported Pedestals 40Mobile Pedestal with 100 Series Pulls 42Mobile Pedestal Cap 44Storage Accessories 45AvenirProducts Prior to June 1990Rectangular Worksurfaces 48Corner Worksurfaces 50Straight Transaction Worksurfaces 51Worksurface-Supported Pedestals 52Freestanding Pedestals 53Mobile Pedestals 54Tackboards 58Transitional Specification Guide 29

High-Performance Acoustical PanelsStandard Includes• Panel with two surfaces: vertical surface fabric pricegroup 1• Top cap, end trim, and base covers with receptacleknockouts: all paint price groups• Top cap height: medium• Universal connector packageRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Fabric color number for surface 13 Fabric color number for surface 24 Paint color number for top cap, end trim,and base covers5 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Tip: To price a panel withtwo surface materials in differentprice groups, add thetwo fabric price group optionprices together and divideby 2; then add the result tothe panel base price.Tip: If you want the panelfabric to match the fabric onpanel end trim, change-ofheightpanel connectors,power poles, cable poles, orfillers, check to see that thefabric you want is availableon that product before youspecify the panel fabric.Some fabrics are not availablebecause they are notsuitable for wrapping thinpieces.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurfacePanel surfaceMaterials • Fabric price group 1 No cost Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 2 +$ 32 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 3 +$ 80 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 4 +$128 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 5 +$200 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group COM +$ 30 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manualto specify.Fabric direction• Warp vertical on directional No cost Specify with warp vertical.fabricscSee Avenir Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.Top cap, end trim, and base covers• Wood on low or medium +$ 96 Specify with wood top cap and selecttop cap onlywood color number.• Customiz stain on wood +$ 12 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.top cap• Fabric-covered end trim +$ 43 cAdd fabric-covered end trim styleeachnumber to the panel specifications andselect fabric color numbercSee Avenir Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.Top CapHeightcSee Avenir • Low (reduces panel height No cost Replace second M in style numberSystems Furniture by 3 ⁄4") with L.Specification Guide • High (increases panel +$ 21 Replace second M in style numberheight by 1") with H.Knockouts• Cable knockout on medium No cost Specify top cap with knockout.top capElectricalFactory-installed powerwaycSee Avenir • 3-circuit powerway with +$134 Add suffix P3 to panel style number.Systems Furniture shared neutralSpecification Guide • 3-circuit powerway with +$160 Add suffix P3 to panel style number andseparate neutralsspecify with separate neutrals.• 4-circuit (3+D) powerway +$158 Add suffix P4 to panel style number.• 4-circuit (3I+1) powerway +$189 Add suffix P4 to panel style number andspecify with 3I+1 wiring.• 4-circuit (2+2) powerway +$189 Add suffix P4 to panel style number andspecify with 2+2 wiring.Field-installed powerway• For use in New York CityMust specify powerway for fieldinstallation only and specifynon-powered panel with power basecovers.cSee Avenir Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.cOptions continued on next pageFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.30 Transitional Specification Guide

High-PerformanceAcoustical PanelscOptions, continuedOptions U.S. Price Required to SpecifyElectricalFactory-installed power base coverscSee Avenir • For use in Chicago No cost Specify with Chicago power base covers.Systems Furniture(For 30"W panels only.)Specification Guide(continued)Factory-installed wire separator+$17 Specify with wire separator.Related • Panel connectors cSee Avenir Systems FurnitureProductsSpecification Guide.• Panel bracketscSee Avenir Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.• Panel accessoriescSee Avenir Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.• Panel wiring and cablingcSee Avenir Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.Specification InformationDWidth DStyle DU.S. DStyle DU.S.d dNumber dBase dNumber dBased d dPrice d dPriced d d d d64 11 ⁄16"H 80 1 ⁄2"H18 5 ⁄16" MPHAM6518 $608 N.A.24 5 ⁄16" MPHAM6524 $614 MPHAM8024 $ 81030 5 ⁄16" MPHAM6530 $649 MPHAM8030 $ 85636 5 ⁄16" MPHAM6536 $684 MPHAM8036 $ 91142 5 ⁄16" MPHAM6542 $737 MPHAM8042 $ 99148 5 ⁄16" MPHAM6548 $792 MPHAM8048 $106560 9 ⁄16" MPHAM6560 $967 N.A.d d d d dAvenirFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 31

Rectangular Worksurfaces G1 1 /8"-ThickDTip: Supports must beordered with a separatestyle number.Tip: Reinforcing channel(TS7WKSPT) is recommendedto add support to1 1 ⁄8" worksurfaces that have60" or more of unsupportedkneespace. Bracket must beordered separately.cSee Answer SolutionsSpecification Guide.Standard Includes• Worksurface: laminate• No support left and right• Radius-edge front and unfinished back edge• Side edges: vinyl (PVC) default• Cable notches• Center support on 66 1 ⁄4"W and 72 1 ⁄4"Wworksurfaces: black paint onlyRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Laminate color number for worksurface3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurfaceWorksurfaceMaterials • Accent laminate +$60 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.• Open Line laminate +$60 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.plus cost of laminateRelated • Worksurface supports and brackets cSee Avenir Systems FurnitureProductsSpecification Guide.• Worksurface accessoriescSee Avenir Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.• Worksurface wiring and cablingcSee Avenir Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.• PedestalscSee Avenir Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.• Storage accessoriescSee Avenir Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.Specification InformationDDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD W dNumber dBased d dPriced d d24"D Worksurfaces24" 30" BW3024 G $15424" 36" BW3624 G $16324" 42" BW4224 G $17624" 48" BW4824 G $20824" 60 1 ⁄4" BW6024 G $23724" 66 1 ⁄4" BW6624 G $26624" 72 1 ⁄4" BW7224 G $297d d d30"D Worksurfaces30" 30" BW3030 G $21130" 36" BW3630 G $22530" 42" BW4230 G $23730" 48" BW4830 G $27030" 60 1 ⁄4" BW6030 G $30530" 66 1 ⁄4" BW6630 G $33330" 72 1 ⁄4" BW7230 G $396d d dFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.32 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

Corner Worksurfaces G1 1 /8"-ThickCorner WorksurfacesWDTip: Order cantileversor shared cantileversseparately.Tip: Reinforcing channel(TS7WKSPT) is recommendedto add support to1 1 ⁄8" worksurfaces that have60" or more of unsupportedkneespace. Bracket must beordered separately.cSee Answer SolutionsSpecification Guide.Standard Includes• Worksurface: laminate• Radius-edge front and unfinished back edge• Side edges: vinyl (PVC) default• Rear corner support: black paint onlyRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Laminate color number for worksurface3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurfaceWorksurfaceMaterials • Accent laminate +$60 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.• Open Line laminate +$60 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.plus cost of laminateGrommets • Available on all corner +$26 Back center: CWBC and plastic colorcSee Avenir worksurfaces each numberSystems Furniture • Available on 24"D x 42 1 ⁄4"W +$26 Keyboard: CWKB and plastic colorSpecification Guide corner worksurfaces only each cornercSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Related • Worksurface supports and brackets cSee Avenir Systems FurnitureProductsSpecification Guide.• Worksurface accessoriescSee Avenir Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.• Worksurface wiring and cablingcSee Avenir Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.• Storage accessoriescSee Avenir Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.AvenirSpecification InformationDDimensions DStyle DU.S.dFront D W dNumber dBased d dPriced d d17 5 ⁄16" 24" 36 1 ⁄4" BCW3624 G $28225 25 ⁄32" 24" 42 1 ⁄4" BCW4224 G $3118 53 ⁄64" 30" 36 1 ⁄4" BCW3630 G $31517 5 ⁄16" 30" 42 1 ⁄4" BCW4230 G $343d d dFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List33Last order entry November 18, 2005

Panel-Supported Radius-End Tables G1 1 /8"-ThickStandard IncludesRequired to SpecifyDW• Worksurface: laminate• Worksurface edge: vinyl on exposed edge andunfinished on straight edge• Height-adjustable column support: all paint price groups• Locking side support: black paint only1 Style number2 Laminate color number for worksurface3 Paint color number for column support4 Plastic color number for vinyl worksurfaceedge5 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurfaceWorksurfaceMaterials • Accent laminate +$60 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.• Open Line laminate +$60 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.plus cost of laminateRelated • Worksurface supports and brackets cSee Avenir Systems FurnitureProductsSpecification Guide.• Worksurface accessoriescSee Avenir Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.• Worksurface wiring and cablingcSee Avenir Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.• PedestalscSee Avenir Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.• Storage accessoriescSee Avenir Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.Specification InformationDDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD W dNumber dBased d dPriced d d30" 60" BPW6030 G $73830" 66" BPW6630 G $74830" 72" BPW7230 G $758d d dFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.34 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

Transaction Worksurfaces G1 1 /8"-ThickTransaction WorksurfacesStandard Includes• Worksurface: laminate• Worksurface edge: vinyl• Support brackets: all paint price groupsRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Laminate color number for worksurface3 Plastic color number for vinyl worksurfaceedge4 Paint color number for support bracketscSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurfaceWorksurfaceMaterials • Accent laminate +$60 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.• Open Line laminate +$60 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.plus cost of laminateSpecification InformationTip: Support brackets allowworksurfaces to be attachedto 41"H panels with low topcaps only. They cannotattach to panels with mediumor high top caps. For panelswith medium top caps, youcan use transaction worksurfacesintroduced prior toJune 1990 for details thatare visually compatible with1 1 ⁄8"-thick transaction worksurfaces.DDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD W dNumber dBased d dPriced d dStraight Transaction Worksurfaces16 5 ⁄8" 30 5 ⁄16" BTT30 G $24416 5 ⁄8" 36 5 ⁄16" BTT36 G $26316 5 ⁄8" 42 5 ⁄16" BTT42 G $28316 5 ⁄8" 48 5 ⁄16" BTT48 G $30216 5 ⁄8" 60 5 ⁄8" BTT60 G $326d d dAvenirFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List35Last order entry November 18, 2005

Worksurface Supports and Brackets GTie Plates for Use with 1 1 ⁄8"-Thick Worksurfaces GStandard Includes• Carton of 10 tie plates: grotto paint onlyRequired to SpecifyStyle numberSpecification InformationDDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD H dNumber dPriced d d3 3 ⁄4" 3⁄4" BTP G $127d d dWorksurface Fillers for Use with 1 1 ⁄8"-Thick Worksurfaces GStandard Includes• Worksurface filler: vinylRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Plastic color numbercSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Specification InformationDDepth DStyle DU.S.d dNumber dPriced d d24" BWF24 G $2030" BWF30 G $20d d dFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.36 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

Worksurface Supportsand BracketsAvenirFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 37

Freestanding Pedestalswith 100 Series and 200 Series Pulls100 Series pullStandard Includes• Pedestal and filler: paint price group 1• 100 Series drawer pulls: metallic plastic only• 200 Series drawer pulls: paint price group 1 to matchpedestal paint color• Basic drawer interiors:– Full drawer body: black only– Box drawers with full extensions– File drawers with full extensions– No drawer accessories• Lock, if selected, keyed random: 9201 Polished Chrome• Mounting hardware• Four adjustable leveling glides: black onlyRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for pedestal3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurface • Paint price group 1 No cost Specify paint color number.Materials • Paint price group 2 +$38 Specify paint color number.• Paint price group 3 +$65 Specify paint color number.200 Series pullFull Drawer 24"D and 30"D box/box/file pedestalsInteriors • Full-depth drawers, full- +$35 Specify with full drawers.drawer extensions, penciltray, and box drawer dividersFiller • No filler –$25 Specify with no filler.Lock andLockKeying • Ember Chrome No cost Specify with 9250 Ember Chrome lock.Individual locking drawers• File/file pedestals only +$95 Specify with individual drawer lock.Keying• Factory- and field-installed keyingcSee Avenir Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.Related • Storage accessories cSee Avenir Systems FurnitureProductsSpecification Guide.For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.38 Transitional Specification Guide

Freestanding Pedestalswith 100 Series and200 Series PullsSpecification Information100 Series Pulls 200 Series PullsDDimensions DOld Style DNew Style DU.S.200 S iDOld StylellDNew Style DU.S.dD W H dNumber dNumber dBase dNumber dNumber dBased d d dPrice d d dPriced d d d d d dTwo File DrawersWithout Lock23 1 ⁄2" 15" 27" BP24FF BU24FF $398 BPF24FF BUF24FF $39829 1 ⁄2" 15" 27" BP30FF BU30FF $466 BPF30FF BUF30FF $466With Lock23 1 ⁄2" 15" 27" BP24FFL BU24FFL $44929 1 ⁄2" 15" 27" BP30FFL BU30FFL $517d d d d d d dTwo Box and One File DrawerWithout Lock23 1 ⁄2" 15" 27" BP24BBF BU24BBF $398 BPF24BBF BUF24BBF $39829 1 ⁄2" 15" 27" BP30BBF BU30BBF $466 BPF30BBF BUF30BBF $466With Lock23 1 ⁄2" 15" 27" BP24BBFL BU24BBFL $44929 1 ⁄2" 15" 27" BP30BBFL BU30BBFL $517d d d d d d dAvenirFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 39

Worksurface-Supported Pedestalswith 100 Series and 200 Series Pulls100 Series pull200 Series pullStandard Includes• Pedestal: paint price group 1• 100 Series drawer pulls: metallic plastic only• 200 Series drawer pulls: paint price group 1 to matchpedestal paint color• Basic drawer interiors:– Full drawer body: black only– Box drawers with full extensions– File drawers with full extensions– No drawer accessories• Lock, if selected, keyed random: 9201 Polished Chrome• Mounting hardwareRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for pedestal3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurface • Paint price group 1 No cost Specify paint color number.Materials • Paint price group 2 +$38 Specify paint color number.• Paint price group 3 +$65 Specify paint color number.Full Drawer • Full-depth drawers, full- +$35 Specify with full drawers.Interiorsdrawer extensions, penciltray, and box drawer dividersLock andLockKeying • Ember Chrome No cost Specify with 9250 Ember Chrome lock.Keying• Factory- and field-installed keyingcSee Avenir Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.Related • Storage accessories cSee Avenir Systems FurnitureProductsSpecification Guide.Specification Information100 Series Pulls 200 Series PullsDDimensions DOld Style DNew Style DU.S. DOld Style DNew Style DU.S.dD W H dNumber dNumber dBase dNumber dNumber dBased d d dPrice d d dPriced d d d d d dOne Box and One File DrawerWithout Lock23 1 ⁄2" 15" 18" BSPP24BF BUPP24BF $279 BSPF24BF BUPF24BF $27928 1 ⁄2" 15" 18" BSPP30BF BUPP30BF $289 BSPF30BF BUPF30BF $289With Lock23 1 ⁄2" 15" 18" BSPP24BFL BUPP24BFL $33028 1 ⁄2" 15" 18" BSPP30BFL BUPP30BFL $340d d d d d d dFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.40 Transitional Specification Guide

Worksurface-SupportedPedestalsAvenirFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 41

Mobile Pedestalwith 100 Series Pulls100 Series pullTip: The 1 /8" steel top isnon-structural.Tip: Optional tops willincrease the overallpedestal height.Standard Includes• Pedestal: paint price group 1• 1 /8"H steel top: paint to match pedestal• 100 Series drawer pulls: metallic plastic only• Basic drawer interiors:– Full drawer body: black only– Box drawers with full extensions– File drawers with full extensions– No drawer accessories• Lock, keyed random: 9201 Polished Chrome• Four hard composition, non-locking casters: black only• Safety interlock mechanism• Counterweight packageRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for pedestal3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurface • Paint price group 1 No cost Specify paint color number.Materials • Paint price group 2 +$ 38 Specify paint color number.• Paint price group 3 +$ 65 Specify paint color number.Tops • 1"H square edge steel top +$ 45 Specify with steel square top.Laminate top• 1 3 ⁄16"H square edge +$197 Specify with laminate top and indicatelaminate toplaminate color number.• 1 7 ⁄16"H bullnose laminate top +$217 Specify with bullnose laminate top andindicate laminate color number.• Accent laminate on +$ 60 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.laminate top• Open Line laminate on +$ 60 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.laminate topplus cost of laminateWood veneer top• 1 3 ⁄16"H wood veneer top +$288 Specify with wood veneer top andindicate wood color number.• Full-fill finish on wood top +$ 15 Specify with full-fill finish.• Customiz stain on wood top +$ 12 Specify with Customiz stain.cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.Cushion top for factory installation on BUP248FL only• Cushion top with 9201 +$303 Specify with cushion top and handle andPolished Chrome handleindicate fabric color number.Upholstery on pedestal cushion top• Fabric price group 1 No cost Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 2 +$ 10 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 3 +$ 33 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 4 +$ 41 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 5 +$ 50 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 6 +$ 72 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 7 +$ 85 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 8 +$125 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 9 +$160 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 10 +$195 Specify fabric color number.• Leather price group +$500 Specify leather color number.cSee Surface Materials, in the electronicprice list.• Customer’s own material +$ 15 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual(COM) or Customer’s ownto specify.leather (COL)Full Drawer • Full-depth drawers, full- +$ 35 Specify with full drawers.Interiorsdrawer extensions, penciltray, and box drawer dividercOptions continued on next pageFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.42 Transitional Specification Guide

Mobile Pedestalwith 100 Series PullscOptions continued from previous pageOptions U.S. Price Required to SpecifyLock andLockKeying • Ember Chrome No cost Specify with 9250 Ember Chrome lock.Keying• Factory- and field-installed keyingcSee Avenir Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.Related • Storage accessories cSee Avenir Systems FurnitureProductsSpecification Guide.Specification Information100 Series PullsDDimensions DOld Style DNew Style DU.S.dD W H dNumber dNumber dBased d d dPriced d d dOne Box and One File Drawer23 1 ⁄2" 15" 21" BMP24BFL BUP24BFL $619d d d dAvenirFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 43

Mobile Pedestal Cap GField-Installed KitStandard Includes• Cushion upholstery: price group 1• Retractable handle: 9201 Polished Chrome only• Template for installationRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Fabric color number for cushionupholstery3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurfaceUpholsteryMaterials • Fabric price group 1 No cost Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 2 +$ 10 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 3 +$ 33 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 4 +$ 41 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 5 +$ 50 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 6 +$ 72 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 7 +$ 85 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 8 +$125 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 9 +$160 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 10 +$195 Specify fabric color number.• Leather price group +$500 Specify leather color number.cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.• Customer’s own material +$ 15 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual(COM) or Customer’s ownto specify.leather (COL)Tip: Mobile pedestal cap canbe used with pre-2004Avenir mobile pedestalMMP2224BFS, 100 SeriesBMP24BFL, and 200 SeriesBMPF24BFL pedestals only.Specification InformationDDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD W dNumber dBased d dPriced d dFor Use with Avenir, 100 Series, and 200 Series Box File Mobile Pedestals24" 15" CAP1524 G $315d d dFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.44 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

Storage Accessories GStorage AccessoriesRail for Pedestal File Drawers GStandard Includes• Rail: black paint onlyRequired to SpecifyStyle numberTip: A rail is standard inpre-2004 Avenir pedestals,desks, returns, and credenzaswith pedestals, soordering a separate rail isnot necessary. Must beordered for use in filedrawers with 200 Seriesdrawer pulls.Specification InformationDDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD W H dNumber dPriced d d1" 12 1 ⁄4" 1⁄2" BPR G $12d d dCompressor for Pedestal File Drawers GStandard Includes• Compressor: black paint onlyRequired to SpecifyStyle numberAvenirSpecification InformationTip: Compressor may beused in pre-2004 Avenirpedestals, desks, returns,and credenzas withpedestals, or for file drawerswith 200 Series drawer pulls.DDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD W H dNumber dPriced d d7 ⁄8" 11 7 ⁄8" 9" BPC G $31d d dConvenience Tray GStandard Includes• Convenience tray: black plastic onlyRequired to SpecifyStyle numberSpecification InformationDDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD W H dNumber dPriced d d7 1 ⁄4" 13 1 ⁄8" 1 5 ⁄8" 99465 G $23d d dFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling ListcStorage Accessories, continued 45Last order entry November 18, 2005

Storage Accessories, continuedReference Shelf GStandard Includes• Reference shelf: black plastic only• Insert: clear plastic onlyRequired to SpecifyStyle numberSpecification InformationDDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD W H dNumber dPriced d d9 1 ⁄2" 13 1 ⁄16" 3 ⁄8" 2256P G $26d d dPedestal Top Conversion Kits GTip: Pedestal conversionkit must be used on any pre-2004 freestanding pedestalthat is used beneath a worksurfacethat is installedhigher than 28 1 ⁄2"H.Standard IncludesSpecification Information• Top: paint• Attachment hardware• Two 1"H spacers: black plastic onlyDDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD W dNumber dPriced d d24" 15" MTK24 G $6930" 15" MTK30 G $69Four Extra SpacersN.A. 3" MTP4 G $31d d dRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for topcSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.46 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

Storage AccessoriesAvenirTransitional Specification Guide 47

Rectangular Worksurfaces1 1 ⁄8" Thick24"DStandard Includes• Worksurface with square-edges: laminate• Front and sides: vinyl (PVC) default• Cable notches on back edge• Center support on 72 5 ⁄16"W worksurfaces:black paint onlyRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Laminate color number for worksurface3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurfaceWorksurfaceMaterials • Wood Prices at right Select wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood Prices at right cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.• Full-fill finish Prices at right Specify with full-fill finish and selectwood color number.cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.Tip: Center drawer andpedestals will block accessto all grommets locatedabove them.Grommets • Worksurface grommet +$26 Back left: CWBL and plastic coloreachnumberBack right: CWBR and plastic colornumberBack center: CWBC and plastic colornumberFront left: CWFL and plastic colornumberFront right: CWFR and plastic colornumberFront center: CWFC and plastic colornumberKeyboard: CWKB and plastic colornumbercSee Avenir Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.Support • Locking side support cSee Avenir Systems FurnitureAlternativesSpecification Guide.• Shared cantilevercSee Avenir Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.• Support platescSee Avenir Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.• PedestalscSee Avenir Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.48 Transitional Specification Guide

Rectangular WorksurfacesSpecification Information24"D30"DDDimensions DStyle DU.S. DOptionsdD W dNumber dBase d(Add $ tod d dPrice dBase Price)d d d dd d d dWood dCustomiz dFull-Filld d d d dStain on dFinishd d d d dWood d24"D Worksurfaces24" 30" PWS3024 $223 +$212 +$12 +$2424" 36" PWS3624 $237 +$212 +$12 +$2424" 42" PWS4224 $261 +$242 +$20 +$4124" 48" PWS4824 $267 +$242 +$20 +$4124" 60 5 ⁄16" PWS6024 $343 +$273 +$20 +$4124" 72 5 ⁄16" PWS7224 $424 +$273 +$30 +$60d d d d d d30"D Worksurfaces30" 30" PWS3030 $297 +$212 +$20 +$4130" 36" PWS3630 $318 +$212 +$20 +$4130" 42" PWS4230 $341 +$242 +$20 +$4130" 48" PWS4830 $387 +$242 +$20 +$4130" 60 5 ⁄16" PWS6030 $433 +$273 +$30 +$6030" 72 5 ⁄16" PWS7230 $517 +$273 +$30 +$60d d d d d dAvenirFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 49

Corner Worksurfaces1 1 ⁄8" ThickWDTip: Reinforcing channel(TSTWKSPT) is recommendedto 1 1 ⁄8" worksurfacesthat have 60" or moreof unsupported kneespace.Bracket must be orderedseparately.cSee Answer SolutionsSpecification Guide.Standard Includes• Worksurface with square-edges: laminate• Front, back, and sides: vinyl (PVC) default• Rear corner support: grey value 2 paint onlyRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Laminate color number for worksurface3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurfaceWorksurfaceMaterials • Wood Prices below Select wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood Prices below cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.• Full-fill finish Prices below Specify with full-fill finish and selectwood color number.cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.Grommets • Available on all corner +$26 Back center: CWBC and plastic colorworksurfaces each number• Available only on corner +$26 Keyboard: CWKB and plastic colorworksurface with 25 13 ⁄16"W each numberfront edgecSee Avenir Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.Specification InformationDDimensions DStyle DU.S. DOptionsdD W dNumber dBase d(Add $ tod d dPrice dBase Price)d d d dd d d dWood dCustomiz dFull-Filld d d d dStain on dFinishd d d d dWood dWith 8 13 ⁄16" Front24" 30 9 ⁄32" PCWS90N24 $325 +$202 +$20 +$4130" 36 9 ⁄32" PCWS90N30 $425 +$202 +$20 +$41d d d d d dWith 17 5 ⁄16" Front24" 36 9 ⁄32" PCWS90M24 $382 +$202 +$20 +$4130" 42 9 ⁄32"" PCWS90W30 $507 +$202 +$20 +$41d d d d d dWith 25 13 ⁄16" Front24" 42 9 ⁄32" PCWS90W24 $423 +$202 +$20 +$41d d d d d dFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.50 Transitional Specification Guide

Straight Transaction WorksurfacesStraight TransactionWorksurfacesStandard Includes• Worksurface with radius-edges: laminate• Worksurface edges: vinyl• Support brackets: all paint price groupsRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Laminate color number for worksurface3 Plastic color number for worksurfaceedge4 Paint color number for support bracketscSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Specification InformationDDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD W dNumber dPriced d d16 5 ⁄8" 30 5 ⁄16" PTWR3017 $35116 5 ⁄8" 36 5 ⁄16" PTWR3617 $33716 5 ⁄8" 42 5 ⁄16" PTWR4217 $35916 5 ⁄8" 48 5 ⁄16" PTWR4817 $42116 5 ⁄8" 60 5 ⁄8" PTWR6017 $398d d dAvenirFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 51

Worksurface-Supported Pedestalswith Prior to June 1990 Style PullsStandard Includes• Pedestal: paint price group 1• Drawer pulls: 9201 Polished Chrome• Full drawer interiors:– Full-depth drawer body: black only– Full extension drawer suspensions– Pencil tray and box drawer dividers: black only• Lock, if selected, keyed random: 9201 Polished Chrome• Mounting hardwareRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for pedestal3 Paint color number for drawer pulls4 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurfacePedestalMaterials • Paint price group 1 No cost Specify paint color number.• Paint price group 2 +$38 Specify paint color number.• Paint price group 3 +$65 Specify paint color number.Drawer pulls• All paint price groups No cost Specify with painted drawer pulls andselect paint color number.Lock andLockKeying • Ember Chrome No cost Specify with 9250 Ember Chrome lock.Keying• Field-installed keying optionscSee Avenir Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.Related • Storage accessories cSee Avenir Systems FurnitureProductsSpecification Guide.Specification InformationOne Box and One File DrawerDDimensions DOld Style DNew Style DU.S.dD W H dNumber dNumber dBased d d dPriced d d dWithout Lock23 1 ⁄2" 15" 18" MSPM24BF MUPM24BF $33428 1 ⁄2" 15" 18" MSPM30BF MUPM30BF $376d d dWith Lock23 1 ⁄2" 15" 18" MSPM24BFL MUPM24BFL $38528 1 ⁄2" 15" 18" MSPM30BFL MUPM30BFL $427d d d dFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.52 Transitional Specification Guide

Freestanding Pedestalswith 1 1 ⁄2"H BaseFreestanding Pedestalswith 1 1 ⁄2"H BaseStandard Includes• Pedestal and filler: paint price group 1• Drawer pulls: 9201 Polished Chrome• Full drawer interiors:– Full depth drawer body: black only– Full extension drawer suspensions– One pencil tray per box/box/file and box drawer dividers:black only• Lock, if selected, keyed random: 9201 Polished Chrome• Mounting hardware• Four adjustable leveling glides: black onlyRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for pedestal3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurfacePedestalMaterials • Paint price group 1 No cost Specify paint color number.• Paint price group 2 +$38 Specify paint color number.• Paint price group 3 +$65 Specify paint color number.Drawer pulls• All paint price groups No cost Specify with painted drawer pulls andselect paint color number.AvenirFiller • No filler –$25 Specify with no filler.Lock andLockKeying • Ember Chrome No cost Specify with 9250 Ember Chrome lock.Individual locking drawers• File/file pedestals only +$95 Specify with individual drawer lock.Keying• Factory- and field-installed keyingcSee Avenir Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.Related • Storage accessories cSee Avenir Systems FurnitureProductsSpecification Guide.Specification InformationTwo File DrawersTwo Box andOne File DrawerDDimensions DOld Style DNew Style DU.S. DOld Style DNew Style DU.S.dD W H dNumber dNumber dBase dNumber dNumber dBased d d dPrice d d dPriced d d d d d dWithout Lock23 1 ⁄2" 15" 27" PWR242 PUR242 $629 PWR243 PUR243 $62929 1 ⁄2" 15" 27" PWR302 PUR302 $698 PWR303 PUR303 $697d d d d d d dWith Lock23 1 ⁄2" 15" 27" PWR242L PUR242L $680 PWR243L PUR243L $68029 1 ⁄2" 15" 27" PWR302L PUR302L $749 PWR303L PUR303L $748d d d d d d dFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 53

Mobile Pedestalswith Square-Edge TopStandard Includes• Pedestal: paint price group 1• 1"H square-edge steel top, if selected: paint to matchpedestal• 1 3 ⁄16"H square-edge laminate top, if selected: laminate• Drawer pulls: 9201 Polished Chrome• Full drawer interiors:– Full-depth drawer body: black only– Full extension drawer suspensions– One pencil tray per box/file and box drawer dividers:black only• Lock, keyed random: 9201 Polished Chrome• Four hard-composition, non-locking casters: black only• Safety interlock mechanism• Counterweight packageRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for pedestal3 Laminate color number for pedestalwith top4 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurfacePedestalMaterials • Paint price group 1 No cost Specify paint color number.• Paint price group 2 +$38 Specify paint color number.• Paint price group 3 +$65 Specify paint color number.Drawer pulls• All paint price groups No cost Specify with painted drawer pulls andselect paint color number.Laminate top• Accent laminate on +$60 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.laminate top• Open Line laminate on +$60 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.laminate topplus cost of laminateLock andLockKeying • Ember Chrome No cost Specify with 9250 Ember Chrome lock.Individual locking drawers• File/file pedestals only +$95 Specify with individual drawer lock.Keying• Factory- and field-installed keyingcSee Avenir Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.Related • Storage accessories cSee Avenir Systems FurnitureProductsSpecification Guide.For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.54 Transitional Specification Guide

Mobile Pedestalswith Square-Edge TopSpecification InformationOne Box andOne File DrawerTwo File DrawersDDimensions DOld Style DNew Style DU.S. DOld Style DNew Style DU.S.dD W H dNumber dNumber dBase dNumber dNumber dBased d d dPrice d d dPriced d d d d d dWith 1"H Square-Edge Steel Top23 1 ⁄2" 15" 22" MPSS18B MUSS18B $730 N.A.23 1 ⁄2" 15" 28" N.A. MPSS242 MUSS242 $804With 1 3 /16"H Square-Edge Laminate Top23 1 ⁄2" 15" 22 3 ⁄16" MPLS18B MULS18B $882 N.A.23 1 ⁄2" 15" 28 3 ⁄16" N.A. MPLS242 MULS242 $956d d d d d d dAvenirFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 55

Mobile Pedestalswith 1 /8"H Steel Top or Radius-Edge Laminate TopTip: The 1 /8"-high steel top isnonstructural.Standard Includes• Pedestal: paint price group 1• 1 /8"H steel top, if selected: paint to match pedestal• 1 7 /16"H radius-edge laminate top, if selected: laminate• Drawer pulls: 9201 Polished Chrome• Full drawer interiors:– Full-depth drawer body: black only– Full extension drawer suspensions– One pencil tray per box/file or box/box/file andbox drawer dividers: black only• Lock, keyed random: 9201 Polished Chrome• Four hard-composition, non-locking casters: black only• Safety interlock mechanism• Counterweight packageRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for pedestal3 Laminate color number for pedestalwith top4 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurfacePedestalMaterials • Paint price group 1 No cost Specify paint color number.• Paint price group 2 +$38 Specify paint color number.• Paint price group 3 +$65 Specify paint color number.Drawer pulls• All paint price groups No cost Specify with painted drawer pulls andselect paint color number.Laminate top• Accent laminate on +$60 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.laminate top• Open Line laminate on +$60 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.laminate topplus cost of laminateLock andLockKeying • Ember Chrome No cost Specify with 9250 Ember Chrome lock.Individual locking drawers• File/file pedestals only +$95 Specify with individual drawer lock.Keying• Factory- and field-installed keyingcSee Avenir Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.Related • Storage accessories cSee Avenir Systems FurnitureProductsSpecification Guide.For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.56 Transitional Specification Guide

Mobile PedestalsSpecification InformationOne Box andOne File DrawerTwo File DrawersDDimensions DOld Style DNew Style DU.S. DOld Style DNew Style DU.S.dD W H dNumber dNumber dBase dNumber dNumber dBased d d dPrice d d dPriced d d d d d dWith 1 /8"H Steel Top23 1 ⁄2" 15" 21" MPSR18B MUSR18B $685 N.A.23 1 ⁄2" 15" 27" N.A. MPSR242 MUSR242 $759d d d d d d dWith 1 7 /16"H Radius-Edge Laminate Top23 1 ⁄2" 15" 22 7 ⁄16" MPLR18B MULR18B $902 N.A.23 1 ⁄2" 15" 28 7 ⁄16" N.A. MPLR242 MULR242 $976d d d d d d dAvenirTwo Box andOne File DrawerDDimensions DOld Style DNew Style DU.S.dD W H dNumber dNumber dBased d d dPriced d d dWith 1 /8"H Steel Top23 1 ⁄2" 15" 27" MPSR243 MUSR243 $759d d dWith 1 7 /16"H Radius-Edge Laminate Top23 1 ⁄2" 15" 28 7 ⁄16" MPLR243 MULR243 $976d d d dFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 57

TackboardsStandard Includes• Tackboard: vertical surface fabric price group 1• Mounting brackets: black paint onlyRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Fabric color number for tackboard3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurfaceTackboard surfaceMaterials • Fabric price group 1 No cost Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 2 +$ 12 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 3 +$ 46 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 4 +$ 62 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 5 +$100 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group COM +$ 15 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manualto specify.Specification InformationDDimensions DStyle DU.S.dW H dNumber dBased d dPriced d d29 3 ⁄4" 15 7 ⁄32" MWTB3015 $12535 3 ⁄4" 15 7 ⁄32" MWTB3615 $13241 3 ⁄4" 15 7 ⁄32" MWTB4215 $15447 3 ⁄4" 15 7 ⁄32" MWTB4815 $16659 3 ⁄4" 15 7 ⁄32" MWTB6015 $215d d dFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.58 Transitional Specification Guide

ContextContext Vertical Cabinets 60Context Storage Towers 62Storage Inserts 64ContextTransitional Specification Guide 59

Context Vertical Cabinets GStandard Includes• Cabinet: paint price group 1• Waterfall or Rod pull• Adjustable shelves in two-drawer cabinet: black paint• Lateral-file drawers with hanging file folder frames• Removable utility trunk access plate• Lock, keyed random: 9201 Polished Chrome• Leveling glidesRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for cabinet3 Color number for drawer pulls4 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.cContext storage capacitiesand dimensions, seeContext SpecificationGuide.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurfaceCabinetMaterials • Paint price group 1 No cost Specify paint color number.• Paint price group 2 +$107 Specify paint color number.• Paint price group 3 +$179 Specify paint color number.Waterfall pulls• Paint No cost Specify paint color number.• Plated metal +$ 13 Specify plated metal color number.eachRod pulls• Paint No cost Specify paint color number.• Plated metal +$ 13 Specify plated metal color number.eachKeying • Factory- and field-installed keying cSee Context Specification Guide.Related • Storage accessories cSee Context Specification Guide.Products • Adjustable shelf cSee Context Specification Guide.• Power and communicationcSee Context Specification Guide.Specification InformationDDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD W H dNumber dBased d dPriced d dWaterfall PullTwo-Drawer Cabinet24" 30" 65" X2AA2465A1 G $228624" 30" 68" X2AA2468A5 G $2314Four-Drawer Cabinet24" 30" 68" X2AF2468A0 G $2504d d dRod PullTwo-Drawer Cabinet24" 30" 65" X2AA2465B7 G $228624" 30" 68" X2AA2468B6 G $2314Four-Drawer Cabinet24" 30" 68" X2AF2468B1 G $2504d d dFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.60 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

Context Vertical CabinetsContextFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 61

Context Storage Towers GStandard Includes• Case: paint price group 1• Shelf, on applicable models: Grotto paint• File frames, on applicable models: Grotto paint• File frame face and tubs, on applicable models:Grotto plastic• Coat rod• Full-height, hinged, pocket door• Lock, keyed random: 9201 Polished Chrome• Leveling glidesRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for case3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.cContext storage capacitiesand dimensions, seeContext SpecificationGuide.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurfaceCaseMaterials • Paint price group 1 No cost Specify paint color number.• Paint price group 2 +$109 Specify paint color number.• Paint price group 3 +$187 Specify paint color number.Keying • Factory- and field-installed keying cSee Context Specification Guide.Related • Trays cSee Context Specification Guide.Products • Tray dividers cSee Context Specification Guide.• File frames with tubs forcSee Context Specification Guide.customizing open towers• Adjustable shelf with centercSee Context Specification Guide.hook• Tub dividerscSee Context Specification Guide.For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.62 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

Context Storage TowersSpecification InformationDrawings show right-handunits.DDimensions DNumber DNumber DStyle DU.S.dD W H dof Shelves dof Tubs dNumber dBased d d d dPriced d d d dShelf, 12"H File Frames with TubsLeft-Hand Unit30"–24" 24" 65" 1 adjustable three 12"H X2B03265A4 G $282830"–24" 24" 75" 1 adjustable four 12"H X2B03275A3 G $3022Right-Hand Unit24"–30" 24" 65" 1 adjustable three 12"H X2B02365A9 G $282824"–30" 24" 75" 1 adjustable four 12"H X2B02375A7 G $3022d d d d dShelf, 4"H/8"H/12"H File Frames with TubsLeft-Hand Unit30"–24" 24" 65" 1 adjustable one 4"H, one 8"H, X2B03265B8 G $2918two 12"H30"–24" 24" 75" 1 adjustable one 4"H, one 8"H, X2B03275B4 G $3293three 12"HRight-Hand Unit24"–30" 24" 65" 1 adjustable one 4"H, one 8"H, X2B02365B2 G $2918two 12"H24"–30" 24" 75" 1 adjustable one 4"H, one 8"H, X2B02375B8 G $3293three 12"Hd d d d dOpenLeft-Hand Unit30"–24" 24" 65" N.A. N.A. X2B032659 G $204730"–24" 24" 75" N.A. N.A. X2B032753 G $2062Right-Hand Unit24"–30" 24" 65" N.A. N.A. X2B023658 G $204724"–30" 24" 75" N.A. N.A. X2B023757 G $2062d d d d dFull-Width Coat RodLeft-Hand Unit30"–24" 24" 65" Full coat rod N.A. X2B03265C6 G $207730"–24" 24" 75" Full coat rod N.A. X2B03275C5 G $2137Right-Hand Unit24"–30" 24" 65" Full coat rod N.A. X2B02365C0 G $207724"–30" 24" 75" Full coat rod N.A. X2B02375C9 G $2137d d d d dContextFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List63Last order entry November 18, 2005

Storage Inserts GCompressor for Pedestal File Drawers GStandard Includes• Compressor: black paint onlyRequired to SpecifyStyle numberSpecification InformationTip: Compressors can beordered for use in pre-2004Context pedestals, desks,returns, and credenzas.DDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD W H dNumber dPriced d d7⁄8" 11 7 ⁄8" 9" BPC G $31d d dConvenience Tray GStandard Includes• Tray: black plasticRequired to SpecifyStyle numberFor use with all storage.Specification InformationDStyledNumberdDU.S.dPricedX5AE00006 G $22dd6" Media Tray GStandard Includes• Tray: black plastic• Two dividers: black plasticRequired to SpecifyStyle numberFor use with all storage.Specification InformationDStyledNumberdDU.S.dPricedX5AA00004 G $27ddFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.64 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

Storage Inserts12" Media Tray GStandard Includes• Tray: black paint• Four dividers: black plasticRequired to SpecifyStyle numberFor use with all storage.Specification InformationDStyledNumberdDU.S.dPricedX5AB00007 G $32ddTray Dividers GStandard Includes• Tray dividers: black plastic• Package of fiveRequired to SpecifyStyle numberFor use with 6", 12",and bi-level trays.Specification InformationDStyledNumberdDU.S.dPricedX5BD00004 G $30ddContextBi-Level Tray GStandard Includes• Tray: black plastic• Two dividers: black plasticRequired to SpecifyStyle numberFor use with all storage.Specification InformationDStyledNumberdDU.S.dPricedX5AC00000 G $30ddFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling ListcStorage Inserts, continued 65Last order entry November 18, 2005

Storage Inserts, continuedVertical Stationery Tray GStandard Includes• Tray: black plasticRequired to SpecifyStyle numberSpecification InformationFor use with all storage.Tip: Does not accommodateA4 or Foolscap storage.DStyledNumberdDU.S.dPricedX5CV00009 G $49ddcContext storage capacitiesand dimensions, seeContext SpecificationGuide.File Frame with 4"H Tub GStandard Includes• File frame: Grotto paint• Tub: Grotto plastic• Two dividers: Grotto plasticRequired to SpecifyStyle numberFor use with storagetowers.cContext storage capacitiesand dimensions, seeContext SpecificationGuide.Specification InformationDStyledNumberdDU.S.dPricedX2IA00001 G $191ddFile Frame with 8"H Tub GStandard Includes• File frame: Grotto paint• Tub: Grotto plastic• Two dividers: Grotto plasticRequired to SpecifyStyle numberFor use with storagetowers.cContext storage capacitiesand dimensions, seeContext SpecificationGuide.Specification InformationDStyledNumberdDU.S.dPricedX2IB00004 G $206ddFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.66 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

Storage InsertsFile Frame with 12"H Tub GStandard Includes• File frame: Grotto paint• Tub: Grotto plasticRequired to SpecifyStyle numberFor use with storage towers.cContext storage capacitiesand dimensions, seeContext SpecificationGuide.Specification InformationDStyledNumberdDU.S.dPricedX2IC00007 G $217ddDividers for 4"H Tub GStandard Includes• Dividers: Grotto plastic• Package of threeRequired to SpecifyStyle numberSpecification InformationDStyledNumberdDU.S.dPricedX2IF00006 G $48ddContextDividers for 8"H Tub GStandard Includes• Dividers: Grotto plastic• Package of threeRequired to SpecifyStyle numberSpecification InformationDStyledNumberdDU.S.dPricedX2IG00009 G $62ddFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling ListcStorage Inserts, continued 67Last order entry November 18, 2005

Storage Inserts, continuedAdjustable Shelf with Center Hook GStandard Includes• Shelf: Grotto paintRequired to SpecifyStyle numberFor use with storagetowers.Specification InformationDStyledNumberdDU.S.dPricedX2IE00003 G $69ddAdjustable Shelf GStandard Includes• Shelf: black paintRequired to SpecifyStyle numberSpecification InformationFor use with verticalcabinets.DStyledNumberdDU.S.dPricedX2AD24000 G $90ddFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.68 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

UnderstandingElective ElementsPanelsStatement of Line 70Product DetailsPanels 72Junctions 74Panel Trim 75Base Power-In 76Top Power-In 77Base Covers and Receptacles 78Powerways 80Cable Drop Box 82Application TopicsRules for Panel Stability 84Rules for Panel Stability with Components 86Bracket Application Rules 87Related ProductsVertical Wire Manager 88Elective ElementsTransitional Specification Guide 69

PanelsStatement of LineTackable Acoustical PanelsTransparent PanelsHeightWidths20" 25" 30" 35" 36" 42" 45" 60"38" • • • • • • • •*45 1 ⁄2" • • • • • • • •*53" • • • • • • • •*60 1 ⁄2" • • • • • • • •*68" • • • • • • • •*75 1 ⁄2" • • • • • • •83" • • • • • • •Height38"45 1 ⁄2"53"60 1 ⁄2"Widths25" 30" 35" 45"68" • • • •75 1 ⁄2" • • • •83" • • • •Tackable Yes NoRemovable surfaces Yes Yes, frame surface is replaceableHorizontal cable routing capability Yes; beneath top cap, in shielded space above Yes; in base cavity if no powerway is installedbase, in base cavity if no powerway is installed.Vertical cable routing capability Yes, in center NoAccommodates powerway Yes, in base cavity Yes, in base cavityAccommodates receptacles Yes; in both base covers Yes; in both base coversAccommodates voice/data receptacles Yes; in base cover if no powerway is installed Yes; in base cover if no powerway is installedAccommodates panel-supported Yes, except on wood surface NocomponentsAccepts power/cable pole Yes NoPanel surface Fabric, wood, or fabric on one side wood Fabric frameon the other side*60"W wood panelis not available70 Transitional Specification Guide

PanelsStatement of LineElective ElementsTransitional Specification Guide 71

PanelsPanels are tackableacoustical when fabric surfacesare specified. Whena wood surface or surfacesare specified, the panel istackable acoustical on thefabric side only.cSpecifying, pages 118–123Fiberglass layer intackable acoustical panelabsorbs sound and providesa tackable surface.End-of-run trim finishesthe exposed vertical edge ofthe last panel in a run.Slotted channel acceptspanel-supported componentsin 1 1 ⁄4" incrementsfrom 12" above the floor towithin 5 1 ⁄2" of the panel’stop.Exception: Transparent andwood panels do not accommodatepanel-supportedcomponents.Base cover is hinged atbottom to allow access tocavity in panel base.Base cavity accepts afactory- or field-installedpowerway. Cable routingis possible if a powerwayis not installed. 20"W and25"W panels accommodatepass-through powerwaysonly with no access forreceptacles.Base cover with receptacleknockouts is standardon panels.Actual DimensionsDepth (thickness) 3"Top cap height 5 ⁄8"Base cover height 2 7 ⁄8". Leveling glide range 1 1 ⁄4"Panel surface is coveredwith vertical surface fabricor wood. Surfaces areremovable and can bereplaced in the field.Top cap conceals spacethat accommodates cablerouting.Exception: Straight transparentpanels do not accommodatecable routing.Interior frame is constructedwith rigid, tubularsteel to ensure strength.Leveling glides adjust upto 1 1 ⁄4" to install panels onuneven floors.Cable space behindsurface of tackable acousticalpanels allows eight1⁄2"-diameter cables to berouted horizontally.Continuous cable slotbetween panel surface andbase cover allows cables toenter or exit anywhere alongthe width of the panel. Cableslot detail on transparentpanels matches but becausethese panels have no cablespace above the base cover,the slot doesn’t function.Light and sound sealprevents light from seepingunder the panel and providesa sound barrier evenwhen leveling glides areextended. Cables can berouted from panel to panelinside the light and soundseal.Tip: To accommodate cablerouting, you should extendpanel glides at least 1 ⁄2".cPage 106.Product DetailsTop caps come in twoshapes—radius and square.They are available fabriccovered or in wood.Panel surfaces can beremoved and replaced ontackable acoustical panelswithout disturbing adjacentpanels.Wood surfaces are availableon both sides of tackableacoustical panels up toand including 45"W. Mixingfabric and wood on oppositesides of a panel is possible.Wood surfaces are nottackable and cannot accommodatepanel-supportedcomponents.Edges of fabric-coveredpanels hide the slottedchannel on tackable acoustical,but because edges arecompressible, access to thechannel is easy.Tip: Wood panel surfacecovers the slotted channel,so you cannot attach panelsupportedcomponents..72 Transitional Specification Guide

Panels.ConnectionsAttachment mechanism,standard with eachpanel, joins panels in astraight configuration orlinks panels to junctions.Junctions can link panelsin L-, T-, and X-configurations,even if the panels aredifferent heights.cPage 74In-line change-of-heighttrim is used to finish theexposed vertical edge ofpanels when they are joinedin a straight configurationat different heights. Trim isincluded with junctions forchange-of-height L-, T-, andX-configurations..Fabric-covered panelscan support componentsincluding worksurfaces,shelves, and overhead storagecabinets. Wood panelsurfaces cannot accommodatethese components.Panel-run stabilityrecommendations varydepending on the width ofthe panel run and use ofpanel-supported componentsand freestandingfurniture.cPage 84Wall-attachmentbracket allows end ofpanel run to connect tofixed wall in building..Wiring & CablingBase power-in bringspower to panel run byconnecting at designatedreceptacle location of tackableacoustical or straighttransparent panel.cPage 76Top power-in bringspower and communicationcables from the ceiling totackable acoustical panel.cPage 77Powerways are factoryor field installed. Four-circuit(3+D) powerways with tworeceptacle locations, oneon each end, are available.Exception: 20"W and 25"Wpanels accommodate passthroughpowerways.cPage 80Cable space in top ofpanels provides room forten 1 ⁄2"-diameter cables withoutcrowding. Bottom ofpanel (behind panel surface)provides more space forrouting eight 1 ⁄2"-diametercables. Light and soundseal allows routing of four1 ⁄2"-diameter cables.Exception: Transparentpanels do not accommodatecable routing.cPage 106Cable drop box concealscables in change-of-heightapplication when panelsare joined in a straightconfiguration. Shortenedtop cap will be needed andmust be ordered separately.Transparent panels do notaccept the cable drop box.cPage 82Junctions hide cables inchange-of-height L-, T-, andX-configurations.All panels are UL listed...Surface MaterialsTop cap• Vertical surface fabric(standard)• Wood (option)• Customiz stain (optionon wood)Base cover• Paint (standard)• 9230 Antique Bronze(option)Panel surface or framesurface on transparentpanels• Vertical surface fabric• Wood (on tackableacoustical panels)• Customiz stain (optionon wood)Tip: If a panel has differentsurfaces, use these guidelines:The first surface youspecify is considered to besurface one. The secondsurface you specify issurface two.Directional fabrics onpanels may be oriented differentlydepending on panelheight. If you want, you canspecify fabric direction toensure that short and tallpanels in a single installationmatch.cFor detailed advice,see page 112Panel insert intransparent panels• 6500 Clear glass• 6502 Solar Bronze glassLeveling glides• SteelLight and sound seal• Black vinyl onlyPricingTo price a panel withsurface materials at differentprices, add the two pricestogether..Elective ElementsTransitional Specification Guide 73

JunctionscSpecifying, pages124–139Top cap snaps into positionon top of junction post.Trim pieces finish theexposed surfaces of junctionswith fabric or wood.Structurally, all junctions arethe same.Junction post linkspanels and accommodatescable routing.Base cover is suppliedwith junctions for L- andT-configurations. No basecover is needed for X-configurationsbecause thejunction post is hidden bypanels.Actual DimensionsWidth 3"Height (including base) 38", 45 1 ⁄2", 53", 60 1 ⁄2",68", 75 1 ⁄2", or 83"Top cap height 5 ⁄8". Base cover height 2 7 ⁄8".Product DetailsJunction packagesthat include trim pieces areavailable for every combinationof panel heights.ConnectionsJunctions are needed tojoin panels in L-, T-, and X-configurations. Panels connectedin a straight line donot need a junction.Attachment mechanism,on panels, locks tocleats of junction post.Different height panelsare joined by junctions thatmatch the height of thetallest panel in the combination.Trim pieces are availableto finish the exposedsurfaces..In-line junctionOne-way junctionL- junctionT- junctionX- junctionFive versions of theradius-edge junctiontop cap are provided tomatch specific installationconfigurations.Tip: Make sure your installerpositions junction top capswhere they belong anduses the leveler for properalignment.Wiring & CablingEight 1 ⁄2"-diametercables can be accommodatedwithin the junctionpost.Cables can be routedbeneath junction top capsand can run vertically withinthe junction post.Junction posts areshorter than panels sothey don’t extend downinto the cavity of the panelbase and, therefore, don’tinterfere with powerwaysor cables running horizontally.With base coveradded, junction heightsmatch panel heights..Surface MaterialsTop cap• Vertical surface fabric(standard)• Wood (option)• Customiz stain (optionon wood)Base cover• Paint• 9230 Antique Bronze(option)Trim pieces• Vertical surface fabric(standard)• Wood (option)• Customiz stain (optionon wood)Directional fabrics onpanels may be oriented differentlydepending on panelheight. If you want, you canspecify fabric direction toensure that short and tallpanels in a single installationmatch.cFor detailed advice,see page 112Specifying sequenceof surface materials varieswith each junction.Application TopicsRules for PanelStabilitycPage 84.74 Transitional Specification Guide

Panel TrimPanel TrimEnd-of-Run TrimcSpecifying, page 140In-Line Change-of-Height TrimcSpecifying, page 141Shortened Top CapscSpecifying, page 142.Product DetailsEnd-of-run trim coversthe exposed vertical edge ofthe last panel in a run.Trim matches top capshape—radius or square.Product DetailsUse in-line change-ofheighttrim to finish theexposed vertical edge ofthe taller panel when youjoin two panels of differentheights in a straightconfiguration.Trim matches top capshape—radius or square.Product Details3"Length of shortenedtop cap is 3" less thanstandard top cap to allowspace for cable drop box ortop power-in.ConnectionsClips attach end-of-runtrim to panel.ConnectionsClips attach trim to thetaller panel.Panels can have shortenedtop caps substituted at thefactory, or you can orderthem separately and replacestandard top caps in thefield.Shortened top capscome in two shapes—radius and square.ConnectionsClips attach shortenedtop cap to panel in sameway as standard top caps.Attachment can be madeat either end of the panel.Surface MaterialsTrim• Vertical surface fabric(standard)• Wood (option)• Customiz stain (optionon wood)Base cover• Paint (standard)• 9230 Antique Bronze(option)Wiring & CablingCables cannot berouted behind in-linechange-of-height trim.Cable drop box can beused if you need to concealcables between two panelsof different heights.cPage 82Wiring & CablingCables can be concealedbeneath shortenedtop caps, just like standardtop caps.Actual DimensionsDepth 5⁄8"Width 3"Height 38", 45 1 ⁄2", 53",60 1 ⁄2", 68", 75 1 ⁄2",or 83"Surface MaterialsTrim• Vertical surface fabric(standard)• Wood (option)• Customiz stain (optionon wood)Actual DimensionsDepth 5⁄8"Width 3"Height 7 1 ⁄2", 15", 22 1 ⁄2",30", or 37 1 ⁄2"Surface MaterialsTop cap• Vertical surface fabric(standard)• Wood (option)• Customiz stain (option onwood)Actual DimensionsDepth 3"Width 17, 22", 27", 32",33", 39", 42", or 57"Height 5⁄8".Elective ElementsTransitional Specification Guide 75

Base Power-IncSpecifying, page 144Conduit connects basepower-in to building’s powersource.Actual DimensionsDepth 2 3 ⁄8"Width 6 1 ⁄2"Height 2 7 ⁄8". Conduit length 6'Leveling glide adjusts foruneven floors..Product DetailsBase power-in connectsto powerway in base ofpanel. Connection can bemade to green end of powerwayonly.Straight panels 30"Wto 60"W can accommodatebase power-in.Tip: 20"W and 25"Wpanels have pass-throughpowerways and don’taccommodate a basepower-in connection.Breakaway basepower-in is available tomeet the Office of StatewideHealth Planning andDevelopment Organization’s(O.S.H.P.D.) requirementsfor hospitals in the stateof California. It is used onpanels that are shorter than68"H.cPage 103.ConnectionsConnector plugs intopowerway and is securedwith a screw.Surface MaterialsBase power-in• PaintConduit• Black vinyl onlyApplication TopicsWiring and Cabling:InterfacecPage 92.76 Transitional Specification Guide

Top Power-InTop Power-IncSpecifying, page 145Actual DimensionsDepth 3". Width 3"Junction box accommodateselectrical connectionto building power.Hanger bar anchors toppower-in to ceiling grid.Ceiling trim platefinishes opening insuspended ceiling.Vertical post coverconceals vertical post,harness, and cables.Harness connects topowerway to bring powerto run of panels..Product DetailsTop power-in attachesto the top of 30"W to 60"Wtackable acoustical panels,and allows power and communicationcables todescend from the ceiling.Tip: 20"W and 25"W straightpanels have pass-throughpowerways and don’taccommodate a top powerinconnection. Straighttransparent panels don’tallow for vertical feed of thetop power-in harness to thepowerway in the base.10'4"HCeiling heights up to10'4"H can be accommodated.Ceiling trim plateadjusts for lower ceilings.Harness inside linkspowerways to power supplyin the ceiling of the building.Connection can also behardwired..Cables are separatedfrom the power harness toshield them from possibleinterference.Seven heights are availableto correspond to sevenheights of panels.ConnectionsTop power-in enters topof panel and fastens insidewith screws.Substitute a shortenedtop cap on the panel toallow space for the toppower-in vertical post.cPage 142Ceiling attachment kitsecures vertical post of toppower-in to suspended ceilinggrid. Junction box at topof vertical post can be hardwiredto building power..Transparent panels donot accept the top power-in.Wiring & CablingTwenty 1 ⁄2"-diametercables can be accommodatedby the top power-in.Surface MaterialsVertical post cover• Paint (standard)• Vertical surface fabric(option)Ceiling trim plate• 4653 White paint onlyApplication TopicsAttaching the toppower-in adjacent to ajunction is practical in allconfigurations.Wiring and Cabling:InterfacecPage 92.Elective ElementsTransitional Specification Guide 77

Base Covers and ReceptaclesReceptacles are orderedseparately and installed inthe field.cSpecifying, page 149Openings for receptaclesare visually unnoticeableuntil the knockout isremoved.20"W25"W9 5 /16" 9 5 /16"30"W9 5 /16" 9 5 /16"35"W9 5 /16"9 5 /16"36"W9 5 /16"9 5 /16"42"W9 5 /16"9 5 /16"45"W9 5 /16" 9 5 /16"60"WActual DimensionsBase coverWidth 20", 25", 30", 35", 36", 42", 45", or 60"Height 2 7 ⁄8"Receptacle openingWidth 2 3 ⁄4". Height 1 3 ⁄8"Knockout can be removedin the field to allow receptacleto be installed. Reclosureplates are available fromService Parts..Product DetailsCircuit connections arepredetermined by the type ofreceptacle. Line 1 receptaclescan only connect withline 1 in the powerway, line2 with line 2, and line 3 withline 3.Dedicated circuit (line 4)in powerway is accessedby a simplex receptacle.Label on receptacleindicates which circuit itconnects to, so user cancontrol which devices areon specific circuits.Metal base covers areplain with two perforated,visually unnoticeable receptacleknockouts that can bepermanently removed in thefield.Exception: 20"W and 25"Wpanels have no knockoutsbecause power can passthrough but not be accessedin these panels.Knockouts cannot beaccidentally removed bykicking them or strikingthem with a vacuum cleanerbecause pressure toremove the knockout mustbe applied from the back ofthe base cover..ConnectionsBase covers are hingedto panels and held in placewith concealed clips.Receptacles plug intoterminals on powerway andare secured with screws.Wiring & CablingAll circuits can beaccessed at each receptaclelocation by using theappropriate receptacle.Surface MaterialsBase covers• Paint (standard)• 9230 Antique Bronze(option)Receptacle• 6000 Black plastic• 6655 Warm White plasticApplication Topics20"W and 25"W straightpanels accommodatepass-through powerwaysonly, so their base coversdo not have receptacleknockouts..78 Transitional Specification Guide

Base Covers andReceptaclesElective ElementsTransitional Specification Guide 79

PowerwaysPowerways added to thebase of panels allow you todistribute power whereverpanels go.cSpecifying, page 146Powerways have two colorcodedflag connectors—agreen end and a yellow end.Flag terminals acceptconnector from adjacentpowerway.Flag connectorlinks to flag terminal onadjacent powerway.Actual DimensionsDepth (thickness) 1 1 ⁄2"Width 20", 25",30",35",36",42",45",60",or curvedHeight 2".Green-color-coded endof the powerway.Terminal for base power-inor duplex-size receptacle.Parking station on the yellow endprovides a place to secure a flagconnector from adjacent powerwaythat is not being used to make anelectrical connection.Terminal for duplex-sizereceptacles.Yellow-color-coded endof the powerway.Yellow-color-coded endof the powerway.Terminal for receptacle ofany size.Terminal for base power-inor receptacle of any size.Terminal for top power-in.Green-colorcodedend ofthe powerway.Flag connectorFlag connector.80 Transitional Specification Guide

Powerways.Product DetailsReceptacles snap intoterminals and are held inplace with screws.cPage 78Pass-through powerwaysare available for20"W and 25"W straightpanels. They cannotaccommodate receptacles,base power-ins, or toppower-ins.Color coding designatesopposing ends of the powerway—greenrepresentsthe power-in end. The yellowend can be used to extendthe network to an adjacentpowerway.Yellow end of factoryinstalledpowerways istagged on the outside ofthe panel.ConnectionsTwo rules for joiningpowerways apply to everyinstallation:• There must be at leastone green end at eachintersection.• There can be no morethan one yellow end ateach intersection.YellowGreenInactiveParking StationFlag from the yellowend of cableway is inactive.It connects to parking stationon adjacent powerway.1 2Straight connection isformed when a flag connectorfrom the green end ofone powerway attaches tothe second flag terminal onthe yellow end of the adjacentpowerway.TerminalJunctionYellowGreenInactiveStraight connection atjunction requires the flagconnector to travel furtherby the dimension of thejunction post. It connectsto the first flag terminal onadjacent powerway. Theinactive flag does not connectto powerway...L-connection is formedwhen flag connector turns toleft or right.T-connection is formedby two flags—one formingan L-connection and theother a straight connectionat junction. Remaining connectionis inactive.X-connection is formedby three flags that makeright turns. Remaining connectionis inactive.End-of-run is terminatedby folding the last flag backand connecting it to its ownparking station or securing itwith tape..In green-green connectionsthe extra flag cansnap onto the extra terminalinstead of onto a parkingstation. This makes a redundantpower connection,which works the same asa parking connection.G YG Y GYYGAlthough it is possibleto power all four panels inan X-configuration with onlygreen ends at the intersection,it is not recommended.One end of a powerway inthe intersection should beyellow..Wiring & CablingAll Steelcase electricalsystems are designedin compliance with theNational Electrical Code(NEC) to function as amulti-wire branch circuit.Installations should bemade in accordance withthe NEC provisions formulti-wire branch circuits.Local electrical codesvary. Consult a qualifiedelectrical contractor or engineerfor the proper installationof electrical equipment.cPage 103Surface MaterialsPowerways are concealedwhen they areproperly installed.Application TopicsSteps to Plan anElectrical NetworkcPage 98.Elective ElementsTransitional Specification Guide 81

Cable Drop BoxCable drop box permitslay-in cable routing andincreased capacity.cSpecifying, page 148Carrier attaches to tallerpanel. It has a large openingat the top to allow cables tobe routed into the cablespace at the top of thepanel.Change-of-height coveron the sides of cable dropbox can be finished tomatch the panel surface(s).Sides are not removable.Actual DimensionsDepth 3"Width 3". Height 7 1 ⁄2", 15", 22 1 ⁄2", 30", or 37 1 ⁄2"Top cap snaps intoposition on top of cabledrop box.Open side of cable dropbox allows lay-in cablerouting.Trim piece continues theline of the top caps..Product DetailsCable drop box concealscables in in-linechange-of-height panelconfigurations.Connections3"Substitute a shortenedtop cap on the lower panelto allow space for the cabledrop box. You can also ordershortened top caps for fieldinstallation when you’readding the cable drop boxto existing panels.Carrier fastens to theframe of taller panel withscrews.Transparent panelsdo not accept the cabledrop box..Wiring & CablingIn situations wherecapacity is critical, youshould conduct a test usingthe specific cable typesyour installation requires.Surface MaterialsChange-of-heightcovers• Vertical surface fabric(standard)• Wood (option)• Customiz stain on wood(option)Trim and top cap• Vertical surface fabric(standard)• Wood (option)• Customiz stain on wood(option).82 Transitional Specification Guide

Cable Drop BoxElective ElementsTransitional Specification Guide 83

Rules for Panel Stability.Elective Elements,when properlyinstalled, is designed tobe a very stable furnituresystem. Adherence to theguidelines presented herewill allow you to efficientlyplan stable workstationsusing panels alone, panelsupportedcomponents, orfreestanding furniture. Toensure safe performanceand maximum stability, theinstallation instructions thataccompany each furnitureshipment must be strictlyobserved.An “X” over a drawingmeans that this applicationis not recommended forpanel-run stability.Change of height hasno effect on these stabilityrules.Rules for Tackable Acoustical PanelsTwo-Panel Runs8' maximumThree-Panel Runs12' maximumUnstable. Requires Perpendicular paneladditional support at end provides stability at end ofof panel run.panel run.Four-Panel Runs16' maximum30"W minimumUnstable. Requires Perpendicular paneladditional support at end provides stability at end ofof panel run.panel run.Five-Panel RunsUnstable. Requiresadditional support..12' maximumFurniture provides stabilityat end of panel run.Tip: Not recommended on75 1 ⁄2"H or 83"H panels in a12' run.16' maximumFurniture provides stabilityat end of panel run.Tip: Not recommended on75 1 ⁄2"H or 83"H panels in a16' run..84 Transitional Specification Guide

Rules for Panel StabilityRules for Straight Transparent PanelsTwo-Panel Runs8' maximumTwo transparent panels Two panels are stable ifrequire additional support. transparent panel is not atthe end of run.Three-Panel Runs12' maximumUnstable. Requires Straight transparentadditional support at end perpendicular panelof panel run.provides stability at end ofa three-panel run of straighttransparent panels.12' maximumFurniture provides stability Furniture used in front ofif transparent panel is not at transparent panels addsthe end of a run.stability but blocks the view.Tip: Not recommended on75 1 ⁄2"H or 83"H panels in a12' run.Four-Panel Runs16' maximum30"W minimumUnstable. Transparent Perpendicular panelpanels do not provide provides stability at end ofstability as a complete panel run.panel run.Straight transparentpanels can only be usedin the first and second.positions.8' maximumPerpendicular panelprovides stability at end ofpanel run.12' maximumTackable acousticalpanel provides stability iftwo transparent panels arenot at the end of a run.16' maximumFurniture provides stabilityat end of panel run.Straight transparentpanels can only be usedin the first and secondpositions.Furniture used in front oftransparent panels addsstability but blocks the view.Unstable. Two transparentpanels require additionalsupport if they’re at the endof a three-panel run.Unstable. Transparentpanel requires additionalsupport at the end of a run.12' maximumTackable acousticalpanel provides stability ifonly one transparent panelis at the end of a run.Unstable. Transparentpanel requires additionalsupport at the end of a run..Elective ElementsTransitional Specification Guide 85

Rules for Panel Stability with Components.Maximum panel stabilityis always achievedwhen loads are counterbalancedby similar loads onthe opposite side of thepanels. The recommendationsshown here apply totackable acoustical panelsand cable-managementpanels. Components cannotbe supported by straighttransparent panels.An “X” over a drawingmeans that this applicationis not recommended.U-bracket is available tojoin adjacent overhead storagecabinets together toensure that they remain inalignment even when oppositesides of the panel supportwidely different weightloads. Order part numberY46664 from Service Parts.Methods for Stabilizing Panels60" minimumConnect to a wall or aperpendicular run of panelsat least 60"W.Rules for Panel StabilityPanel runs with onepanel-supported componentper panel require stabilityevery three panels.Panel runs with twopanel-supported componentsper panel require stabilityevery two panels.Panel runs with twopanel-supported componentsper panel can be extendedfor three panels, if the centerpanels only support onecomponent and all loads arecounterbalanced.Fully loaded panelsmust be counterbalanced.In addition, panel run-offsare required at both ends of. the panel.Connect to perpendicularpanels, freestanding furniture,or a worksurface withat least one end panel.minimum two 20"Wpanel run-offsminimum two 25"Wpanel run-offsTip: Not recommended on75 1 ⁄2"H or 83"H panels in a16' run.dimension mustmatch worksurfaceTip: Not recommended on75 1 ⁄2"H or 83"H panels in a16' run..86 Transitional Specification Guide

Bracket Application Rulesfor Curved Front Bin and L-ShelfBracket Application RulesBasic BracketsBasic brackets are usedto mount bins and shelves topanels with vertical slotpatterns. Answer, Avenir,Elective Elements, Kick,Series 9000, Montage, andPathways Technology Wallpanels can support basicattachment brackets. Basicattachment brackets pushbins and shelves 1 ⁄4" fromframe.6"6"Width of overhead binor shelf must match or bewider than the width of thepanel or panels that it isattached to..Bracket Application Matrix12"Basic attachmentbrackets install in panelseams and allow bins andshelves that are wider to beattached. Total width of binor shelf can extend 12"beyond the bracket on oneside.Basic Full Off-Module UpmountAnswer X XAvenirXElective ElementsXEnhanced Off-Module Montage X XKick X XMontageXPathways Technology Wall X X XSegmentXSeries 9000X.Elective ElementsTransitional Specification Guide 87

Vertical Wire ManagerVertical wire manageraccommodates cables andprovides flexibility. Concealscords and cables that arerouted along the edge ofpanels.cSpecifying, page 150Actual DimensionsDepth 1"Width 1 5 ⁄8". Height 16", 18 1 ⁄2", or 48".Product DetailsThree lengths are availablefor typical applications.Plastic wire manager can becut to meet specialrequirements.16"H wire managermatches the distance frombelow the worksurface tothe panel base cover.18 1 ⁄2"H wire managermatches the distance fromthe bottom of overheadstorage to a worksurface..18 1 ⁄2"H or 48"H wiremanager can be used toconceal power cord extendingfrom panel-mountedcanopy light to worksurface.Both are available to installdepending on the heightthat you hang the canopylight on the panel. Specifythe plastic wire manageronly for 48"H applicationsas fabric will fray.ConnectionsHooks attach the verticalwire manager to the slottedchannel on a panel. Positionof hooks can be adjusted inthe field. 48"H vertical wiremanager ships with fourhooks. All other sizes shipwith two hooks.Surface MaterialsVertical wire manager• Plastic (standard)• Vertical surface fabric(option)Directional fabrics onvertical wire manager maybe oriented differentlydepending on height. Youcan specify fabric direction.cPage 112Application TopicsPlastic version canbe cut to length. Fabriccoveredversion must beordered to fit height dimensionof panel or clearancebetween storage andworksurface..88 Transitional Specification Guide

UnderstandingElective ElementsWiring and CablingStatement of Line 90Wiring and Cabling Product DetailsWiring and Cabling: Interface 92Wiring and Cabling: Distribution 94Wiring and Cabling: Access and Storage 96Wiring and Cabling Application TopicsSteps to Plan an Electrical Network 98Steps to Specify Powered Panels with Different Surface Materials 99Circuit Choices 100Circuit Specifications 101How to Calculate Power Needs 102Locations with Special Requirements 103Understanding Building Wiring 104Cable Capacities 106Elective ElementsAll Steelcase electrical systemsare designed in compliancewith the NationalElectrical Code (NEC) tofunction as a multiwirebranch circuit. Installationsshould be made in accordancewith the NEC provisionsfor multiwire branchcircuits.Local electrical codes vary.Consult a qualified electricalcontractor or engineer forthe proper installation ofelectrical equipment.Transitional Specification Guide 89

Wiring and CablingStatement of LineBase Power-InsUnderstandingcPage 76SpecifyingcPage 144Breakaway BasePower-InsUnderstandingcPage 76SpecifyingcPage 144Top Power-InsUnderstandingcPage 77SpecifyingcPage 145ReceptaclesUnderstandingcPage 78SpecifyingcPage 149PowerwaysUnderstandingcPage 80SpecifyingcPage 146Cable Drop BoxUnderstandingcPage 82SpecifyingcPage 148Three-Piece GrommetUnderstandingcSee Elective ElementsSystems FurnitureSpecification Guide.4" GrommetUnderstandingcSee Elective ElementsSystems FurnitureSpecification Guide.Continuous ChannelGrommetUnderstandingcSee Elective ElementsSystems FurnitureSpecification Guide.Grommet ConvenienceReceptacleUnderstandingcPage 96SpecifyingcSee Elective ElementsSystems FurnitureSpecification Guide.Power SpheresUnderstandingcSee Elective ElementsSystems FurnitureSpecification GuideSpecifyingcSee Elective ElementsSystems FurnitureSpecification Guide.Power andCommunicationSpheresUnderstandingcSee Elective ElementsSystems FurnitureSpecification GuideSpecifyingcSee Elective ElementsSystems FurnitureSpecification Guide.CommunicationSphereUnderstandingcSee Elective ElementsSystems FurnitureSpecification GuideSpecifyingcSee Elective ElementsSystems FurnitureSpecification Guide.Round Power andCommunication PortUnderstandingcSee Elective ElementsSystems FurnitureSpecification GuideSpecifyingcSee Elective ElementsSystems FurnitureSpecification Guide.Cable and Fiber ReelUnderstandingcSee Elective ElementsSystems FurnitureSpecification GuideSpecifyingcSee Elective ElementsSystems FurnitureSpecification Guide.90 Transitional Specification Guide

Wiring and CablingStatement of LineTermination PlateUnderstandingcSee Elective ElementsSystems FurnitureSpecification Guide.SpecifyingcSee Elective ElementsSystems FurnitureSpecification Guide.Canopy LightsUnderstandingcSee Elective ElementsSystems FurnitureSpecification Guide.SpecifyingcSee Elective ElementsSystems FurnitureSpecification Guide.Shelf LightsUnderstandingcSee Elective ElementsSystems FurnitureSpecification Guide.SpecifyingcSee Elective ElementsSystems FurnitureSpecification Guide.Vertical Wire ManagerUnderstandingcPage 88SpecifyingcPage 150Power StripsUnderstandingcPage 97SpecifyingcSee Elective ElementsSystems FurnitureSpecification Guide.Cord ReelUnderstandingcPage 97SpecifyingcSee Elective ElementsSystems FurnitureSpecification Guide.Cable Storage TrayUnderstandingcPage 97SpecifyingcSee Elective ElementsSystems FurnitureSpecification Guide.Wire Guide ClipUnderstandingcPage 97SpecifyingcSee Elective ElementsSystems FurnitureSpecification Guide.Elective ElementsTransitional Specification Guide 91

Wiring and Cabling: Interface.Interface refers to wherethe utilities (electrical andcables) for your panelinstallation connect withthe building’s power andcommunications.Top power-ins routebuilding power from theceiling through the panel tothe powerway in the panelbase cavity. They can alsobe used to run communicationcables from the ceilingto the top of a panel.cPage 77Base power-ins connectbuilding power from the wallor floor to a powerway inthe panel base.cPage 76Continuous cable slotcan be used to route cablesfrom a floor source to thepanel..92 Transitional Specification Guide

Wiring and Cabling: Interface.Product DetailsVertical post of toppower-in can attach toeither end of a panel.Tip: Order a shortened topcap for the panel, to allowfor the width of the post.cPage 142Power and communicationcables can be routedvia a top power-in. The postincludes a power harnessas well as a separate, insulatedspace for cables.Power can be routed to thepowerways, and communicationcables can be routedto the tops of the panels.Ceiling attachment kitsecures the vertical post ofa top power-in to the suspendedceiling grid. Junctionbox at the top of the verticalpost can be hardwired tobuilding power..Base power-ins supplybuilding power to a panelrun by connecting to thepowerway at one of thereceptacle locations. Breakawaymodels are availablefor use in California.Continuous cable slotabove the panel base covercan be used to bring cablesinto the panel base fromthe floor.Exception: Continuous cableslot is not available on transparentpanels..ConnectionsPower harness of toppower-in has a flag connectorthat plugs into thepowerway in the panelbase.Top power-ins andbase power-ins are hardwiredto building power inthe field by an electrician.Breakaway basepower-in is mandated foruse in health care facilitiesin the state of Californiaby the Office of StatewideHealth Planning and DevelopmentOrganization (O.S.H.P.D.). With 50 pounds ofpressure, the connectionwill come part to separatelive electrical current in theevent of panel movement.Breakaway power-ins fitduplex- or triplex-sizereceptacle openings..Application TopicsSteps to Plan anElectrical NetworkcPage 98Understanding BuildingWiringcPage 104Chicago, New YorkCity, and Californiahave special requirements.cPage 103..Elective ElementsTransitional Specification Guide 93

Wiring and Cabling: Distribution.Distribution refers to howthe power and cables getfrom one place to anotherthrough the panel and worksurfacecomponents.Cable space under topcaps allows ten 1 ⁄2"-diametercables to be routedinside tops of panels.Wire channel, insidetackable acoustical andcable-management panels,provides space to routepower from top power-in topowerways in panel basecavity.Cable chase, inside tackableacoustical and cablemanagementpanels, allowscables to be routed verticallyfrom the cable spaceto the continuous cable slotin the panel base.Light and sound seal,at the base of the panel,provides room for cablerouting.Panel base cavity concealspowerways. If powerwaysare not used, basecavity can be used to routeand conceal cables.Cable drop box concealscables passing from one topcap to another in a changeof-heightapplication whenpanels are joined in astraight configuration.Space at the bottomof the panel, behind thesurface, provides additionalspace for routing four 1 ⁄2"-diameter cables on eachside of the panel..94 Transitional Specification Guide

Wiring and Cabling:Distribution.Product DetailsPowerways, within panelbase cavities, connect toroute power through acluster of workstations andprovide terminals for receptaclesor base power-ins.cPage 80Cable drop box concealscables when panels changeheight and there is no junction.The box is detailed toresemble a junction andmust be used with a shortenedtop cap.cPage 82Tip: Cable drop box cannotbe used at panel combinationsthat include transparentpanels..Grommets in worksurfaceshave removable covers.They can be specified inseveral locations on rectangular,transitional, andcorner worksurfaces.cSee Elective ElementsSystems FurnitureSpecification Guide.4"-square grommet withremovable cover is availablefactory installed insome worksurfaces.cSee Elective ElementsSystems FurnitureSpecification Guide.Continuous channelgrommet has movablesegments that can be positionedas needed.cSee Elective ElementsSystems FurnitureSpecification Guide..Vertical wire managersattach at panel seams andcorners. They conceal tasklight cords running to theworksurface, or cords runningbetween the worksurfaceand base receptacles.cPage 88.Product DetailsPowered panels may bejoined to form straight, L-, T-,or X-configurations. powercan be extended to all panelsat a junction, and cablesmay be routed from anypanel to any other panel.20"W and 25"W panelscannot have receptacles,but power can pass throughthem..Application TopicsPowerwayscPage 80Steps to Plan anElectrical NetworkcPage 98Circuit ChoicescPage 100Circuit SpecificationscPage 101How to CalculatePower NeedscPage 102Cable CapacitiescPage 106Chicago, New YorkCity, and Los Angeleshave special requirements.cPage 103.Elective ElementsTransitional Specification Guide 95

Wiring and Cabling: Access and Storage.Access refers to thepoints where you’ll placeelectrical outlets so peoplecan plug things in. Accessalso includes the links ofcommunication and computernetworks.Storage refers to the waysyou manage excess lengthsof cords and cables.Grommet conveniencereceptacles can beused to provide access topower wherever there is agrommet.Grommets permit youto access cords at worksurfacelevel.Base receptacles, in thepanel base cover, providepower at floor level..96 Transitional Specification Guide

Wiring and Cabling:Access and Storage.Product DetailsBase receptacles areavailable in a duplex configurationfor three differentcircuits, or a simplex configurationfor a dedicatedcircuit.cPage 78Four base receptaclescan be installed. Panels canhave two receptacles perside: two duplex, or oneduplex and one simplex.20"W and 25"W panelsaccommodate pass-throughpowerways only, so theirbase covers do not havereceptacle openings.Power strips providea convenient array ofreceptacles and can beattached to the undersideof the worksurface.cSee Elective ElementsSystems FurnitureSpecification Guide..Grommets in worksurfaceshave removable coversto admit three-prongplugs. They can be specifiedin nine locations toavoid conflict with drawersand pedestals.cSee Elective ElementsSystems FurnitureSpecification Guide.4"-square grommet withremovable cover is availablefactory installed insome worksurfaces.cSee Elective ElementsSystems FurnitureSpecification Guide.Continuous channelgrommet has movablesegments that can be positionedas needed.cSee Elective ElementsSystems FurnitureSpecification Guide..Cord reels, field installedunder the worksurface, takeup excess cord or cable.cSee Elective ElementsSystems FurnitureSpecification Guide.Cable and fiber reelstores lengths of excessfiber-optic cable or conventionalcables.cSee Elective ElementsSystems FurnitureSpecification Guide.Termination plateaccommodates the oversizedjunction boxes usedfor installation of fiber-opticcables.cSee Elective ElementsSystems FurnitureSpecification Guide.Cable storage trays,field installed under theworksurface, hold cablesout of the way.cSee Elective ElementsSystems FurnitureSpecification Guide..Wire guide clip has anadhesive back to allow it tostick anywhere under aworksurface for routing andmanaging cords.cSee Elective ElementsSystems FurnitureSpecification Guide.ConnectionsSimplex receptaclesin the panel base can belocated in base-right or -leftopenings.Cords with three-prongplugs connect pull-uppower receptacles, andpower strips to a panelbase receptacle. Hardwiredconnections are alsoavailable..Application TopicsChicago, New YorkCity, and Californiahave special requirements.cPage 103.Elective ElementsTransitional Specification Guide 97

Steps to Plan an Electrical Network.There are four steps toplanning an electricalnetwork.1On a drawing of your panellayout, indicate where youwant receptacles.2Designate which circuit (1,2, 3, or dedicated) you wanteach receptacle to link to.cFor more informationabout dedicated and designatedcircuits, see page 100.3Determine how many powerinsare needed to supplyenough power to each clusterof workstations.cFor more informationabout calculating powerneeds, see page 102.4Indicate the position of eachbase power-in or top powerinon your floor plan.You’re probably done.If, however, your layoutincludes panels withdifferent surface materialson the two panel surfaces,you may want to streamlinethe installation process byspecifying surface materialsin a special order.cSee the next page fordetails.1 21 21 21 21 23Base power-in= Simplex receptacle= Duplex receptacle3 13 13 13 132 2 DDD 2 2 D2 D2 2 D1 3 2 11 31 31 32 1Division between separate power-ins2DD2 12 11 3 2 13.98 Transitional Specification Guide

Steps to Specify Powered Panels with DifferentSurface MaterialsSteps to Specify PoweredPanels with DifferentSurface Materials.You can streamline theinstallation process whenusing different surfacematerials on each side ofthe panels by specifyingthe panel surfaces in order.Because powerways canbe reversed in the field,you can skip this process.But, allow extra time forinstallation.1Complete the stepsdescribed on page 98,so that you have a drawingof your installation withthe positions of power-insindicated.2Start with the powerwaythat connects to the powerinand use the letter “G” toindicate that this is the endof the powerway that iscolor coded green. Use theletter “Y” on the oppositeend to indicate that it iscolor coded yellow.3Continue by marking thegreen and yellow ends ofeach powerway with letters.When assigning color codes,follow these two rules:• There must be at leastone green end at eachintersection• There can be no morethan one yellow end ateach intersection.cPage 804Use a color marker to indicatethe different surfacematerials of each panel.5Locate the side of eachpanel that has the greenend of the powerway onthe right. This is side one.Always specify the surfacematerial on side one of thepanel first, then specifyside two.6You may have panels thatare identical in every respect,except that the materials forside one and side two arereversed. The installers willbe able to speed up theinstallation by arrangingthese panels to match yourlayout without rearrangingthe powerways.YYYY1212GGGGYBase power-inBase power-inGG YG YG YG Y GYY GG Y GY1Division between separate power-ins2Y GG Y GY21 11Y GY G1Y G Y1Y222Y GG Y GY21 122.Elective ElementsTransitional Specification Guide 99

Circuit ChoicesPowerways and Strategies for Using Them.Powerways added to thebase of panels allow you todistribute power whereverpanels go.4-circuit (3+D) powerwayshave the same fivewires plus three additionalwires to make a separate,fourth circuit with its ownhot, neutral, and groundwires..Three basic strategiescan be used to employ theavailable circuits.Circuit1Circuit2Circuit3Strategy 1Undesignated CircuitsThis strategy allows allavailable circuits to be usedfreely without specifyingwhich equipment is poweredby which circuit.AdvantagesNo planning required..Circuit1Circuit2Circuit3Strategy 2Designated CircuitsThis strategy assigns specificcircuits for specificuses. You can indicate thecircuit number—1, 2, or 3—for each receptacle in yourplan and then designatewhich equipment should beconnected to each circuit.AdvantagesGain control over groups ofelectrical equipment. Forexample, connect all thelight fixtures to one designatedcircuit and you canturn them all on or off witha single switch.Furthermore, equipment onthe other two circuits, suchas fax machines and printers,won’t be affected..CircuitDStrategy 3Dedicated CircuitsThis strategy uses the separatecircuit in the 4-circuit(3+D) powerways to powersensitive electronic equipment.Sensitive equipmentis isolated and protectedfrom fluctuations in powerflow induced by electronicequipment on other circuits.The remaining three circuitsin the 4-circuit (3+D) powerwaycan be designated orundesignated.AdvantagesSensitive electronic equipment,such as a computer,can be protected from voltagespikes and electronicnoise.Equipment that has highpower requirements, suchas a copy machine or papershredder, can be assignedto the dedicated circuit toreduce the burden on theremaining circuits..100 Transitional Specification Guide

Circuit SpecificationsDetailed Information for the Electrical EngineerCircuit Specifications.The Elective Elementselectrical system is an8-wire system with fourcircuits (3 circuits plus afourth dedicated circuit).It is designed to work withthree-phase, 208Y/120Vservice.If a building has singlephase,240/120V service,you simply use two of thethree hot conductors thatshare a neutral ground.Because the dedicated circuitin the 4-circuit (3+D)system has its own neutraland ground, it works witheither type of service.There are several ways toconfigure the system. Thedrawing at the right showsone of the most simple.How 4-circuit (3+D) System ConnectsLine Line Line1 2 3Circuit breakersDedicated circuit canconnect to any line.NeutralGround.JunctionboxSystem description:Multiwire branch circuitsystem, rated at 20-ampsper circuit. The 4-circuit(3+D) system has 8 wires:3 hots, with a shared neutral,plus a completely separatecircuit with its own hot,neutral, and ground. Whenconnected to a buildingsuppliedisolated ground, itprovides a ground-isolatedcircuit that can be dedicatedto sensitive electronicequipment. Provides a totalcapacity of 80 amps.PowerwayWire specifications:Common neutral wire is10AWG, 600V, 90°C. Hotand ground wires are12AWG, 600V, 105°C..Elective ElementsTransitional Specification Guide 101

How to Calculate Power NeedsUse This to Determine How Many Power-Ins You’ll Need.When planning a powernetwork, the amperagerequirements of all yourelectrical components mustbe calculated so you canprovide sufficient electricityto power them..If your usage is notknown in advance:The National Electrical Code(NEC) allows a maximumof 13 receptacles on each20-amp circuit. This resultsin up to 52 receptaclesfor each 4-circuit (3+D)power-in.Because these numbersrefer to receptacles, notoutlets, you are able tospecify all duplex receptaclesor a combination ofduplex and simplex receptaclesfor three circuits andthe dedicated circuit of the4-circuit (3+D) system.Simplex receptacles onlyaccess the dedicatedcircuit..If your usage is knownin advance:Add up the amperage usedby each piece of equipmentin the workstation. Wheneveryou reach 60 amps(20 amps times 3 circuits)from items that are likely tobe used at the same time,you have reached the limitfor a single power-in.Specify another power-inand continue until all equipmentis powered.cSee table at right for typicaland actual amperageusages for components.If the circuits will normallybe subject to a continuousload (three or more hoursof continuous use, such aslights or computers), theNEC requires that circuitcapacity be “de-rated” by20 percent. Therefore, treatcircuits used for continuousloads as if they were ratedat 16 amps instead of theregular 20 amps. This is atotal of 48 amps for eachpower-in.Try to anticipate futureincreases in power requirementsand build someexcess capacity into yourplan.Some appliances, such aslarge copiers, coffee makers,or space heatersrequire most of the currentavailable on a 20-amp circuit.It is recommended thatsuch devices be suppliedwith their own receptacle,directly from the building.This leaves the capacity ofthe furniture circuits availablefor the more dynamicrequirements of the officeoccupants.Local electrical codes vary.Consult a qualified electricalcontractor or engineer forthe proper planning of electricalcircuits in your locale.Typical and Actual Requirements ofOffice EquipmentGeneral Equipment(Typical Amperage)A.C. adapter 0.05Adding machine 0.05Answering machine 0.08Calculator 0.25Clock 0.03Coffee pot 10.00Desk-top copiers 7.00 to 10.00Stand-alone copiers 15.00Electric eraser 0.25Fan 1.00Manuscript holder 0.75Microfiche 0.85Microwave 8.00 to 12.00Pencil sharpener 0.25Radio 0.05Slide projector 2.00 to 6.00Space heater, 1000 watts 8.50Space heater, 1500 watts 12.50Transcriber 0.15Typewriter 1.50Electronic Equipment(Typical Amperage)Desk-top memorystorage devices 0.08 to 12.00Modems 0.15Desk-top printers 1.20 to 5.00Stand-alone printers 3.00 to 11.00VDTs and PCs 0.08 to 4.80Steelcase Lighting(Actual Amperage)Canopy lights:24 1 ⁄4"W, 14 watts 0.1436 1 ⁄16"W, 21 watts 0.2047 7 ⁄8"W, 28 watts 0.26Shelf lights:25"W, 17 watts 0.2037"W, 25 watts 0.3049"W, 32 watts 0.30.102 Transitional Specification Guide

Locations with Special RequirementsLocations withSpecial RequirementsChicago electricalcode requires the powerdistribution network to behardwired on site. Theseinstallations require specialChicago base covers thathave receptacle knockoutsin position to match the locationof receptacles installedin Chicago junction boxes.Chicago receptacle openingsare 1 ⁄4" higher than thestandard base cover, andthey are enlarged to accommodate20 amp receptacles.Chicago base covershave openings positioned tomatch receptacle location inChicago junction box.New York City CodePowerways must be fieldinstalled and task lightsmust meet city portabilityrequirements (does notrequire tools to install).California OSHPDRequirementsIn California, the Office ofStatewide Health Planningand Development (OSHPD)requires special power-inconnections that will reducethe chance of a hazard ifpanels are disturbed duringan earthquake. The rulesare mandated for healthcarefacilities only. Thereare two products that canbe used to meet the OSHPDrequirements..PowerwayBreakaway basepower-in features a connectorthat interrupts thepower supply if the paneltips.Junction boxReceptacle openingsare knocked out in the field.ReceptacleReceptacleBase coverAnchor bracket attachesto panel glide and securesthe panel to the floor at apower-entry point—wherethe top power-in or basepower-in is attached. Anchorbracket prevents panelmovement and possibledamage to the electricalconnection.Order panels withoutpower and add the phrase“with Chicago base covers.”Knock out the receptacleopenings in the positionswhere you intend to installreceptacles.Chicago junction boxcan accommodate tworeceptacles back to back.Electrician must make allhardwire connections in thefield, including panel-topanelconnections.Order panels withoutpower. Standard basecovers have two receptacleopenings available oneach side. Knock out thereceptacle openings in thepositions where you intendto install receptacles.Order field-installedpowerways for thesepanels.Canopy lights and shelflights meet all requirementsfor portability.Order breakaway basepower-in for all panelsconnected to power-ins.Order anchor bracketfor panels 72"H or higherthat are connected topower-ins.Code does not allow cordand-plugdevices in commercialbuildings.Order Chicago versionof canopy lights orshelf lights. These lightshave a built-in circuitbreaker.Order special hardwarepackage order partnumber 25-9451504.(10 clips). To install shelflights on service moduleswithout the use of tools.Available from serviceparts. Order part number25-9451504..Elective ElementsTransitional Specification Guide 103

Understanding Building Wiring.System Characteristics Advantages Disadvantages CommentsFixed Wall and ColumnPoke ThroughUnderfloor DuctCellular Floor• Common to most buildings.• Power and telecommunicationrun through permanentwalls to wall receptacles.• Wiring concealed in ceilingspace of floor below andfed through holes in floor.• Electrical receptacles andtelecommunications outletslocated in floor-mountedmonument fixtures.• Ducts or continuous channelsencased in floor slab.• Underfloor system withlarge-capacity, divided distributioncells for electricaland telecommunicationwiring.• Wiring runs perpendicularto the trench header, a specialduct that cuts acrossall the cells and providesaccess.• Low cost for initialinstallation.• Provides power in corridorsand small rooms.• More flexible than underfloorduct because wirescan be pulled up at anylocation.• Low life-cycle costs.• Easy access for relocation.• Relocation causes little disruption.• Inconspicuous.• Electrical and telecommunicationssystems runtogether to workstation.• Protects voice and datasystems from interferenceand damage.• Must be used with othersystems to reach areasaway from walls.• Moving wall receptacles isdifficult and expensive.• High relocation costs.• Moving junction boxesrequires cutting a holethrough the floor—aprocess called coring.• Moving junction boxes candisrupt work on two floors.• Monument fixtures cancause people to trip.• Flexibility limited to specificaccess points.• System can add to requiredlength of wire or cablebecause of trench headercellconfiguration.• Workstation layout dependson location of wall receptaclesand must be carefullyplanned.• Usually used with other systemssuch as poke throughor flat wiring.• Not accepted by some localfire codes.• May weaken floor slab.• Flexibility dependent onbuilding structure.• Increasing wire and cablerequirements may exceedcapabilities of existingsystem.• Carpet tiles ease access totrench..104 Transitional Specification Guide

Understanding Building Wiring.System Characteristics Advantages Disadvantages CommentsAccess FlooringFlat WiringIn-Ceiling Wiring• Developed for mainframecomputer rooms.• Modular floor panels raisedabove the slab on 6" to 36"high supports, and conduitand cable run beneaththese floor panels.• Access through monumentfixtures.• Access from wall or column.Power and signal cablesrun to workstation via flatwire and cable sandwichedbetween slab and carpet.• Outlets in transition boxeson top of carpet.• Conduit and cables run inspace above suspendedceiling and are distributedto workstation level via toppower-ins.• Ease of access andrearrangement of wiringsystems.• Easy relocation.• Flexible.• Meets most capacityrequirements.• Elements sold as onepackage.• Low initial cost.• Very easy to move.• Little disruption duringmove.• Space usually accommodateslarge capacities.• May be noisy when walkedon.• Requires stair and ramptransition to building floorwhen added to existingfacility.• Heavy wheel traffic cancause signal interruption indata transmission wiring.• Top power-ins used to routecables can detract fromopen-plan aesthetics.• Smoke alarms and fire protectionsprinklers may berequired.• Use only carpet tiles or arearugs.• Should not be used in areassusceptible to extremedampness or water spillage.• Slab-on-grade installations,where concrete is poureddirectly on the ground,require careful preparationper manufacturer’s instructionsto ensure that moisturedoesn’t damage thesystem.• Cost for installationincreases when ceilingspace is used as return airplenum to meet fire protectioncodes.• Cable trays should be consideredfor communicationswiring..Elective ElementsTransitional Specification Guide 105

Cable Capacities.Test and verify capacitiesfor your individual situation.We recommend thattesting be conducted usingyour specific cable as wellas the furniture configurationyou are considering.Cable capacities in this tableare based on non-plenumratedcables installed by acable contractor under idealconditions. Figures areapproximations. Actualcapacities may vary slightlydepending on which manufacturerproduced thecable and the specific fieldconditions.Cat 6 Test Cableså Avaya 1071OD=0.215"∫ Avaya 1081OD=0.250"ç Avaya 2071 PlenumOD=0.195"∂ Avaya 2081 PlenumOD=0.240"´ Belden Media Twist1872AOD=0.365" x 0.165"ƒ Belden Media Twist1874A PlenumOD=0.365" x 0.165"© Berk-TekLan-Mark 1000OD=0.230"˙ Berk-TekLan-Mark 1000PlenumOD=0.225"ˆ CommScopeUltraMediaOD=0.240"∆ General CableCommand LINX 6OD=0.250"˚ Mohawk GigaLANOD=0.240"¬ Nordx 4812LXOD=0.245"µ Nordx 4813XPlenumOD=0.230"Cat 5 Test Cables˜ Berk–Tek24 AWG CMR4-Pair UTPOD=0.190".StraightL, T, and XBootå ∫ ç ∂ ´ ƒ © ˙ ˆ ∆ ˚ ¬ µ ˜Cable routing at top40 31 43 35 36 35 32 35 33 34 32 34 37 85of panelCable routing atbase of panel with26 20 26 26 26 24 24 22 24 22 20 20 24 40powerway1Cable routing at baseof panel without70 54 68 64 64 62 58 56 52 60 54 60 70 78powerway2Change-of-height cable52 41 55 44 45 45 50 52 45 40 45 43 51 50routing at top of panelVertical cable routinginside panel from top18 15 17 16 17 17 16 16 15 17 15 19 18 39cap to base withoutpowerway3, 4Cable routing around28 L 19 L 26 L 22 L 23 L 22 L 22 L 21 L 22 L 24 L 19 L 22 L 23 L 37 Linside corner at top30 T 20 T 28 T 24 T 23 T 22 T 22 T 21 T 22 T 24 T 19 T 22 T 23 T 37 Tof panel40 X 31 X 43 X 35 X 36 X 37 X 32 X 35 X 33 X 34 X 33 X 34 X 37 X 37 XCable routing at10 L 10 L 12 L 10 L 12 L 10 L 12 L 10 L 10 L 12 L 10 L 10 L 12 L 28 Lbase of panel with12 T 10 T 12 T 12 T 14 T 12 T 12 T 12 T 12 T 12 T 10 T 10 T 12 T 28 Tpowerway124 X 18 X 24 X 24 X 28 X 24 X 24 X 22 X 24 X 24 X 18 X 20 X 24 X 28 XCable routing at base55 L 42 L 53 L 58 L 52 L 50 L 42 L 41 L 41 L 40 L 43 L 45 L 50 L 78 Xof panel withoutpowerway270 T 54 T 68 T 64 T 64 T 62 T 58 T 50 T 52 T 60 T 54 T 60 T 70 T 78 X80 X 80 X 80 X 80 X 80 X 80 X 80 X 80 X 80 X 80 X 80 X 80 X 80 X 78 XCable routing in12 10 12 12 14 12 12 12 12 12 10 10 12 16panel boot.106 Transitional Specification Guide

Cable Capacities.Power Pole and Cable PoleBase Fiber-Inå ∫ ç ∂ ´ ƒ © ˙ ˆ ∆ ˚ ¬ µ ˜Cable routing fromdouble-sided pole48 40 50 41 46 42 46 46 41 39 43 41 42 48with power harnessinto panel top capCable routing fromdouble-sided pole50 39 51 43 48 45 48 47 42 40 44 38 40 48without powerharness into paneltop capCable routing fromdouble-sided pole37 29 39 32 37 34 39 37 32 28 34 35 36 36into panel basewith powerway 5Cable routing fromdouble-sided pole49 41 49 44 42 43 47 43 40 39 41 43 44 48into panel basewithout powerwayBase fiber-in into8 5 7 6 7 7 6 6 5 5 6 5 6 7panel baseVertical Wire ManagerCable routing inside12 10 16 12 10 10 11 10 10 9 12 9 12 8vertical wire manager.4 3 ⁄4"7 ⁄8"Clip1 ⁄2"5 ⁄8"Elective Elements PanelCross SectionLightSeal1 ⁄2"3 ⁄4"TopCap1 ⁄4"7 ⁄8"Upper Portionof Panel BootNotes:1 = Capacities include boththe upper portion of the bootand the cable-routing spaceabove the powerway (clip).2 = Capacities includethe upper portion of theboot, the powerway cavity,and the cable-routing spaceabove the powerway (clip).3 = Powerway blocks accessto boot, clip, and powerwaycavity, which makes verticalcable routing impracticalwhen powerway is installed.4 = Capacities can bedoubled if routed throughboth openings. Capacityfigures are based on routingthrough one opening.5 = Capacities includecable-routing (clip) spaceabove the powerway only,not the boot..Elective ElementsTransitional Specification Guide 107

108 Transitional Specification Guide

SpecifyingElective ElementsElective ElementsTransitional Specification Guide 109

Specifying Tips.ils,General TipsPanelsStandard Includes• Panel with two surfaces: vertical sor wood• Radius-edge top cap: vertical surf• Two base covers with receptacleException: 20"W and 25"W base• Attachment mechanismReview the features thatare standard for each productbefore you begin tospecify. You only need toinclude specifications foroptions, surface materials,and colors when you want asubstitute for the standard.To ensure that you donot overlook anything,approach the specifyingprocess in a consistentorder every time. Here arethree common methods.Specify productsaccording to theirorder on the specificationpages.Specify all workstationsusing a formulatedpattern, such asstarting at the entrance toa workstation and movingclockwise.Specify each typeof workstation in yourinstallation and then determinehow many of eachtype are needed..PanelsSpecify style numbersand surface materials forall panels.Keep track of panels thatrequire power and list panelswith power separately.Specify junctions and theirsurface materials for topcaps, and, if appropriate,trim pieces and base cover.List end-of-run trim andin-line change-of-heighttrim requirements.Base trims with invisibleknockouts are standardwith 30"W–60"Wpanels. Remove knockoutsonly where you want toaccess power.WorksurfacesSpecify style numbersand surface materials forall worksurfaces.Include style numbers. for the support you want.110 Transitional Specification Guide

Specifying TipsStorageSpecify storage componentstyle numbers andsurface materials.LightingSpecify style numbersof lights.Wiring & CablingIf you specified withpower as you ordered yourpanels, the only things leftto specify are power-insand receptacles.Example of OrderHere’s what the specification would be like for the installationshown at the left.Qty. Style No. DescriptionPanels8 EEP6845 68"H x 45"W tackable panelsw/power sides 1 & 2: fabric, 5339top cap: fabric, 5338base cover: 08354 EEP6825 68"H x 25"W tackable panelsside 1: fabric, 5339side 2: fabric, 5338top cap: fabric, 5338base cover: 08356 EE40608 68"H end-of-run trimsurface: fabric, 5338base cover: 0835Junctions1 EE40639 68"H X-junctiontop cap: fabric, 53382 EE40622 68"H T-junctionstop cap: fabric, 5338trim: fabric, 5338base cover: 0835Worksurfaces4 EEW2545LRL 25"D x 45"W laminate radius-edgeworksurfaces w/lock: 28702 EEW2545LRL 25"D x 45"W laminate radius-edgeworksurfaces: 2870w/E91RR6 grommets, rear right: 66552 EEW2545LRL 25"D x 45"W laminate radius-edgeworksurfaces: 2870w/E91RL4 grommets, rear left: 66552 EE69113 laminate panel-supported endpanels, left hand: 28702 EE69319 laminate panel-supported endpanels, right hand: 28704 EEWC2545LR 25"D x 45"W laminate cornerworksurfaces: 2870w/E91F1 grommet, front center: 66558 EEC25RS 25" shared cantilevers1 ctn 98767 carton cord reelsStorage4 EE30293 24"D x 15"W x 27"H laminatefile/file pedestals: 28704 EE30499 24"D x 15"W x 27"H laminatebox/box/file pedestals: 28708 EE51802 16"D x 45"W x 19 1 ⁄2"H laminateoverhead storage cabinets: 2870Lighting8 LSB36K 37" Utility task lightWiring and Cabling1 ctn E90153 line 1 duplex receptacles: 60001 ctn E90160 line 2 duplex receptacles: 60001 ctn E90177 line 3 duplex receptacles: 60001 ctn E91147 line 4 simplex receptacles: 60001 E90098 base power-in8 E91817 18 1 ⁄2"H vertical wire managers,fabric: 5612..Elective ElementsTransitional Specification Guide 111

Specification Guidelines for Vertical Fabric Applications.The standard warpdirection of 66"W fabricsvaries depending on thefabric being used and theheight of the panel. Thetable on the next pagedetails the current standards.Steelcase is not responsiblefor charges associatedwith replacementor reupholstery ofpanel surfaces due toincorrect specifications.66" FabricWidthWarp vertical meansthe height dimension of thepanel is parallel to the warpof the fabric.66" FabricWidthWarp horizontal meansthe height dimension of thepanel is perpendicular tothe warp of the fabric.66" FabricWidthPanel HeightTackboardHeightPanelHeightWarp DirectionWarp DirectionWarp DirectionFabric on 75 1 ⁄2"H panelscannot be applied warp horizontalbecause the heightof the panel is greater thanthe width of the fabric..The combination of tallpanels (75 1 ⁄2"H with warpvertical) with short panels(68"H or less high with warphorizontal) will result in thefabric patterns running inopposite directions. Fabriccoveredtop caps are alwaysparallel to panel surface.To remedy this situation,the following optionsare available:• Use non-directional fabric.• Use fabrics that havestandard warp verticaldirection.• Specify warp verticaldirection on fabrics thatare standard warphorizontal.Tip: If you require warpvertical and it is not thestandard, you must specifythe warp vertical option.cSee page 113 forStandard warp directions forElective Elementspanels..Warp direction on shortpanels can be specifiedvertical to match tall panels.But tall panels (75 1 ⁄2"H orhigher) cannot be specifiedhorizontal.HorizontalstandardVerticalspecifiedWarp direction of top capsis always parallel to the fabricdirection of the panel or junction.You cannot specify warpdirection on any top cap..Fabric Direction Decision Process1Does your installationcombine fabric-coveredpanels 75 1 /2"H or higher,with shorter panels?YES2Are any of the selectedfabrics directional?cSee next page.YES3Are the directionalfabrics warp vertical onall panel sizes?cSee next page.NO4You may want to specify“warp vertical” option onall panels that are lessthan 75 1 /2"H and onrelated componentsincluding:• junctions• end-of-run trim• in-line change-ofheighttrim• shortened top caps• top power-in• cable drop box• vertical wire managerTip: Not every installationrequires that all panels havethe same fabric direction.You may not have to specifymatching fabric directions ontall and short panels,• if they are not going to beused together, or• if you like the appearanceof contrasting fabricdirections.Tip: You may want to specifyfabric direction if you are tryingto match existing panels.NONOYESDone. You don’tneed to take anyspecial steps.Done. You don’tneed to take anyspecial steps.Done. You don’tneed to take anyspecial steps..112 Transitional Specification Guide

Specification Guidelines forVertical Fabric Applications.Application TopicsException: Fabric warpdirection cannot be alteredfrom standard on Tackboards.Customer’s OwnMaterial YardageRequirementsPre-approved fabrics areavailable. To determine ifthe fabric you want is on thepre-approved list, call aCOM Consultant at616.246.9822.Surface MaterialsRepresentatives arealso available to answeryour questions and to provideclarification. They canalso help with situationswhere you are using fabricsunder 66"W. Call616.246.9822.For further informationregarding COM fabrics,refer to the SteelcaseSurface Materials ReferenceManual (S1359).Additional fabric isrequired to accommodateflaws, wrinkles, and otherimperfections.PriceNo additional cost tospecify warp direction.How to SpecifyYou must specify warpdirection when you needto depart from the standard.Elective Elements panelsallow this option to beselected electronically.On non-electronic orders,add a written specificationto each panel to indicatenon-standard warpdirections.For example:EE1156760 1 ⁄2"H x 36"W tackableacoustical panelsside 1: fabric B800 (G220Etude) with warp vertical.side 2: fabric B801 (G221Antante) with warp vertical.Standard Warp Directions for Elective Elements Panels and TackboardsFabric Standard Panel Height38"H 45 1 ⁄2"H 53"H 60 1 ⁄2"H 68"H 75 1 ⁄2"H 83"H TackboardsAcadia D H H H H H N.A. N.A. HAbacus D H H H H H N.A. N.A. HAmiranté D V V V V V V V HAshanti D V V V V V V V HAshanti Reverse D V V V V V V V HBariolage D H H H H H V V HBelgrade ND H H H H H V V HBellaRose D H H H H H N.A. N.A. HBoccie D H H H H H V V HBouquet D H H H H H N.A. N.A. HCordial D V V V V V V V HCornice D H H H H H N.A. N.A. HEmbrasure D H H H H H N.A. N.A. HFirenze D H H H H H V V HFirenze Reverse D H H H H H V V HFresco D H H H H H V V HMartinique D V V V V V V V HMilano D H H H H H V V HRacquets D H H H H H N.A. N.A. HRegatta ND H H H H H V V HWilshire D V V V V V V V HD = DirectionalND = Non-directionalH = Warp horizontalV = Warp verticalFor Designtex Graded-In Cutting Direction, see Surface Materials Reference Manual...Elective ElementsTransitional Specification Guide 113

Guidelines for Using New Panels with Old Panels.Elective Elementspanels were enhancedin June 1991 to offerimproved cable managementcapabilities, tostreamline installation, andto expand choices. Usingthese current panels in conjunctionwith panels orderedbetween March 1988 andJune 1991 is possible if youfollow the guidelines on thispage.Tip: Panels produced beforeMarch 1988 are not compatiblewith either of the panelsdescribed on this page.What’s the difference?The main differencesbetween old panels (producedbetween March 1988and June 1991) and newpanels (produced after June1991) are:• Reveal separates thepanel surface from thebase cover on new panels• Panel surface is slightlyshorter on new panels• Base cover is slightlytaller on new panels..NewRevealConnections are possiblebetween old and newpanels. But reveal on newpanels create a slight visualdifference.Tip: You may want to usethem only in separate areas.Visual differences, suchas the reveal, are noticeableto careful observers.NewNewOldOldOldTop caps cannot be transferredbetween new and oldpanels..End-of-run trim cannotbe transferred between newand old panels.Panel surfaces cannotbe transferred between newand old panels. Specialextended-size panelsurfaces are available toallow new panels to matchold panels but the revealcannot function for cablerouting.NewNewNewOldOldOldBase covers cannot betransferred between newand old panels..NewPowerways cannot betransferred between newand old panels.NewOldOldJunction posts can betransferred between newand old panels. Visual differenceslike those that arevisible when old and newpanels are combined arenoticeable to carefulobservers...114 Transitional Specification Guide

SpecifyingElective ElementsPanelsWhen ordering panelsfor use with other ElectiveElements panels orderedbetween March 1988 andJune 1991, refer toGuidelines for Using NewPanels with Old Panels.cPage 114Panels9201 Polished Chrome Option on Panel andJunction Base Covers 116Tackable Acoustical Panels 118Transparent Panels 122Related ProductsJunctions for Panels of the Same Height 124Junctions for Varying-Height Panels 128End-of-Run Trim 140In-Line Change-of-Height Trim 141Shortened Top Caps 142Panel Brackets 143Panel Wiring and Cabling 144Vertical Wire Managers 150Metal Storage AccessoriesConvenience Tray 151Reference Shelf 151Elective ElementsTransitional Specification Guide 115

9201 Polished Chrome Option on Panel and JunctionBase Covers GStandard IncludescSee Elective Elements Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.Required to SpecifycSee Elective Elements Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.Options Price Required to Specify9201 Polished • Tackable acoustical panel +$42 Specify with 9201 Polished Chrome baseChrome base cover GG covers.• Transparent panel base cover GG +$42 Specify with 9201 Polished Chrome basecovers.• Base covers on L- and T-junctions No cost Specify with 9201 Polished Chrome basefor panels of the same height Gcovers.• Base covers on L- and T-junctions No cost Specify with 9201 Polished Chrome basefor varying-height panels Gcovers.• End-of-run trim base cover G No cost Specify with 9201 Polished Chrome basecovers.116 GG= Scheduled to beG = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification Guidedeleted June 17, 2005 Last order entry November 18, 2005

9201 Polished ChromeOption on Panel andJunction Base CoversElective ElementsTransitional Specification Guide 117

Tackable Acoustical Panels GGcNeed help?Product details,page 72Standard Includes• Panel with two surfaces: vertical surface fabricprice group 1• Radius-edge top cap: all vertical surface fabricprice groups• Two base covers with receptacle knockouts:all paint price groupsException: 20"W and 25"W base covers haveno knockouts.• Attachment mechanismRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Color number for surface 13 Color number for surface 24 Fabric color number for top cap5 Paint color number for base covers6 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Tip: Wood surfaces arenon-tackable and cannotaccommodate panelsupportedcomponents.Options Price Required to SpecifySurfacePanel surfaceMaterials • Fabric price group 1 No cost Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 2 +$ 16 per Specify fabric color number.surface• Fabric price group 3 +$ 40 per Specify fabric color number.surface• Fabric price group 4 +$ 64 per Specify fabric color number.surface• Fabric price group 5 +$100 per Specify fabric color number.surface• Fabric price group COM +$ 15 per cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.surface• Wood panel surfaces Prices at right Specify wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood panel Prices at right cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.surfaceFabric direction• Warp vertical on directional fabrics No cost Specify with warp vertical.cPage 112Radius-edge top cap• Wood radius-edge top cap +$ 87 Specify with radius-edge wood top cap andselect wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood +$ 12 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.radius-edge top capSquare-edge top cap• Vertical surface fabric on square- No cost Specify with square-edge fabric top cap andedge top capselect fabric color number.• Wood square-edge top cap +$ 87 Specify with square-edge wood top cap andselect wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood +$ 12 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.square-edge top capShortened Radius-edge shortened top capTop Cap • Vertical surface fabric on radius- No cost Specify with radius-edge fabric shortenededge shortened top cap:top cap and select fabric color number.• Wood radius-edge shortened +$ 87 Specify with radius-edge wood shortenedtop captop cap and select wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood +$ 12 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.radius-edge shortened top capSquare-edge shortened top cap• Vertical surface fabric on square- No cost Specify with square-edge fabric shortenededge shortened top captop cap and select fabric color number.• Wood square-edge shortened +$ 87 Specify with square-edge wood shortenedtop captop cap and select wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood +$ 12 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.square-edge shortened top capBase • Antique Bronze +$ 73 Specify with 9230 Antique Bronze base covers.CoverscOptions continued on next page118 GG= Scheduled to beTransitional Specification Guidedeleted June 17, 2005

Tackable Acoustical PanelsTip: 20"W and 25"W panelswill have pass-throughpowerways and their basecovers will have no receptacleknockouts.cOptions continued from previous pageOptions Price Required to SpecifyElectricalFactory-installed powerwaycPage 80 • Powerway in 30"W and wider +$161 Specify with power.panels and pass-through powerwayin 20"W and 25"W panels.Chicago base covers• For use with Chicago junction box No cost Specify with Chicago base covers.Tip: For wood both panelsurfaces, multiply the optionprice by two and add it tothe base price.Specification InformationDWidth DStyle DBase DOptions DStyle DBase DOptionsd dNumber dPrice d(Add $ per surface dNumber dPrice d(Add $ per surfaced d d dto Base Price) d d dto Base Price)d d d d d d dd d d dWood dCustomiz d d dWood dCustomizd d d dSurface dStain d d dSurface dStain38"H 45 1 ⁄2"H20" EEP3820 G G $378 +$152 +$24 EEP4520 G G $423 +$173 +$4125" EEP3825 G G $408 +$160 +$41 EEP4525 G G $461 +$181 +$4130" EEP3830 G G $501 +$168 +$41 EEP4530 G G $532 +$189 +$4135" EEP3835 G G $546 +$177 +$41 EEP4535 G G $585 +$197 +$6036" EEP3836 G G $560 +$185 +$41 EEP4536 G G $600 +$205 +$6042" EEP3842 G G $594 +$193 +$60 EEP4542 G G $634 +$213 +$6045" EEP3845 G G $636 +$201 +$60 EEP4545 G G $680 +$221 +$6060" EEP3860 GG $774 N.A. N.A. EEP4560 GG $827 N.A. N.A.d d d d d d d d d53"H 60 1 ⁄2"H20" EEP5320 G G $472 +$193 +$41 EEP6020 G G $492 +$213 +$4125" EEP5325 G G $517 +$201 +$41 EEP6025 G G $542 +$221 +$6030" EEP5330 G G $566 +$209 +$60 EEP6030 G G $594 +$229 +$6035" EEP5335 G G $617 +$217 +$60 EEP6035 G G $651 +$238 +$6036" EEP5336 G G $634 +$225 +$60 EEP6036 G G $670 +$246 +$6042" EEP5342 G G $674 +$233 +$60 EEP6042 G G $711 +$254 +$8445" EEP5345 G G $723 +$242 +$84 EEP6045 G G $759 +$262 +$8460" EEP5360 GG $880 N.A. N.A. EEP6060 GG $924 N.A. N.A.d d d d d d d d dElective ElementsTransitional Specification Guide GG= Scheduled to becTackable Acoustical Panels, continued 119deleted June 17, 2005

Tackable Acoustical Panels, continuedcNeed help?Product details,page 72Standard Includes• Panel with two surfaces: vertical surface fabricprice group 1• Radius-edge top cap: all vertical surface fabricprice groups• Two base covers with receptacle knockouts:all paint price groupsException: 20"W and 25"W base covers haveno knockouts.• Attachment mechanismRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Color number for surface 13 Color number for surface 24 Fabric color number for top cap5 Paint color number for base covers6 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Tip: Wood surfaces arenon-tackable and cannotaccommodate panelsupportedcomponents.Options Price Required to SpecifySurfacePanel surfaceMaterials • Fabric price group 1 No cost Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 2 +$ 16 per Specify fabric color number.surface• Fabric price group 3 +$ 40 per Specify fabric color number.surface• Fabric price group 4 +$ 64 per Specify fabric color number.surface• Fabric price group 5 +$100 per Specify fabric color number.surface• Fabric price group COM +$ 15 per cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.surface• Wood panel surfaces Prices at right Specify wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood panel Prices at right cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.surfaceFabric direction• Warp vertical on directional fabrics No cost Specify with warp vertical.cPage 112Radius-edge top cap• Wood radius-edge top cap +$ 87 Specify with radius-edge wood top cap andselect wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood +$ 12 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.radius-edge top capSquare-edge top cap• Vertical surface fabric on square- No cost Specify with square-edge fabric top cap andedge top capselect fabric color number.• Wood square-edge top cap +$ 87 Specify with square-edge wood top cap andselect wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood +$ 12 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.square-edge top capShortened Radius-edge shortened top capTop Cap • Vertical surface fabric on radius- No cost Specify with radius-edge fabric shortenededge shortened top cap:top cap and select fabric color number.• Wood radius-edge shortened +$ 87 Specify with radius-edge wood shortenedtop captop cap and select wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood +$ 12 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.radius-edge shortened top capSquare-edge shortened top cap• Vertical surface fabric on square- No cost Specify with square-edge fabric shortenededge shortened top captop cap and select fabric color number.• Wood square-edge shortened +$ 87 Specify with square-edge wood shortenedtop captop cap and select wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood +$ 12 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.square-edge shortened top capBase • Antique Bronze +$ 73 Specify with 9230 Antique Bronze base covers.CoverscOptions continued on next page120 Transitional Specification Guide

Tackable Acoustical PanelsTip: 20"W and 25"W panelswill have pass-throughpowerways and their basecovers will have no receptacleknockouts.cOptions continued from previous pageOptions Price Required to SpecifyElectricalFactory-installed powerwaycPage 80 • Powerway in 30"W and wider +$161 Specify with power.panels and pass-through powerwayin 20"W and 25"W panels.Chicago base covers• For use with Chicago junction box No cost Specify with Chicago base covers.Tip: For wood both panelsurfaces, multiply the optionprice by two and add it tothe base price.Tip: On panels that are75 1 ⁄2"H or 83"H, the warpdirection of fabric is vertical.If you want shorter adjacentpanels to match, you mayneed to specify their fabricwarp direction vertical.cSee page 112 for VerticalFabric Applications.Specification InformationDWidth DStyle DBase DOptions DStyle DBase DOptionsd dNumber dPrice d(Add $ per surface dNumber dPrice d(Add $ per surfaced d d dto Base Price) d d dto Base Price)d d d d d d dd d d dWood dCustomiz d d dWood dCustomizd d d dSurface dStain d d dSurface dStain68"H 75 1 ⁄2"H20" EEP6820 G G $515 +$233 +$ 41 EEP7520 G G $543 +$254 +$ 6025" EEP6825 G G $567 +$242 +$ 60 EEP7525 G G $593 +$262 +$ 6030" EEP6830 G G $623 +$250 +$ 60 EEP7530 G G $654 +$270 +$ 6035" EEP6835 G G $687 +$258 +$ 84 EEP7535 G G $717 +$278 +$ 8436" EEP6836 G G $704 +$266 +$ 84 EEP7536 G G $735 +$286 +$ 8442" EEP6842 G G $746 +$274 +$ 84 EEP7542 G G $799 +$294 +$10745" EEP6845 G G $797 +$282 +$107 EEP7545 G G $853 +$302 +$10760" EEP6860 GG $973 N.A. N.A.d d d d d d d d d83"H20" EEP8320 G G $568 +$274 +$ 6025" EEP8325 G G $626 +$282 +$ 6030" EEP8330 G G $684 +$290 +$ 8435" EEP8335 G G $749 +$298 +$10736" EEP8336 G G $766 +$307 +$10742" EEP8342 G G $848 +$315 +$10745" EEP8345 GG $907 +$323 +$107d d d d d d d d dElective ElementsTransitional Specification Guide GG= Scheduled to be121deleted June 17, 2005

Transparent Panels GGTip: All fabric price groupshave the same price on thepanels.Tip: Components cannot besupported by transparentpanels.cNeed help?Product details,page 72Standard Includes• Panel insert: clear tempered glass• Two frame surfaces: all vertical surface fabricprice groups• Radius-edge top cap: all vertical surface fabricprice groups• Two base covers with receptacle knockouts:all paint price groupsException: 25"W base covers have no knockouts.• Attachment mechanismRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Glass color number for panel insert3 Fabric color number for frame surface 14 Fabric color number for frame surface 25 Fabric color number for top cap6 Paint color number for base covers7 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options Price Required to SpecifySurfacePanel insertMaterials • Solar bronze glass insert +$100 Specify glass color 6502 Solar Bronze.Fabric direction• Warp vertical on directional fabrics No cost Specify with warp vertical.cPage 112Radius-edge top cap• Wood radius-edge top cap +$ 87 Specify with radius-edge wood top cap andselect wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood +$ 12 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.radius-edge top capSquare-edge top cap• Vertical surface fabric on square- No cost Specify with square-edge fabric top cap andedge top capselect fabric color number.• Wood square-edge top cap +$ 87 Specify with square-edge wood top cap andselect wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood +$ 12 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.square-edge top capBase • Antique Bronze +$ 73 Specify with 9230 Antique Bronze baseCoverscovers.Tip: 25"W panels will havepass-through powerwaysand their base coverswill have no receptacleknockouts.cPage 78ElectricalFactory-installed powerwaycPage 80 • Powerway in 30"W and wider +$161 Specify with power.panels and pass-through powerwayin 25"W panels.Chicago base covers• For use with Chicago junction box No cost Specify with Chicago base covers.Related • Junctions cPages 124–139Products • End-of-run trim cPage 140• Panel wiring and cabling cPage 144122 GG= Scheduled to beTransitional Specification Guidedeleted June 17, 2005

Transparent PanelsSpecification InformationTip: On panels that are75 1 ⁄2"H or 83"H, the warpdirection of fabric is vertical.If you want shorter adjacentpanels to match, you mayneed to specify their fabricwarp direction vertical.cSee page 112 for VerticalFabric Applications.DWidth DStyle DBased dNumber dPriced d d68"H Panels25" EEPST6825 G G $120230" EEPST6830 G G $133035" EEPST6835 G G $146145" EEPST6845 GG $1693d d d75 1 ⁄2"H Panels25" EEPST7525 G G $126330" EEPST7530 G G $139535" EEPST7535 G G $152645" EEPST7545 GG $1810d d d83"H Panels25" EEPST8325 G G $132630" EEPST8330 G G $146135" EEPST8335 G G $159345" EEPST8345 GG $1929d d dElective ElementsTransitional Specification Guide GG= Scheduled to be123deleted June 17, 2005

L-Junctions for Panels of the Same Height GStandard IncludesRequired to Specify2Joins two panels of thesame height at 90°.431cNeed help?Product details,page 74• Two-way radius-edge top cap: all vertical surfacefabric price groups• Two full-height trim pieces: all vertical surfacefabric price groups• Base cover: all paint price groups1 Style number2 Paint color number for base cover !3 Fabric color number for full-height trimpiece @4 Fabric color number for full-height trimpiece #5 Fabric color number for top cap $6 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Tip: Specifying electronically,you will see these componentslisted as:! BASE@ CVR1-FUL# CVR2-FUL$ TOP-CAPOptions Price Required to SpecifySurfaceFabric directionMaterials • Warp vertical on directional fabrics No cost Specify with warp vertical.cPage 112Radius-edge top cap• Wood radius-edge top cap +$70 Specify with radius-edge wood top cap andselect wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood +$ 7 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.radius-edge top capSquare-edge top cap• Vertical surface fabric on square- No cost Specify with square-edge fabric top cap andedge top capselect fabric color number.• Wood square-edge top cap +$70 Specify with square-edge wood top cap andselect wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood +$ 7 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.square-edge top capFull-height trim pieces• Wood +$48 each Specify with wood full-height trim pieces andselect wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood No cost cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.Base covers• Antique Bronze No cost Specify with 9230 Antique Bronze basecovers.Specification InformationDHeight DStyle DBased dNumber dPriced d d38" EE40213 G $20145 1 ⁄2" EE40316 G $21553" EE40419 G $22260 1 ⁄2" EE40512 G $23668" EE40615 G $245Tip: On panels and junctionsthat are 75 1 ⁄2"H or 83"H, thewarp direction of the fabric isvertical. If you want shorterjunctions or shorter adjacentpanels to match, you mayneed to specify their fabricwarp direction vertical.cSee page 112 for VerticalFabric Applications.75 1 ⁄2" EE40718 G $25783" EE40811 G $271d d d124 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

T-Junctions for Panels of the Same Height GT-Junctions for Panelsof the Same HeightStandard IncludesRequired to Specify321cNeed help?Product details,page 74• Three-way radius-edge top cap: all verticalsurface fabric price groups• One full-height trim piece: all vertical surfacefabric price groups• Base cover: all paint price groups1 Style number2 Paint color number for base cover !3 Fabric color number for full-height trimpiece @4 Fabric color number for top cap #5 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Joins two panels in line toone panel of the sameheight at 90°.Tip: Specifying electronically,you will see these componentslisted as:! BASE@ CVR1-FUL# TOP-CAPOptions Price Required to SpecifySurfaceFabric directionMaterials • Warp vertical on directional fabrics No cost Specify with warp vertical.cPage 112Radius-edge top cap• Wood radius-edge top cap +$70 Specify with radius-edge wood top cap andselect wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood +$ 7 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.radius-edge top capSquare-edge top cap• Vertical surface fabric on square- No cost Specify with square-edge fabric top cap andedge top capselect fabric color number.• Wood square-edge top cap +$70 Specify with square-edge wood top cap andselect wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood +$ 7 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.square-edge top capFull-height trim piece• Wood +$48 Specify with wood full-height trim piece andselect wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood No cost cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.Base covers• Antique Bronze No cost Specify with 9230 Antique Bronze basecovers.Tip: On panels and junctionsthat are 75 1 ⁄2"H or 83"H, thewarp direction of the fabric isvertical. If you want shorterjunctions or shorter adjacentpanels to match, you mayneed to specify their fabricwarp direction vertical.cSee page 112 for VerticalFabric Applications.Specification InformationDHeight DStyle DBased dNumber dPriced d d38" EE40220 G $18145 1 ⁄2" EE40323 G $19253" EE40426 G $19860 1 ⁄2" EE40529 G $20868" EE40622 G $21675 1 ⁄2" EE40725 G $22683" EE40828 G $242d d dElective ElementsTransitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List125Last order entry November 18, 2005

X-Junctions for Panels of the Same Height GStandard IncludesRequired to Specify1cNeed help?Product details,page 74• Four-way radius-edge top cap: all verticalsurface fabric price groups1 Style number2 Fabric color number for top cap !3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Joins four panels of thesame height at 90°.Tip: Specifying electronically,you will see these componentslisted as:! TOP-CAPOptions Price Required to SpecifySurfaceRadius-edge top capMaterials • Wood radius-edge top cap +$70 Specify with radius-edge wood top cap andselect wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood +$ 7 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.radius-edge top capSquare-edge top cap• Vertical surface fabric on square- No cost Specify with square-edge fabric top cap andedge top capselect fabric color number.• Wood square-edge top cap +$70 Specify with square-edge wood top cap andselect wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood +$ 7 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.square-edge top capSpecification InformationDHeight DStyle DBased dNumber dPriced d d38" EE40237 G $14845 1 ⁄2" EE40330 G $15653" EE40433 G $16160 1 ⁄2" EE40536 G $16768" EE40639 G $17475 1 ⁄2" EE40732 G $18283" EE40835 G $200d d d126 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

X-Junctions for Panelsof the Same HeightElective ElementsTransitional Specification Guide 127

L-Junctions for Varying-Height Panels GStandard IncludesRequired to Specify3Joins low panel to highpanel at 90°.5241cNeed help?Product details,page 74• One-way radius-edge top cap: all vertical surfacefabric price groups• Change-of-height trim piece: all vertical surfacefabric price groups• Two full-height trim pieces: all vertical surfacefabric price groups• Base cover: all paint price groups1 Style number2 Paint color number for base cover !3 Fabric color number for change-of-heighttrim piece @4 Fabric color number for full-heighttrim piece #5 Fabric color number for full-heighttrim piece $6 Fabric color number for top cap %7 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Tip: Specifying electronically,you will see these componentslisted as:! BASE@ CVR1-COH# CVR2-FUL$ CVR3-FUL% TOP-CAPOptions Price Required to SpecifySurfaceFabric directionMaterials • Warp vertical on directional fabrics No cost Specify with warp vertical.cPage 112Radius-edge top cap• Wood radius-edge top cap +$60 Specify with radius-edge wood top cap andselect wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood +$ 7 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.radius-edge top capSquare-edge top cap• Vertical surface fabric on square- No cost Specify with square-edge fabric top cap andedge top capselect fabric color number.• Wood square-edge top cap +$60 Specify with square-edge wood top cap andselect wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood +$ 7 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.square-edge top capChange-of-height trim piece• Wood No cost Specify with wood change-of-height trimpiece and select wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood No cost cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.Full-height trim pieces• Wood +$48 each Specify with wood full-height trim piecesand select wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood No cost cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.Base covers• Antique Bronze No cost Specify with 9230 Antique Bronze basecovers.128 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

L-Junctions forVarying-Height PanelsSpecification InformationDLower DHigher DStyle DBasedPanel dPanel dNumber dPricedHeight dHeight d dd d d d38" 45 1 ⁄2" EE40299 G $23638" 53" EE40244 G $24638" 60 1 ⁄2" EE40251 G $25638" 68" EE40268 G $265Tip: On panels and junctionsthat are 75 1 ⁄2"H or 83"H, thewarp direction of the fabric isvertical. If you want shorterjunctions or shorter adjacentpanels to match, you mayneed to specify their fabricwarp direction vertical.cSee page 112 for VerticalFabric Applications.38" 75 1 ⁄2" EE40275 G $27645 1 ⁄2" 53" EE40392 G $24645 1 ⁄2" 60 1 ⁄2" EE40347 G $25945 1 ⁄2" 68" EE40354 G $26645 1 ⁄2" 75 1 ⁄2" EE40361 G $27745 1 ⁄2" 83" EE40378 G $28953" 60 1 ⁄2" EE40495 G $25653" 68" EE40440 G $26653" 75 1 ⁄2" EE40457 G $27553" 83" EE40464 G $28760 1 ⁄2" 68" EE40598 G $26760 1 ⁄2" 75 1 ⁄2" EE40543 G $27960 1 ⁄2" 83" EE40550 G $28968" 75 1 ⁄2" EE40656 G $27868" 83" EE40646 G $29175 1 ⁄2" 83" EE40781 G $291d d d dElective ElementsTransitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List129Last order entry November 18, 2005

T-Junctions for Varying-Height Panels G2Joins two low panels to onehigh panel at 90°.Standard Includes5 cNeed help?Product details,page 74• One-way radius-edge top cap: all vertical surfacefabric price groups• Two change-of-height trim pieces: all vertical4surface fabric price groups• Full-height trim piece: all vertical surface fabric3price groups• Base cover: all paint price groups1Required to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for base cover !3 Fabric color number for change-of-heighttrim piece @4 Fabric color number for full-heighttrim piece #5 Fabric color number for change-of-heighttrim piece $6 Fabric color number for top cap %7 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Tip: Specifying electronically,you will see these componentslisted as:! BASE@ CVR1-COH# CVR2-FUL$ CVR3-COH% TOP-CAPOptions Price Required to SpecifySurfaceFabric directionMaterials • Warp vertical on directional fabrics No cost Specify with warp vertical.cPage 112Radius-edge top cap• Wood radius-edge top cap +$60 Specify with radius-edge wood top cap andselect wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood +$ 7 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.radius-edge top capSquare-edge top cap• Vertical surface fabric on square- No cost Specify with square-edge fabric top cap andedge top capselect fabric color number.• Wood square-edge top cap +$60 Specify with square-edge wood top cap andselect wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood +$ 7 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.square-edge top capChange-of-height trim pieces• Wood No cost Specify with wood change-of-height trimpieces and select wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood No cost cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.Full-height trim piece• Wood +$48 Specify with wood full-height trim pieceand select wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood No cost cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.Base covers• Antique Bronze No cost Specify with 9230 Antique Bronze basecovers.130 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

T-Junctions forVarying-Height PanelsSpecification InformationDLower DHigher DStyle DBasedPanel dPanel dNumber dPricedHeight dHeight d dd d d d38" 45 1 ⁄2" EE42332 G $22638" 53" EE42040 G $23638" 60 1 ⁄2" EE42057 G $24338" 68" EE42064 G $251Tip: On panels and junctionsthat are 75 1 ⁄2"H or 83"H, thewarp direction of the fabric isvertical. If you want shorterjunctions or shorter adjacentpanels to match, you mayneed to specify their fabricwarp direction vertical.cSee page 112 for VerticalFabric Applications.38" 75 1 ⁄2" EE42071 G $26045 1 ⁄2" 53" EE43333 G $23545 1 ⁄2" 60 1 ⁄2" EE43041 G $24645 1 ⁄2" 68" EE43058 G $25245 1 ⁄2" 75 1 ⁄2" EE43065 G $26145 1 ⁄2" 83" EE43072 G $27253" 60 1 ⁄2" EE44334 G $24253" 68" EE44042 G $25253" 75 1 ⁄2" EE44059 G $25953" 83" EE44066 G $27060 1 ⁄2" 68" EE43335 G $25160 1 ⁄2" 75 1 ⁄2" EE45043 G $26260 1 ⁄2" 83" EE45050 G $27168" 75 1 ⁄2" EE46051 G $26068" 83" EE46044 G $27375 1 ⁄2" 83" EE47083 G $272d d d dElective ElementsTransitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List131Last order entry November 18, 2005

T-Junctions for Varying-Height Panels G23Joins one low and one highpanel in line to one lowpanel at 90°.Tip: Specifying electronically,you will see these componentslisted as:! BASE@ CVR1-COH# CVR2-COH$ CVR3-FUL% TOP-CAP541cNeed help?Product details,page 74Standard Includes• One-way radius-edge top cap: all vertical surfacefabric price groups• Two change-of-height trim pieces: all verticalsurface fabric price groups• Full-height trim piece: all vertical surface fabricprice groups• Base cover: all paint price groupsRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for base cover !3 Fabric color number for change-of-heighttrim piece @4 Fabric color number for change-of-heighttrim piece #5 Fabric color number for full-heighttrim piece $6 Fabric color number for top cap %7 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options Price Required to SpecifySurfaceFabric directionMaterials • Warp vertical on directional fabrics No cost Specify with warp vertical.cPage 112Radius-edge top cap• Wood radius-edge top cap +$60 Specify with radius-edge wood top cap andselect wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood +$ 7 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.radius-edge top capSquare-edge top cap• Vertical surface fabric on square- No cost Specify with square-edge fabric top cap andedge top capselect fabric color number.• Wood square-edge top cap +$60 Specify with square-edge wood top cap andselect wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood +$ 7 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.square-edge top capChange-of-height trim pieces• Wood No cost Specify with wood change-of-height trimpieces and select wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood No cost cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.Full-height trim piece• Wood +$48 Specify with wood full-height trim pieceand select wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood No cost cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.Base covers• Antique Bronze No cost Specify with 9230 Antique Bronze basecovers.132 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

T-Junctions forVarying-Height PanelsSpecification InformationDLower DHigher DStyle DBasedPanel dPanel dNumber dPricedHeight dHeight d dd d d d38" 45 1 ⁄2" EE42334 G $22638" 53" EE42349 G $23638" 60 1 ⁄2" EE42356 G $24338" 68" EE42363 G $251Tip: On panels and junctionsthat are 75 1 ⁄2"H or 83"H, thewarp direction of the fabric isvertical. If you want shorterjunctions or shorter adjacentpanels to match, you mayneed to specify their fabricwarp direction vertical.cSee page 112 for VerticalFabric Applications.38" 75 1 ⁄2" EE42370 G $26045 1 ⁄2" 53" EE43034 G $23545 1 ⁄2" 60 1 ⁄2" EE43340 G $24645 1 ⁄2" 68" EE43357 G $25245 1 ⁄2" 75 1 ⁄2" EE43364 G $26145 1 ⁄2" 83" EE43371 G $27253" 60 1 ⁄2" EE44035 G $24253" 68" EE44341 G $25253" 75 1 ⁄2" EE44358 G $25953" 83" EE44365 G $27060 1 ⁄2" 68" EE45036 G $27060 1 ⁄2" 75 1 ⁄2" EE45342 G $26260 1 ⁄2" 83" EE45359 G $27168" 75 1 ⁄2" EE46350 G $26068" 83" EE46343 G $27375 1 ⁄2" 83" EE47384 G $272d d d dElective ElementsTransitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List133Last order entry November 18, 2005

T-Junctions for Varying-Height Panels G2Joins one low and one highpanel in line to one highpanel at 90°.Tip: Specifying electronically,you will see these componentslisted as:! BASE@ CVR1-COH# CVR2-FUL$ TOP-CAP431cNeed help?Product details,page 74Standard Includes• Two-way radius-edge top cap: all verticalsurface fabric price groups• Change-of-height trim piece: all vertical surfacefabric price groups• Full-height trim piece: all vertical surface fabricprice groups• Base cover: all paint price groupsRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for base cover !3 Fabric color number for change-of-heighttrim piece @4 Fabric color number for full-heighttrim piece #5 Fabric color number for top cap $6 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options Price Required to SpecifySurfaceFabric directionMaterials • Warp vertical on directional fabrics No cost Specify with warp vertical.cPage 112Radius-edge top cap• Wood radius-edge top cap +$60 Specify with radius-edge wood top cap andselect wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood +$ 7 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.radius-edge top capSquare-edge top cap• Vertical surface fabric on square- No cost Specify with square-edge fabric top cap andedge top capselect fabric color number.• Wood square-edge top cap +$60 Specify with square-edge wood top cap andselect wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood +$ 7 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.square-edge top capChange-of-height trim piece• Wood No cost Specify with wood change-of-height trimpiece and select wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood No cost cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.Full-height trim piece• Wood +$48 Specify with wood full-height trim pieceand select wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood No cost cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.Base covers• Antique Bronze No cost Specify with 9230 Antique Bronze basecovers.134 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

T-Junctions forVarying-Height PanelsSpecification InformationDLower DHigher DStyle DBasedPanel dPanel dNumber dPricedHeight dHeight d dd d d d38" 45 1 ⁄2" EE42136 G $21338" 53" EE42246 G $22238" 60 1 ⁄2" EE42253 G $22838" 68" EE42260 G $236Tip: On panels and junctionsthat are 75 1 ⁄2"H or 83"H, thewarp direction of the fabric isvertical. If you want shorterjunctions or shorter adjacentpanels to match, you mayneed to specify their fabricwarp direction vertical.cSee page 112 for VerticalFabric Applications.38" 75 1 ⁄2" EE42277 G $24545 1 ⁄2" 53" EE43137 G $22245 1 ⁄2" 60 1 ⁄2" EE43247 G $23145 1 ⁄2" 68" EE43254 G $23745 1 ⁄2" 75 1 ⁄2" EE43261 G $24645 1 ⁄2" 83" EE43278 G $26053" 60 1 ⁄2" EE44138 G $23253" 68" EE44248 G $24153" 75 1 ⁄2" EE44255 G $24853" 83" EE44262 G $26260 1 ⁄2" 68" EE45139 G $23760 1 ⁄2" 75 1 ⁄2" EE45249 G $24760 1 ⁄2" 83" EE45256 G $25968" 75 1 ⁄2" EE46257 G $24668" 83" EE46240 G $26175 1 ⁄2" 83" EE47287 G $261d d d dElective ElementsTransitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List135Last order entry November 18, 2005

T-Junctions for Varying-Height Panels G21Joins two high panels in lineto one low panel at 90°.Tip: Specifying electronically,you will see these componentslisted as:! BASE@ CVR1-FUL# CVR2-COH$ TOP-CAP43cNeed help?Product details,page 74Standard Includes• In-line radius-edge top cap: all vertical surfacefabric price groups• Change-of-height trim piece: all vertical surfacefabric price groups• Full-height trim piece: all vertical surface fabricprice groups• Base cover: all paint price groupsRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for base cover !3 Fabric color number for full-heighttrim piece @4 Fabric color number for change-of-heighttrim piece #5 Fabric color number for top cap $6 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options Price Required to SpecifySurfaceFabric directionMaterials • Warp vertical on directional fabrics No cost Specify with warp vertical.cPage 112Radius-edge top cap• Wood radius-edge top cap +$60 Specify with radius-edge wood top cap andselect wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood +$ 7 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.radius-edge top capSquare-edge top cap• Vertical surface fabric on square- No cost Specify with square-edge fabric top cap andedge top capselect fabric color number.• Wood square-edge top cap +$60 Specify with square-edge wood top cap andselect wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood +$ 7 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.square-edge top capChange-of-height trim piece• Wood No cost Specify with wood change-of-height trimpiece and select wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood No cost cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.Full-height trim piece• Wood +$48 Specify with wood full-height trim pieceand select wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood No cost cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.Base covers• Antique Bronze No cost Specify with 9230 Antique Bronze basecovers.136 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

T-Junctions forVarying-Height PanelsSpecification InformationDLower DHigher DStyle DBasedPanel dPanel dNumber dPricedHeight dHeight d dd d d d38" 45 1 ⁄2" EE42435 G $21338" 53" EE42143 G $22238" 60 1 ⁄2" EE42150 G $22838" 68" EE42167 G $236Tip: On panels and junctionsthat are 75 1 ⁄2"H or 83"H, thewarp direction of the fabric isvertical. If you want shorterjunctions or shorter adjacentpanels to match, you mayneed to specify their fabricwarp direction vertical.cSee page 112 for VerticalFabric Applications.38" 75 1 ⁄2" EE42174 G $24545 1 ⁄2" 53" EE43436 G $22245 1 ⁄2" 60 1 ⁄2" EE43144 G $23145 1 ⁄2" 68" EE43151 G $23745 1 ⁄2" 75 1 ⁄2" EE43168 G $24645 1 ⁄2" 83" EE43175 G $26053" 60 1 ⁄2" EE44437 G $22853" 68" EE44145 G $23753" 75 1 ⁄2" EE44152 G $24453" 83" EE44169 G $25860 1 ⁄2" 68" EE45438 G $23860 1 ⁄2" 75 1 ⁄2" EE45146 G $24860 1 ⁄2" 83" EE45153 G $26068" 75 1 ⁄2" EE46154 G $24768" 83" EE46147 G $26275 1 ⁄2" 83" EE47180 G $262d d d dElective ElementsTransitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List137Last order entry November 18, 2005

X-Junctions for Varying-Height Panels GStandard IncludesRequired to Specify132cNeed help?Product details,page 74• In-line radius-edge top cap: all vertical surfacefabric price groups• Two change-of-height trim pieces: all verticalsurface fabric price groups1 Style number2 Fabric color number for change-of-heighttrim piece !3 Fabric color number for change-of-heighttrim piece @4 Fabric color number for top cap #5 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Joins two high panels in lineto two low panels in line at90°.Tip: Specifying electronically,you will see these componentslisted as:! CVR1-COH@ CVR2-COH# TOP-CAPOptions Price Required to SpecifySurfaceFabric directionMaterials • Warp vertical on directional fabrics No cost Specify with warp vertical.cPage 112Radius-edge top cap• Wood radius-edge top cap +$60 Specify with radius-edge wood top cap andselect wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood +$ 7 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.radius-edge top capSquare-edge top cap• Vertical surface fabric on square- No cost Specify with square-edge fabric top cap andedge top capselect fabric color number.• Wood square-edge top cap +$60 Specify with square-edge wood top cap andselect wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood +$ 7 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.square-edge top capChange-of-height trim pieces• Wood No cost Specify with wood change-of-height trimpieces and select wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood No cost cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.Specification InformationDLower DHigher DStyle DBase DLower DHigher DStyle DBasedPanel dPanel dNumber dPrice dPanel dPanel dNumber dPricedHeight dHeight d d dHeight dHeight d dd d d d d d d d38" 45 1 ⁄2" EE42734 G $190 53" 60 1 ⁄2" EE44736 G $20138" 53" EE42442 G $199 53" 68" EE44444 G $21038" 60 1 ⁄2" EE42459 G $202 53" 75 1 ⁄2" EE44451 G $21538" 68" EE42466 G $209 53" 83" EE44468 G $228Tip: On panels and junctionsthat are 75 1 ⁄2"H or 83"H, thewarp direction of the fabric isvertical. If you want shorterjunctions or shorter adjacentpanels to match, you mayneed to specify their fabricwarp direction vertical.cSee page 112 for VerticalFabric Applications.38" 75 1 ⁄2" EE42473 G $216 60 1 ⁄2" 68" EE45737 G $20945 1 ⁄2" 53" EE42735 G $198 60 1 ⁄2" 75 1 ⁄2" EE45445 G $21845 1 ⁄2" 60 1 ⁄2" EE43443 G $205 60 1 ⁄2" 83" EE45452 G $22945 1 ⁄2" 68" EE43450 G $210 68" 75 1 ⁄2" EE46453 G $21645 1 ⁄2" 75 1 ⁄2" EE43467 G $217 68" 83" EE46446 G $23145 1 ⁄2" 83" EE43474 G $230 75 1 ⁄2" 83" EE47481 G $230d d d d d d d d138 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

X-Junctions for Varying-Height Panels GX-Junctions forVarying-Height PanelsStandard IncludesRequired to Specify21cNeed help?Product details,page 74• Three-way radius-edge top cap: all verticalsurface fabric price groups• Change-of-height trim piece: all vertical surfacefabric price groups1 Style number2 Fabric color number for change-of-heighttrim piece !3 Fabric color number for top cap @4 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Joins two high panels in lineto one low panel and onehigh panel in line at 90°.Tip: Specifying electronically,you will see these componentslisted as:! CVR1-COH@ TOP-CAPOptions Price Required to SpecifySurfaceFabric directionMaterials • Warp vertical on directional fabrics No cost Specify with warp vertical.cPage 112Radius-edge top cap• Wood radius-edge top cap +$60 Specify with radius-edge wood top cap andselect wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood +$ 7 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.radius-edge top capSquare-edge top cap• Vertical surface fabric on square- No cost Specify with square-edge fabric top cap andedge top capselect fabric color number.• Wood square-edge top cap +$60 Specify with square-edge wood top cap andselect wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood +$ 7 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.square-edge top capChange-of-height trim piece• Wood No cost Specify with wood change-of-height trimpiece and select wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood No cost cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.Tip: On panels and junctionsthat are 75 1 ⁄2"H or 83"H, thewarp direction of the fabric isvertical. If you want shorterjunctions or shorter adjacentpanels to match, you mayneed to specify their fabricwarp direction vertical.cSee page 112 for VerticalFabric Applications.Specification InformationDLower DHigher DStyle DBase DLower DHigher DStyle DBasedPanel dPanel dNumber dPrice dPanel dPanel dNumber dPricedHeight dHeight d d dHeight dHeight d dd d d d d d d d38" 45 1 ⁄2" EE42538 G $177 53" 60 1 ⁄2" EE44530 G $18738" 53" EE42545 G $185 53" 68" EE44547 G $19538" 60 1 ⁄2" EE42552 G $187 53" 75 1 ⁄2" EE44554 G $20038" 68" EE42569 G $194 53" 83" EE44561 G $21638" 75 1 ⁄2" EE42576 G $201 60 1 ⁄2" 68" EE45531 G $19645 1 ⁄2" 53" EE43539 G $185 60 1 ⁄2" 75 1 ⁄2" EE45548 G $20445 1 ⁄2" 60 1 ⁄2" EE43546 G $190 60 1 ⁄2" 83" EE45555 G $21845 1 ⁄2" 68" EE43553 G $195 68" 75 1 ⁄2" EE46556 G $20345 1 ⁄2" 75 1 ⁄2" EE43560 G $202 68" 83" EE46549 G $22045 1 ⁄2" 83" EE43577 G $218 75 1 ⁄2" 83" EE47588 G $220d d d d d d d dElective ElementsTransitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List139Last order entry November 18, 2005

End-of-Run Trim GcNeed help?Product details,page 75Standard Includes• Radius-edge end-of-run trim: all vertical surfacefabric price groups• Base cover: all paint price groupsRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Fabric color number for end-of-run trim3 Paint color number for base cover4 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options Price Required to SpecifySurfaceFabric directionMaterials • Warp vertical on directional fabrics No cost Specify with warp vertical.cPage 112Radius-edge end-of-run trim• Wood radius-edge end-of-run trim +$69 Specify with radius-edge wood end-of-runtrim and select wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood +$14 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.radius-edge end-of-run trimSquare-edge end-of-run trim• Vertical surface fabric on square- No cost Specify with square-edge fabric end-of-runedge end-of-run trimtrim and select fabric color number.• Wood square-edge end-of-run trim +$69 Specify with square-edge wood end-of-runtrim and select wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood +$14 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.square-edge end-of-run trimBase cover• Antique Bronze No cost Specify with 9230 Antique Bronze basecover.Specification InformationDHeight DStyle DBased dNumber dPriced d d38" EE40206 G $ 8545 1 ⁄2" EE40309 G $ 9653" EE40402 G $10160 1 ⁄2" EE40505 G $ 9668" EE40608 G $100Tip: On panels and end-ofruntrim that are 75 1 ⁄2"H or83"H, the warp direction ofthe fabric is vertical. If youwant shorter adjacent panelsand their end-of-run trimto match, you may need tospecify their fabric warpdirection vertical.cSee page 112 for VerticalFabric Applications.75 1 ⁄2" EE40701 G $10683" EE40804 G $119d d d140 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

In-Line Change-of-Height Trim GIn-LineChange-of-Height TrimcNeed help?Product details,page 75Standard Includes• In-line change-of-height trim: all vertical surfacefabrics or woodRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Color number for in-line change-of-heighttrim3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Tip: On panels 75 1 ⁄2"H or83"H, the warp direction ofthe fabric is vertical. If youwant the in-line change-ofheighttrim or shorter adjacentpanels to match, youmay need to specify theirfabric warp directionvertical.cSee page 112 for VerticalFabric Applications.Options Price Required to SpecifySurface • Customiz stain on wood No cost cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.MaterialsFabric direction• Warp vertical on directional fabric No cost Specify with warp vertical.cPage 112Specification InformationDHeight DStyle DPrice DStyle DPriced dNumber d dNumber dd d d d dRadius EdgeFabric-CoveredSquare EdgeFabric-Covered7 1 ⁄2" EE40031 G $ 38 EE41032 G $ 3815" EE40048 G $ 45 EE41049 G $ 4522 1 ⁄2" EE40055 G $ 53 EE41056 G $ 5330" EE40062 G $ 57 EE41063 G $ 5737 1 ⁄2" EE40079 G $ 66 EE41070 G $ 66WoodWood7 1 ⁄2" EE40938 G $ 92 EE41135 G $ 9115" EE40945 G $ 99 EE41142 G $ 9822 1 ⁄2" EE40952 G $108 EE41159 G $10730" EE40969 G $112 EE41166 G $11237 1 ⁄2" EE40976 G $121 EE41173 G $121d d d d dElective ElementsTransitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List141Last order entry November 18, 2005

Shortened Top Caps G(field installed)Tip: Shortened top capsallow space for top powerinor cable drop box.Tip: For factory-installedshortened top cap, add “withshortened top cap” to thepanel style number.Tip: On panels 75 1 ⁄2"H or83"H, the warp direction ofthe fabric is vertical. If youwant shortened top cap orshorter adjacent panels tomatch, you may need tospecify their fabric warpdirection vertical.cSee page 112 for VerticalFabric Applications.cNeed help?Product details,page 75Standard IncludesRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Color number for shortened top caps3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options Price Required to SpecifySurface • Customiz stain on wood Prices below cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.MaterialsFabric direction• Warp vertical on directional fabric No cost Specify with warp vertical.cPage 112Specification InformationDHeight DStyle DBase DOption DStyle DBase DOptiond dNumber dPrice d(Add $ to dNumber dPrice d(Add $ tod d d dBase Price) d d dBase Price)d d d d d d dd d d dCustomiz d d dCustomizd d d dStain d d dStainRadius EdgeFabric-CoveredSquare EdgeFabric-Covered20" EE30278 G $ 34 N.A. EE31279 G $ 34 N.A.25" EE30209 G $ 41 N.A. EE31203 G $ 41 N.A.30" EE30216 G $ 45 N.A. EE31217 G $ 45 N.A.35" EE30223 G $ 51 N.A. EE31224 G $ 51 N.A.36" EE30230 G $ 53 N.A. EE31231 G $ 53 N.A.42" EE30261 G $ 55 N.A. EE31262 G $ 55 N.A.45" EE30247 G $ 57 N.A. EE31248 G $ 57 N.A.60" EE30254 G $ 68 N.A. EE31255 G $ 68 N.A.Wood• Shortened top cap: all vertical surface fabricsor wood.20" EE30371 G $102 +$11 EE31372 G $ 98 +$1125" EE30302 G $110 +$11 EE31303 G $104 +$1130" EE30319 G $113 +$12 EE31310 G $109 +$1235" EE30326 G $120 +$12 EE31327 G $114 +$1236" EE30333 G $122 +$12 EE31334 G $116 +$1242" EE30364 G $124 +$13 EE31365 G $119 +$1345" EE30340 G $126 +$13 EE31341 G $121 +$1360" EE30357 G $137 +$14 EE31358 G $131 +$14d d d d d d d142 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

Panel BracketsPanel BracketsWall-Attachment Brackets GStandard Includes• Upright: black paint only• Attachment hardwareRequired to SpecifyStyle numberSpecification InformationDHeight DStyle DPriced dNumber dd d d38" EEWAB38 G $48Tip: Wall-attachment bracketwill be concealed by panel.45 1 ⁄2" EEWAB45 G $5753" EEWAB53 G $6660 1 ⁄2" EEWAB60 G $7168" EEWAB68 G $7975 1 ⁄2" EEWAB75 G $8683" EEWAB83 G $93d d dAnchor BracketStandard Includes• Anchor bracket: black paint onlyRequired to SpecifyStyle numberTip: Anchor bracket attachesto panel’s leveling glide andsecures the panel to thefloor to prevent movement.Specification InformationDStyledNumberdDPricedd98769 $19ddElective ElementsTransitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List143Last order entry November 18, 2005

Panel Wiring and CablingBase Power-InscNeed help?Product details,page 76Standard Includes• Base power-in assembly: all paint price groups• 6'-long, 1 ⁄2"-diameter conduit, if selected:black vinyl onlyRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for base power-inassemblycSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Specification InformationDStyledNumberdDPriceddBase Power-In with ConduitE90098 $186ddNew York Base Power-In without ConduitE90108 $186ddBreakaway Base Power-IncNeed help?Product details,page 76Standard Includes• Breakaway base power-in assembly: all paintprice groups• 6'-long, 1 ⁄2"-diameter conduit, if selected:black vinyl onlyRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for base power-inassemblycSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Specification InformationDStyledNumberdDPriceddBase Power-In with ConduitE91240 $186dd144 Transitional Specification Guide

Panel Wiring and CablingTop Power-Ins GcNeed help?Product details,page 77Standard Includes• Top power-in: all paint price groups• Ceiling trim plate: white paint onlyRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for top power-in3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options Price Required to SpecifySurface • Vertical surface fabric Prices below Specify fabric color number.MaterialscSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.• Warp vertical on directional fabric No cost Specify with warp vertical.cPage 112Tip: Shortened top capsmust be used with toppower-in.cPage 142Tip: On panels that are75 1 ⁄2"H or 83"H, the warpdirection of the fabric is vertical.If you want a fabriccoveredtop power-in orshorter adjacent panels tomatch, you may need tospecify their fabric warpdirection vertical.cSee page 112 for VerticalFabric Applications.Specification InformationDPanel DStyle DBase DOptiondHeight dNumber dPrice d(Add $ tod d d dBase Price)d d d dd d d dFabricdd d dcovered38" EE90232 G $395 +$7245 1 ⁄2" EE90335 G $370 +$6853" EE90438 G $344 +$6360 1 ⁄2" EE90445 G $321 +$5968" EE90634 G $295 +$5575 1 ⁄2" EE90665 G $270 +$5283" EE90830 G $246 +$47d d d dElective ElementsTransitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling ListcPanel Wiring and Cabling, continued 145Last order entry November 18, 2005

Panel Wiring and Cabling, continuedPowerways (field installed) GcNeed help?Product details,page 80Standard Includes• PowerwayRequired to SpecifyStyle numberTip: For factory-installedpowerways, add “withpower” to the panel stylenumber.Specification InformationDPanel DStyle DPricedWidth dNumber dd d d4-Circuit (3+D) Powerways30" E95017B G $16135" E95024B G $16136" E95031B G $16142" E95062B G $16145" E95048B G $16160" E95055B G $161Pass-Through Powerways20" E95079B G $16125" E95000B G $161d d dChicago Junction BoxcNeed help?Product details,page 103Standard Includes• Carton of six junction boxesRequired to SpecifyStyle numberTip: Remember to orderChicago base covers onpanel.Specification InformationDStyledNumberdDPriceddE91934 $134dd146 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

Panel Wiring and CablingChicago Panel-to-Panel Connectors GcNeed help?Product details,page 103Standard Includes• Carton of six panel-to-panel connectorassembliesRequired to SpecifyStyle numberSpecification InformationDStyledNumberdDPriceddIn-Line Panel-to-Panel Connector AssemblyE90256 G $17590° Panel-to-Panel Connector AssemblyE90263 G $175ddElective ElementsTransitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling ListcPanel Wiring and Cabling, continued 147Last order entry November 18, 2005

Panel Wiring and Cabling, continuedCable Drop Boxes G2314Tip: You must use a shortenedtop cap with the cabledrop box.Tip: Specifying electronically,you will see these componentslisted as:! CVR1-COH@ CVR2-COH# TOP-CAP$ TRIMTip: On panels that are75 1 ⁄2"H or 83"H, the warpdirection of the fabric isvertical. If you want a cabledrop box or shorter adjacentpanels to match, you mayneed to specify their fabricwarp direction vertical.cSee page 112 for VerticalFabric Applications.cNeed help?Product details,page 82Standard Includes• One-way radius-edge top cap: all verticalsurface fabrics• Two change-of-height covers: all vertical surfacefabrics• Trim piece: all vertical surface fabricsRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Fabric color number for change-of-heightcover !3 Fabric color number for change-of-heightcover @4 Fabric color number for top cap #5 Fabric color number for trim $3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options Price Required to SpecifySurfaceFabric directionMaterials • Warp vertical on directional fabric No cost Specify with warp vertical.cPage 112Radius-edge top cap• Wood radius-edge top cap +$60 Specify with wood radius-edge top capand select wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood +$ 7 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.Square-edge top cap• Vertical surface fabric No cost Specify with square-edge fabric top capand select fabric color number.• Wood square-edge top cap +$60 Specify with wood square-edge top capand select wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood +$ 7 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.Change-of-height covers• Wood No cost Specify with wood change-of-heightcover(s) and select wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood No cost cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.Trim piece• Wood +$56 Specify with wood trim piece and selectwood color number.• Customiz stain on wood No cost cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.Specification InformationDHeight DStyle DBased dNumber dPriced d d7 1 ⁄2" EE40196A G $13315" EE40141A G $15022 1 ⁄2" EE40158A G $15730" EE40165A G $16137 1 ⁄2" EE40172A G $169d d d148 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

Panel Wiring and CablingDuplex Powerway ReceptaclescNeed help?Product details,page 78Standard Includes• Carton of six powerway receptacles: plasticRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Plastic color number: 6000 Black,6001 Coffee, 6655 Warm White, or6682 CobblestoneSpecification InformationDFits DConnects DStyle DPriced dWith dNumber dd d d dDuplex-size openings Line 1 E90153 $150Duplex-size openings Line 2 E90160 $150Duplex-size openings Line 3 E90177 $150d d d dSimplex Powerway Receptacles with Dedicated CircuitcNeed help?Product details,page 78Standard Includes• Carton of six powerway receptacles: plasticRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Plastic color number: 6000 Black,6001 Coffee, 6655 Warm White, or6682 CobblestoneSpecification InformationDFits DConnects DStyle DPriced dWith dNumber dd d d dDuplex-size openings Line 4 E91147 $198d d d dElective ElementsTransitional Specification Guide 149

Vertical Wire Managers GcNeed help?Product details,page 88Standard Includes• Vertical wire manager: plasticRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Plastic color number3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options Price Required to SpecifySurface • All vertical surface fabrics +$15 Select fabric color number.MaterialscSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Fabric direction• Warp vertical on directional fabric No cost Specify with warp vertical.cPage 112Tip: On panels that are75 1 ⁄2"H or 83"H the warpdirection of fabric is vertical.If you want a fabric-coveredvertical wire manager orshorter adjacent panels tomatch, you may need tospecify their fabric warpdirection vertical.cSee page 112 for VerticalFabric Applications.Specification InformationDHeight DStyle DBased dNumber dPriced d d16" E91831 G $1818 1 ⁄2" E91817 G $1848" E91800 G $29d d d150 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

Metal Storage Accessories GMetal Storage AccessoriesConvenience Tray GStandard Includes• Convenience tray: black plastic onlyRequired to SpecifyStyle numberSpecification InformationDDimensions DStyle DPricedD W H dNumber dd d d7 1 ⁄4" 12 3 ⁄4" 1 1 ⁄2" 99465 G $23d d d dReference Shelf GStandard Includes• Reference shelf: black plastic only• Shelf protector: clear plasticRequired to SpecifyStyle numberSpecification InformationDDimensions DStyle DPricedD W H dNumber dd d d9 1 ⁄2" 13 3 ⁄16" 3 ⁄8" 2256P G $26d d d dElective ElementsTransitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List151Last order entry November 18, 2005

152 Transitional Specification Guide

I-Line Moveable WallsUnderstanding I-LineMoveable Walls GPricesContact your Steelcase dealer forcurrent prices.Statement of Line 154UnderstandingSolid Wall Panels 160Glass Wall Panels 164Butt-Hinged Frames and Door Leaves 168Pivot-Hinged Frames and Door Leaves 172Door Swing Orientation Choices 176Slider Doors 178Ceiling Tracks 182Mini Ends 184Wall Channels 186Wall Channel Flexibility 189Cut Panels 190Adapters 192Posts 194Feature Strip Calculator 196Application TopicsCenterline Versus Interior Dimension Planning 198Planning Guide for Unitized Bases 200Using Floor Track Extenders with Continuous Base Trim 206Wiring and CablingHow to Power a Panel 208Overview of Powered Panels 212New York City Power 214Wiring Schematics 216How to Calculate Power Needs 217Harness Length Calculations 218I-LineMoveable WallsTransitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List153Last order entry November 18, 2005

I-Line Moveable WallsI-Line Moveable WallsStatement of Line4"H UnitizedBase4"H ContinuousBase5"H UnitizedBase5"H ContinuousBase4"H UnitizedBase4"H ContinuousBase5"H UnitizedBase5"H ContinuousBaseSolid Wall PanelsHeights 8'0" to 10'0"in one-inch increments6"W •8"W • M20"W • M24"W • M30"W • M36"W • M40"W • M42"W • M48"W • M60"W • McUnderstanding, page 160cSpecifying, page 220Glass Wall PanelsHeights 8'0" to 10'0"in one-inch increments6"W •8"W • M20"W • M24"W • M30"W • M36"W • M40"W • M42"W • M48"W • M60"W • McUnderstanding, page 164cSpecifying, page 221M = Available in modular widths, cPages 220–221154 Transitional Specification Guide

I-Line Moveable WallsI-Line Moveable WallsStatement of Line4"H UnitizedBase4"H ContinuousBase5"H UnitizedBase5"H ContinuousBase4"H UnitizedBase4"H ContinuousBase5"H UnitizedBase5"H ContinuousBaseGlass Wall Panels with Four Equal Divided LitesHeights 8'0" to 10'0"in one-inch increments6"W •8"W • M20"W • M24"W • M30"W • M36"W • M40"W • M42"W • M48"W • M60"W • McUnderstanding, page 164cSpecifying, page 222Glass Wall Panels with Four Divided Lites*Heights 8'0" to 10'0"in one-inch increments6"W •8"W • M20"W • M24"W • M30"W • M36"W • M40"W • M42"W • M48"W • M60"W • M*Transom-aligned top litecUnderstanding, page 164cSpecifying, page 223I-LineMoveable WallsM = Available in modular widths, cPages 222–223Transitional Specification Guide cI-Line Moveable Walls Statement of Line, continued 155

I-Line Moveable WallsI-Line Moveable Walls Statement of Line, continued4"H UnitizedBase4"H ContinuousBase5"H UnitizedBase5"H ContinuousBase4"H UnitizedBase4"H ContinuousBase5"H UnitizedBase5"H ContinuousBaseGlass Wall Panels with Two Divided Lites*Heights 8'0" to 10'0"in one-inch increments6"W •8"W • M20"W • M24"W • M30"W • M36"W • M40"W • M42"W • M48"W • M60"W • M*Transom-aligned top litecUnderstanding, page 164cSpecifying, page 224Clerestory Wall PanelsHeights 8'0" to 10'0"in one-inch increments6"W •8"W • M20"W • M24"W • M30"W • M36"W • M40"W • M42"W • M48"W • M60"W • McUnderstanding, page 164cSpecifying, page 225M = Available in modular widths, cPages 224–225156 Transitional Specification Guide

I-Line Moveable WallsI-Line Moveable WallsStatement of LineFull-Height Transom Full-HeightTransomPairPairFull-HeightTransomFull-HeightPairTransomPairButt-Hinged Door FramesHeights 8'0" to 10'0"in one-inch increments40"W single •76"W pair •cUnderstanding, page 168cSpecifying, page 228Pivot-Hinged Door FramesHeights 8'0" to 10'0"in one-inch increments40"W withoutswitch cutout •42"W withswitch cutout •80"W withoutswitch cutout •cUnderstanding, page 172cSpecifying, pages 231–232Full-HeightTransomFull-HeightPairTransomPairFull-HeightTransomFull-HeightPairTransomPairButt-Hinged Door LeavesHeight36"W (35 13 ⁄16" actual) 8'0" to 10'0" in one-inch incrementsSolid singlefor full-height door frame7'0" for transom door frame72"W (71 5 ⁄8" actual) 8'0" to 10'0" in one-inch incrementsSolid pairfor full-height door frame7'0" for transom door frame36"W (35 13 ⁄16" actual) 8'0" to 9'0" in one-inch incrementsGlass singlefor full-height door frame7'0" for transom door framecUnderstanding, page 168cSpecifying, pages 229–230Pivot-Hinged Door LeavesHeight36"W (37 13 ⁄16" actual*) 8'0" to 10'0" in one-inch incrementsSolid singlefor full-height door frame7'0" for transom door frame77 1 ⁄2"W (75 5 ⁄8" actual) 8'0" to 10'0" in one-inch incrementsSolid pairfor full-height door frame7'0" for transom door frame36"W (37 13 ⁄16" actual*) 8'0" to 9'0" in one-inch incrementsGlass singlefor full-height door frame7'0" for transom door frameTip: For pivot-hinged pair of doors, the active leaf will always be 37 3 ⁄16"W.Width of inactive door leaf will be 39 13 ⁄16".*36 3 ⁄8" with switch in framecUnderstanding, page 172cSpecifying, pages 233–236I-LineMoveable WallsTransitional Specification Guide 157

I-Line Moveable WallsI-Line Moveable Walls Statement of Line, continuedRecessedOverlappingSlider Doors*Heights 8'0" to 10'0"in one-inch increments80"W •96"W •*Lites in slider door are equal.cUnderstanding, page 178cSpecifying, page 241Ceiling Tracks*Length120" to cut on site*Finished end, L, and V ceiling tracks are also available.cUnderstanding, page 182cSpecifying, page 242Continuous Base TrimLength 4"H 5"H120" to cut on site • •Tip: Continuous base trim is not required on panels with unitized base trim.cUnderstanding, page 161cSpecifying, page 244Mini EndsHeights 8'0" to 10'0"in one-inch increments1 7 ⁄8"W to 3"W •2 7 ⁄8"W to 4"W •4 1 ⁄2"W to 5 1 ⁄2"W •cUnderstanding, page 184cSpecifying, page 246Wall ChannelsHeights 8'0" to 10'0"in one-inch increments1" •2 1 ⁄4" •4" •cUnderstanding, pages 186–189cSpecifying, page 247158 Transitional Specification Guide

I-Line Moveable WallsI-Line Moveable WallsStatement of LineIn-lineFinished endTwo-way LThree-way TTwo-way L squareTwo-way L radiusThree-way TCutpanelFour-way XPanel endFour-way XTwo-way VThree-way YAdaptersFinished endTwo-way LThree-way TFour-way XPanel endcUnderstanding, page 192cSpecifying, page 248Heights 8'0" to 10'0"in one-inch increments•••••PostsIn-lineTwo-way L squareTwo-way L radiusThree-way TFour-way XTwo-way VThree-way YcUnderstanding, page 194cSpecifying, page 250Heights 8'0" to 10'0"in one-inch increments•••••••I-LineMoveable WallsTransitional Specification Guide 159

I-Line Moveable WallsSolid Wall Panels.I-Line solid wall panelscreate floor-to-ceiling walls,prefabricated to the heightand width dimensions youspecify. These panels, whichoffer power and communicationcapability, can be relocatedto respond to changingneeds.cSpecifying, page 220Cable-routing channels,one inside each solid paneledge, conceal wires andcables vertically routed.Integral slotted verticalsallow for panelsupportedfurniture. Integralslotted verticals start 1 3 /8"above the base and run toa height of 83 3 /8" for a4" base and 84 3 /8" for a5" base.Adjustable levelersallow panels to be installedon uneven floors.Acoustic packing,ordered separately, increasesacoustic performance.cPage 245Recessed or overlappingceiling track isavailable.Post extensions areavailable in two versions toaccommodate both types ofceiling tracks.Feature strip joins panelsto posts, adapters, andother adjacent components.Surface is steel, availablein paint, fabric, or verticalsurface vinyl.Tip: Vertical surface vinylis available only on panels48"W or smaller.Power and communicationoutlets can belocated in the panel faceat desk or ADA heightand/or in the panel base.Receptacles are orderedseparately.Floor track anchors baseof panel to floor, withoutfasteners.Base trim is availableunitized or continuous..Product DetailsPanel height can bespecified from 8'0"H to10'0"H, in one-inch increments,to accommodatedifferent ceiling heights.Tip: Specify ceiling height ofyour installation and componentwill be fabricated toallow for ceiling track.+/- 1 /2"+/- 1 /2"8'0"H to10'0"HCeiling track and floortrack each allow 1 ⁄2" ofvertical adjustment to accommodatevariations in fieldconditions..160 Transitional Specification Guide

I-Line Moveable WallsSolid Wall Panels.60"W6"WPanel widths range from6"W to 60"W.WidthWidth of panel is measuredto center of jointbetween two panels.1 1 /2"Modular46 1 /2"panel48" 12'0"Modular46 1 /2"panel1 1 /2"Modular panels usedwith adapters allowcenterline planning. In theexample above, two modularpanels allow the distancebetween the centerline ofthe two parallel walls toremain at 12'0"..96"48" 48"Standard panels96"46 1 /2" 46 1 /2"Modular panelsModular panel widthsare slightly smaller (1 1 ⁄2"less) than regular panelwidths so that when a cornercondition is created, theoverall dimension remainsunchanged. All other featuresof modular panelsare the same as standardpanels.Two versions of basetrim are available—continuousand unitized.Continuous base trim,ordered separately, is availablein 10' lengths. It runsalong multiple panels tocreate a uniform look. Forlonger runs, multiple basetrim segments can be usedadjacent to each other..Unitized base trim,available as an option, issegmented into units thatmatch the panel width. Thisallows panels to be relocatedeasily. 5"H unitizedbase trim is required toaccommodate power receptaclesinstalled in the panelbase. Panels ship withunitized base trim factoryinstalled.Mini endExtendedunitizedbaseExtended unitizedbase trim is available forpanels that are adjacent toadapters, door frames, andmini ends.cSee Planning Guide forUnitized Bases, page 200..SwapRight- and left-handversions of extendedbase trim aren’t requiredbecause installers can swapbase trim from the oppositeside of the panel (or turnthe panel around) to converta panel with the extensionon the left to a panelwith the extension on theright. If power receptaclesare specified for the baseof one side of a panel withextended base, you’llreceive an extra base coverto allow you to accommodateboth left- and righthandinstallations.4" 5"Standard floor trackaccommodates 4"H and 5"Hbase trim. Base trim that is5"H is required to acceptpower receptacles installedin the panel base.FinishedendadapterFinished end adapteris available to finish theexposed end of a run of panels.Adapter adds approximately1 1 ⁄2" to the length ofthe wall..Cut panel kit is availableto restore leveler and housingthat is removed whenpanel is cut on site. Kitincludes panel spreader tomaintain rigidity in panelface.cPage 247Side 1 Side 2SpreaderLevelerDifferent surface materialscan be applied toopposite sides of the panel.For example, you can havevinyl applied to side 1 andfabric applied to side 2.Vinyl is available on panelsthat are 48"W or smaller..I-LineMoveable WallsTransitional Specification Guide cSolid Wall Panels, continued 161

I-Line Moveable WallsSolid Wall Panels, continued.BipassCoverCeiling track bipasscover is available to concealcable or conduit routednext to a recessed ceilingtrack as the conduit travelsfrom the ceiling into a wallpanel.cPage 243Acoustical packing isavailable to improve theacoustical performance ofsolid and glass panels byfilling the space behind continuousor unitized basetrim. Acoustical ratings ashigh as 43 STC are possibleby field-cutting andinstalling acoustical packingin solid panels on site. Each120" length of acousticalpacking provides enoughmaterial to pack 30 linearfeet of panels..ConnectionsFeature strip, orderedseparately, joins panelstogether. Strip also preventslight and sound leaks whileallowing access to the integralslotted verticals. Torearrange panels, featurestrips can be removed andreused.cPage 245RecessedOverlappingCeiling track, orderedseparately, joins the top ofwall panels to the ceiling.Ceiling track is availablerecessed or overlapping.cPage 182Base trim snaps into positionat the bottom of panelsurface and above the floortrack..Integral slottedverticals accommodatepanel-supported storageand worksurface componentsat any height in 1 1 ⁄2"increments.cSee Storage ProductsSpecification Guide.Posts join panels in in-line,L-, T-, X-, V-, and Y-configurationswithout blockingaccess to integral slottedverticals.cPage 194Adapters connect panelsin L-, T-, and X-configurationswithout adding extracreep to panel dimension.Tip: Adapter blocks slottedverticals in panel edge ofsome panels.cPage 192.Mini end connects a panelor panel run to a perpendicularbuilding wall. Elementsof the mini end telescopeto allow a limited range ofdimensional adjustability.cPage 184Wall channelCut panelMini endWall channel connects apanel or cut panel to a perpendicularbuilding wall.cPage 186Solid panels can becut on site to conform tobuilding walls and ceilingdetails including sills andbulkheads.Tip: Power cannot be routedin a cut panel..Cut edges of cut panelcan be finished with fieldcutwall channel.Cut panelPanel endPanel end connects a cutpanel to another panel inline.cPage 190.162 Transitional Specification Guide

I-Line Moveable WallsSolid Wall PanelsWiring & CablingSolid I-Line panels canbe specified with factoryinstalledpowerkits. Powerkitsinclude a power blockand harness.Power block will be factoryinstalled in the panel,centered to accommodateeither power receptaclesonly or power and communicationreceptacles. Asingle power block canaccommodate receptacleson one side or both sidesof the panel.PowerreceptaclesPower andcommunicationreceptaclesWidth of panel must beadequate to accommodatecutouts. See table below forminimum widths.Power onlyDesk height, ADA height,and at base• 24"W standard panel• 30"W (nominal) modularpanelPower andCommunicationDesk height and ADA height• 30"W standard panel• 36"W (nominal) modularpanelAt base• 40"W standard panel• 42"W (nominal) modularpanelPower receptacles areordered separately andinstalled on site.cPage 252..Communication receptaclesare provided by othersand installed on site.Cutout accommodates standardNEMA-size face plate.Tip: A pull string is includedto the communication cutoutat ADA or desk height.BaseheightDeskBase34" or35"DeskheightADABase18" or19"ADAheightDeskADAReceptacles can bespecified in five differentconfigurations. Combinationsof receptacle heightsare available—desk heightplus base or ADA heightplus base. Combining deskheight and ADA height isnot possible.Tip: Base trim height determinesreceptacle heightfrom floor. For example,receptacle height of panelwith 4"H base trim is 34"H.Receptacle height of panelwith 5"H base trim is 35"H.Cutouts for receptaclescan be specified forboth sides of the panel orfor one side only. Whenspecifying cutouts in bothsides, the cutout type andlocation will be the same inboth panel faces..Unitized base trimBase height and basetrim determine if basepower receptacle locationsare available. Only panelswith 5"H unitized bases canaccommodate base powerreceptacles.Infeeds can connectpower blocks to buildingpower in the ceiling or floor.Factory-installed infeedsextend a minimum of 12'from the panel.Modular harnesses andharness-to-harnessconnectors can be usedto extend power to a powerblock from another powerblock in an adjacent panel.5".Wiring schematics areavailable to accommodate awide range of building typesand power needs. 15-ampand 20-amp systems areavailable in 4-circuit, 3+1;4-circuit, 2+2; and 3-circuitwith separate neutrals. All ofthese choices are supportedwith a system ground andisolated ground.Local electrical codesvary. Consult a qualifiedelectrical contractor orengineer for the properinstallation of electricalcomponents.New York City electricalcode requires specialinstallations of modularcomponents.cPage 214Chicago requires that allpower be hardwired in thefield. Modular power systemsare not permitted. AllI-Line panels can be hardwiredon site using conventionalelectrical components.Please contact a SteelcaseSales Resource TeamProduct Specialist for aChicago Power Bulletin orcheck the newest version ofthis specification guide publishedafter March 2003.Vertical cable routingis practical through the verticalchannel at both edgesof the solid panel.Horizontal cable routingis possible through thebase of panels..Surface MaterialsPanels• Paint• Fabric• Vertical surface vinylTip: Different surface materialscan be applied to oppositesides of the panel.Tip: Remember to designateside 1 and side 2 as appropriateto panel cutouts.Floor track• PaintBase trim• PaintFeature strip• PlasticBezel• PlasticReceptacle• PlasticApplication TopicsFeature StripCalculatorcPage 196Centerline VersusInterior DimensionPlanningcPage 198Planning Guide forUnitized BasescPage 200How to Power a PanelcPage 208Overview of PoweredPanelscPage 212Power OptionscPage 226.I-LineMoveable WallsTransitional Specification Guide 163

I-Line Moveable WallsGlass Wall Panels.I-Line glass wall panelscreate floor-to-ceiling walls,prefabricated to the heightand width dimensions youspecify. These panels, whichoffer power and communicationcapability, can be relocatedto respond to changingneeds.cSpecifying, pages 221–225Feature strip joinspanels.Factory-installed litescan be specified in a varietyof glass types.Muntins divide glass intoseparate lites.Integral slotted verticalsstart 1 3 /8" above thebase and run to a height of83 3 /8" for a 4" base and84 3 /8" for a 5" base.Adjustable levelersallow panels to be installedon uneven floors.Floor track anchors baseof panel to floor, withoutfasteners.Base trim is availableunitized or continuous.Recessed or overlappingceiling track isavailable.Post extensions areavailable in two versions toaccommodate both types ofceiling tracks.Surface of clerestorypanels is steel, availablein paint, fabric, or verticalsurface vinyl.Tip: Vertical surface vinylis available only on panels48"W or smaller.Power and communicationoutlets can belocated in the panel face atdesk or ADA height and/orin the base of a clerestorypanel. Outlets can belocated in the base of fullglasspanel..164 Transitional Specification Guide

I-Line Moveable WallsGlass Wall PanelsProduct Details+/- 1 /2"+/- 1 /2"Ceiling track and floortrack each allow 1 ⁄2" ofvertical adjustment to accom-Glass wall panelmodate variations in fieldconditions.87"87"Four equal Four divideddivided lites, transom-litesaligned top lite87"87"Glass wall panels withtransom-aligned toplite correspond to transomheightdoors.Tip: Top muntin is 2 1 ⁄4"H;other muntins are 1 1 ⁄2"H.Two divided Clerestorylites, transomalignedtop liteGlass wall panels are1 available in the following1 /2"types: one lite, four equaldivided lites, four dividedlites with transom-alignedtop lite, two divided liteswith transom-aligned toplite, and solid with glassFrameclerestory.MuntinsFour equal litesMuntins are factoryinstalledhorizontal framingelements that physicallydivide glass lites. Muntinsmatch frame colorspecified.Tip: All muntins in glasswall panels with four equaldivided lites are 1 1 ⁄2"H....Panel height can bespecified from 8'0"H to10'0"H, in one-inch increments,to accommodatedifferent ceiling heights.Tip: Specify ceiling height ofyour installation and componentwill be fabricated toallow for ceiling track.60"WPanel widths range from6"W to 60"W.Width8'0"H to10'0"HWidth of panel is measuredto center of jointbetween two panels.6"W.Modular panel widthsare slightly smaller (1 1 ⁄2"less) than regular panelwidths so that when a cornercondition is created, theoverall dimension remainsunchanged.ModularpanelModularpanel96"48" 48"Standard panels96"46 1 /2" 46 1 /2"Modular panels1 1 /2"46 1 /2"48" 12'0"46 1 /2"1 1 /2"Modular panels usedwith adapters allowcenterline planning. In theexample above, two modularpanels allow the distancebetween the centerline ofthe two parallel walls toremain at 12'0"..Two versions of basetrim are available—continuousand unitized.Continuous base trim,ordered separately, is availablein 10' lengths. It runsalong multiple panels tocreate a uniform look. Forlonger runs, multiple basetrim segments can be usedadjacent to each other.Unitized base trim,available as an option, issegmented into units thatmatch the panel width. Thisallows panels to be relocatedeasily. 5"H unitizedbase trim is required toaccommodate power receptaclesinstalled in the panelbase. Panels ship withunitized base trim factoryinstalled..I-LineMoveable WallsTransitional Specification Guide cGlass Wall Panels, continued 165

I-Line Moveable WallsGlass Wall Panels, continued.Mini endExtendedunitizedbaseExtended unitizedbase trim is available forpanels that are adjacent toadapters, door frames, andmini ends.cSee Planning Guide forUnitized Bases, page 200.SwapRight- and left-handversions of extendedbase trim aren’t requiredbecause installers can swapbase trim from the oppositeside of the panel (or turnthe panel around) to converta panel with the extensionon the left to a panelwith the extension on theright. If power receptaclesare specified for the baseof one side of a panel withextended base, you’llreceive an extra base coverto allow you to accommodateboth left- and righthandinstallations.4" 5"Standard floor trackaccommodates 4"H and 5"Hbase trim. Base trim that is5"H is required to acceptpower receptacles installedin the panel base..FinishedendadapterFinished end adapteris available to finish theexposed end of a run of panels.Adapter adds approximately1 1 ⁄2" to the length ofthe wall.Vinyl is available on panelsthat are 48"W or smaller.Acoustical packing isavailable to improve theacoustical performance ofsolid and glass panels byfilling the space behind continuousor unitized basetrim. Improved acousticalratings are possible byfield-cutting and installingacoustical packing in solidpanels on site. Each 120"length of acoustical packingprovides enough materialto pack 30 linear feet ofpanels..ConnectionsFeature strip, orderedseparately, joins panelstogether. Strip also preventslight and sound leaks whileallowing access to theintegral slotted verticals inthe clerestory panels. Torearrange panels, featurestrips can be removed andreused.cPage 245RecessedOverlappingCeiling track, orderedseparately, joins the top ofwall panels to the ceiling.Ceiling track is availablerecessed or overlapping.cPage 182Base trim snaps into positionat the bottom of panelsurface and above the floortrack..Panel-supported storageand worksurfacecomponents cannot beattached to I-Line glass wallpanels. Use solid wall orclerestory panels instead.Posts join panels in in-line,L-, T-, X-, V-, and Y-configurationswithout blockingaccess to integral slottedverticals.cPage 194Adapters connect panelsin L-, T-, and X-configurationswithout adding extracreep to panel dimension.cPage 192Mini endMini end connects a panelor panel run to a perpendicularbuilding wall.cPage 184Wiring & CablingGlass I-Line panels canbe specified with factoryinstalledpowerkits. Powerkitsinclude a power blockand harness.Power block will be factoryinstalled in the panel,centered to accommodateeither power receptaclesonly or power and communicationreceptacles. Asingle power block canaccommodate receptacleson one side or both sidesof the panel.PowerreceptaclesPower andcommunicationreceptaclesWidth of panel must beadequate to accommodatecutouts. See table below forminimum widths.Power onlyDesk height, ADA height,and at base• 24"W standard panel• 30"W (nominal) modularpanelPower andCommunicationDesk height and ADA height• 30"W standard panel• 36"W (nominal) modularpanelAt base• 40"W standard panel• 42"W (nominal) modularpanelPower receptacles areordered separately andinstalled on site.cPage 252..166 Transitional Specification Guide

I-Line Moveable WallsGlass Wall Panels.Communication receptaclesare provided by othersand installed on site.Cutout accommodates standardNEMA-size face plate.Tip: A pull string is includedto the communication cutoutat ADA or desk height.BaseheightDeskBase34" or35"DeskheightADABase18" or19"ADAheightDeskADAReceptacles can bespecified in five differentconfigurations in clerestorypanels. Receptacles can bespecified in the base only inglass panels. Combinationsof receptacle heights areavailable—desk height plusbase or ADA height plusbase. Combining deskheight and ADA height isnot possible.Tip: Base trim height determinesreceptacle heightfrom floor. For example,receptacle height of panelwith 4"H base trim is 34"H.Receptacle height of panelwith 5"H base trim is 35"H.Cutouts for receptaclescan be specified forboth sides of the panel orfor one side only. Whenspecifying cutouts in bothsides, the cutout type andlocation will be the same inboth panel faces..Unitized base trimBase height and basetrim determine if basepower receptacle locationsare available. Only panelswith 5"H unitized bases canaccommodate base powerreceptacles.Infeeds can connectpower blocks to buildingpower in the ceiling or floor.Because glass panels cannotaccommodate verticalrouting of harnessesthrough the glass portionof the panel, use adjacentsolid panels, mini ends, ordoor frames to bring powerfrom the ceiling to a powerblock in a glass panel.Modular harnesses andharness-to-harnessconnectors can be usedto extend power to a powerblock from another powerblock in an adjacent panel.5".Wiring schematics areavailable to accommodate awide range of building typesand power needs. 15-ampand 20-amp systems areavailable in 4-circuit, 3+1;4-circuit, 2+2; and 3-circuitwith separate neutrals. All ofthese choices are supportedwith a system ground andisolated ground.Local electrical codesvary. Consult a qualifiedelectrical contractor orengineer for the properinstallation of electricalcomponents.New York City electricalcode requires specialinstallations of modularcomponents.cPage 214Chicago requires that allpower be hardwired in thefield. Modular power systemsare not permitted. AllI-Line panels can be hardwiredon site using conventionalelectrical components.Please contact a SteelcaseSales Resource TeamProduct Specialist for aChicago Power Bulletin orcheck the newest version ofthis specification guide publishedafter March 2003.Vertical cable routingis practical through the verticalchannel at both edgesof clerestory panels thatfeeds up from the floor.Horizontal cable routingis possible through thebase of panels..Surface MaterialsPanel frame andmuntin• PaintClerestory panel• Paint• Fabric• Vertical surface vinylLite• Glass• Customer-specified glassalso availableFloor track• PaintBase trim• PaintFeature strip• PlasticBezel• PlasticReceptacle• Plastic.Application TopicsFeature StripCalculatorcPage 196Centerline VersusInterior DimensionPlanningcPage 198Planning Guide forUnitized BasescPage 200How to Power a PanelcPage 208Overview of PoweredPanelscPage 212Power OptionscPage 226.I-LineMoveable WallsTransitional Specification Guide 167

I-Line Moveable WallsButt-Hinged Frames and Door Leaves.I-Line doors can be usedwith I-Line panels. Doorframes and leaves must beordered separately.cSpecifying, pages 228–230Recessed or overlappingceiling track isavailable.Pair leaves can bepainted or specified withwood veneer.Inactive door leaf issecured with flush boltsthat are included with hingekit for pair doors (orderedseparately).Door frame is factoryprepped for butt hinges.Door hardware is orderedseparately.cPage 237Feature stripjoins door framesto panels, posts,or adapters.Active door leaf accommodateslatch.Post extensions areavailable in two versions toaccommodate both types ofceiling track.Single door leaves aresolid or glass. Solid leavescan be painted or specifiedwith wood veneer..168 Transitional Specification Guide

I-Line Moveable WallsButt-Hinged Frames andDoor LeavesProduct DetailsSingle and pair versionsof doors and doorframes are available.8'0"H to10'0"HDoor frames can bespecified from 8'0"H to10'0"H, in one-inch increments,to accommodatedifferent ceiling heights.Tip: Specify ceiling heightof your installation and componentwill be fabricated toallow for ceiling track.+/- 1 /2"+/- 1 /2"Ceiling track and floortrack each allow 1 ⁄2" ofvertical adjustment to accommodatevariations in fieldconditions...Full-height doorsincrease in height as thedoor frame increases.Tip: Maximum ceiling heightof glass doors is 9'0"H.87"Transom-height doorsremain 7'0"H. Transomincreases in height as thedoor frame increases..40"36"76"36"36"Width of single door frameis 40"W and accommodatesa 36"W door. Width of pairframe is 76"W and accommodatestwo 36"W doorleaves.Transom-height doorscorrespond to clerestory orglass wall panels with transom-alignedtop lite.Left-handLefthand.Right-handRighthand.Left- and right-handversions of butt-hingeddoors and door frames areavailable. Swing orientationis permanent.To determine whethera door is left or righthand, imagine yourselfstanding in the door’s framewith your back against theside of the frame wherethe door’s hinges will beattached. If the door willswing to your left, it is aleft-hand door (and frame).If it will swing to your right,it is a right-hand door (andframe).Switch cutout, availableas an option on single doorframes, will be factory-cut inthe strike jamb of the frame,on the side that matchesthe direction in which thedoor swings.Conduit is routed from theceiling or floor through thedoor jamb.SinglepolesingleswitchThreewaysingleswitchSwitchlocation forleft-handdoorSwitchlocation forright-handdoorSinglepoledoubleswitchSwitches, ordered separately,are available in threeversions—single pole singleswitch, three-way singleswitch, and single poledouble switch.cPage 240Tip: Switches are ULapproved for use in theUnited States. They are notavailable for use in Canada..I-LineMoveable WallsTransitional Specification Guide cButt-Hinged Frames and Door Leaves, continued 169

I-Line Moveable WallsButt-Hinged Frames and Door Leaves, continued.Ceiling track bipasscover is available to concealswitch conduit routednext to a recessed ceilingtrack as the conduit travelsfrom the ceiling into a doorframe.cPage 243Cylindricalpassageset orlocksetBipassCoverMortisepassageset orlocksetCutout for cylindricalpassage set or locksetis standard in butt-hingeddoor leaves. Cutout for mortisepassage set or locksetis available as an option.Order passage sets andlocksets separately.cPage 237Tip: Cutout and hardwaremust be the same for doorand door frames.Tip: Locksets and passagesets ordered from anothermanufacturer must have a1 3 ⁄8" curved strike plate.Tip: Wood doors that arespecified with hardware prepfor mortise locks will nothave faces drilled for levers,cylinders, etc. All necessaryholes in the face of the doorwill be drilled by the installer..MagneticwallstopDome-stylefloor stopScrew-inbase stopDoor stops can beordered for use with doors.Magnetic wall stop, domestylefloor stop, and screwinbase stop are available.Magnetic wall stop is foruse with painted solid orclerestory panels only.cPage 239All door openings meetADA requirements..ConnectionsFeature strip, orderedseparately, joins door framesto panels, posts, adapters,and other components,while preventing light andsound leaks. To rearrangedoors, feature strips can beremoved and reused.cPage 245RecessedOverlappingCeiling track, orderedseparately, joins the top ofdoor frames to the ceiling.Ceiling track is availablerecessed or overlapping.cPage 182Panel-supported storageand worksurfacecomponents cannot beattached to door frames.Use solid wall or clerestorypanels instead..Posts join a door frame toa panel in an L-, T-, X-, V-,and Y-configuration. T- orX-post can also be usedbetween two in-line doorframes.cPage 194Adapters connect a doorframe to a panel in an L-,T- or X-configuration. A T-adapter can also be usedbetween two in-line doorframes.cPage 192DoorframeMini endMini end connects a doorframe to a perpendicularbuilding wall.cPage 184.Wall channelDoorframeWall channel connects adoor frame to a perpendicularbuilding wall. Door framesshould not be inserted toodeeply into the wall channelbecause the wall channelwill block the swing of thedoor.cSee Wall ChannelFlexibility, page 189.Door frameExtendedunitizedbaseExtended unitized basetrim is available for panelsthat are adjacent to a doorframe.cSee Planning Guide forUnitized Bases, page 200..170 Transitional Specification Guide

Transitional Specification Guide 171..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................I-Line Moveable WallsButt-Hinged Frames andDoor LeavesI-LineMoveable WallsWiring & CablingInstallation of a switchin a door frame will limitthe ability to route a powerinfeed through the frame. Ifthe door frame has noswitch, you can route powerto the base of an adjacentglass panel.Surface MaterialsDoor frame• PaintAluminum rails andstiles on glass doorleaf• PaintSolid door leaf• Paint• Wood veneerTransom, glass doorleaf• GlassStrike plate, doorstops, and butt hinges• 9200 Satin Chrome• 9201 Polished ChromeSwitch plate• PaintFeature strip• PlasticRailStileApplication TopicsDoor Swing OrientationChoicescPage 176Feature StripCalculatorcPage 196Planning Guide forUnitized BasescPage 200

I-Line Moveable WallsPivot-Hinged Frames and Door LeavesI-Line doors can be usedwith I-Line panels. Doorframes and leaves must beordered separately.cSpecifying, pages 231–236Recessed or overlappingceiling track isavailable.Pair leaves can bepainted or specified withwood veneer.Inactive door leafDoor frame is factoryprepped for pivot hinges.Door hardware is orderedseparately.cPage 237Tip: Hardware is mostlyhidden..Feature stripjoins door framesto panels, posts,or adapters.Active door leaf accommodateslatch.Frame has a narrow(1 1 ⁄4"W) profile. Expandedframe to accommodateswitch has a 2 1 ⁄2"W profile.Post extensions areavailable in two versions toaccommodate both types ofceiling track.Single door leaves aresolid or glass. Solid leavescan be painted or specifiedwith wood veneer..172 Transitional Specification Guide

I-Line Moveable WallsPivot-Hinged Frames andDoor LeavesProduct DetailsSingle and pair versionsof doors and doorframes are available.8'0"H to10'0"HDoor frames can bespecified from 8'0"H to10'0"H, in one-inch increments,to accommodate differentceiling heights.Tip: Specify ceiling heightof your installation and componentwill be fabricated toallow for ceiling track.+/- 1 /2"+/- 1 /2"Ceiling track and floortrack each allow 1 ⁄2" ofvertical adjustment to accommodatevariations in fieldconditions...Full-height doorsincrease in height as thedoor frame increases.Tip: Maximum ceiling heightof glass doors is 9'0"H.87"Transom-height doorsremain 7'0"H. Transomincreases in height as thedoor frame increases.1 1 /4"1 1 /4"2 1 /2".40"Width of single door framewithout switch cutout is40"W and accommodates a37 3 ⁄16"W door. Width of pairframe is 80"W.42 "37 3 /16"80"39 13 /16"36 3 /8"37 3 /16"Door frame with switchcutout is 42"W andaccommodates a 36 3 ⁄8"Wdoor..Maximum swing ofdoor is 115°.Transom-height doorscorrespond to clerestory orglass wall panels with transom-alignedtop lite.Left-handpivot doorRight-handpivot door115°Pivot-hinged doors anddoor frames are nonhanded.By removing andreinstalling the strike plate,you can convert a left-handpivot door into a right-handpivot door..Left-handswingPivot-hinged doorframes with switchcutout are handed. Youcannot change the swingorientation of the doorframe in the field, althoughyou can change the swingof the door.Right-handswingLefthandRighthandTo determine whethera door is left or righthand, imagine yourselfstanding in the door’s framewith your back against theside of the frame wherethe door’s hinges will beattached. If the door willswing to your left, it is aleft-hand door (and frame).If it will swing to your right,it is a right-hand door (andframe)..I-LineMoveable WallsTransitional Specification Guide cPivot-Hinged Frames and Door Leaves, continued 173

I-Line Moveable WallsPivot-Hinged Frames and Door Leaves, continued.Switch cutout in pivothingeddoor frames isalways on the strike jambof the frame. Cutout isstandard on the side thatmatches the direction inwhich the door swings.SinglepolesingleswitchThreewaysingleswitchSwitchlocationleftSwitchlocationrightSinglepoledoubleswitchSwitches, ordered separately,are available in threeversions—single pole singleswitch, three-way singleswitch, and single poledouble switch.cPage 240Tip: Switches are ULapproved for use in theUnited States. They are notavailable for use in Canada..Ceiling track bipasscover is available to concealswitch conduit routednext to a recessed ceilingtrack as the conduit travelsfrom the ceiling into a doorframe.cPage 243Cylindricalpassageset orlocksetBipassCoverMortisepassageset orlocksetCutout for cylindricalpassage set or locksetis standard in pivot-hingeddoor leaves. Cutout andstrike plate for mortise passageset or lockset is availableas an option. Orderpassage sets and locksetsseparately.cPage 237Tip: Cutout and hardwaremust be the same for doorand door frames.Tip: Mortise locksets andpassage sets ordered fromanother manufacturer musthave a 1 1 ⁄8"flat strike plate.Tip: Wood doors that arespecified with hardware prepfor mortise locks will nothave faces drilled for levers,cylinders, etc. All necessaryholes in the face of the doorwill be drilled by the installer..MagneticwallstopDome-stylefloor stopScrew-inbase stopDoor stops can beordered for use with doors.Magnetic wall stop, domestylefloor stop, and screwinbase stop are available.Magnetic wall stop is foruse with painted solid orclerestory panels only.All door openings meetADA requirements..ConnectionsFeature strip, orderedseparately, joins door framesto panels, posts, adapters,and other components whilepreventing light and soundleaks. To rearrange doors,feature strips can beremoved and reused.cPage 245RecessedOverlappingCeiling track, orderedseparately, joins the top ofdoor frames to the ceiling.Ceiling track is availablerecessed or overlapping.cPage 182Panel-supported storageand worksurfacecomponents cannot beattached to door frames.Use solid wall or clerestorypanels instead..Posts join a door frame toa panel in an L-, T-, X-, V-,and Y-configuration. T- orX-post can also be usedbetween two in-line doorframes.cPage 194Adapters connect a doorframe to a panel in an L-,T- or X-configuration. A T-adapter can also be usedbetween two in-line doorframes.cPage 192DoorframeMini endMini end connects a doorframe to a perpendicularbuilding wall.cPage 184.174 Transitional Specification Guide

I-Line Moveable WallsPivot-Hinged Frames andDoor Leaves.Wall channelDoorframeWall channel connects adoor frame to a perpendicularbuilding wall. Door framesshould not be inserted toodeeply into the wall channelbecause the wall channelwill block the swing of thedoor.cSee Wall ChannelFlexibility, page 189.Door frameExtendedunitizedbaseExtended unitized basetrim is available for panelsthat are adjacent to a doorframe.cSee Planning Guide forUnitized Bases, page 200..Wiring & CablingPivot doorwith switchPivot doorwithout switchInstallation of a switchin a door frame will limitthe ability to route a powerinfeed through the frame.If the door frame has noswitch, you can route powerto the base of an adjacentglass panel..Surface MaterialsDoor frame• PaintRailAluminum rails andstiles on glass doorleaf• PaintSolid door leaf• Paint• Wood veneerTransom, glass doorleaf• GlassStrike plate, doorstops, and butt hinges• 9200 Satin Chrome• 9201 Polished ChromePivot hinges• 9200 Satin ChromeSwitch plate• PaintStileFeature strip• Plastic.Application TopicsDoor Swing OrientationChoicescPage 176Feature StripCalculatorcPage 196Planning Guide forUnitized BasescPage 200..I-LineMoveable WallsTransitional Specification Guide 175

I-Line Moveable WallsDoor Swing Orientation ChoicesButt-Hinged Door FramesLeft-hand swingRight-hand swingorientationorientationLeft-hand active swing Right-hand active swingorientation on active leaf orientation on active leafTip: Door frames are also available transom height..Butt-Hinged Door Frames with Switch CutoutLeft-hand swingorientation plus switchcutout optionRight-hand swingorientation plus switchcutout option.176 Transitional Specification Guide

I-Line Moveable WallsDoor Swing OrientationChoicesPivot-Hinged Door FramesLeft-hand swingorientationLeft-hand active swingorientation on active leafTip: Door frames are also available transom height..Reverse swing orientationon site at the time ofinstallationReverse swing orientationon site at the time oninstallationPivot-Hinged Door Frames with Switch CutoutLeft-hand swing orientationon door frame with switchcutoutRight hand swing orientationoption on door frame withswitch cutout.I-LineMoveable WallsTransitional Specification Guide 177

I-Line Moveable WallsSlider Doors.I-Line sliding doors canbe used with full-heightpanels. Door unit includesslider door, door frame,fixed panel, and hardware.cSpecifying, page 241Recessed or overlappingceiling track isavailable.Fascia conceals track andceiling mechanism and projectsbeyond the face ofthe wall.Fixed panel does notmove. It provides space forthe overlapping door whenit is in the open position.Base trim is availableunitized or continuous.Floor track connectsbase of slider door to floor,without fasteners.Post extensions areavailable in two versions toaccommodate both types ofceiling track.Feature strip joins sliderdoor to panels, posts, oradapters.Strike post marks theextreme limit of door’stravel.Door pull is stainless steel.Slider door slides in frontof fixed panel and is orientedto the outside of the panel..178 Transitional Specification Guide

I-Line Moveable WallsSlider DoorsProduct Details8'0"H to10'0"HSlider doors can be specifiedfrom 8'0"H to 10'0"H,in one-inch increments, toaccommodate different ceilingheights. All lites will beequal in size, regardless ofoverall door height.Tip: Specify ceiling height ofyour installation and componentwill be fabricated toallow for ceiling track.+/- 1 /2"+/- 1 /2"Ceiling track and floortrack each allow 1 ⁄2" ofvertical adjustment to accommodatevariations in fieldconditions.80"W96"WWidth of slider door is80"W or 96"W. Full openingis slightly less than half ofthe total width of slidingdoor assembly...Left-hand (OX)Slider doorRight-hand (XO)Slider doorSlider door is availableleft hand (OX) and righthand (XO).Glass lite types can bespecified individually perrow.cSee Surface Materials,in the electronic price list..FrameMuntinMuntins are factoryinstalledhorizontal framingelements that physicallydivide glass lites. Muntinsmatch frame color specified.Door lock with interiorthumb latch is availableas an option. Locks arekeyed randomly.Two versions of basetrim are available—continuousand unitized.Continuous base trim,ordered separately, is availablein 10' lengths. It runsalong multiple panels andslider doors to createa uniform look. For longerruns, multiple base trimsegments can be usedadjacent to each other.4"5".Unitized base trim,available as an option, issegmented into units thatmatch the door width. Thisallows doors to be relocatedeasily as well as matchunitized base trim on adjacentpanels.Standard floor trackaccommodates 4"H and5"H base trim..ConnectionsFeature strip, orderedseparately, joins sliderdoors to panels, posts,adapters, and other componentswhile preventinglight and sound leaks. Torearrange doors, featurestrips can be removedand reused.cPage 245RecessedOverlappingCeiling track, orderedseparately, joins the top ofdoors to the ceiling. Ceilingtrack is available recessedor overlapping.cPage 182Panel-supported storageand worksurfacecomponents cannot beattached to slider doors.Use solid wall or clerestorypanels instead..I-LineMoveable WallsTransitional Specification Guide cSlider Doors, continued 179

I-Line Moveable WallsSlider Doors, continued.Posts join a slider door toa panel in an L-, T-, X- or inlineconfiguration. T- or X-post can also be usedbetween two slider doors.cPage 194.Adapters connect a sliderdoor to a panel in an L-,T- or X-configuration. A T-adapter can also be usedbetween two slider doors.cPage 192DoorframeMini endMini end connects a sliderdoor unit to a perpendicularbuilding wall.cPage 184.Wiring & CablingSlider door does notaccommodate vertical wireand cable routing..Surface MaterialsDoor frame andmuntins• PaintLite• GlassFloor track• PaintBase trim• PaintFeature strip• PlasticApplication TopicsTwo slider doors cannotbe installed with the openportion of the door framesin-line.Feature StripCalculatorcPage 196Planning Guide forUnitized BasescPage 200..180 Transitional Specification Guide

I-Line Moveable WallsSlider DoorsI-LineMoveable WallsTransitional Specification Guide 181

I-Line Moveable WallsCeiling Tracks.Ceiling track attachesthe top of I-Line wall panels,door frames, and othercomponents to the ceiling.Ceiling track is available inrecessed or overlappingversions.cSpecifying, page 242Recessed ceiling trackis set back from the surfaceof the panel on both sides.Factory formed cornerpieces are available toform L- and V-configurations.Finished endFlexible seal ensurestight fit to ceiling to blocklight and sound leaks.Overlapping ceilingtrack covers the top ofpanel face..Product Details120"Straight ceiling trackis available in 120" lengths.It can be cut on site toaccommodate any condition.Multiple straight lengthscan be joined in line.Finished end ceilingtrack is available to finishthe exposed end of a straightrun of ceiling track.L corner pieces areavailable in square andradius versions, recessedor overlapping, to form 90°corners. Use the radius versionto match the curvedform of a curved L-post..182 Transitional Specification Guide

I-Line Moveable WallsCeiling Tracks.V corner pieces areavailable recessed oroverlapping to form 135°corners.To join panels in aY-configuration usestraight ceiling track withan L corner piece.For panels joined in aT-configuration, use twostraight lengths of ceilingtrack, placed perpendicularto each other.For panels joined in anX-configuration, usemultiple straight lengths ofceiling track placed perpendicularto each other..T-clip can be used forpanels joined in a T-configuration.Use two T-clips forpanels joined in an X-configuration.Clip attachmentimproves track alignment..ConnectionsCeiling track can beremoved and repositionedusing optional hardware,without damaging ceilinggrid or tile.ExposedT-clipAttachment hardwareis available in a variety oftypes to accommodatemost standard ceiling typesand other field conditions.To discuss unusual fieldconditions, call theSteelcase SolutionsResource Teamat 1.888.783.3522..Wiring & CablingOverlapping ceilingtrack conceals power harnessesand cables routedvertically from the ceilinginto a run of panels.BipassCoverBipass cover is availableto conceal power harnessesand cables routed next to arecessed ceiling track asthe conduit travels from theceiling into a run of panelsor a door frame..Surface MaterialsCeiling track• Paint.I-LineMoveable WallsTransitional Specification Guide 183

I-Line Moveable WallsMini Ends.Mini ends connect a panelto a perpendicular buildingwall or column.cSpecifying, page 246Verticals on inner channelallows the mini end to connectto adjacent panel usingfeature strips. Panel slotsremain accessible to supportpanel-supported furniture.The mini end has noslots and cannot supportcomponents.Outer channel has a flatsurface to fit flush againstvertical surface of the buildingwall. No permanentalteration to the buildingwall is needed.Inner channel slipsinside the outer channel toallow adjustability to fitspecific field conditions.Base zone can accommodateeither 4"H or 5"H basetrim. Base trim from adjacentpanel extends underthe mini end. Mini end canalso be specified to extendto the floor eliminating theneed for base trim.Neoprene seals providelight and sound sealbetween the mini end andthe building wall.Mini end consists of twotelescoping components—inner channel and outerchannel.Feature strip joins thepanel to the mini end in thesame way that two panelsare joined..Product DetailsHeight of mini end mustbe the same as the adjacentpanel. Mini ends areavailable in all the sameheights as panels. Indicateheight when you order byspecifying the ceiling heightof the installation.1 7 /8" to 3"2 7 /8" to 4"4 1 /2" to 5 1 /2"Three sizes of mini endsare available. Each telescopesto accommodate adifferent range of dimensions.For installations that requirea dimension smaller than1 7 ⁄8", use a wall channel.cPage 186For installations that requirea dimension larger than5 1 ⁄2", consider using a largerpanel somewhere in the runor use a cut panel kit.cPage 190.184 Transitional Specification Guide

I-Line Moveable WallsMini Ends.RecessedOverlappingBoth recessed andoverlapping ceilingtracks can be used withmini ends.Extended base trimMini end“to floor” option4"5"Base of mini end can befinished three differentways—4"H base trim, 5"Hbase trim, and with mini endextended to the floor toeliminate base trim..Panels with unitizedbase trim installed adjacentto a mini end can bespecified with the “extendedbase trim for use with miniend” option. With this option,base trims on the panel willbe approximately 6" longerand can be cut on site tomatch the exact conditions.Panels with continuousbase trim installed adjacentto a mini end require nospecial specification. Theinstallers will extend thebase trim beyond the miniend to the building wall.cSee Using Floor TrackExtenders with ContinuousBase Trim, page 206..Mini end to floor is anoption that eliminates thebase zone by extending themini end to the floor. Oneadvantage of this approachis that it eliminates the needto cut the unitized basetrims of the adjacent panelon site to match the exactamount of telescoping ofthe mini end.Tip: To eliminate a gapbetween the mini end tofloor and the unitized basetrim of the adjacent panel,specify the “at door/adapterextended base trim” optionfor the base trims of theadjacent panel. Continuousbase trim can be field cut tobutt against the mini end tofloor..ConnectionsMiniendAll panel types can connectto a mini end.Adjacent panels connectto a mini end in the sameway all panels connect.Feature strip on both sidesof the panel form a continuouslink to the mini end byengaging the verticals ofthe mini end and the adjacentpanel.Physical connection tothe building is not needed.Mini end fits tightly againstthe building wall, and thecontact points are sealedwith continuous neoprenestrips to form a light andsound seal.Panel-supported componentscannot beattached to a mini end. Usethe adjacent panel to supportstorage and worksurfacecomponents..Wiring & CablingWire and cable routingvertically through a miniend is possible. Mini endsare often used to routepower to a run of glass panelswhich don't have sufficientspace to accommodatevertical power and cablerouting.Surface MaterialsSurfaces of mini endscan be paint, fabric, or vinyl.Both sides must be thesame material and color.Mini end• Paint• Fabric• VinylMultipurposeinfeedVerticaljumper.I-LineMoveable WallsTransitional Specification Guide 185

I-Line Moveable WallsWall Channels.Wall channels connectpanels, both cut and uncut,to a perpendicular buildingwall or column.cSpecifying, page 247Base zone can accommodateeither 4"H or 5"H basetrim. Base trim from adjacentpanel extends underthe wall channel. Wall channelcan also be specified toextend to the floor eliminatingthe need for base trim.Wall channel has a flatsurface to fit flush againstvertical surface of the buildingwall or window frame.No permanent alteration tothe building wall is needed.Shape of the wall channelallows it to fit over the endof a solid panel.Neoprene seals providelight and sound sealbetween the wall channeland the building wall..Product DetailsHeight of wall channelmust be the same as theadjacent panel. Wall channelsare available in all thesame heights as panels.Indicate height when youorder by specifying the ceilingheight of the installation.minimum 1 /4"maximum 1 /2"minimum 3 /8"maximum 1 5 /16"4"2 1 /4"1"minimum 3 /8"maximum 3 1 /16"Three sizes of wall channelsare available. Eachaccommodates a range ofdifferent dimensions.cFor the dimensions ofglass panels and doors, seeWall Channel Flexibility,page 189..186 Transitional Specification Guide

I-Line Moveable WallsWall Channels.RecessedOverlappingBoth recessed andoverlapping ceilingtracks can be used withwall channels.Extended base trimWall channel“to floor” option4"5"Base of wall channelcan be finished three differentways—4"H base trim,5"H base trim, and with wallchannel extended to thefloor to eliminate base trim..Panels with unitizedbase trim installed adjacentto a wall channel can bespecified with the “extendedbase trim for use with miniend” option. With this option,base trims on the panel willbe approximately 6" longerand can be cut on site tomatch the exact conditions.Panels with continuousbase trim installed adjacentto a wall channelrequire no special specification.The installers willextend the base trim beyondthe wall channel to thebuilding wall.cSee Using Floor TrackExtenders with ContinuousBase Trim, page 206.Wall channel to flooris an option that eliminatesthe base zone by extendingthe wall channel to the floor.One advantage of thisapproach is that it eliminatesthe need to cut the unitizedbase trims of the adjacentpanel. The base trim of thepanel telescopes inside thewall channel..Solid panels can beinserted to make use offull dimension of the wallchannel, glass panels anddoor frames should not beinserted too deeply into thewall channel because thewall channel will overlap theglass or block the swing ofthe door.cSee Wall ChannelFlexibility, page 189.Cut panels can be usedwith wall channels toachieve specific dimensionswithin your installation.cFor installation with cutpanels, see Cut Panels,page 190..Field cutting of wallchannels is possible to finishthe edges of solid panelsthat have been shapedto match the contours of thebuilding walls, sills, andbulkheads..ConnectionsWallchannelAll panel types can beused with a wall channel.Adjacent panel is insertedinside the wall channel.Physical connection tothe building is not needed.Wall channel fits tightlyagainst the building wall,and the contact points aresealed with continuous neoprenestrips to form a lightand sound seal.Slotted edges of theadjacent panel areblocked by wall channel.Use mini ends if planningwith panel-supportedfurniture..I-LineMoveable WallsTransitional Specification Guide cWall Channels, continued 187

I-Line Moveable WallsWall Channels, continued.Wiring & CablingMultipurposeinfeedVerticaljumperWire and cable routingvertically through a wallchannel is possible. Wallchannels can be used toroute power to a run of glasspanels which don't havesufficient space to accommodatevertical power andcable routing..Surface MaterialsSurfaces of wall channelscan be paint, fabric, or vinyl.Both sides must be thesame material and color.Wall channel• Paint• Fabric• Vinyl.Application TopicsWall channels are usedto join a whole or a cut panelto a perpendicular buildingwall. Wall channels willblock the slotted edges ofthe adjacent panel. Usemini ends if planning withpanel-supported furniture.cFor installations with cutpanels, see Cut Panels,page 190.SpreaderLevelerCut panel kit is availableto restore leveler and housingthat is removed whenpanel is cut on site. Kitincludes panel spreader tomaintain rigidity in panelface.cPage 247Field-cut panels shouldhave at least 4" of materialfrom the edge of a panelremoved and at least 4"should be retained.Tip: If you need multiple cutpanels, consider specifyinga single large panel and cuttingit in two, to produce twocut panels....188 Transitional Specification Guide

I-Line Moveable WallsWall Channel FlexibilityWall Channel Flexibility.Wall channels allowpanels to telescope inside.The amount of flexibilityvaries depending on thesize of the wall channel andwhat type of panel it is orwhether it is a door frame.Tip: 1" wall channel isrecommended for use withglass panels. The 2 1 ⁄4" and4" wall channels may overlapa portion of the glassarea..Solid Panels1"minimum 1 /4"maximum 1 /2"Glass Panels1"minimum 1 /4"maximum 1 /2"Door Frames1"Door frames must bejoined to a perpendicularbuilding wall with a miniend,not a wall channel.2 1 /4"minimum 3 /8"maximum 1 5 /16"2 1 /4"minimum 1 3 /16"maximum 1 5 /16"2 1 /4"4"minimum 3 /8"maximum 3 1 /16"4"minimum 2 15 /16"maximum 3 1 /16"4".I-LineMoveable WallsTransitional Specification Guide 189

I-Line Moveable WallsCut Panels.Cut panels are typicallypositioned at the end of arun, adjacent to a wallchannel. Cut panels canalso be positioned in themiddle of a run by using apanel end.Solid panels can be cuton site to allow walls to fitwith existing building conditions.Glass panels cannotbe cut.4" minimummust be cut off4" minimummust be left onVerticalchannelVertical channel at theedge of the panel should beavoided when cutting. Planyour cuts so that at least4" of panel width is removedand at least 4" of panelremains. Angled cuts arepossible if they conformto these guidelines.Tip: When you need multiplecut panels, you may be ableto specify a larger panel andcut it to produce two smallercut panels..Cut section of panelmust have at least onevertical edge intact to befunctional.PanelspreaderSupportchannelat baseof panelLevelerscrewNonfunctionalCut panel kit is availableto restore leveler and housingthat is removed whenpanel is cut on site. Kitincludes panel spreader tomaintain rigidity in panelface.cPage 247Wall channel finishes thecut edge of a panel that isinstalled against a perpendicularbuilding wall.cPage 186.Field-cut wall channelscan be used to finish theedge of a panel that hasbeen cut to conform the thespecific shape of a perpendicularbuilding wall.cPage 247Tip: 2 1 /4" wall channel isrecommended to trim a cutpanel..Cut panel withpanel endPanel end finishes theedge of a cut panel installedin line with other panels toproduce a wall of a specificlength. A panel end is typicallyused to achieve a specificlength in a wall that hasno wall channel.Surface materials don’taffect cutting. Painted, fabric,and vinyl surfaces canall be cut on site.CutpanelSoffitCutpanelSoffitPlan your cuts with installationin mind to make surethat it will be possible to fitbehind any soffits. Aligningcuts with boundaries maysimplify installation.Fixed dimensionrequired byfield conditions.190 Transitional Specification Guide

I-Line Moveable WallsCut PanelsI-LineMoveable WallsTransitional Specification Guide 191

I-Line Moveable WallsAdapters.Adapters engage theverticals on the edge of apanel to allow perpendicularpanels to connectcSpecifying, page 248Base trim on finished endadapter and L-adapter canbe specified to align with thebase trim on adjacent panels.T- and X-adapters are concealedwhen installed sothere is no base trim.Recessed and overlappingceiling track canbe used with adapters.Integral slotted verticalsallow connections toadjacent panels, doorframes, and mini ends.Feature strips joinadapters to adjacentcomponents.Surfaces of finished endadapter and L-adapter aresteel, covered with paint,fabric or vinyl to match panelsurfaces. T- and X-adaptersare concealed when installedso there is no surface finishto specify.Product Details8'0"H to10'0"HHeight can be specifiedfrom 8'0" to 10'0", in oneinchincrements, to accommodatedifferent ceilingheights.+/- 1 /2"+/- 1 /2"Ceiling track and floortrack each allow 1 ⁄2" ofvertical adjustment to accommodatevariations in fieldconditions.2 3 /8"1 3 /16"Finished-end adaptercaps the exposed verticaledge of the last panel in arun. Surface of the adapteris steel, covered in paint,fabric, or vinyl. Base trimis standard 4"H, and 5"Hbase trim is available asan option. Finished-endadapter adds approximately1 3 ⁄16" to the length of thewall.cSee Feature StripCalculator, page 196...192 Transitional Specification Guide

I-Line Moveable WallsAdapters2 3 /8"1 1 /2" 1 3 /16"2 11 /16"L-adapter allows a perpendicularpanel to attachat the end of a panel.Surface of the adapter issteel, covered in paint,fabric, or vinyl. Base trimis standard 4"H, and 5"Hbase trim is available asan option.cSee Feature StripCalculator, page 196.2 3 /8"1 1 /2"2 11 /16"T-adapter allows a perpendicularpanel to attachon the centerline betweentwo panels joined in line.cSee Feature StripCalculator, page 196.2 3 /8"1 1 /2"3 1 /16"X-adapter allows twoperpendicular panels toattach on opposite sides ofthe centerline between twopanels joined in line.cSee Feature StripCalculator, page 196..Cutpanel2 3 /8"1 1 /8"Panel end can be usedto finish the end of a cutpanel so that it functionslike a conventional paneland can make connectionsto an adjacent panel, doorframe, or mini end. Surfaceof the adapter is paintedsteel. Heights correlate tostandard 4"H and 5"Hbase trim.Tip: Panel end includes acut panel kit.ConnectionsAny panel, door frame,or mini end can be connectedto an adapter.Feature strip, orderedseparately, joins panelsand other components toadapters. Strip also preventslight and sound leakswhile allowing access to theintegral slotted verticals sothat panel-supported componentscan be attached.To rearrange panels, featurestrips can be removedand reused.cPage 245..Finished-end ceilingtrack is available for usewith finished end adapter.This ceiling track componentfinished the end of theceiling track in the sameway that the finished endadapter completes theexposed vertical edge ofthe last panel.cPage 242Unitized base trim isalways included on finishedend and L-adapters, and isavailable 4"H and 5"H.Extended base trim isavailable on adapters whenused next to a door frame.Specify the base at doorframe option. Base will beextended in all directions,so field cutting on unitizedbases on adjacent panelswill be needed to achievea perfect fit.cFor an overview of allbase trim conditions, seePlanning Guide for UnitizedBases, page 200.Some panels with unitizedbase that are adjacentto adapters will requireextended base.cFor an overview of allbase trim conditions, seePlanning Guide for UnitizedBases, page 200..AdapterSlotsblocked onboth panelsBlocked slots occur onthe edges of some panels inconfigurations with adapters.This makes it impracticalto attach panel-supportedcomponents at these points.cFor an overview of theplanning choices, seeCenterline Versus InteriorDimension Planning,page 198.T-postT-adapterT-adapters, unlike T-posts,produce a simpler, cleanervisual by presenting onejoint instead of two..Cut panelExact fit between fixedelements, such as buildingcolumns, is possible byusing a cut panel with thepanel end. The cut panelbehaves exactly like a conventionalpanel but its widthdimension can be modifiedon site to match fieldconditions.Tip: You cannot hang furnitureon a cut panel.cSee Cut Panels, page190.Wiring & CablingAdapters do not accommodatevertical wire andcable routing.Surface MaterialsFinished end adapterand L-adapter• Paint• Fabric• VinylApplication TopicsFeature StripCalculatorcPage 196Panel endCenterline VersusInterior DimensionPlanningcPage 198Planning Guide forUnitized BasescPage 200.I-LineMoveable WallsTransitional Specification Guide 193

I-Line Moveable WallsPosts.Posts join panels in a varietyof configurations.cSpecifying, page 250Base trim on posts canbe specified to align withthe base trim on adjacentpanels.Recessed and overlappingceiling track canbe used with posts.Surfaces of post are steel,covered with paint, fabric,or vinyl to match panelsurfaces.Feature strips join poststo adjacent components.Posts connect to adjacentpanels, door frames, andmini ends.Product Details8'0"H to10'0"HHeight can be specifiedfrom 8'0" to 10'0", in oneinchincrements, to accommodatedifferent ceilingheights.+/- 1 /2"+/- 1 /2"Ceiling track and floortrack each allow 1 ⁄2" ofvertical adjustment to accommodatevariations in fieldconditions...194 Transitional Specification Guide

I-Line Moveable WallsPosts2 3 /8"1 1 /2"2 11 /16"2 3 /8"3 1 /16"1 1 /2"2 11 /16"2 3 /8"1 1 /2"3 1 /16"2 3 /8"1 1 /2"2 3 /8"1 1 /2"2 3 /8"3 1 /16"1 1 /2"Configurations for postsinclude L, T, X, V, and Y aswell as in-line..L-post squareL-post radiusL-post is available withboth a square and radiusprofile.135°90°135°Y-post is made up of a 90°corner and two 135° angles...ConnectionsAny panel, door frame,or mini end can be connectedto a post.Feature strip, orderedseparately, joins panels andother components to posts.Strip also prevents light andsound leaks while allowingaccess to the integral slottedverticals so that panelsupportedcomponents canbe attached. To rearrangepanels, feature strips canbe removed and reused.cPage 245Unitized base trim isalways included on finishedend and L-adapters, and isavailable in 4"H and 5"H.Extended base trim isavailable on posts whenused next to a door frame.Specify the base at doorframe option. Base will beextended in all directions,so field cutting on unitizedbases on adjacent panelswill be needed to achievea perfect fit.cFor an overview of allbase trim conditions, seePlanning Guide for UnitizedBases, page 200.Posts are often moreappropriate when planningwith interior roomdimensions.Tip: Remember to allow forpost dimensions when calculatingthe overall length ofa wall.cSee Centerline VersusInterior Dimension Planning,page 198..PostNo slotsblocked onpanelsSlotted verticals arenever blocked when usingposts.cFor an overview of theplanning choices, seeCenterline Versus InteriorDimension Planning,page 198..Wiring & CablingPosts do not accommodatevertical wire and cablerouting.Surface MaterialsPost• Paint• Fabric• VinylBase trim• PaintApplication TopicsFeature StripCalculatorcPage 196Centerline VersusInterior DimensionPlanningcPage 198Planning Guide forUnitized BasescPage 200.I-LineMoveable WallsTransitional Specification Guide 195

I-Line Moveable WallsFeature Strip Calculator.Use the table at rightto determine the quantityof individual feature stripsyou need in specificapplications.cSee page 245 to orderfeature strips.ProductNumber of singlefeature strip piecesPanel2 GIFSHinged door frame2 GIFS*Slider door unit4 GIFS, 2 GIFS1Mini end2 GIFSFinished end2 GIFSL-adapter2 GIFST-adapter2 GIFSX-adapter4 GIFSL-post2 GIFST-post4 GIFSX-post6 GIFSIn-line post2 GIFSV-post2 GIFSY-post4 GIFS*For each back-to-back door frame condition, add one*GIFS1 feature strip....GIFS feature strip is specifiedto correspond to theheight of your installation.It is available only in packagesof 25.GIFS1 feature strip is 120"long and cut on site to therequired length. It is specifiedseparately..196 Transitional Specification Guide

I-Line Moveable WallsFeature Strip CalculatorI-LineMoveable WallsTransitional Specification Guide 197

I-Line Moveable WallsCenterline Versus Interior Dimension Planning.Planning ChoicesArchitects and designerstypically use either centerlineplanning or insidedimensionplanning whenlaying out walls. I-Line supportseither approach or acombination. Your decisionabout which strategy to usewill depend on your buildingand integration and interfaceissues. Each approachoffers its own advantagesand disadvantages.CenterlineDimensionCenterline planning isconcerned about the distancebetween the centerlineof walls; the thicknessof the walls is a secondaryconsideration. For example,two parallel walls that are2 3 ⁄8" thick and with centerlinesthat are 96" apart willproduce an interior spacethat is 93 5 ⁄8"W.InteriorDimensionInterior planning isconcerned with the physicaldimensions of the roomcreated by walls. For example,to create an interiorspace that is 96"W, twoparallel walls that are 2 3 ⁄8"thick would have a centerlinedimension of 99"..1 3 /16"Using Adapters2 11 /16"Using Posts24' 0" centerline dimension96" 96" 96"Vertical slotsin cross wallare not blockedCenterline Dimension48" 48" 48" 48" 48" 48"24' 2 3 /8"Vertical slotsin cross wallare not blockedAdvantages• Allows centerlineplanning.• No creep added to thedimensions of the run ofpanels in one axis.• Lower cost than usingposts at T- and X-corners.• Clean visuals. No doublefeature strips visible whenthe back side of the walldoesn’t have perpendicularpanels.24' 9 1 /8" centerline dimensionInterior DimensionDisadvantages• Vertical slots in somepanels will be blocked byoverlapping panels andtherefore cannot accommodatepanel-supportedstorage or worksurfacecomponents.96 5 /8" 96 5 /8" 96 5 /8"24' 11 3 /8"1 3 /16"3 1 /16" 3 1 /16" 2 11 /16"48" 48" 48" 48" 48" 48"Advantages• Ideal for interior dimensionplanning because theinside dimensions of theroom will always matchthe dimensions of thepanels that make up thewall.• Vertical slots will never beblocked, so adding panelsupportedstorage orworksurfaces is never aproblem.Disadvantages• Must allow the 2 11 ⁄16"increment that each L-postadds and 3" increment thateach T-post adds to thelength of the run of panels.• Posts and two featurestrips will be visible on theopposite side of the wallif no panels are joined atthose points.• More expensive thanusing adapters at T- andX-corners..198 Transitional Specification Guide

I-Line Moveable WallsCenterline Versus InteriorDimension PlanningCombining TechniquesIn some applications it isdesirable to combine centerlineplanning with insidedimensionplanning. Forexample, you might want afront wall that producesalignment in a building thathas columns or windowelements on centerlinesthat are spaced 96" apart.But along the cross walls,you may want to use insidedimensionplanning toensure that standard-sizedfurniture components, suchas worksurfaces and bins,will match panel dimensions.2 11 /16"1 1 /2" 1 1 /2"2 3 /8" 2 3 /8"L-adapter L-post3"3"1 1 /2"2 3 /8" 2 3 /8"T-post X-postAdapters and posts adddifferent dimensions to arun of panel depending onthe configuration...CROSS WALLVertical slotsin front wallare blockedVertical slotsin cross wallare not blocked96"FRONT WALLInterior Dimension96"Interior dimensionplanning along cross wallsmeans that vertical slotswill be available to attachstorage components andworksurfaces to cross wallpanels.Centerline Dimension96"Centerline planningalong front wall allows finwalls to match centerlinesof building elements suchas columns, windowframes, and ceiling grid..I-LineMoveable WallsTransitional Specification Guide 199

I-Line Moveable WallsPlanning Guide for Unitized Bases.Unitized base trimoption for any panel mayvary depending on what’sadjacent to each panel.These exaggerated drawingsshow unitized basetrim conditions for most typicalconfigurations. In somesituations, you need tospecify extended unitizedbase trim on panels that areadjacent to door frames,adapters, or mini ends. Youmust also specify extendedunitized bases on adaptersand posts that are adjacentto door frames. Extendedunitized bases will beapplied on both sides forpanels, on all four sides onposts. In some cases, theunitized base trim on adjacentpanels will need to befield cut for a perfect fit.UnitizedAt door frameor adapterAt mini end5 /16"6 1 /2"When you select “atdoor frame” option, theunitized base trim will beextended by 5 ⁄16" to fill thegap that occurs at doorframes and adapter verticals.When you select “atmini end” base option, theunitized base trim will beextended by 6 1 ⁄2" to fill thegap that occurs at miniends and wall channels.PanelsPanels In-LineBase option “unitized”Base trims willmeet in the centerof the feature strip.Panels with In-Line Door FrameSpecify “at doorframe” extendedbase option onpanel adjacent todoor frame.T-Adapter with In-Line Door FrameSpecify “at doorframe” extendedbase option onpanel adjacentto door frame...T-AdapterPanel EndBase of field-cutpanel extends tofinish the base of panelend adapter.T-adapter“at panel”Specify“at door frame”extended baseoption on panelthat is perpendicularto T-adapters.Panelend.200 Transitional Specification Guide

I-Line Moveable WallsPlanning Guide forUnitized Bases.Mini EndThere are two methods for planning base trim atmini end. The first is simple and less expensive.The second is better looking and more expensive.Specify “at doorframe” extended baseoption on paneladjacent to a mini endthat goes to the floor.Specify “mini end” extendedbase option on panel adjacentto a mini end when you wantto continue the base.Mini end“to floor”Mini end“to base”.Wall Channel with Cut or Uncut PanelThere are two methods for planning base trim atwall channel. The first is simple and less expensive.The second is better looking and moreexpensive.Specify “mini end” extendedbase option on panel adjacentto a wall channel when youwant to continue the base.Posts and AdaptersIn-Line PostBase trims willmeet in the centerof the feature strip.Uncut or cutpanelWall channel“to floor”Uncut or cutpanelWall channel“to base”In-line post“at panel”.L-PostBase trims willmeet in the centerof the feature strip.L-post (2-way)“at door frame”Field-cutbase trim“At post”“At door frame”L-post(2-way)“at panel”OutsideSpecify “at doorframe” extendedbase option onL-post adjacent toa door frame..I-LineMoveable WallsTransitional Specification Guide 201

I-Line Moveable WallsPlanning Guide for Unitized Bases, continued.L-AdapterBase trim ofL-adapter willmeet base trim ofadjacent panel inthe center of thefeature strip atpanel.L-adapter“at panal”Specify“at door frame”extended baseoption on panelthat is perpendicularto L-adapter.L-Adapter with In-Line Door FrameL-adapter“at door frame”Specify “at doorframe” extendedbase option onL-adapter usedadjacent to adoor frame.Post with FrameField-cutbase trimSpecify “at doorframe” extendedbase option onpost adjacent todoor frame.Finished EndBase option “at panel”Featurestrip.In-line post“at door frame”Finishedend adapterT-Adapter with PerpendicularDoor FrameT-adapter (3-way)“at door frame”Field-cut120" featurestrip to extendto floor.T-Adapter with In-Line Door FramesT-adapter (3-way)“at door frame”Field-cut 120"feature strip toextend to floor.Specify “at doorframe” extendedbase option onpanel adjacent todoor frame...202 Transitional Specification Guide

I-Line Moveable WallsTransitional Specification Guide cPlanning Guide for Unitized Bases, continued 203Planning Guide forUnitized BasesI-LineMoveable Walls............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................T-PostT-Post with In-Line Door FrameField-cutbase trimT-post (3-way)“at door frame”InsideT-post(3-way)“at panel”T-Post with In-Line Door FramesField-cutbase trimSpecify “at doorframe” extendedbase option onT-post adjacentto a door frame.T-post (3-way)“at door frame”T-Post with Perpendicular Door FrameX-PostX-post(4-way)“at panel”Base trims willmeet in the centerof the feature strip.T-post (3-way)“at door frame”Field-cutbase trim

204 Transitional Specification GuideI-Line Moveable WallsPlanning Guide for Unitized Bases, continued............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................X-Post with Door FramesSpecify “at doorframe” extendedbase option onX-post adjacentto a door frame.X-post (4-way)“at door frame”Field-cutbase trimSliding DoorOn door frameend of slidingdoor, adjacentcomponentsattach like theywould to a doorframe.On sidelite endof sliding door,adjacentcomponentsattach like theywould to a panel.

I-Line Moveable WallsPlanning Guide forUnitized BasesI-LineMoveable WallsTransitional Specification Guide 205

I-Line Moveable WallsUsing Floor Track Extenders with Continuous Base Trim.3"Floor trackextender6"Floor trackextenderFloor track extendersare available in two sizes toincrease the length of afloor track to reach adjacentcomponents and eliminatethe gap that would be visiblebelow the base trim.BasetrimFloortrackBasetrimFloortrackDoorframeGapDoorframeFloortrackextenderDoor FrameTwo 3" floor trackextenders are required foreach door frame.Continuousbase trimOrder 3"extended floortrack to fill gapL-AdapterOne 3" floor trackextender is required foreach L-adapter.Continuousbase.DoorframeOrder 3"extended floortrack to fill gapContinuousbase trimOrder 3"extended floortrack to fill gap.T-AdapterOne 3" floor trackextender is required foreach T-adapter.X-AdapterContinuousbaseTwo 3" floor trackextenders are required foreach X-adapter.ContinuousbaseOrder 3"extended floortrack to fill gapSame conditionon opposite sideContinuousbase trimOrder 3"extended floortrack to fill gap.206 Transitional Specification Guide

I-Line Moveable WallsUsing Floor TrackExtenders with ContinuousBase Trim.Mini EndOne 6" floor trackextender is required foreach mini end.ContinuousbaseWall ChannelOne 6" floor trackextender is required foreach wall channel.ContinuousbaseMiniendOrder 6"extended floortrack to fill gapWallchannelOrder 6"extended floortrack to fill gap.I-LineMoveable WallsTransitional Specification Guide 207

I-Line Moveable WallsHow to Power a Panel.Factory-installed componentsare available topower panels with receptaclesat desk height, ADAheight, or at the base of thepanel. Power infeeds canfeed through the ceiling orthe floor.Ceiling infeed, factoryinstalled in panel.Communication cable,field installed.Power andcommunicationreceptacles atdesk height.Power blocks, factoryinstalled at ADA height.ModularharnessVertical jumper, factoryinstalled to extend powerfrom base to desk or ADAheight.Power blocks,factory installedat base height.Floor infeed.208 Transitional Specification Guide

I-Line Moveable WallsHow to Power a Panel.Powering an I-Linepanel requires four things—power blocks, receptacles,cutouts in the surfaceof the panel to access thereceptacles, and a harnessor infeed to bring power tothe power block.Power BlocksPower blocks must beinstalled in a panel in orderto accommodate powerreceptacles.34" or35"Deskheight18" or19"ADAheightBaseheightThree different heightsare possible for powerblocks—desk height, ADAheight, and in the base ofthe panel. Each individualpower block serves bothsides of the panel. It's notpractical to install bothdesk-height and ADA-heightpower blocks in a singlepanel.Tip: To install power blocksin the base of a panel, 5"Hunitized bases must bespecified for the panel.Cutouts for receptaclescan be specified forboth sides of the panel orfor one side only. Whenspecifying cutouts in bothsides, the cutout type andlocation will be the same inboth panel faces.Power blocks can belocated in the base withoutcutouts to allow for distributionof power.Panel type determineswhich receptacle locationsare available. For example,solid wall panels can havereceptacles in any position,but glass wall panels canhave receptacles in thebase only.Panel Desk-Type heightSolidGlass N.A. N.A.ClerestoryReceptacles.ADAheightBaseReceptacles are orderedseparately and field installedin power blocks. Separateduplex receptacles are availableto engage each of thedifferent circuits that arepossible in the electricalsystem. Receptacles arecoded to indicate whichcircuit and type of groundthey engage.Installation is done onsite. Receptacles snap intopower block. Tools are notrequired for installation.cPage 252CutoutsPowerreceptaclesPowerand communicationreceptaclesPowerreceptaclesPowerand communicationreceptaclesCutouts can be specifiedin any position where apower block is located.Cutouts in the face of thepanel at desk height or atADA height include a plasticbezel that frames the tworeceptacles. You can chooseto have cutouts for receptacleson one side of thepanel or both sides.Width of panel must beadequate to accommodatecutouts. See table below forminimum widths.Power onlyDesk height, ADA height,and at base• 24"W standard panel• 30"W (nominal) modularpanelPower andCommunicationDesk height and ADA height• 30"W standard panel• 36"W (nominal) modularpanelAt base• 40"W standard panel• 42"W (nominal) modularpanel..Communication openingis sized to accommodatea standard NEMA-sizeoutlet supplied by theelectrician.Tip: A pull string is includedto the communication cutout.Fillers are available tooccupy spaces in bezel orbase trim cutouts where noreceptacles are needed.Communication openingscan be filled by a field-suppliedvendor plate whennot in use.InfeedsCeilinginfeedCeiling infeeds are factoryinstalled to bring powerto a power block installed atdesk height or ADA height.Harness orientation is standardon the left side whenfacing side 1..Floor infeed for use withraised floor systems can befactory installed to bringpower to a power blockinstalled at desk height orADA height. Harness orientationis standard on the leftside when facing side 1.Factory-installed infeedsextend a minimum of 12'from the panel.Base power blocksalways receive theirpower from field-installedharnesses.cPage 212MiniendMultipurposeinfeedFloorinfeedField-installed multipurposeinfeed can be usedto bring power from the ceilingor floor by routing itthrough an adjacent componentsuch as a mini end.If an infeed is needed,it must be ordered separatelywhen you order apanel with base poweroption. When you order apanel with ADA- or deskheightpower option, afactory-installed hardwireinfeed is included, locatedtop left in a solid panel andbottom left in a clerestorypanel..I-LineMoveable WallsTransitional Specification Guide cHow to Power a Panel, continued 209

I-Line Moveable WallsHow to Power a Panel, continued.BasepowerinfeedField-installed basepower infeed can bringpower from a floor monumentto a power block inthe base of a panel. Floorinfeed harness at the baseoccupies one receptaclelocation in the base powerblock.ModularharnessField-installed modularharness can bring powerfrom a power block installedin the base of an adjacentpanel.cTo calculate harnesslength, see page 218.Harness-to-harnessconnector, ordered separately,links harnesses.Harness-to-harness connectorallows multiple harnessesto connect to allowpower networks to branch..HardwireModularTransitionEnd of the powerinfeed can be hardwire,modular, or transition.Hardwire allows the electricianto make a conventionalconnection to the building’spower inside a junction box.Modular allows the infeed toconnect to any correspondingmodular connector orharness using a harness toharness connector. This isthe same modular connectorused by Steelcase’sPathways Technology Wall,Answer, Kick, Montage, andPathways Post and Beam.Transition allows the infeedharness to connect to thePathways ArchitecturalPower Systems used withraised floors..Connector receptacle isincluded with modular multipurposeinfeed to hardwireto a junction box. It allowsmodular connector to snapinto position. This allowswalls to be disconnected,moved, and reconnectedlater.VerticaljumperVertical jumper can befactory installed to extendpower from a power block inthe base of a panel to apower block at desk heightor ADA height..MultipurposeinfeedVerticaljumperMultipurposeinfeedVerticaljumperMultipurposeinfeedGlass panels cannotaccommodate vertical routingof power harnessesthrough the glass portion ofthe panel. Use adjacentpanels, mini ends, or doorframes to accommodate afield-installed multipurposeinfeed.Tip: A power switch installedin a door frame will blockthe path of a multipurposeinfeed..All I-Line electricalcomponents are listed byUnderwriters Laboratory(UL) and certified by theCanadian StandardsAssociation (CSA).All Steelcase electricalsystems are designed incompliance with the NationalElectrical Code (NEC) andCanadian Electrical Code(CEC) to function as a multiwirebranch circuit. Installationsshould be made inaccordance with the NEC orCEC provisions for multiwirebranch circuits.Local electrical codesvary. Consult a qualifiedelectrical contractor or engineerfor the proper installationof electrical equipment.Chicago requires that allpower be hardwired in thefield. Modular power systemsare not permitted. AllI-Line panels can be hardwiredon site using conventionalelectrical components.Please contact a SteelcaseSales Resource TeamProduct Specialist for aChicago Power Bulletin orcheck the newest version ofthis specification guide publishedafter March 2003.New York City has specialrequirements for theinstallation of modular electricalsystems.cPage 214SpecifyingcFor guidelines about thesteps to specify power componentsfor a panel, seePower Options, page 226..210 Transitional Specification Guide

I-Line Moveable WallsHow to Power a PanelI-LineMoveable WallsTransitional Specification Guide 211

I-Line Moveable WallsOverview of Powered PanelsPower in BasePower in the base of asolid or glass panel canbe energized using fieldinstalledharnesses orinfeeds.Tip: Base trim must be 5"Hunitized.Power at Desk Height or ADA HeightPower at desk heightor ADA height alwaysrequires factory-installedharness.Power source E:Factory-installed ceilinginfeed.cPage 226.Power source A:Field-installed harness fromadjacent panel with powerin base.cPage 255Power source F:Factory-installed floorinfeed.cPage 226Power source B:Field-installed multipurposeinfeed from ceiling throughcable routing channel insolid panel.cPage 254Power source G:Factory-installed verticaljumper. Base must receivepower using one of theapproaches shown at thetop of the page.cPage 226Power source C:Field-installed multipurposeinfeed from floor.cPage 254Power source D:Field-installed base powerinfeed from floor monumentor adjacent wall. Occupiesone receptacle location.cPage 253Installations that require multiple independentpower sources can use one source for base receptaclesand another for desk-height or ADA-height receptacles.Power blocks can be located in the base without cutoutsto allow for distribution of power..212 Transitional Specification Guide

I-Line Moveable WallsOverview of PoweredPanelsPower in Panels with GlassPower cannot be routedvertically through the glassportion of a panel so deskheightand ADA-heightreceptacles in glass panelsalways receive power frombelow.Tip: Power block in basedoesn’t have to be expressed.You may choose to use it onlyas a connection point for aninfeed and not specify receptacleknockouts in base.Power source F:Factory-installed floorinfeed.cPage 226.Power source G:Factory-installed verticaljumper. Base must receivepower using one of theapproaches shown on previouspage.cPage 226Mini EndAdjacent mini end canbe used to route a fieldinstalledmultipurposeinfeed. Factory-installedvertical jumper can extendpower to desk-height orADA-height.Adjacent door framecan be used to route afield-installed multipurposeinfeed.Exception: Switch installedin routing side of door framewill block harness..I-LineMoveable WallsTransitional Specification Guide 213

I-Line Moveable WallsNew York City Power.New York City electricalcode requires modularpower components to befield installed on site by theelectrician. For installationsin New York City, specifythe New York City poweroption for all panels thatrequire power. Thesepanels will be prepared toreceive field-installed powerkits.Order the powerkitsseparately.New York Citymultipurpose infeedBase to ADA-heightvertical jumperModular harnessPower and communicationreceptacles atADA heightModularharnessBase to desk-heightvertical jumperCommunicationcablesPower and communicationreceptacles atdesk heightPower block.Powerkits for deskheight and ADA heightinclude two power blocksand a vertical jumper andare ordered separately tofield install inside panelswith the New York Citypower option. Widths ofpowerkits correspond topanel widths. Separate powerkitsare available for allpanel widths from 24"W to60"W.Tip: Remember that to usethese powerkits, you mustchoose the New York Citypower option when youspecify the panel.ModularinfeedTransitioninfeedMultipurposeinfeedModularharnessVerticaljumperPowerblockPowerblockInfeeds and harnessesto energize powerkits areordered separately. Infeedcan be routed from the ceilingor floor or from a powerblock installed in the baseof the panel..214 Transitional Specification Guide

I-Line Moveable WallsNew York City Power.Receptacles are orderedseparately and are fieldinstalled in power blocks.Receptacles are coded toindicate which circuit typethey engage. Receptaclessnap into place on powerblock. Tools are notrequired for installation.cPage 252PowerblockModularharnessBase powerkits thatinclude only a power blockare available for use in NewYork City installations. Toconnect power from the baseof one panel to another,order modular harnessesof the required length.cPage 256Tip: Remember that to usethese powerkits, you mustchoose the New York Citypower option when youspecify the panel..MultipurposeinfeedDesk orADApowerkitBasepowerkitPower receptacles intwo different positionsrequire two New York Citypowerkits. For example, ifyou want power in the baseof a panel and at desk height(or ADA height), first order aNew York City base powerkitand a multipurpose infeed orharness to connect it to thepower supply. Also specify aNew York City powerkit fordesk height (or ADA height).Multipurpose infeedsare available for use in NewYork City.cPage 254.Specify one or morepowerkits for use in NewYork City.Desk-height or ADAheightpowerkits forNew York City includea vertical jumper to basepower and two powerblocks.cPages 257–258Base powerkits forNew York City include apower block only.Tip: Remember to order amodular harness of theappropriate length separatelyto bring power froman adjacent panel.Multipurpose infeed forNew York City is availableto bring power from thefloor to a power blockinstalled in the base of apanel..Example• One GISM30• 4840 Sunlight side 1• 4842 Biscuit side 2• 4750 Champagnebase/floor track• 6618 White bezel• 9'0" ceiling height• 5"H unitized base• With New York City power• Power cutout side 1 base• Panel surface ADA-heightpower• Power cutout side 1 ADAheight• One GI2PKA30NYY,30"W ADA powerkit• One GI2PKBNYY, basepowerkit• One GI2MHAY,30" modular harnessOrder receptaclesseparately.cPage 252..I-LineMoveable WallsTransitional Specification Guide 215

I-Line Moveable WallsWiring SchematicsDetails for the ElectricianI-Line, modular power components, areoffered in three different wiring schematics toallow you to match your specific wiring strategyto any typical building wiring plan.Tip: All the components in an electrical systemmust use the same wiring schematic. The componentsare color coded and keyed to make it impossibleto connect mismatched parts.Black = Four-circuit, 3+1Brown = Four-circuit, 2+2Rust = Three-circuit, separate neutralsShared neutral conductors = 10 gaugeSeparate neutral conductors = 12 gaugeHot conductors = 12 gaugeGrounding conductors = 12 gaugeFour-Circuit, 3+1Circuit Panel 1PHASE PHASE PHASEA B CCircuit 1 HotCircuit 2 HotCircuit 3 HotCircuits 1, 2, and 3 NeutralNEUTRALGroundGROUNDCircuit Panel 2PHASE PHASE PHASEA B CCircuit 4 HotCircuit 4 NeutralNEUTRALGroundGROUNDIn the four-circuit 3+1 schematic, circuits1, 2, and 3 are distributed from the first circuitpanel and are supported with one shared neutraland one shared ground. Circuit 4 is distributedfrom a second circuit panel and is supported witha separate neutral and ground.Single 3-PhaseCircuit PanelPHASE PHASE PHASEA B CCircuit 1 HotCircuit 2 HotCircuit 3 HotCircuit 4 HotCircuits 1, 2, and 3 NeutralNEUTRALCircuit 4 NeutralSystem GroundGROUNDIsolated GroundOn a single 3-phase circuit panel, all fourcircuits are distributed as shown..Four-Circuit, 2+2Circuit Panel 1PHASE PHASE PHASEA B CCircuit 1 HotCircuit 2 HotCircuits 1 and 2 NeutralNEUTRALGroundGROUNDCircuit Panel 2PHASE PHASE PHASEA B CCircuit 3 HotCircuit 4 HotCircuits 3 and 4 NeutralNEUTRALGroundGROUNDIn the four-circuit 2+2 schematic, circuits1 and 2 are distributed from two different phasesfrom the first circuit panel and are supportedwith one shared neutral and one shared ground.Circuits 3 and 4 are distributed from a second circuitpanel and supported by their own sharedneutral and ground.Single 3-PhaseCircuit PanelPHASE PHASE PHASEA B CCircuit 1 HotCircuit 2 HotCircuit 3 HotCircuit 4 HotCircuits 1 and 2 NeutralNEUTRALCircuits 3 and 4 NeutralSystem GroundGROUNDIsolated GroundOn a single 3-phase circuit panel, all fourcircuits are distributed as shown.Split-PhaseCircuit PanelPHASEPHASEACCircuit 1 HotCircuit 2 HotCircuit 3 HotCircuit 4 HotCircuits 1 and 2 NeutralNEUTRALCircuits 3 and 4 NeutralSystem GroundGROUNDIsolated GroundOn a split-phase circuit panel, all four circuitsare distributed as shown..Three-Circuit, Separate NeutralsCircuit Panel 1PHASE PHASE PHASEA B CCircuit 1 HotCircuit 2 HotCircuit 1 NeutralNEUTRALCircuit 2 NeutralGroundGROUNDCircuit Panel 2PHASE PHASE PHASEAB CCircuit 3 HotCircuit 3 NeutralNEUTRALGroundGROUNDIn the three-circuit, separate neutralschematic, circuits 1 and 2 are distributed fromtwo different phases from the first circuit panel.Each circuit is supported with its own neutral anda common ground. Circuit 3 is distributed fromthe second circuit panel and is supported by itsown neutral and ground.Single 3-PhaseCircuit PanelPHASE PHASE PHASEA B CCircuit 1 HotCircuit 2 HotCircuit 3 HotCircuit 1 NeutralCircuit 2 NeutralNEUTRALCircuit 3 NeutralSystem GroundGROUNDIsolated GroundOn a single 3-phase circuit panel, threecircuits are distributed as shown.Split-PhaseCircuit PanelPHASEPHASEACCircuit 1 HotCircuit 2 HotCircuit 3 HotCircuit 1 NeutralCircuit 2 NeutralNEUTRALCircuit 3 NeutralSystem GroundGROUNDIsolated Ground.On a split-phase circuit panel, three circuitsare distributed as shown.216 Transitional Specification Guide.

I-Line Moveable WallsHow to Calculate Power NeedsUse This to Determine How Many Power Infeeds You’ll NeedHow to CalculatePower Needs.When planning a powernetwork, you must calculatethe amperage requirementsof all your electrical componentsso you can providesufficient electricity topower them..If your usage is notknown in advance:The National ElectricalCode (NEC) allows a maximumof 13 receptacleson each 20-amp circuit.This provides up to 39receptacles for each 3-circuitpower-in and 52 receptaclesfor each 4-circuitpower-in. In Canada, theCanadian Electrical Codeallows a maximum of 10receptacles on each 15-amp circuit. This providesup to 30 receptacles foreach 3-circuit power-in and40 receptacles for each4-circuit power-in..If your usage is knownin advance:Add up the amperage usedby each piece of equipmentin the workstation. Wheneveryou reach 60 amps—20 amps times 3 circuits—(45 amps in Canada) fromitems that are likely to beused at the same time, youhave reached the limit for asingle power-in. Specifyanother power-in and continueuntil all equipment ispowered.cSee table at right for typicaland actual amperageusages for components.To calculate amperage whenthe wattage of a device isknown, divide watts by 120.If the circuits will normallybe subject to a continuousload (three or more hoursof continuous use, such aslights or computers), theNEC requires that circuitcapacity be “de-rated” by20 percent. Therefore, treatcircuits used for continuousloads as if they were ratedat 16 amps (12 amps inCanada) instead of theregular 20 amps.Try to anticipate futureincreases in power requirementsand build someexcess capacity into yourplan.Some appliances, suchas large copiers, coffeemakers, or space heatersrequire most of the currentavailable on a circuit. It isrecommended that suchdevices be supplied withtheir own dedicated circuit.Local electrical codes vary.Consult a qualified electricalcontractor or engineer forthe proper planning of electricalcircuits in your locale..Requirements of Office Equipmentin AmpsGeneral Equipment(Typical Amperage)A.C. adapter 0.05Adding machine 0.05Answering machine 0.08Calculator 0.25Clock 0.03Coffee pot 10.00Copy machine 15.00Desk-top copiers 7.00 to 10.00Stand-alone copiers 15.00Electric eraser 0.25Fan 1.00Manuscript holder 0.75Microwave 8.00 to 12.00Pencil sharpener 0.25Radio 0.05Space heater, 1000 watts 8.50Space heater, 1500 watts 12.50Electronic Equipment(Typical Amperage)Desk-top memorystorage devices 0.08 to 12.00Modems 0.15Desk-top printers 1.20 to 5.00Stand-alone printers 3.00 to 11.00VDTs and PCs 0.08 to 4.80Steelcase Task Lighting(Actual Amperage)Shelf lights:19"W, 15 watts 0.2024"W, 17 watts 0.2036"W, 25 watts 0.3048"W, 32 watts 0.30Canopy Lighting24 1 ⁄4"W, 14 watts 0.1436"W, 25 watts 0.2048"W, 32 watts 0.26.I-LineMoveable WallsTransitional Specification Guide 217

I-Line Moveable WallsHarness Length Calculations.Harnesses can be fieldinstalled to connect powerblocks in separate panels.cSpecifying, page 255To determine the lengthof the harness required, usethese guidelines.Two Adjacent Panels, Two Perpendicular Panels Separated by a PostTwo Panels Separated by a PostTwo Panels Separated by a Third Panel.If the sum of the panel widths is 48" to 90",Harness length = [(sum of panel widths)/2] minus 6If the sum of the panel widths > 90"Harness length = [(sum of panel widths)/2] minus 3If the sum of the panel widths is 48" to 90",Harness length = [(sum of panel widths)/2] minus 3If the sum of the panel widths > 90",Harness length = (sum of panel widths)/2Use the appropriate formula above, and add the width of theseparating panel to this result.Example: Two 36"W panels separated by a 40"W panel:Harness length = [(36"+ 36")/2] – 6" + 40" = 70".218 Transitional Specification Guide

Specifying I-LineMoveable Walls GSpecifyingSolid Wall Panels 220Glass Wall Panels 221Glass Wall Panels with Four Equal Divided Lites 222Glass Wall Panels with Four Divided Lites 223Glass Wall Panels with Two Divided Lites 224Clerestory Wall Panels 225Power Options 226Unitized Base Trim Options 227Butt-Hinged Door Frames 228Full-Height Butt-Hinged Door Leaves 229Transom-Height Butt-Hinged Door Leaves 230Pivot-Hinged Door Frames 231Pivot-Hinged Door Frames with Switch Cutout 232Full-Height Pivot-Hinged Door Leaves 233Transom-Height Pivot-Hinged Door Leaves 234Full-Height Pivot-Hinged Door Leaves for Use with Switch Cutout 235Transom-Height Pivot-Hinged Door Leavesfor Use with Switch Cutout 236Hardware and Accessories for Swing Doors 237Slider Doors 241Ceiling Tracks 242Trim and Accessories 244Mini Ends 246Wall Channels 247Adapters 248Posts 250Wiring and Cabling 252I-LineMoveable WallsTransitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List219Last order entry November 18, 2005

I-Line Moveable WallsSolid Wall Panels GcNeed help?Product details,page 160Standard Includes• Ceiling height from 8'0"H to 10'0"H, in one-inchincrements• 2 3 /8"-thick panel with steel surfaces: paint• Integral slotted verticals• Two internal vertical cable-routing channels• Floor track with adjustable levelers toaccommodate continuous 4"H base trim(ordered separately): paint• Post extensions for recessed ceiling trackRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Ceiling height3 Paint color number for side 14 Paint color number for side 25 Paint color number for floor track6 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Tip: Order ceiling track, featurestrip, and continuousbase trim separately.Exception: Choosing theunitized base trim optionmeans the base trim will beincluded with each panel.cRecessed ceiling tracks,page 242cOverlapping ceiling tracks,page 242cContinuous base trims,page 244cFeature strip, page 245OptionsRequired to SpecifySurfacePanel surfacesMaterials • Fabric Specify fabric color number for side 1and/or side 2.• Vertical surface vinyl Specify vinyl color number for side 1Available on panels 48"W or smaller and/or side 2.Ceiling Height • Ceiling height from 8'0" to 10'0" Specify ceiling height following style numberin one-inch incrementsof standard product.Post Extension • Post extensions modified to accommodate Specify post extensions for overlappingoverlapping ceiling track (ordered separately) ceiling track interface.Base Height • Component heights change to accommodate Specify with 5"H base height.cPage 1635"H base heightBase Trim • Unitized base trim cPage 227Electrical • Factory-installed power cPage 226PowerNew York City power cPage 226• Panel modified to accommodatefield-installed powerkitsRelated • Ceiling tracks cPage 242Products • Continuous base trim cPage 244• Feature strip cPage 245• Acoustic packing cPage 245• Power receptacles cPage 252• Infeeds cPages 253–254• Harnesses cPage 255• Power outlet filler cover cPage 256• New York City powerkits cPages 256–258Specification InformationDWidth DStyle DNominal DModular DStyled dNumber dWidth dWidth dNumberd d d d dSolid Wall PanelsModular Solid Wall Panels6" GISS06 G N.A.8" GISS08 G 8" 6 1 ⁄2" GISM08 G20" GISS20 G 20" 18 1 ⁄2" GISM20 G24" GISS24 G 24" 22 1 ⁄2" GISM24 G30" GISS30 G 30" 28 1 ⁄2" GISM30 G36" GISS36 G 36" 34 1 ⁄2" GISM36 G40" GISS40 G 40" 38 1 ⁄2" GISM40 G42" GISS42 G 42" 40 1 ⁄2" GISM42 G48" GISS48 G 48" 46 1 ⁄2" GISM48 G60" GISS60 G 60" 58 1 ⁄2" GISM60 Gd d d d d220 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

I-Line Moveable WallsGlass Wall Panels GGlass Wall PanelscNeed help?Product details,page 164Standard Includes• Ceiling height from 8'0"H to 10'0"H, in one-inchincrements• 2 3 /8"thick panel with steel frame: paint• Factory-installed lite: glass• Floor track with adjustable levelers toaccommodate continuous 4"H base trim(ordered separately): paint• Post extensions for recessed ceiling trackRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Ceiling height3 Paint color number for frame4 Glass number for lite5 Paint color number for floor track6 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Tip: Order ceiling track, featurestrip, and continuousbase trim separately.Exception: Choosing theunitized base trim optionmeans the base trim will beincluded with each panel.cRecessed ceiling tracks,page 242cOverlapping ceiling tracks,page 242cContinuous base trims,page 244cFeature strip, page 245OptionsRequired to SpecifyCeiling Height • Ceiling height from 8'0" to 10'0" Specify ceiling height following style numberin one-inch incrementsof standard product.Post Extension • Post extensions modified to accommodate Specify post extensions for overlappingoverlapping ceiling track (ordered separately) ceiling track interface.Base Height • Component heights change to accommodate Specify with 5"H base height.cPage 1675"H base heightBase Trim • Unitized base trim cPage 227Electrical • Factory-installed power cPage 226PowerNew York City power cPage 226• Panel modified to accommodatefield-installed powerkitsRelated • Ceiling tracks cPage 242Products • Continuous base trim cPage 244• Feature strip cPage 245• Acoustic packing cPage 245• Power receptacles cPage 252• Infeeds cPages 253–254• Harnesses cPage 255• New York City powerkits cPages 256–258Specification InformationDWidth DStyle DNominal DModular DStyled dNumber dWidth dWidth dNumberd d d d dGlass Wall PanelsModular Glass Wall Panels6" GIGS06 G N.A.8" GIGS08 G 8" 6 1 ⁄2" GIGM08 G20" GIGS20 G 20" 18 1 ⁄2" GIGM20 G24" GIGS24 G 24" 22 1 ⁄2" GIGM24 G30" GIGS30 G 30" 28 1 ⁄2" GIGM30 G36" GIGS36 G 36" 34 1 ⁄2" GIGM36 G40" GIGS40 G 40" 38 1 ⁄2" GIGM40 G42" GIGS42 G 42" 40 1 ⁄2" GIGM42 G48" GIGS48 G 48" 46 1 ⁄2" GIGM48 G60" GIGS60 G 60" 58 1 ⁄2" GIGM60 Gd d d d dI-LineMoveable WallsTransitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List221Last order entry November 18, 2005

I-Line Moveable WallsGlass Wall Panels with Four Equal Divided Lites GcNeed help?Product details,page 164Standard Includes• Ceiling height from 8'0"H to 10'0"H, in one-inchincrements• 2 3 /8"-thick panel with steel frame: paint• Four factory-installed lites: glass• Floor track with adjustable levelers toaccommodate continuous 4"H base trim(ordered separately): paint• Post extensions for recessed ceiling trackRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Ceiling height3 Paint color number for frame and muntin4 Glass number for lite 1(from top)5 Glass number for lite 26 Glass number for lite 37 Glass number for lite 48 Paint color number for floor track9 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Tip: Order ceiling track, featurestrip, and continuousbase trim separately.Exception: Choosing theunitized base trim optionmeans the base trim will beincluded with each panel.cRecessed ceiling tracks,page 242cOverlapping ceiling tracks,page 242cContinuous base trims,page 244cFeature strip, page 245OptionsRequired to SpecifyPost Extension • Post extensions modified to accommodate Specify post extensions for overlappingoverlapping ceiling track (ordered separately) ceiling track interface.Ceiling Height • Ceiling height from 8'0" to 10'0" Specify ceiling height following style numberin one-inch incrementsof standard product.Base Height • Component heights change to accommodate Specify with 5"H base height.cPage 1675"H base heightBase Trim • Unitized base trim cPage 227Electrical • Factory-installed power cPage 226PowerNew York City power cPage 226• Panel modified to accommodatefield-installed powerkitsRelated • Ceiling tracks cPage 242Products • Continuous base trim cPage 244• Feature strip cPage 245• Acoustic packing cPage 245• Power receptacles cPage 252• Infeeds cPages 253–254• Harnesses cPage 255• New York City powerkits cPages 256–258Specification InformationDWidth DStyle DNominal DModular DStyled dNumber dWidth dWidth dNumberd d d d dGlass Wall PanelsModular Glass Wall Panels6" GIGS4EL06 G N.A.8" GIGS4EL08 G 8" 6 1 ⁄2" GIGM4EL08 G20" GIGS4EL20 G 20" 18 1 ⁄2" GIGM4EL20 G24" GIGS4EL24 G 24" 22 1 ⁄2" GIGM4EL24 G30" GIGS4EL30 G 30" 28 1 ⁄2" GIGM4EL30 G36" GIGS4EL36 G 36" 34 1 ⁄2" GIGM4EL36 G40" GIGS4EL40 G 40" 38 1 ⁄2" GIGM4EL40 G42" GIGS4EL42 G 42" 40 1 ⁄2" GIGM4EL42 G48" GIGS4EL48 G 48" 46 1 ⁄2" GIGM4EL48 G60" GIGS4EL60 G 60" 58 1 ⁄2" GIGM4EL60 Gd d d d d222 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

I-Line Moveable WallsGlass Wall Panels with Four Divided Lites GTransom-Aligned Top LiteGlass Wall Panels withFour Divided LitescNeed help?Product details,page 164Standard Includes• Ceiling height from 8'0"H to 10'0"H, in one-inchincrements• 2 3 /8"-thick panel with steel frame: paint• Four factory-installed lites—top lite is transomedaligned, bottom three are of equal height: glass• Floor track with adjustable levelers toaccommodate continuous 4"H base trim(ordered separately): paint• Post extensions for recessed ceiling trackRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Ceiling height3 Paint color number for frame and muntin4 Glass number for lite 1(from top)5 Glass number for lite 26 Glass number for lite 37 Glass number for lite 48 Paint color number for floor track9 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Tip: Order ceiling track,feature strip, and continuousbase trim separately.Exception: Choosing theunitized base trim optionmeans the base trim will beincluded with each panel.cRecessed ceiling tracks,page 242cOverlapping ceiling tracks,page 242cContinuous base trims,page 244cFeature strip, page 245OptionsRequired to SpecifyPost Extension • Post extensions modified to accommodate Specify post extensions for overlappingoverlapping ceiling track (ordered separately) ceiling track interface.Ceiling Height • Ceiling height from 8'0" to 10'0" Specify ceiling height following style numberin one-inch incrementsof standard product.Base Height • Component heights change to accommodate Specify with 5"H base height.cPage 1675"H base heightBase Trim • Unitized base trim cPage 227Electrical • Factory-installed power cPage 226PowerNew York City power cPage 226• Panel modified to accommodatefield-installed powerkitsRelated • Ceiling tracks cPage 242Products • Continuous base trim cPage 244• Feature strip cPage 245• Acoustic packing cPage 245• Power receptacles cPage 252• Infeeds cPages 253–254• Harnesses cPage 255• New York City powerkits cPages 256–258Specification InformationDWidth DStyle DNominal DModular DStyled dNumber dWidth dWidth dNumberd d d d dGlass Wall PanelsModular Glass Wall Panels6" GIGS4L06 G N.A.8" GIGS4L08 G 8" 6 1 ⁄2" GIGM4L08 G20" GIGS4L20 G 20" 18 1 ⁄2" GIGM4L20 G24" GIGS4L24 G 24" 22 1 ⁄2" GIGM4L24 G30" GIGS4L30 G 30" 28 1 ⁄2" GIGM4L30 G36" GIGS4L36 G 36" 34 1 ⁄2" GIGM4L36 G40" GIGS4L40 G 40" 38 1 ⁄2" GIGM4L40 G42" GIGS4L42 G 42" 40 1 ⁄2" GIGM4L42 G48" GIGS4L48 G 48" 46 1 ⁄2" GIGM4L48 G60" GIGS4L60 G 60" 58 1 ⁄2" GIGM4L60 Gd d d d dI-LineMoveable WallsTransitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List223Last order entry November 18, 2005

I-Line Moveable WallsGlass Wall Panels with Two Divided Lites GTransom-Aligned Top LitecNeed help?Product details,page 164Standard Includes• Ceiling height from 8'0"H to 10'0"H, in one-inchincrements• 2 3 /8"-thick panel with steel frame: paint• Two factory-installed lites—top lite is transomedaligned: glass• Floor track with adjustable levelers toaccommodate continuous 4"H base trim(ordered separately): paint• Post extensions for recessed ceiling trackRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Ceiling height3 Paint color number for frame and muntin4 Glass number for lite 1(from top)5 Glass number for lite 26 Paint color number for floor track7 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Tip: Order ceiling track, featurestrip, and continuousbase trim separately.Exception: Choosing theunitized base trim optionmeans the base trim will beincluded with each panel.cRecessed ceiling tracks,page 242cOverlapping ceiling tracks,page 242cContinuous base trims,page 244cFeature strip, page 245OptionsRequired to SpecifyPost Extension • Post extensions modified to accommodate Specify post extensions for overlappingoverlapping ceiling track (ordered separately) ceiling track interface.Ceiling Height • Ceiling height from 8'0" to 10'0" Specify ceiling height following style numberin one-inch incrementsof standard product.Base Height • Component heights change to accommodate Specify with 5"H base height.cPage 1675"H base heightBase Trim • Unitized base trim cPage 227Electrical • Factory-installed power cPage 226PowerNew York City power cPage 226• Panel modified to accommodatefield-installed powerkitsRelated • Ceiling tracks cPage 242Products • Continuous base trim cPage 244• Feature strip cPage 245• Acoustic packing cPage 245• Power receptacles cPage 252• Infeeds cPages 253–254• Harnesses cPage 255• New York City powerkits cPages 256–258Specification InformationDWidth DStyle DNominal DModular DStyled dNumber dWidth dWidth dNumberd d d d dGlass Wall PanelsModular Glass Wall Panels6" GIGS2DL06 G N.A.8" GIGS2DL08 G 8" 6 1 ⁄2" GIGM2DL08 G20" GIGS2DL20 G 20" 18 1 ⁄2" GIGM2DL20 G24" GIGS2DL24 G 24" 22 1 ⁄2" GIGM2DL24 G30" GIGS2DL30 G 30" 28 1 ⁄2" GIGM2DL30 G36" GIGS2DL36 G 36" 34 1 ⁄2" GIGM2DL36 G40" GIGS2DL40 G 40" 38 1 ⁄2" GIGM2DL40 G42" GIGS2DL42 G 42" 40 1 ⁄2" GIGM2DL42 G48" GIGS2DL48 G 48" 46 1 ⁄2" GIGM2DL48 G60" GIGS2DL60 G 60" 58 1 ⁄2" GIGM2DL60 Gd d d d d224 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

I-Line Moveable WallsClerestory Wall Panels GClerestory Wall PanelscNeed help?Product details,page 164Standard Includes• Ceiling height from 8'0"H to 10'0"H, in one-inchincrements• 2 3 /8"-thick panel with steel surfaces: paint• Factory-installed clerestory lite: glass• Integral slotted verticals• Two internal vertical cable-routing channelsaccessible from floor only• Floor track with adjustable levelers toaccommodate continuous 4"H base trim(ordered separately): paint• Post extensions for recessed ceiling trackRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Ceiling height3 Paint color number for side 14 Paint color number for side 25 Paint color number for frame6 Glass number for clerestory lite7 Paint color number for floor track8 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Tip: Order ceiling track, featurestrip, and continuousbase trim separately.Exception: Choosing theunitized base trim optionmeans the base trim will beincluded with each panel.cRecessed ceiling tracks,page 242cOverlapping ceiling tracks,page 242cContinuous base trims,page 244cFeature strip, page 245OptionsRequired to SpecifySurfacePanel surfacesMaterials • Fabric Specify fabric color number for side 1and/or side 2.• Vertical surface vinyl Specify vinyl color number for side 1Available on panels 48"W or smaller and/or side 2.Ceiling Height • Ceiling height from 8'0" to 10'0" Specify ceiling height following style numberin one-inch incrementsof standard product.Post Extension • Post extensions modified to accommodate Specify post extensions for overlappingoverlapping ceiling track (ordered separately) ceiling track interface.Base Height • Component heights change to accommodate Specify with 5"H base height.cPage 1675"H base heightBase Trim • Unitized base trim cPage 227Electrical • Factory-installed power cPage 226PowerNew York City power cPage 226• Panel modified to accommodatefield-installed powerkitsRelated • Ceiling tracks cPage 242Products • Continuous base trim cPage 244• Feature strip cPage 245• Acoustic packing cPage 245• Power receptacles cPage 252• Infeeds cPages 253–254• Harnesses cPage 255• Power outlet filler cover cPage 256• New York City powerkits cPages 256–258Specification InformationDWidth DStyle Number DNominal Width DModular Width DStyle Numberd d d d dClerestory PanelsModular Clerestory Panels6" GIGCS06 G N.A.8" GIGCS08 G 8" 6 1 ⁄2" GIGCM08 G20" GIGCS20 G 20" 18 1 ⁄2" GIGCM20 G24" GIGCS24 G 24" 22 1 ⁄2" GIGCM24 G30" GIGCS30 G 30" 28 1 ⁄2" GIGCM30 G36" GIGCS36 G 36" 34 1 ⁄2" GIGCM36 G40" GIGCS40 G 40" 38 1 ⁄2" GIGCM40 G42" GIGCS42 G 42" 40 1 ⁄2" GIGCM42 G48" GIGCS48 G 48" 46 1 ⁄2" GIGCM48 G60" GIGCS60 G 60" 58 1 ⁄2" GIGCM60 Gd d d d dI-LineMoveable WallsTransitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List225Last order entry November 18, 2005

I-Line Moveable WallsPower Options.cFor details about howpower is accommodated inI-Line panels, see Overviewof Powered Panels, page 212.OverviewNearly all I-Line panelscan be specified with factoryinstalledpowerkits.PowerreceptaclesPower andcommunicationreceptaclesPower block will be factoryinstalled in the panel,centered to accommodateeither power receptaclesonly or power and communicationreceptacles.Exception: For New YorkCity installations, powerkitsare ordered separately, fieldinstalled.cPages 256–258Width of panel must beadequate to accommodatecutouts. See table below forminimum widths.Power onlyDesk height, ADA height,and at base• 24"W standard panel• 30"W (nominal) modularpanelPower andCommunicationDesk height and ADA height• 30"W standard panel• 36"W (nominal) modularpanelAt base• 40"W standard panel• 42"W (nominal) modularpanelPower receptacles areordered separately andinstalled on site..cPage 252Communication receptaclesare provided by othersand installed on site.Face plate accommodatesstandard NEMA-size outlets.Tip: A pull string is includedto the communication cutout.BaseheightDeskBase34" or35"DeskheightADABase18" or19"ADAheightDeskADAReceptacles can bespecified in five differentconfigurations. Combinationsof receptacle heightsare available—desk heightplus base or ADA heightplus base. Combining deskheight and ADA height isnot possible.Tip: Base trim height determinesreceptacle heightfrom floor. For example,receptacle height of panelwith 4"H base trim is 34"H.Receptacle height of panelwith 5"H base trim is 35"H.Cutouts for receptaclescan be specified forboth sides of the panel orfor one side only. Whenspecifying cutouts in bothsides, the cutout type andlocation will be the same inboth panel faces.Power blocks can belocated in the base withoutcutouts to allow for distributionof power..Panel type determines4which receptacle locationsPower locationsare available. For example,Specify one of the followingsolid wall panel can havepower locations that isreceptacles in any positionavailable on the panel typebut glass wall panels canyou have chosen:have receptacles in thebase only.Desk heightPanel DeskheighheightBaseSolidBaseGlass N.A. N.A.Base and desk heightClerestoryBase and ADA height5Cutout choices byADA-ADA heightType5"positionsCutouts are only availablein the positions you specifiedfor power locations instep 4, above.Unitized base trimDesk heightBase height and base• Powertrim determine if base• Power and communicationpower receptacle locationsare available. Only panelsADA heightwith 5"H unitized bases can• Poweraccommodate base power• Power and communicationreceptacles.Base height• PowerSpecifying• Power and communication• No cutoutPanelsTip: If you do not specifyone of the above for base1height, no cutout will beChoose appropriate panelprovided.width to accommodatepower and communicationChoose configuration fromreceptacles. See table inabove menu for side 1first column at left.and/or side 2.Tip: If you do not specify2side 1 and/or side 2 for deskPower schematicor ADA height, cutouts willSpecify the powerbe positioned in side 1 only.schematic:Tip: You cannot specify desk• 4-circuit, 3+1height on one side and ADA• 4-circuit, 2+2height on the other side.• 3-circuit, separateneutrals (3SN)6• New York City powerBezel colorcSee New York City Power,If you have selected deskheightor ADA-height receptaclelocations, specify apage 214.3plastic color number for theIf you intend to have powerbezel that frames thein the panel base, specifycutouts. Your color specificationwill apply to both5"H base height option andselect the 5"H unitized basesides of the panel.trim option.cSee Surface Materials,cPage 227in the electronic price list..Infeeds7Power infeedsPanels with factory-installedpower blocks at desk- orADA-height can have a factory-installedpower infeedharness to supply powerfrom the ceiling or floor.Factory-installed infeedsextend a minimum of 12’from the panel. Specify oneof the following:• Hardwire ceiling infeed• Modular ceiling infeed• Transition ceiling infeed• Hardwire floor infeed• Modular floor infeed• Transition floor infeedTip: If you do not specifyone of the above infeeds,hardwire infeed, located topleft in a solid panel and bottomleft in a clerestorypanel, will be provided.8Panels with factory-installedpower blocks in the baseand at desk-height or ADAheightcan have a factoryinstalledvertical jumper toextend power from the baseof the panel to the deskheightor ADA-height powerblock. Specify:• Vertical jumperException: For New YorkCity installations, verticaljumper is included, fieldinstalled.cPages 257–258Example• One GISM30• 4840 Sunlight side 1• 4842 Biscuit side 2• 4750 Champagnebase/floor track• 6618 White bezel• 9'0" ceiling height• Post extension forrecessed ceiling track• 2+2 wiring schematic• 5"H unitized base• Power cutout side 1 base• Panel surface ADA-heightpower• Power cutout side 1 ADAheight• Base to ADA vertical jumperOrder receptacles separately.cPage 252..226 Transitional Specification Guide

I-Line Moveable WallsUnitized Base Trim OptionsUnitized Base Trim Options.OverviewAll I-Line panels can bespecified with unitized basetrim 4"H or 5"H.Tip: To accommodate powerreceptacles in the base ofthe panel, you must specify5"H unitized base trim.Tip: Prewired power is notavailable in slider doors andside panels.UnitizedbaseStandard unitized baseextends exactly half thewidth of the feature stripbetween two adjacent panelsurfaces.ExtendedunitizedbaseExtended base trim foruse with door frame oradapter is available forinstallations where a panelis adjacent to a door frameor adapter. Extended basetrim is 5 ⁄16" longer to spanthe entire width of the featurestrip and reach the verticaledge of the door frameor adapter.ExtendedunitizedbaseFeaturestripUnitizedbaseFeaturestripDoorframe oradapterFeaturestripMini-endExtended base trim foruse with mini end isavailable for installationswhere a panel is adjacent toa mini-end. Extended basetrim is several inches longerto span the feature strip andthe width of the mini-end..Unitized base trim5"Power receptaclecutouts in unitized basetrim are specified by selectingfactory-installed poweroption.cPage 226Specifying1Choose any panel.2Specify one of the followingoptions:4"H unitized base trim4"H door/adapter extendedunitized base trim4"H mini-end extendedunitized base trim5"H unitized base trim5"H door/adapter extendedunitized base trim5"H mini-end extendedunitized base trimTip: Paint color number thatyou specify for the panelfloor track will apply to thepaint color of the base trim.....I-LineMoveable WallsTransitional Specification Guide 227

I-Line Moveable WallsButt-Hinged Door Frames GcNeed help?Product details,page 168Standard Includes• Ceiling height from 8'0"H to 10'0"H, in one-inchincrements• Left-hand, butt-hinged door frame: paint• Factory prep for butt hingesTip: Order door hardware separately.• Hardware cutout for strike plate• Transom, if selected: glass• Post extensions for recessed ceiling trackRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Ceiling height3 Paint color number for frame4 Glass number for transom, if selected5 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Tip: Glass door is availableup to 9'0"H ceiling height.OptionsRequired to SpecifyPost Extension • Post extensions modified to accommodate Specify post extensions for overlappingoverlapping ceiling track (ordered separately) ceiling track interface.Ceiling Height • Ceiling height from 8'0" to 10'0" Specify ceiling height following style numberin one-inch incrementsof standard product.Swing • Right-hand door frame Specify with right-hand door frame.OrientationcPage 176Tip: Remember to specifyswitch cutout option if youwant a butt-hinged doorframe with a switch.Switch • Switch cutout located in strike jamb of single Specify with switch cutout.Cutoutdoor frame. Not available in pair frames.cPage 169Order switch separately.cPage 240Related • Door leaves cPages 229–230Products • Passage sets and locksets cPage 237• Hinges cPage 238• Stops cPage 239• Switches cPage 240• Ceiling tracks cPage 242• Floor track extender cPage 244• Feature strip cPage 245Specification InformationDWidthddDStyledNumberdSingle Door FramesFull-Height40" GIDSBF GWith Transom40" GIDSBT Gd dPair FramesFull-Height76" GIDPBF GWith Transom76" GIDPBT Gd d228 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

I-Line Moveable WallsFull-Height Butt-Hinged Door Leaves GFull-Height Butt-HingedDoor LeavesTip: Glass door is availableup to 9'0"H ceiling height.cNeed help?Product details,page 168Standard Includes• Ceiling height from 8'0"H to 10'0"H, in one-inchincrementsException: Maximum ceiling height of glassdoors is 9'0"H.• Butt-hinged door: paint or glass• Factory prep for butt hinges• Factory prep for cylindrical passage set or locksetOptionsRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Ceiling height3 Paint color number for door, if solid doorselected4 Glass number for glass door, if glass doorselected5 Paint color number for glass door, if glassdoor selected6 Left-hand or right-hand swing orientationof active leaf7 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Required to SpecifySurface • Solid door: veneer Specify wood veneer color number.MaterialsCeiling Height • Ceiling height from 8'0" to 10'0" Specify ceiling height following style numberin one-inch incrementsof standard product.Lock Prep • Factory prep for mortise passage set Specify with mortise prep.cPage 170or locksetRelated • Door frames cPage 228Products • Passage sets and locksets cPage 237• Hinges cPage 238• Stops cPage 239Specification InformationDWidth DCorresponding DStyled dFrame Width dNumberd d dSolid Single Door36" 40" GILSSBF40 Gd d dGlass Single Door36" 40" GILGSBF40 Gd d dI-LineMoveable WallsSolid Pair Door72" 76" GILSPBF76 Gd d dTransitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List229Last order entry November 18, 2005

I-Line Moveable WallsTransom-Height Butt-Hinged Door Leaves GcNeed help?Product details,page 168Standard Includes• 7'0"H• Butt-hinged door: paint or glass• Factory prep for butt hinges• Factory prep for cylindrical passage set or locksetRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for door, if solid doorselected3 Glass number for glass door, if glass doorselected4 Paint color number for glass door, if glassdoor selected5 Left-hand or right-hand swing orientationof active leaf6 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.OptionsRequired to SpecifySurface • Solid door: veneer Specify wood veneer color number.MaterialsLock Prep • Factory prep for mortise passage set Specify with mortise prep.cPage 170or locksetRelated • Door frames cPage 228Products • Passage sets and locksets cPage 237• Hinges cPage 238• Stops cPage 239Specification InformationDWidth DCorresponding DStyled dFrame Width dNumberd d dSolid Single Door36" 40" GILSSBT40 Gd d dGlass Single Door36" 40" GILGSBT40 Gd d dSolid Pair Door72" 76" GILSPBT76 Gd d d230 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

I-Line Moveable WallsPivot-Hinged Door Frames GPivot-Hinged Door FramescNeed help?Product details,page 172Standard Includes• Ceiling height from 8'0"H to 10'0"H, in one-inchincrements• Reversible, pivot-hinged door frame: paint• Factory prep for pivot hingesTip: Order door hardware separately.• Strike plate and factory prep for cylindricalpassage set or lockset: 9200 Satin Chrome or9201 Polished Chrome• Transom, if selected: glass• Post extensions for recessed ceiling trackRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Ceiling height3 Paint color number for frame4 Glass number for transom, if selected5 Metal color number for strike plate:9200 Satin Chrome9201 Polished Chrome6 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Tip: Glass door is availableup to 9'0"H ceiling height.OptionsRequired to SpecifyPost Extension • Post extensions modified to accommodate Specify post extensions for overlappingoverlapping ceiling track (ordered separately) ceiling track interface.Ceiling Height • Ceiling height from 8'0" to 10'0" Specify ceiling height following style numberin one-inch incrementsof standard product.Lock Prep • Strike plate and factory prep for mortise Specify with mortise prep.cPage 174passage set or locksetRelated • Door leaves cPages 233–234Products • Passage sets and locksets cPage 237• Hinges cPage 238• Stops cPage 239• Switches cPage 240• Ceiling tracks cPage 242• Floor track extender cPage 244• Feature strip cPage 245Specification InformationDWidthddDStyledNumberdSingle Door FramesFull-Height40" GIDSPF GWith Transom40" GIDSPT Gd dPair FramesFull-Height80" GIDPPF GWith Transom80" GIDPPT Gd dI-LineMoveable WallsTransitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List231Last order entry November 18, 2005

I-Line Moveable WallsPivot-Hinged Door Frames with Switch Cutout GTip: Glass door is availableup to 9'0"H ceiling height.cNeed help?Product details,page 172Standard Includes• Ceiling height from 8'0"H to 10'0"H, in one-inchincrements• Left-hand reversible, pivot-hinged door frame:paint• Factory prep for pivot hingesTip: Order door hardware separately.• Switch cutout in strike jamb of door frameTip: Order switch separately.• Strike plate and factory prep for cylindricalpassage set or lockset: 9200 Satin Chrome or9201 Polished Chrome• Transom, if selected: glass• Post extensions for recessed ceiling trackOptionsRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Ceiling height3 Paint color number for frame4 Glass number for transom, if selected5 Metal color number for strike plate:9200 Satin Chrome9201 Polished Chrome6 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Required to SpecifyPost Extension • Post extensions modified to accommodate Specify post extensions for overlappingoverlapping ceiling track (ordered separately) ceiling track interface.Ceiling Height • Ceiling height from 8'0" to 10'0" Specify ceiling height following style numberin one-inch incrementsof standard product.Swing • Right-hand door frame Specify with right-hand door frame.OrientationcPage 177Lock Prep • Strike plate and factory prep for mortise Specify with mortise prep.cPage 174passage set or locksetRelated • Door leaves cPages 235–236Products • Passage sets and locksets cPage 237• Hinges cPage 238• Stops cPage 239• Switches cPage 240• Ceiling tracks cPage 242• Floor track extender cPage 244• Feature strip cPage 245Specification InformationDWidthddDStyledNumberdSingle Door FramesFull-Height42" GIDSPFS GWith Transom42" GIDSPTS Gd d232 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

I-Line Moveable WallsFull-Height Pivot-Hinged Door Leaves GFull-Height Pivot-HingedDoor LeavescNeed help?Product details,page 172Standard Includes• Ceiling height from 8'0"H to 10'0"H, in one-inchincrementsException: Maximum ceiling height of glassdoors is 9'0"H.• Reversible pivot-hinged door: paint or glass• Factory prep for pivot hinges• Factory prep for cylindrical passage set orlocksetRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Ceiling height3 Paint color number for door, if solid doorselected4 Glass number for glass door, if glass doorselected5 Paint color number for glass door, if glassdoor selected6 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Tip: Glass door is availableup to 9'0"H ceiling height.OptionsRequired to SpecifySurface • Solid door: wood veneer Specify wood veneer color number.MaterialsCeiling Height • Ceiling height from 8'0" to 10'0" Specify ceiling height following style numberin one-inch incrementsof standard product.Lock Prep • Factory prep for mortise passage set or Specify with mortise prep.cPage 174locksetRelated • Door frames cPage 231Products • Passage sets and locksets cPage 237• Hinges cPage 238• Stops cPage 239Specification InformationDWidth DCorresponding DStyled dFrame Width dNumberd d dSolid Single Door37 3 ⁄16" 40" GILSSPF40 Gd d dGlass Single Door37 3 ⁄16" 40" GILGSPF40 Gd d dI-LineMoveable WallsSolid Pair Door77 1 /2" 80" GILSPPF80 Gd d dTransitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List233Last order entry November 18, 2005

I-Line Moveable WallsTransom-Height Pivot-Hinged Door Leaves GcNeed help?Product details,page 172Standard Includes• 7'0"H• Reversible pivot-hinged door: paint or glass• Factory prep for pivot hinges• Factory prep for cylindrical passage set orlocksetRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for door, if solid doorselected3 Glass number for glass door, if glass doorselected4 Paint color number for glass door, if glassdoor selected5 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.OptionsRequired to SpecifySurface • Solid door: wood veneer Specify wood veneer color number.MaterialsLock Prep • Factory prep for mortise passage set or Specify with mortise prep.cPage 174locksetRelated • Door frames cPage 231Products • Passage sets and locksets cPage 237• Hinges cPage 238• Stops cPage 239Specification InformationDWidth DCorresponding DStyled dFrame Width dNumberd d dSolid Single Door37 3 ⁄16" 40" GILSSPT40 Gd d dGlass Single Door37 3 ⁄16" 40" GILGSPT40 Gd d dSolid Pair Door77 1 /2" 80" GILSPPT80 Gd d d234 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

I-Line Moveable WallsFull-Height Pivot-Hinged Door Leavesfor Use with Switch Cutout GFull-Height Pivot-HingedDoor Leaves for Use withSwitch CutoutcNeed help?Product details,page 172Standard Includes• Ceiling height from 8'0"H to 10'0"H, in one-inchincrementsException: Maximum ceiling height of glassdoors is 9'0"H.• Reversible pivot-hinged door: paint or glass• Factory prep for pivot hinges• Factory prep for cylindrical passage set orlocksetRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Ceiling height3 Paint color number for door, if solid doorselected4 Glass number for glass door, if glass doorselected5 Paint color number for glass door, if glassdoor selected6 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Tip: Glass door is availableup to 9'0"H ceiling height.OptionsRequired to SpecifySurface • Solid door: wood veneer Specify wood veneer color number.MaterialsCeiling Height • Ceiling height from 8'0" to 10'0" Specify ceiling height following style numberin one-inch incrementsof standard product.Lock Prep • Factory prep for mortise passage set Specify with mortise prep.cPage 174or locksetRelated • Door frames cPage 232Products • Passage sets and locksets cPage 237• Hinges cPage 238• Stops cPage 239Specification InformationDWidth DCorresponding DStyled dFrame Width dNumberd d dSolid Single Door36 3 ⁄8" 42" GILSSPF42 Gd d dGlass Single Door36 3 ⁄8" 42" GILGSPF42 Gd d dI-LineMoveable WallsTransitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List235Last order entry November 18, 2005

I-Line Moveable WallsTransom-Height Pivot-Hinged Door Leavesfor Use with Switch Cutout GcNeed help?Product details,page 172Standard Includes• 7'0"H• Reversible pivot-hinged door: paint or glass• Factory prep for pivot hinges• Factory prep for cylindrical passage set orlocksetRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for door, if solid doorselected3 Glass number for glass door, if glass doorselected4 Paint color number for glass door, if glassdoor selected5 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.OptionsRequired to SpecifySurface • Solid door: wood veneer Specify wood veneer color number.MaterialsLock Prep • Factory prep for mortise passage set Specify with mortise prep.cPage 174or locksetRelated • Door frames cPage 232Products • Passage sets and locksets cPage 237• Hinges cPage 238• Stops cPage 239Specification InformationDWidth DCorresponding DStyled dFrame Width dNumberd d dSolid Single Door36 3 ⁄8" 42" GILSSPT42 Gd d dGlass Single Door36 3 ⁄8" 42" GILGSPT42 Gd d d236 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

I-Line Moveable WallsHardware and Accessories for Swing Doors GHardware and Accessoriesfor Swing DoorsCylindrical Passage Set and Lockset GcNeed help?Product details,page 170Standard Includes• Cylindrical passage set or lockset,keyed randomly• Strike plate: 9200 Satin Chrome or 9201 PolishedChromeRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Metal color number:9200 Satin Chrome9201 Polished ChromeSpecification InformationDStyledNumberdCylindrical Passage SetGIDCLA GdCylindrical LocksetGIDCLO GdMortise Passage Set and Lockset GcNeed help?Product details,page 170Standard Includes• Mortise passage set or lockset,keyed randomly• Strike plate: 9200 Satin Chrome or 9201 PolishedChromeRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Metal color number:9200 Satin Chrome9201 Polished ChromeSpecification InformationDStyledNumberdMortise Passage SetGIDMLA GdMortise LocksetGIDMLO GdI-LineMoveable WallsTransitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling ListcHardware and Accessories for Swing Doors, continued 237Last order entry November 18, 2005

I-Line Moveable WallsHardware and Accessories for Swing Doors, continuedButt Hinge Kits GStandard Includes• Set of butt hinges: 9200 Satin Chrome or9201 Polished Chrome• Hinge kits for pair doors include flush bolts forinactive doorsRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Metal color number for flush bolts:9200 Satin Chrome9201 Polished ChromeSpecification InformationDNumber ofdHingesdDStyledNumberdButt Hinges for Single Doors and FramesFor Use with 84"H Door3 GIDBH3 GFor Use with Full-Height Door4 GIDBH4 GddButt Hinges for Pair Doors and FramesFor Use with 84"H Door6 GIDBH3P GFor Use with Full-Height Door8 GIDBH4P GddPivot Hinge Kits GStandard Includes• Set of pivot hinges: 9200 Satin Chrome• Hinge kits for pair doors include flush bolts forinactive doors: 9200 Satin Chrome or 9201Polished ChromeRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Metal color number for flush bolts:9200 Satin Chrome9201 Polished ChromeSpecification InformationDStyledNumberdPivot Hinges for Single Doors and FramesGIDPHS GdPivot Hinges for Pair Doors and FramesGIDPHSP Gd238 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

I-Line Moveable WallsHardware and Accessoriesfor Swing DoorsMagnetic Wall Stop GTip: For use with paintedsteel panels.cNeed help?Product details,page 170Standard IncludesSpecification InformationDStyledNumberdGIDMWS Gd• Magnetic wall stop: 9200 Satin Chrome or9201 Polished ChromeRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Metal color number:9200 Satin Chrome9201 Polished ChromeDome-Style Floor Stop GcNeed help?Product details,page 170Standard Includes• Dome-style floor stop: 9200 Satin Chrome or9201 Polished ChromeRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Metal color number:9200 Satin Chrome9201 Polished ChromeSpecification InformationDStyledNumberdGIDDFS GdScrew-In Base Stop GcNeed help?Product details,page 170Standard IncludesSpecification InformationDStyledNumberdGIDSBS Gd• Screw-in base stop: 9200 Satin Chrome or9201 Polished ChromeRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Metal color number:9200 Satin Chrome9201 Polished ChromeI-LineMoveable WallsTransitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling ListcHardware and Accessories for Swing Doors, continued 239Last order entry November 18, 2005

I-Line Moveable WallsHardware and Accessories for Swing Doors, continuedSwitches GcNeed help?Product details,page 169Standard Includes• Switch: ivory• Electrical box and related hardware• Switch plate: paintRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for switch platecSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Tip: If you are usingrecessed ceiling track,remember to order ceilingtrack bypass cover.Tip: Not available for use inCanada.Specification InformationDStyledNumberdSingle Pole Single SwitchGIDSS1 GdThree-Way Single SwitchGIDSS3 GdSingle Pole Double SwitchGIDSD1 Gd240 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

I-Line Moveable WallsSlider Doors GSlider DoorscNeed help?Product details,page 178Standard Includes• Ceiling height from 8'0"H to 10'0"H, in one-inchincrements• Left-hand (OX) slider door: glass• Four equal divided lites with 1 1 /2" muntins• Door frame• Side panel• Slide hardware• Floor track with adjustable levelers toaccommodate continuous 4"H base trim(ordered separately): paint• Door pull: stainless steel• Post extensions for recessed ceiling trackRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Ceiling height3 Paint for frame and muntins4 Glass number for lite 1(from top)5 Glass number for lite 26 Glass number for lite 37 Glass number for lite 48 Paint color number for floor track9 Slide orientation10 Options, if selected (see below)c See Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.OptionsRequired to SpecifyPost Extension • Post extensions modified to accommodate Specify post extensions for overlappingoverlapping ceiling track (ordered separately) ceiling track interface.Ceiling Height • Ceiling height from 8'0" to 10'0" Specify ceiling height following style numberin one-inch incrementsof standard product.Base Height • Component heights change to accommodate Specify with 5"H base height.cPage 1795"H base heightBase Trim • Unitized base trim cPage 227Slide • Right (XO) Specify with XO.OrientationcPage 179Lock • Door lock with interior thumb latch Specify with lock.Related • Ceiling tracks cPage 242Products • Continuous base trim cPage 244• Feature strip cPage 245Specification InformationDWidthddDStyledNumberd80" GIDSG80 G96" GIDSG96 Gd dI-LineMoveable WallsTransitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List241Last order entry November 18, 2005

I-Line Moveable WallsCeiling Tracks GCeiling Tracks GcNeed help?Product details,page 182Standard Includes• Recessed ceiling track: paintRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for ceiling track3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.RecessedOptionsRequired to SpecifyCeiling • Overlapping ceiling track Specify with overlapping ceiling track.TrackOverlappingTip: No ceiling clip isincluded unless selected asan option.Ceiling ClipClips for use on straight and finished end ceiling track• 1"W armstrong C60Specify with 1"W armstrong C60 clip.• 1" concealed splineSpecify with 1" concealed spline clip.• 1" metalSpecify with 1" metal clip.• 1" drywallSpecify with 1" drywall clip.• 1" plaster over drywallSpecify with 1" plaster over drywall clip.• 1" wood or concreteSpecify with 1" wood or concrete clip.• 1" x 1 /4"D tegularSpecify with 1" x 1 /4"D tegular clip.• 1" x 3 /8"D tegularSpecify with 1" x 3 /8"D tegular clip.• 1" x 1 /2"D tegularSpecify with 1" x 1 /2"D tegular clip.• 1" x 5 /8"D tegularSpecify with 1" x 5 /8"D tegular clip.• Fineline 1 /4" slotSpecify with Fineline with 1 /4" slot clip.• Fineline 1 /8" slotSpecify with Fineline with 1 /8" slot clip.• 1"W exposed TSpecify with 1"W exposed T clip.• 1" fluted runner 1 /4" – 20"Specify with 1" fluted runner 1 /4" – 20"clip.• 1" tee quick clipSpecify with 1" tee quick clip.• 9 /16"W exposed teeSpecify with 9 /16"W exposed tee clip.• 9/16" tee, 5 /8 studSpecify with 9 /16" tee, 5 /8" stud clip.Specification InformationDWidthddDStyledNumberdStraight Ceiling Track120" GICTS Gd dFinished-End Ceiling Track120" GICTF Gd dL Ceiling TrackSquare24" GICTLS GRadius24" GICTLR Gd d135° V Ceiling Track24" GICTV Gd d242 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

I-Line Moveable WallsCeiling TracksCeiling Track T-Clip GStandard IncludesRequired to SpecifyT-clip for recessedceiling trackcNeed help?Product details,page 183• T-clip: black paint only1 Style number2 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.T-clip for overlappingceiling trackOptionsRequired to SpecifyCeiling • Recessed ceiling track Specify with recessed ceiling track.Track • Overlapping ceiling track Specify with overlapping ceiling track.Specification InformationDStyledNumberdGICTT GdCeiling Track Bipass Cover GcNeed help?Product details,page 183Standard Includes• Bipass cover: paintRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for bipass covercSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Specification InformationDStyledNumberdGICTB GdI-LineMoveable WallsTransitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List243Last order entry November 18, 2005

I-Line Moveable WallsTrim and Accessories GContinuous Base Trim GcNeed help?Product details,page 161Standard Includes• 4"H continuous base trim: paintRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for base trim3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Tip: Order floor track extendersas required at adapters,mini ends, and door frames.OptionsRequired to SpecifyBase Height • 5"H base trim Specify with 5"H base trim.cPage 163Specification InformationDWidthddDStyledNumberd120" GICBT Gd dFloor Track Extenders GcNeed help?Product details,page 206Standard Includes• Floor track extender: paintRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for floor trackcSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.3" Floor trackextenderSpecification InformationDWidthddDStyledNumberd3" GIFTE3 G6" GIFTE6 Gd d6" Floor trackextender244 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

I-Line Moveable WallsTrim and AccessoriesFeature Strips GcNeed help?Product details,pages 162, 196Standard Includes• Feature strip(s): plastic• GIFS ceiling height from 8'0"H to 10'0"H,in one-inch incrementsRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Plastic color number for feature strip3 Ceiling and base height of panels for GIFS4 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Tip: GIFS1 feature strips are120" long and are field cut.OptionsRequired to SpecifyCeiling Height • Ceiling height from 8'0" to 10'0" Specify ceiling height.in one-inch increments for GIFS onlyTip: Order GIFS1 whenjoining door frames to panels,doors frames, postsadapters, and other components;or when joining panelsto panels.cSee Feature StripCalculator, page 196.SSpecification InformationDHeight DQuantity DStyled d dNumberd d d120" 1 GIFS1 G8'0"–10'0" 25 GIFS Gd d dAcoustic Packing GcNeed help?Product details,page 162Standard Includes• 120" of acoustic packing for 30'L of panel basecavity to increase acoustic performanceRequired to SpecifyStyle numberSpecification InformationDStyledNumberdGIAP GdI-LineMoveable WallsTransitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List245Last order entry November 18, 2005

I-Line Moveable WallsMini Ends GcNeed help?Product details,page 184Standard Includes• Ceiling height from 8'0"H to 10'0"H, in one-inchincrements• Telescoping mini end: paint• Aligns to top of 4"H baseRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Ceiling height3 Paint color number for mini end4 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.OptionsRequired to SpecifySurfaceMini endMaterials • Fabric Specify fabric color number.• VinylSpecify vinyl color number.Ceiling Height • Ceiling height from 8'0" to 10'0" Specify ceiling height following style numberin one-inch incrementsof standard product.Base Height • Aligns to top of 5"H base Specify with 5"H base.cPage 185 • Mini end to floor. No base zone. Specify to floor.Related • Floor track extender cPage 244ProductsSpecification InformationDSizeddDStyledNumberd1 7 /8" to 3" GIME3 G2 7 /8" to 4" GIME4 G4 1 /2" to 5 1 /2" GIME5 Gdd246 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

I-Line Moveable WallsWall Channels GWall ChannelsWall Channels GcNeed help?Product details,page 186Standard Includes• Ceiling height from 8'0"H to 10'0"H, in one-inchincrements• Wall channel: paint• Aligns to top of 4"H baseRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Ceiling height3 Paint color number for wall channel4 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Tip: Always order a cutpanel kit when you cut apanel at a wall channel.OptionsRequired to SpecifySurfaceWall channelMaterials • Fabric Specify fabric color number.• VinylSpecify vinyl color number.Ceiling Height • Ceiling height from 8'0" to 10'0" Specify ceiling height following style numberin one-inch incrementsof standard product.Base Height • Aligns to top of 5"H base Specify with 5"H base.cPage 187 • Wall channel to floor. No base zone. Specify to floor.Related • Floor track extender cPage 244ProductsSpecification InformationDSizeddDStyledNumberd1" GIWC1 G2 1 /4" GIWC2 G4" GIWC4 Gd dCut Panel Kit GcNeed help?Product details,page 190Standard Includes• Panel spreader• Leveler for 4" base• Leveler reinforcementRequired to SpecifyStyle numberTip: Panel end includes acut panel kit.OptionsRequired to SpecifyBase Height • Leveler for 5"H base Specify with 5"H base trim.cPage 187Specification InformationDStyledNumberdGIWCC GdI-LineMoveable WallsTransitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List247Last order entry November 18, 2005

I-Line Moveable WallsAdapters GcNeed help?Product details,page 192Standard Includes• Ceiling height from 8'0"H to 10'0"H, in one-inchincrements• Finished end, L-adapter, and panel end: paint• 4"H base trim on finished end and L-adapterfor use at panel with a 4"H base: paint• Panel end aligns to top of 4"H base• Cut panel kit, if panel end selectedRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Ceiling height3 Paint color number for finished end,L-adapter, and panel end, if selected4 Paint color number for base on finished endand L-adapter5 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.OptionsRequired to SpecifySurfaceFinished end and L-adaptersMaterials • Fabric Specify fabric color number.• VinylSpecify vinyl color number.Ceiling Height • Ceiling height from 8'0" to 10'0" Specify ceiling height following style numberin one-inch incrementsof standard product.Base • Base trim on L and finished end adapters Specify with base at door frame.cPage 192for use at door frameBase Height • 5"H base trim on finished end and L-adapters Specify with 5"H base trim.cPage 192 • Panel end aligns to top of 5"H base Specify with 5"H base trim.Related • Floor track extender cPage 244ProductsSpecification InformationDStyledNumberdFinished End AdapterGIAFE GdL-AdapterGIAL GdT-AdapterGIAT GdX-AdapterGIAX GdPanel EndGIAPE GdTip: GIAPE includes cutpanel kit.248 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

I-Line Moveable WallsAdaptersI-LineMoveable WallsTransitional Specification Guide 249

I-Line Moveable WallsPosts GcNeed help?Product details,page 194Standard Includes• Ceiling height from 8'0"H to 10'0"H, in one-inchincrements• Post: paint• 4"H base trim at panel with a 4"H base: paintRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Ceiling height3 Paint color number for post4 Paint color number for base5 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.OptionsRequired to SpecifySurfacePostMaterials • Fabric Specify fabric color number.• VinylSpecify vinyl color number.Ceiling Height • Ceiling height from 8'0" to 10'0" Specify ceiling height following style numberin one-inch incrementsof standard product.Base • Base trim at door frame Specify with base at door frame.cPage 194Base Height • 5"H base trim Specify with 5"H base trim.cPage 194Specification InformationDStyledNumberdL-PostSquareGIPLS GRadiusGIPLR GdT-PostGIPT GdcSpecification Information continued on next page250 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

I-Line Moveable WallsPostscSpecification Information, continuedSpecification InformationDStyledNumberdX-PostGIPX GdIn-Line PostGIPI GdV-PostGIPV GdY-PostGIPY GdI-LineMoveable WallsTransitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List251Last order entry November 18, 2005

I-Line Moveable WallsWiring and Cabling GReceptacles GcNeed help?Product details,page 209Standard Includes• Receptacle: plasticRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Plastic color number for receptaclecSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Specification InformationSystem Ground Isolated Ground System Ground Isolated GroundDLine DStyle DStyle DStyle DStyled dNumber dNumber dNumber dNumberd d d d d4-Circuit, 3+115-Amp Receptacles20-Amp ReceptaclesLine 1 GI1R1SGX G GI1R1IGX G GI1R1SGHX G GI1R1IGHX GLine 2 GI1R2SGX G GI1R2IGX G GI1R2SGHX G GI1R2IGHX GLine 3 GI1R3SGX G GI1R3IGX G GI1R3SGHX G GI1R3IGHX GLine 4 GI1R4SGX G GI1R4IGX G GI1R4SGHX G GI1R4IGHX Gd d d d d4-Circuit, 2+215-Amp Receptacles20-Amp ReceptaclesLine 1 GI2R1SGY G GI2R1IGY G GI2R1SGHY G GI2R1IGHY GLine 2 GI2R2SGY G GI2R2IGY G GI2R2SGHY G GI2R2IGHY GLine 3 GI2R3SGY G GI2R3IGY G GI2R3SGHY G GI2R3IGHY GLine 4 GI2R4SGY G GI2R4IGY G GI2R4SGHY G GI2R4IGHY Gd d d d d3-Circuit, Separate Neutrals15-Amp Receptacles20-Amp ReceptaclesLine 1 GI3R1SGZ G GI3R1IGZ G GI3R1SGHZ G GI3R1IGHZ GLine 2 GI3R2SGZ G GI3R2IGZ G GI3R2SGHZ G GI3R2IGHZ GLine 3 GI3R3SGZ G GI3R3IGZ G GI3R3SGHZ G GI3R3IGHZ Gd d d d d252 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

I-Line Moveable WallsWiring and CablingBase Power Infeeds GcNeed help?Product details,page 210Standard Includes• Junction box fittings for hardwired connection• Liquid-tight flexible conduit: black vinylRequired to SpecifyStyle numberSpecification InformationDLengthdd4-Circuit, 3+1DStyledNumberd12' GI1BPI12X Gdd4-Circuit, 2+212' GI2BPI12Y Gdd3-Circuit, Separate Neutrals12' GI3BPI12Z GddI-LineMoveable WallsTransitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling ListcWiring and Cabling, continued 253Last order entry November 18, 2005

I-Line Moveable WallsWiring and Cabling, continuedMultipurpose Power Infeeds GcNeed help?Product details,page 209Standard Includes• Hardwire infeed—Junction box fittings—Conduit: metal• Modular infeed—Conduit: metal• Modular infeed coverRequired to SpecifyStyle numberHardwireNew YorkModularTransitionTip: If an infeed is needed, itmust be ordered separatelywhen you order a panel withbase power option. Whenyou order a panel with ADAordesk-height power option,a factory-installed hardwireinfeed is included.5Specification InformationDLength anddConnectiond4-Circuit, 3+1DStyledNumberd24' Hardwire GI1PIH24X G24' New York GI1PIN24X G24' Modular GI1PIM24X G24' Transition GI1PIT24X Gdd4-Circuit, 2+224' Hardwire GI2PIH24Y G24' New York GI2PIN24Y G24' Modular GI2PIM24Y G24' Transition GI2PIT24Y Gdd3-Circuit, Separate Neutrals24' Hardwire GI3PIH24Z G24' New York GI3PIN24Z G24' Modular GI3PIM24Z G24' Transition GI3PIT24Z Gdd254 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

I-Line Moveable WallsWiring and CablingModular Harnesses GcNeed help?Product details,page 210Standard Includes• HarnessRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Harness length (see below)OptionsRequired to SpecifyHarness Length • Harness length from 18" to 60" Specify harness length of xx" (designatecPage 218 in one-inch increments length from 18" to 60").• Harness length from 61" to 103"Specify harness length of xx" (designatein one-inch increments length from 61" to 103").• Harness length from 104" to 144"Specify harness length of xx" (designatein one-inch increments length from 104" to 144").Specification InformationDLength DStyle DStyle DStyled dNumber dNumber dNumberd d d d4 Circuit, 3+1 4 Circuit, 2+2 3 Circuit, Separate Neutrals18" to 60" GI1MHAX G GI2MHAY G GI3MHAZ G61" to 103" GI1MHBX G GI2MHBY G GI3MHBZ G104" to 144" GI1MHCX G GI2MHCY G GI3MHCZ Gd d d dHarness-to-Harness Connectors GcNeed help?Product details,page 210Standard Includes• Connector: black plastic onlyRequired to SpecifyStyle numberSpecification InformationDDescriptionDStyleddNumberdd4-Circuit, 3+1Harness-to-harness GI1HHX Gdd4-Circuit, 2+2Harness-to-harness GI2HHY Gdd3-Circuit, Separate NeutralsHarness-to-harness GI3HHZ GddI-LineMoveable WallsTransitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling ListcWiring and Cabling, continued 255Last order entry November 18, 2005

I-Line Moveable WallsWiring and Cabling, continuedPower Outlet Filler Cover GStandard Includes• Power outlet filler cover: plasticRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Plastic color number for filler covercSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Tip: Fillers are used to fillunused openings in powercovers.Tip: Unused communicationopenings can be filled in thefield with a cover suppliedby the vendor of communicationoutlets.Specification InformationDStyledNumberdGIRP GdBase Powerkits for Use in New York City GcNeed help?Product details,page 215Standard Includes• Power blocksRequired to SpecifyStyle numberRelated Products• Harnesses cPage 255Specification InformationDStyledNumberdPowerkit with 4-Circuit, 3+1 Wiring SchematicGI1PKBNYX GdPowerkit with 4-Circuit, 2+2 Wiring SchematicGI2PKBNYY GdPowerkit with 3-Circuit, Separate Neutrals Wiring SchematicGI3PKBNYZ Gd256 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

I-Line Moveable WallsWiring and CablingADA-Height Powerkits for Use in New York City GcNeed help?Product details,page 214Standard Includes• Two power blocks• Base to ADA vertical jumper with modularconnectorRequired to SpecifyStyle numberModular baseto ADA jumperTip: Infeeds and harnessesto energize powerkits areordered separately.Related ProductSpecification Information• Receptacles cPage 252• Multipurpose infeeds cPage 254• Harnesses cPage 255DFrame DStyle DStyledWidth dNumber dNumberd d d4-Circuit, 3+1 Wiring Schematic24" GI1PKA24NYX G GI2PKA24NYY G30" GI1PKA30NYX G GI2PKA30NYY G36" GI1PKA36NYX G GI2PKA36NYY G40" GI1PKA40NYX G GI2PKA40NYY G42" GI1PKA42NYX G GI2PKA42NYY G48" GI1PKA48NYX G GI2PKA48NYY G60" GI1PKA60NYX G GI2PKA60NYY Gd d d3-Circuit, Separate Neutrals Wiring Schematic24" GI3PKA24NYZ G30" GI3PKA30NYZ G36" GI3PKA36NYZ G40" GI3PKA40NYZ G42" GI3PKA42NYZ G48" GI3PKA48NYZ G60" GI3PKA60NYZ GddRequired to Specify4-Circuit, 2+2 Wiring SchematicI-LineMoveable WallsTransitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling ListcWiring and Cabling, continued 257Last order entry November 18, 2005

I-Line Moveable WallsWiring and Cabling, continuedDesk-Height Powerkits for Use in New York City GcNeed help?Product details,page 214Standard Includes• Two power blocks• Base to desk vertical jumper with modularconnectorRequired to SpecifyStyle numberModular baseto desk jumperTip: Infeeds and harnessesto energize powerkits areordered separately.Related ProductsSpecification Information• Receptacles cPage 252• Multipurpose infeeds cPage 254• Harnesses cPage 255DFrame DStyle DStyledWidth dNumber dNumberd d d4-Circuit, 3+1 Wiring Schematic24" GI1PKD24NYX G GI2PKD24NYY G30" GI1PKD30NYX G GI2PKD30NYY G36" GI1PKD36NYX G GI2PKD36NYY G40" GI1PKD40NYX G GI2PKD40NYY G42" GI1PKD42NYX G GI2PKD42NYY G48" GI1PKD48NYX G GI2PKD48NYY G60" GI1PKD60NYX G GI2PKD60NYY Gd d d3-Circuit, Separate Neutrals Wiring Schematic24" GI3PKD24NYZ G30" GI3PKD30NYZ G36" GI3PKD36NYZ G40" GI3PKD40NYZ G42" GI3PKD42NYZ G48" GI3PKD48NYZ G60" GI3PKD60NYZ GddRequired to Specify4-Circuit, 2+2 Wiring Schematic258 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

MontageProduct DetailsFloor-to-Ceiling Applications of Montage Frames 260Acoustic Guidelines 261Worksurfaces 262Frames and DoorsFloor-to-Ceiling Interface and Ceiling Fix Brackets 278Acoustic Fillers 279Door Frames 280Doors 281Worksurfaces 282MontageTransitional Specification Guide 259

Floor-to-Ceiling Applications of Montage Frames.Floor-to-ceilinginstallations are possibleby stacking Montagecomponents to achieve theappropriate height. In someapplications, standard-sizecomponents will fill thevertical space perfectly. Butin most applications, specialheights of frames are neededto exactly fill the availablespace. This chapter offers afull array of components forthese applications.Tip: Combinations of baseframes and stacking framesin floor-to-ceilingapplications must notexceed 10'H.Base frames 86"H shouldbe used for floor-to-ceilingapplication.Stacking frames arestandard 20"H. Specialstacking frames areavailable in any height from4" to 26 3 ⁄4" in 1 ⁄4" incrementsfor applications wherestandard-size stackingframes do not fit exactly.Tiles that correspond tothese dimensions are alsoavailable.Ceiling-interfacecomponents must beordered to fill the spacebetween the top of theframes and the building’sceiling. It forms a light sealbetween the frames and theceiling and provides aphysical connection to theceiling grid. The ceilinginterface has an accordionfoldedgasket that expandsand contracts from 1 3 ⁄4" to3". Ceiling interface isavailable in 9' segments andare cut in the field..Floor-interfacecomponents are availableto fill the slight gaps thatexist between the bottom ofthe frames and the floor. Thefloor interface is placed onthe floor, and the base frameis installed on top of itcreating a light seal. Theinterface expands or compressesover a 3 ⁄4" range asthe leveling glides areadjusted. Floor interface isavailable in 9' segmentswhich are cut in the field.Wall attachmentbrackets, X, T, and Ijunctions specify to theoverall frame height.End trim, L, and Vjunctions specify to theceiling height.Wall-to-wallapplications may requirean adjustable wallattachmentbracket if thebuilding walls are not plumb.Checklist1Verify application of floor-toceilingproduct with localbuilding inspector.2You must complete detailedsite measurements todetermine existingconditions. Take heightmeasurements every 8'along the paths that theframes will follow. It is vitalthat you determine both thelowest and the highestdimensions of the spacewhere the Montage frameswill be installed..3Make note of any obstaclesthat might get in the waysuch as light fixtures,sprinkler heads, bulkheads,etc. You must re-route thepath of the frames or havethe frames drop in height atkey points to provideclearance.4Identify the type of ceiling,manufacturer’s name, anddescription of ceiling so thatyou can include thesedetails along with yourspecials request and orderso that the factory can shipthe appropriate attachmenthardware.5Use the process in the boxbelow to calculate thecombination and the heightof the frames needed toreach the ceiling.1Find the shortest distancebetween the floor andceiling along the path thatthe frames will follow.2Subtract 3" from the heightof the space toaccommodate the ceilinginterface. Ideally, theframes will fill theremaining space, but it israre that standard frameheights combine toproduce just the right total.In many installations, it isnecessary to specify aspecial height for the topsegment.Remember that thestandard frame heights of20"and 86" are nominal.Actual heights are 20.669"and 86.023". Stackedheights of standard framesare 65.354", 86.024",106.693", and 127.361"..6Order the appropriate tilesfor your frames.cSee page 261 for AcousticGuidelines.Tip: Hard-tiled surfacesblock sound best. If yourpurpose in constructing afloor-to-ceiling frame is toenhance acoustical privacy,you should specify nontackable(fabric-covered orpainted), glass, or wood onboth sides of the frames.Regardless of the tiles thatyou specify, Montage cannotduplicate the level of soundprivacy provided by drywallor a demountable wall.7Specify enough floorinterface and ceilinginterface for the installation.Order ceiling and floorinterface components in108" increments and cutthem in the field. Cutting thematerial in the fieldeliminates the difficultyinstallers might have in findingthe specific-length parts.Example:119.000" Overall ceilingheight (9'11")– 3.000" Ceiling interface=116.000"– 86.023" Base frame= 29.977"– 20.669" Single frame= 9.308" Height of specialframe required9.25" Round to thenearest 1 ⁄4".Tip: Use long ceilinginterface components forlong runs of frames toavoid unnecessary seams.Always make sure that thejoints of the ceilinginterface are positioned tomatch the joints betweenframes.8Specify wall attachmentbrackets, X, T, and ijunctions to match theframe height (i.e. 86"+12.5").9Specify end trim, L, and Vjunctions to match theceiling height (i.e. 86"+12.5"+ ceiling interface).Refer to the SpecialsHandbook for floor-toceilingcustom size frames(stackers), junctions, endtrims, tiles, and glass.How to calculate the standard and special products that are required20.669"44.685"86.023"127.361"106.692"65.354"3Special-size stacking framesare only available 7"H orhigher. In installations wherethe remaining space is lessthat 7", increase the height ofthe top, standard-stackingframe instead of addinga small stacking frameon top..260 Transitional Specification Guide

Acoustic GuidelinesAcoustic Guidelines.Montage is a flexible,stackable furniture systemthat can provide moderatelevels of acoustical privacyif applied appropriately.Floor-to-ceilinginstallations providevisual and acousticalprivacy. Blocking sound isthe goal of floor-to-ceilingapplications. Higher STCratings are desired.Recommendation: Useglass where possible; nextbest are any other hard tilesurfaces such as steel,fabric over steel, and wood.Where tackability is required,use high-performanceacoustical tiles; all other tilesshould be hard surface.Tip: Do NOT use tackableacoustical tiles in floor-toceilingapplications.Floor-to-ceilingjunctions, floor and ceilinginterface are shipped withfiller insulation for fieldinstallation. Additional lightseals (24) will ship with each9' section of ceiling interface,to improve sound absorption.For additional light seals,reference part numberZ700100SR in the CSS(or CSP Canada) electronicparts catalog.Open plan installationsprovide visual privacy withmoderate levels of acousticalprivacy. Sound absorptionis the goal of open installationplans. Higher-performingNRC ratings are desired..Steelcase’s expanding portfolio of demountable and reconfigurable floor-to-ceiling wallsoffers customers exceptional acoustical and reconfigurable performance, far exceedingthe capabilities of any stackable panel system. Beginning October 2000, Steelcase willno longer offer Montage as a floor-to-ceiling product for new customers, and ceiling interfaceorders will be accepted only for customers who have previously purchased them.ChecklistChecklist30"65".Floor-to-ceiling1Ensure frames arecorrectly double boltedand level.2Ensure junctions, ceiling andfloor interface have fillerinsulation.3Ceiling and floor interface areinstalled without light/soundleaks.4All tile segments have fourlight seals.5Hard tile surfaces are usedwherever possible. At aminimum, one side of theframe must be hard surface.6Sound masking is applied inthe environment.7Ceiling tile has NRC of .70 forsound absorption.For optimum acousticalperformanceFor all installations:1Use steel or other hard tilesurfaces at the frame base.2Use high-performanceacoustical, slatwall, ormarkerboard functional tilesabove worksurface.3Use steel or other hard tilesurfaces at the top of frame.Example:30"WNon-Tackable30"WHigh-PerformanceAcoustical30"WNon-Tackable.MontageTransitional Specification Guide 261

Straight, Corner, Extended Corner,and Extended Corner Cove Worksurfaces.Worksurfaces provide aprimary work space.cSpecifying, pages 282–290Cantilever, which is nonhanded,attaches to adjacentframe to support oneworksurface or two worksurfacesin line in on-modulepositions.Opening in cantileverfacilitates the routing andmanagement of cablesbeneath the worksurface.End-of-run cantilever,which is handed, attachesto adjacent frame in onmodulepositions and isused to support the end of ahanded corner worksurfacein on-module positions.Side support brackets,which attach to frames, areavailable to support the sideof a worksurface or to supportthe back corner of acorner worksurface.Brackets are used in onmodulepositions only.Standard end panels oroff-module end panelsare available to support theend of a worksurface andcan be used in on-moduleor off-module positions.Actual DimensionsHeight 28 1 /2"Thickness 1 1 /4"Depth Nominal minus 1 /2"Worksurface has awood core with a laminatesurface.Side support bracket,ordered separately, supportsthe back corner ofcorner, extended corner,extended corner cove, andworksurfaces. Bracket isused in on-module positionsonly.Cable scallops allowplugs to pass over the backof the worksurface.Back is self-edged PVCon laminate worksurface.Off-module worksurfacebracket can beused where two worksurfacesjoin in off-modulepositions or can support thefront of a worksurface on anoff-module fin panel.Off-module tie plate canbe used to join the front ofworksurfaces in off-modulepositions.Alignment plate isincluded to make connectionto adjacent worksurfaces..Product DetailsTorus edge combinesa stepped detail with aradius vinyl edge on laminateworksurfaces.CornerworksurfaceExtended cornerworksurfaceExtended cornercove worksurfaceCorner worksurfacesare available in threeshapes—corner, extendedcorner, and extended cornercove surfaces.Worksurface heightis standard at 28 1 /2"H.Other heights are possiblewith adjustable-heightcantilever.Off-module worksurfacebrackets mustbe used with on-modulesupports.Worksurface depth is1/2" less than nominal toallow cord drops betweenthe worksurfaces and tiles..262 Transitional Specification Guide

Straight, Corner,Extended Corner, andExtended Corner CoveWorksurfaces.Field-installed centerdrawer can be installedbeneath curvilinear worksurfaceswherever spacepermits—requires 19 1 ⁄2"D x21"W.Adjustable-heightcantilevers are availableto support corner andstraight worksurfaces from24 1 ⁄2"H to 34 1 ⁄2"H at 1"increments in on-modulepositions only.Tip: Requires a thirdadjustable-height cantileverto support rear corner ofcorner worksurface. Alsocannot be used in combinationwith desk-height cablemanagement tray. Maximumspan between adjustableheightcantilevers is 48".Adjacent worksurfacesmust be the same height toconnect. Do not combinecorner or straight worksurfacesthat are supported byadjustable-height cantileverswith worksurfacesthat are column supported.ConnectionsWorksurfaces arestandard without supports.Worksurface supportsinclude:• Pedestal• Off-module pedestal• End panel• Off-module end panel• Cantilever• Shared cantilever• End-of-run cantilever• End support brackets• Off-module worksurfacebracket• Off-module tie plate48"W or wider worksurfacescan spantwo frames.On-module Off-moduleEnd panels are availablein left- and right-hand versionsto support either endof a worksurface. A bracketis included with the endpanel to connect it to theframe. End panels are usedin on-module or off-modulepositions. End panels canbe converted in the field tostandard or off-module endpanels by ordering a panelpackage from Service Parts.Cantilever has a nonhandedflange that allowsit to support either theright- or left-hand side ofa worksurface in on-modulepositions only...Two cantilevers canbe used side by side in onmodulepositions to supportstraight and corner worksurfacesthat are joined.End-of-run cantileveris used to support the endof a corner worksurface inon-module positions. Cantileversare for use in onmodulepositions only.TwoOne SharedShared cantilevers canonly be used to supportworksurfaces with their owncolumn supports—bubblevisitor, jetty, bubble jetty,and visitor worksurfaces.Use two adjacent cantileversto support straightor corner worksurfaces thatare joined..Off-module worksurfacebracket is used off-modulewhere two worksurfacesjoin in off-module positions.Bracket can also be used tosupport the front of a worksurfaceon an off-module finpanel.Tip: Off-module worksurfacebracket must be used withon-module supports.End support bracket isused to support the backcorner of any corner worksurfaceand can be used tosupport the ends of rectangularor corner worksurfaceswhen they are wrapped byframes. Bracket is used inon-module positions only.Tip: End support bracketpairs are ordered separately.Make sure you specify anadequate supply.Off-module tie plateis included to make connectionto adjacent worksurfacesand is used inconjunction with off-moduleworksurface brackets..Wiring & CablingClear space at the backof worksurface allows cordsand cables to pass over atany point. Cable scallopsprovide space for plugs topass over the back edgeof the worksurface.Cable managementdevices are available tohelp manage conventionaland fiber-optic cablesbeneath the worksurface..MontageTransitional Specification Guide cStraight, Corner, Extended Corner, and Extended Corner Cove Worksurfaces, continued 263

Straight, Corner, Extended Corner, and Extended CornerCove Worksurfaces, continued.Surface MaterialsWorksurface• Laminate (standard)Tip: The color of the vinyltorus edge is determined bythe color you specify forthe laminate.End panel• PaintCantilever and flange• Black paint onlyEnd support bracket• Black paint onlyAlignment plate• Black paint onlyTie plate• Black paint onlyOff-module worksurfacebracket• PaintEnd-of-run cantilever• Paint.Application TopicsWorksurfaces with morethan 60" of unsupportedspan require additional support.Use cantilevers.Off-module worksurfacebrackets must beused in combination withon-module supports to provideforward worksurface tipsupport..ShippingPalletizing streamlinesunloading and staging ofworksurfaces. Identicalworksurfaces ordered onthe same line item arepacked on pallets containing10–25 worksurfaces.Remaining worksurfacesare packed individually incartons. If palletizing is notdesired, order in quantitiesof nine or less per lineitem. For maximum unloadefficiency, utilize pallethandling equipment at jobsite whenever possible....264 Transitional Specification Guide

Straight, Corner,Extended Corner, andExtended Corner CoveWorksurfacesMontageTransitional Specification Guide 265

Bubble Visitor, Jetty, and Bubble Jetty WorksurfacesBubble visitor, jetty,and bubble jettyworksurfaces are usedfor meetings within theworkstation.cSpecifying, pages 291–293Back is self-edged PVCon laminate worksurface.Bubble visitorworksurfaceJetty worksurfaceEnd support brackets,which attach to frames,are available to supportthe worksurface in onmodulepositions.Bubble jettyworksurfaceColumn leg adjustsover a range of 3 1 ⁄8".Actual DimensionsHeight 28 1 /2"Thickness 1 1 /4". Adjustable column diameter 4"Off-module worksurfacebrackets can beused to support the backof worksurfaces in offmodulepositions.Worksurface has a woodcore with a laminate surface.Off-module tie plate isused to join the front ofworksurfaces together inoff-module positions.Cable scallops allowplugs to pass over the backof the worksurface.Shared cantilever isused to support jetty, bubblejetty, bubble visitor, andadjacent worksurfaces in onmodulepositions.Alignment plates areincluded to make connectionto adjacent worksurfaces..Product DetailsWorksurface height is28 1 /2".Adjacent worksurfacesmust be the same height toconnect. Do not combinethese worksurfaces withcorner or straight worksurfacesthat are supported byadjustable-height cantilever.Off-module worksurfacebrackets mustbe used with on-modulesupports.Torus edge combinesa stepped detail with aradius vinyl edge on laminateworksurfaces.ConnectionsWorksurfaces are standardwithout supports oroff-module worksurfacebrackets. Order theadjustable column separatelyfor field installation.Worksurface supportsinclude:• Adjustable column• Shared cantilever• End support brackets• Off-module tie plate• Off-module worksurfacesupportbracketsPedestals cannot be usedto support bubble visitor,jetty, and bubble jettyworksurfaces..266 Transitional Specification Guide

Bubble Visitor, Jetty,and Bubble JettyWorksurfaces.Wiring & CablingClear space at the backof the worksurface allowscords and cables to passover at any point. Cablescallops provide space forplugs to pass over the backedge of the worksurface.Cable managementdevices are available tohelp manage conventionaland fiber-optic cablesbeneath the worksurface.cSee Montage SpecificationGuide..Surface MaterialsWorksurface• Laminate (standard)Tip: The color of the vinyltorus edge is determined bythe color you specify for thelaminate.Adjustable column• PaintShared cantilever• Black paint onlyAlignment plate• Black paint onlyEnd support bracket• Black paint onlyOff-module tie plate• Black paint onlyOff-module worksurfacebracket• Paint.Application TopicsEnd support bracket isused to support the cornerof a bubble visitor, jetty, orbubble jetty worksurfacethat is adjacent to a framebut not linked to an adjacentworksurface. Brackets areused in on-module positionsonly.Tip: End support bracketsare ordered separately.Make sure you specify anadequate supply.Off-module worksurfacebracket is usedto support the corner ofa bubble visitor, jetty, orbubble jetty worksurfacethat is adjacent to a framebut not linked to an adjacentworksurface. Bracketsare used in off-module positionsonly and must be usedwith on-module supports toproperly support the worksurfacein an off-moduleposition..Off-module worksurfacebrackets must beused in combination withon-module supports toprovide forward worksurfacetip support.Shared cantilevers areused to support two worksurfacesat the same timeand are used in on-modulepositions only.Exception: They cannot beused to support corner orstraight worksurfaces sideby side..ShippingPalletizing streamlinesunloading and staging ofworksurfaces. Identicalworksurfaces ordered onthe same line item arepacked on pallets containing10–25 worksurfaces.Remaining worksurfacesare packed individually incartons. If palletizing is notdesired, order in quantitiesof nine or less per lineitem. For maximum unloadefficiency, utilize pallethandling equipment at jobsite whenever possible..MontageTransitional Specification Guide 267

Spanner and Fanned Spanner WorksurfacesSpanner and fannedspanner worksurfaceslink two back-to-back worksurfacesand provide spacefor meetings.cSpecifying, page 294Worksurface has a woodcore with a laminate surface.Back is self-edged PVCon laminate worksurface.Column leg adjusts over arange of 3 1 ⁄8".Torus edge combines astepped detail with a radiusvinyl edge on laminateworksurfaces.Alignment plates areincluded to make connectionto adjacent worksurfaces.Shared cantilever isused to support a spanneror fanned spanner and anadjacent worksurfaces atthe same time.Actual DimensionsHeight 28 1 /2"Thickness 1 1 /4". Adjustable column diameter 4"Fanned spannerworksurfaceSpanner worksurface.268 Transitional Specification Guide

Spanner and FannedSpanner Worksurfaces.Product DetailsWorksurface height is28 1 /2"H..ConnectionsWorksurfaces are standardwithout supports. Orderadjustable column separatelyfor field installation.Worksurface supportsinclude:• Adjustable column• Shared cantilever.Wiring & CablingClear space at the backof the worksurface allowscords and cables withplugs to pass over theworksurface.Cable managementdevices are available tohelp manage conventionaland fiber-optic cablesbeneath the worksurface.cSee Montage SpecificationGuide..Surface MaterialsWorksurface• Laminate (standard)Tip: The color of the vinyltorus edge is determined bythe color you specify for thelaminate.Adjustable column• PaintShared cantilever• Black paint onlyAlignment plate• Black paint only.ShippingPalletizing streamlinesunloading and staging ofworksurfaces. Identicalworksurfaces ordered onthe same line item arepacked on pallets containing10–25 worksurfaces.Remaining worksurfacesare packed individually incartons. If palletizing is notdesired, order in quantitiesof nine or less per lineitem. For maximum unloadefficiency, utilize pallethandling equipment at jobsite whenever possible..MontageTransitional Specification Guide 269

CountertopsCountertops can be usedindividually or can link witheach other to form continuouscountertops along a runof frames.Tip: Countertops can’t bemounted off-module.cSpecifying, pages 295–297Countertop has awood core.Curved ends of countertopare used at the end ofa run and extend slightlybeyond the footprint of theframes that support it.5 3 /4" 5 3 /4"5 3 /4" 6"6"5 3 /4"Actual DimensionsStraight Countertop Corner CountertopDepth 15" 15"Nominal width 24", 30", 36", 42", 48", 24" x 24", 30" x 30", 36" x 36",(corresponds to frame width) 54", 60", 66", 72", 78", 42" x 42", 48" x 48", 24" x 30",84", 90", and 96" 24" x 36", 24" x 42", 24" x 48",30" x 24", 30" x 36", 30" x 42",30" x 48", 42" x 24", 42" x 30",42" x 36", 42" x 48", 48" x 24",48" x 30", 48" x 36", and48" x 42"Countertop thickness 1 1 ⁄4" 1 1 ⁄4".Bracket height 6" 6"Straight ends on countertopscan be used tocontinue a run.Concealed fastenersensure a flush connectionbetween countertopcomponents.Corner countertops areL-shaped units that matchthe nominal dimensions offrames..Product DetailsTorus edge combines astepped detail with a radiusvinyl edge on laminateworksurfaces.Round end of countertopoverhangs frame 5 3 ⁄4".Countertops are notintended to be load bearing.ConnectionsTie plate or alignmentbracket is used to connectadjacent countertops toensure alignment.Recommended standingheight for countertopsis achieved by attachingthem to 45"H frames. Allframe heights can acceptcountertops.Countertops can spanmore than one frame.Straight countertopsare non-handed..270 Transitional Specification Guide

Countertops.Steel top cap onframe is required forall countertops.Frame top cap remainsin place beneath the countertopand is not damaged.Utility shelf lights canbe installed beneath countertopsusing screws andkeyhole slots in light fixture.Adjustable-heightworksurfaces can beused with countertops, butit is more practical to usefixed monitor surfaces withadjustable keyboards sothat the clearance betweenthe worksurface andthe countertop remainsconstant..Surface MaterialsCountertop• LaminateTip: The color of the vinyltorus edge is determined bythe color you specify for thelaminate.Brackets• Black paint only.Application TopicsCountertops can beinstalled between adjacenttaller frames. Vertical endtrim can be modified in thefield to finish the exposedends of frames.Perpendicular framescan be higher than thecountertop.Tip: Countertop must beremoved to access adjacentframe.Corner countertopcan be attached to frames.Curved panel is not required.Transaction top cannotbe shorter than the framethat supports it.Brackets shippedwith countertops applyto frames manufacturedafter June 11, 2001.Tip: See Service Partsto specify countertopbrackets required forframes manufacturedprior to June 11, 2001.Tip: In applications usingframes with wood top caps,specify quote CA008682through Specials forrequired brackets....MontageTransitional Specification Guide 271

Worksurfaces and Supports Used in Off-Module PositionsTip: Always use on-moduleworksurface supports in allvertical panel upright slotpositions to provide forwardtip support. Off-moduleworksurfaces are supportedwith a combination of offmoduleworksurfaces andon-module worksurfacesupports.Cantilever, which is nonhanded,attaches to adjacentframe in on-modulepositions to support oneworksurface or two worksurfacesin line.Opening in cantilever facilitatesthe routing and managementof cables beneaththe worksurface.Worksurface has a woodcore with a laminate surface.Off-module pedestalsare available to supportworksurfaces in off-modulepositions. You must orderan off-module pedestalto use in an off-moduleposition.Tip: Worksurfaces canhang off an on-moduleworksurface support by amaximum of 6" before anoff-module end panel, offmodulepedestal, or offmoduleworksurface bracketand freestanding leg mustbe used.Actual DimensionsThickness 1 1 ⁄4"Height 28 1 ⁄2". Depth 23 1 ⁄2" or 29 1 ⁄2"scale 50End support bracket,ordered separately, supportsthe back corner ofcorner, extended corner,extended corner cove, andworksurfaces. Brackets areused in the vertical paneluprights which are for onmodulepositions only.Off-module worksurfacebracket is usedwhere two worksurfacesjoin in off-module positions.Bracket can also be usedto support the front cornerof a worksurface on an offmodulefin panel.Cantilever can only beused in on-module verticalpanel uprights.Off-module tie plateis ordered separately andis required to make connectionto adjacent worksurfacesand used inconjunction with off-moduleworksurface brackets.Off-module end panelsare available to support theend of a worksurface in offmodulepositions. You mustorder an off-module endpanel to use in off-modulepositions..272 Transitional Specification Guide

Worksurfaces and SupportsUsed in Off-Module PositionsMontageTransitional Specification Guide 273

Adjustable-Height WorksurfacesCrank-Adjustable.Crank-adjustable,adjustable-height worksurfacessupport computers,keyboards, and mousefor users in task-intensive orhigh-churn environments.cSpecifying, pages 298–300Worksurfaces have awood core with alaminate surface.Knobs adjust keyboard tilton dual adjustable-heightworksurfaces.Release lever activatescontinuous height adjustmentof keyboard surfaceon dual adjustable-heightworksurfaces.Actual Dimensions39 1 /4" 39 1 /4" 27 5 /8"24"22 1 /4"9 3 /4"11"24" 24"10 1 /8"22 1 /4"45 1 /4" 45 1 /4" 31 3 /16" 12 9 /16"32 1 /2"22 1 /4"9 3 /4"11"32 1 /2"32 1 /2"22 1 /4"Hand crank allowsseated left- or right-handedusers to raise or lower themonitor worksurface. Crankcan be stored away whennot in use.Front edge has a Torusedge to match otherMontage worksurfaces.Leveling glides adjust toinstall unit on uneven floors.40" 40"28 1 /4"46" 46"28 1 /4".Product DetailsTorus front edge is vinyl(PVC). Side and back worksurfaceedges are finishedwith self-edge vinyl (PVC).Three variations ofcrank-adjustable worksurfacesare available—single, dual, and bi-level. Allthree variations are availablein both straight and cornershapes.21 3 /4"11"21 3 /4"11"39 1 /2"26 1 /8"Single worksurfacesare one piece to accommodatesingle or multiple monitorsand a keyboard. Youcan adjust the height of theworksurface with the crankmechanism from 26 1 ⁄8"H to39 1 ⁄2"H.39 1 /2"26 1 /8"Dual worksurfaces aretwo pieces—a large monitorworksurface with a smallerkeyboard worksurfaceattached. You can adjustthe height of the monitorworksurface with the crankfrom 26 1 ⁄8"H to 39 1 ⁄2"H, andthe keyboard worksurfacemoves along with it.Tip: Extension worksurfacescannot attach to dualworksurfaces.40"46".15 1 /2"17 1 /4"15 1 /2"17 1 /4"26 1 /8"H to 39 1 /2"HMonitorKeyboard worksurfaceon dual worksurfaces issupported by a springmechanism that allows it toadjust to positions up to 6"higher or 5" lower than themonitor worksurface.Bi-level worksurfacesare two nearly equalpieces—a monitor worksurfaceand a large keyboardworksurface. You can adjustthe height of the monitorworksurface with the crankmechanism. You can alsoadjust the height of the keyboardworksurface with thecrank mechanism. Thesetwo adjustments are completelyindependent of eachother and range from26 1 ⁄8"H to 39 1 ⁄2"H.24"36"KeyboardFloor22 1 /4"22 1 /4"39 1 /2"26 1 /8"6"5".274 Transitional Specification Guide

Adjustable-HeightWorksurfaces.Extension worksurfacesconnect to cornerworksurfaces to providethe user with additionalspace. An extension worksurfaceattaches to a singleor bi-level corner worksurfaceand moves up or downin tandem with the cornerworksurface. Extensionworksurface includes agas cylinder in the rearcolumn.Tip: Extension worksurfacescannot attach to dualworksurfaces.1 1 /2"1 3 /4"39 1 /2"26 1 /8"At least a 1 3 ⁄4" gapmust separate backs of aworksurface and panels toaccommodate cables andprevent pinching. A 1"gap separates sides andadjacent furniture. There isalso a 1 1 ⁄2" space betweenthe keyboard and monitorsurfaces on units with twosurfaces.Adjustable-heightmechanism requiresassembly and attachmentto the worksurface.1".Keyboard surface tiltswith a range of 25°.GasCylindersGas cylinder packagecan be field installed tosingle and dual crankadjustableworksurfacesto provide an additional110 pounds of lift assistance(55 pounds for eachcylinder). Gas cylinders fitinto the empty rear columnsof single and dual crankadjustablebases anddecrease the load up to50 percent. Gas cylinderscannot be field installed tobi-level models because thespace in all four columnsis occupied by the crankmechanism. Gas cylindercomes standard on extensionworksurfaces..Surface MaterialsWorksurfaces• LaminateAdjustable-height base• PaintApplication TopicsAdjustable-heightworksurfaces support atotal of 150 pounds. If theunit has two surfaces, themonitor surface will supportup to 130 pounds and thekeyboard surface will supportup to 20 pounds.Moving worksurfacescan collide with other components.Don’t install overheadstorage, desk-height power,communication outlets, ordesk accessories in the pathof adjustable-height worksurfaces.Crank-adjustable,adjustable-heightworksurfaces will travel1" for approximately every6.5 turns of the crankhandle.Crank Adjustability DetailsCrank drives worm screw Straight and cornerin leg of straight single, bi-level worksurfacesstraight dual, corner single, have separate height-and corner dual worksurfacesto raise or lower work-for the keyboard and thesurface. Chain connects to monitor surfaces, whichheight-adjustment mecha-allow the two surfaces tonism in adjacent leg so it adjust independently ofmoves up or down in sync one another. Monitor sur-with crank leg. Crank handle face can accommodatecan be used in either leg. one 21" monitor.Chain connectsheight-adjustmentmechanisms on extensionworksurfaces to allowuser to adjust all worksurfacessimultaneously with oneturn of the crank.Three worksurfaces(one corner and two extensionworksurfaces) can be linkedand raised or lowered withone action.adjustment mechanisms..MontageTransitional Specification Guide cAdjustable-Height Worksurfaces, continued 275

Adjustable-Height WorksurfacesElectrically AdjustableElectrically adjustable,adjustable-height worksurfacessupportcomputers, keyboards, andmouse for intensive computerusers in single-occupant,multi-occupant, or high-churnenvironments. Allows usersto quickly and easily varybetween seated and standingpostures.cSpecifying, page 3019' power cord is provided.Knobs adjust keyboard tilton dual adjustable-heightworksurfaces.Release lever activatescontinuous adjustmentof keyboard surface ondual adjustable-heightworksurfaces.Actual Dimensions39 1 /4" 39 1 /4"22 1 /4"24"24"45 1 /4" 45 1 /4"22 1 /4".32 1 /2"32 1 /2"9 3 /4"11"9 3 /4"11"Worksurface has awood core with a laminatesurface.Drawer-mounted twobuttoncontroller activatessmooth, continuousheight adjustment of singleor monitor worksurface.Controller is included with150-pound weight capacityworksurfaces.40"46"28 1 /4"28 1 /4"40"46"Programmablememory isavailable asan option.Front edge has a Torusedge to match otherMontage worksurfaces.Leveling glides adjust toinstall unit on uneven floors.21 3 /4"11"21 3 /4"11".Product DetailsTorus front edge is vinyl(PVC). Side and backworksurface edges arefinished with self-edge vinyl(PVC).Two variations ofelectrically adjustable,adjustable-heightworksurfaces areavailable—single and dual.Both variations are availablein straight and cornershapes.40"24 1 /2"Single worksurfacesare one piece to accommodatea monitor and a keyboard.You can adjust theheight of the worksurfacewith the crank mechanismfrom 24 1 ⁄2"H to 40"H.40"24 1 /2"Dual worksurfaces aretwo pieces—a large monitorworksurface with a smallerkeyboard worksurfaceattached. You can adjustthe height of the monitorworksurface from 24 1 ⁄2"Hto 40"H, and the keyboardworksurface moves alongwith it.Keyboard surface tiltswith a range of 25°..KeyboardMonitor6"5"FloorKeyboard worksurfaceon dual worksurfaces issupported by a springmechanism that allows it toadjust to positions up to 6"higher or 5" lower than themonitor worksurface.1 3 /4"1 1 /2"1"At least a 1 3 ⁄4" gapmust separate backs of aworksurface and panels toaccommodate cables andprevent pinching. A 1"gap separates sides andadjacent furniture. There isalso a 1 1 ⁄2" space betweenthe keyboard and monitorsurfaces on units with twosurfaces.Adjustable-heightmechanism requiresattachment to theworksurface.Programmable memoryis available as an option andallows three users to programthree height settings each, fora total of nine settings. Included,is a drawer-mounted sixbuttoncontroller with an LEDdisplay that shows settings ininches, and soft-start/softstopadjustment for an extrasmooth start and stop motion..24 1 /2"H to 40"H276 Transitional Specification Guide

Adjustable-HeightWorksurfaces.High-performanceadjustable-heightworksurface is availableas an option and accommodatesa 250-pound weightcapacity. Programmablememory is included.Controller drawer shipswith the worksurface andallows for easy access to thecontroller while helping toprevent unintentionaladjustment..Surface MaterialsWorksurfaces• LaminateAdjustable-height base• Paint.Application TopicsAll adjustable-heightworksurfaces support atotal of 150 pounds. If theunit has two surfaces, themonitor surface will sup-portup to 130 pounds and thekeyboard surface will supportup to 20 pounds. Maximumpower consumption is 2.0amps. A 9' power cord isprovided.Optional high-performanceadjustable-heightworksurface supports 250pounds on top of worksurface.Moving worksurfacescan collide with other components.Don’t install overheadstorage, desk height power,communication outlets, ordesk accessories in the pathof adjustable-heightworksurfaces.Worksurfaces with 150-pound weight capacity willtravel 1.3" per second. Worksurfaceswith 250-poundweight capacity will travel1" per second....MontageTransitional Specification Guide 277

Floor-to-Ceiling Interface and Ceiling Fix BracketsWhat’s Special?Ceiling and floor interfaces are special.Clamp brackets to attach ceiling interface toceiling grid are special.Standard IncludesCeiling Interface• Top rail to affix to ceiling grid: black paint• Bellows• Attachment hardwareFloor Interface• Extrusion for floor: black plastic onlyCeiling Fix Brackets• Two brackets: paint price group 1Required to SpecifyItems on this page must bespecified through the SpecialsEngineering Quote Number process:1 General quote number: CA0-04779 forinterface and ceiling fix brackets2 Style number3 Quantity of 108" lengths of ceiling interface4 Quantity of 108" lengths of floor interface5 Designate “Ceiling fix brackets.”6 Type of ceilingcSee Surface Materials in Montage SolutionsSpecification Guide.NotesCeiling interface allows 1 1 ⁄4" variance infloor-to-ceiling dimensions. Ceiling and floorinterface must be cut to size in field.Please refer to floor-to-ceilingapplication notes to help determineproper dimensions.cPage 260Dealer to specify type of ceiling withorder.Order the appropriate number of 108"lengths and cut product to size in the field.Flat-style T-bar ceiling interface5⁄8"W fine line T-bar ceiling interfaceDropped ceiling interfaceSpecification InformationDLength DStyle DSIMS DU.S.d dNumber dID Number dPriced d d dCeiling InterfaceFlat-Style T-Bar Ceiling Interface Grid108" ZCIFLATSR CA0000329 $2605⁄8"W Fine Line T-Bar Ceiling Interface Grid108" ZCIFINESR CA00015662 $281Dropped Ceiling Interface Grid108" ZCTTEGUSR CA00015663 $270d d d dFloor Interface108" $ 57d d dFlat Style T-Bar GridZCIFLCLIP CA00002735 $ 25d d d dFine Line – 5 ⁄8" WideZCIFICLIP CA0015664 $ 25d d d dDrop Ceiling InterfaceZCITEG CA00015665 $ 25d d d d278 Transitional Specification Guide

Acoustic FillersAcoustic FillersWhat’s Special?Acoustic fillers that fit between tilesproviding additional acoustic absorption arespecial.3.5x20x36Standard Includes• Cut-to-size bats: soft fiberglassRequired to SpecifyItems on this page must bespecified through the SpecialsEngineering Quote Number process:1 General quote number: CA0-052562 Style number3 Designate “Acoustic frame filler” andindicate size.NotesInstallation in floor-to-ceiling applicationsto be completed by dealership.Specification InformationDDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD H dNumber dPriced d d20"H Acoustic Frame Fillers3 1 ⁄2" 24" ZAF2024 $73 1 ⁄2" 30" ZAF2030 $93 1 ⁄2" 36" ZAF2036 $103 1 ⁄2" 42" ZAF2042 $123 1 ⁄2" 48" ZAF2048 $14d d dMontageFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 279

Door FramesTip: Door frames are notstructural. Use a stack-onframe above a doorway toprovide stability. For applicationswhere no frame isgoing to be installed abovethe door frame, a specialtop cap linked to adjacentframes is required. Contactyour Steelcase area office todiscuss your application.Tip: You can order hollowcoredoors locally to installin Montage door frames.cSee Montage SolutionsSpecification Guide.Tip: Special four-hingeframes required for veneeror heavier custom doors.cSee Specials Handbook.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurface • Paint price group 1 No cost Specify paint color number.Materials • Paint price group 2 +$ 6 Specify paint color number.• Paint price group 3 +$10 Specify paint color number.Related • Doors cPage 281Products • Door lever sets cSee Montage Solutions SpecificationGuide.Specification InformationDDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD W dNumber dBased d dPriced d dDouble Door Frame48" 86" ZDF4886 $376d d dStandard Includes• Door frame with butt hinges: paint price group 1Required to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for door frame3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.280 Transitional Specification Guide

DoorsDoorsTip: Door lever sets must beordered separately.cSee Montage SolutionsSpecification Guide.Standard Includes• Door: laminate• 2 1 ⁄8"-diameter knob-set hole offset 2 3 ⁄4"and 1"-diameter latch hole pre-drilledRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Laminate color number for doorcSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Related Products• Door frames cPage 280Specification InformationDDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD W H dNumber dPriced d dDouble Doors1 3 ⁄8" 48" 86" ZD4886 $1587d d dMontageFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 281

Straight Worksurfaces48" orless54" ormoreTip: Worksurfaces with 60"or more of unsupportedkneespace require additionalcantilever support.cSee Montage SolutionsSpecification Guide forcantilevers.Tip: Pallets range between10–25 worksurfaces.cNeed help?Product details,page 262Standard Includes• Worksurface: laminate• Worksurface edge: vinyl default sides and vinyldefault torus edge on front• Cable scallops• Alignment plate package• Palletization of worksurfacesRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Laminate color number for worksurface3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurface • Open Line laminate +$60 cSee Surface Materials Reference ManualMaterials plus cost of laminate to specify.Related • End panels and off-module end panels cSee Montage Solutions SpecificationProductsGuide.• CantileverscSee Montage Solutions SpecificationGuide.• Side support bracketscSee Montage Solutions SpecificationGuide.• Off-module worksurface bracketcSee Montage Solutions SpecificationGuide.• Off-module tie platecSee Montage Solutions SpecificationGuide.• PedestalscSee Montage Solutions SpecificationGuide.• Off-module pedestalscSee Montage Solutions SpecificationGuide.For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.282 Transitional Specification Guide

Straight WorksurfacesSpecification InformationDDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD W dNumber dBased d dPriced d d24"D Worksurfaces24" 24" ZST2424 $16924" 30" ZST2430 $18224" 36" ZST2436 $19224" 42" ZST2442 $20824" 48" ZST2448 $24524" 54" ZST2454 $26324" 60" ZST2460 $28124" 66" ZST2466 $31324" 72" ZST2472 $350d d d30"D Worksurfaces30" 24" ZST3024 $23930" 30" ZST3030 $24930" 36" ZST3036 $26630" 42" ZST3042 $28130" 48" ZST3048 $31830" 54" ZST3054 $33930" 60" ZST3060 $36130" 66" ZST3066 $39330" 72" ZST3072 $428d d dMontageFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 283

Corner WorksurfacesACDBTip: Pallets range between10–25 worksurfaces.cNeed help?Product details,page 262Standard Includes• Worksurface: laminate• Worksurface edge: vinyl default sides and vinyldefault torus edge on front• Cable scallops• Alignment plate package• Palletization of worksurfacesRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Laminate color number for worksurface3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurface • Open Line laminate +$60 cSee Surface Materials Reference ManualMaterials plus cost of laminate to specify.Related • End panels and off-module end panels cSee Montage Solutions SpecificationProductsGuide.• Cantilevers and end-of-run cantileverscSee Montage Solutions SpecificationGuide.• Side support bracketscSee Montage Solutions SpecificationGuide.• Off-module worksurface bracketcSee Montage Solutions SpecificationGuide.• Off-module tie platecSee Montage Solutions SpecificationGuide.Specification Information42"DDimensions DStyle DU.S.dA B C D dNumber dBased d dPriced d dCorner Worksurfaces24" 24" 42" 42" ZCT24244242 $39942"24"24"48"24" 24" 48" 48" ZCT24244848 $44648"24"24"48"24" 30" 48" 48" ZCT24304848 $46848"30"24"48"30" 24" 48" 48" ZCT30244848 $46848"24"30"48"48"30"30" 30" 48" 48" ZCT30304848 $488d d d30"284 Transitional Specification Guide

Corner WorksurfacesMontageFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 285

Extended Corner WorksurfacesLeft-HandACDTip: Pallets range between10–25 worksurfaces.BcNeed help?Product details,page 262Standard Includes• Worksurface: laminate• Worksurface edge: vinyl default sides and vinyldefault torus edge on front• Cable scallops• Alignment plate package• Palletization of worksurfacesRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Laminate color number for worksurface3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurface • Open Line laminate +$60 cSee Surface Materials Reference ManualMaterials plus cost of laminate to specify.Related • End panels and off-module end panels cSee Montage Solutions SpecificationProductsGuide.• Cantilevers and end-of-run cantileverscSee Montage Solutions SpecificationGuide.• Side support bracketscSee Montage Solutions SpecificationGuide.• Off-module worksurface bracketcSee Montage Solutions SpecificationGuide.• Off-module tie platecSee Montage Solutions SpecificationGuide.• PedestalscSee Montage Solutions SpecificationGuide.• Off-module pedestalscSee Montage Solutions SpecificationGuide.For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.286 Transitional Specification Guide

Extended CornerWorksurfaces54", 60",66", 72",or 78"54", 60",66", 72",or 78"54", 60",66", 72",or 78"54", 60",66", 72",or 78"48"24"48"24"48"30"48"30"24"30"24"30"Specification InformationDDimensions DStyle DU.S.dA B C D dNumber dBased d dPriced d dLeft-Hand Worksurfaces24" 24" 54" 48" ZCT24245448 $58824" 24" 60" 48" ZCT24246048 $64524" 24" 66" 48" ZCT24246648 $70524" 24" 72" 48" ZCT24247248 $76424" 24" 78" 48" ZCT24247848 $82224" 30" 54" 48" ZCT24305448 $65324" 30" 60" 48" ZCT24306048 $71224" 30" 66" 48" ZCT24306648 $77024" 30" 72" 48" ZCT24307248 $82824" 30" 78" 48" ZCT24307848 $88830" 24" 54" 48" ZCT30245448 $65330" 24" 60" 48" ZCT30246048 $71230" 24" 66" 48" ZCT30246648 $77030" 24" 72" 48" ZCT30247248 $82830" 24" 78" 48" ZCT30247848 $88830" 30" 54" 48" ZCT30305448 $68630" 30" 60" 48" ZCT30306048 $74430" 30" 66" 48" ZCT30306648 $80330" 30" 72" 48" ZCT30307248 $86130" 30" 78" 48" ZCT30307848 $919d d dMontageFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 287

Extended Corner WorksurfacesRight-HandACDTip: Pallets range between10–25 worksurfaces.BcNeed help?Product details,page 262Standard Includes• Worksurface: laminate• Worksurface edge: vinyl default sides and vinyldefault torus edge on front• Cable scallops• Alignment plate package• Palletization of worksurfacesRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Laminate color number for worksurface3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurface • Open Line laminate +$60 cSee Surface Materials Reference ManualMaterials plus cost of laminate to specify.Related • End panels and off-module end panels cSee Montage Solutions SpecificationProductsGuide.• Cantilevers and end-of-run cantileverscSee Montage Solutions SpecificationGuide.• Side support bracketscSee Montage Solutions SpecificationGuide.• Off-module worksurface bracketcSee Montage Solutions SpecificationGuide.• Off-module tie platecSee Montage Solutions SpecificationGuide.• PedestalscSee Montage Solutions SpecificationGuide.• Off-module pedestalscSee Montage Solutions SpecificationGuide.For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.288 Transitional Specification Guide

Extended CornerWorksurfacesSpecification Information24"24"30"48"48"24"30"48"48"24"54", 60",66", 72",or 78"54", 60",66", 72",or 78"54", 60",66", 72",or 78"30" 54", 60",66", 72",or 78"30"DDimensions DStyle DU.S.dA B C D dNumber dBased d dPriced d dRight-Hand Worksurfaces24" 24" 48" 54" ZCT24244854 $58824" 24" 48" 60" ZCT24244860 $64524" 24" 48" 66" ZCT24244866 $70524" 24" 48" 72" ZCT24244872 $76424" 24" 48" 78" ZCT24244878 $82224" 30" 48" 54" ZCT24304854 $65324" 30" 48" 60" ZCT24304860 $71224" 30" 48" 66" ZCT24304866 $77024" 30" 48" 72" ZCT24304872 $82824" 30" 48" 78" ZCT24304878 $88830" 24" 48" 54" ZCT30244854 $65330" 24" 48" 60" ZCT30244860 $71230" 24" 48" 66" ZCT30244866 $77030" 24" 48" 72" ZCT30244872 $82830" 24" 48" 78" ZCT30244878 $88830" 30" 48" 54" ZCT30304854 $68630" 30" 48" 60" ZCT30304860 $74430" 30" 48" 66" ZCT30304866 $80330" 30" 48" 72" ZCT30304872 $86130" 30" 48" 78" ZCT30304878 $919d d dMontageFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 289

Extended Corner Cove WorksurfacesACDTip: Pallets range between10–25 worksurfaces.BcNeed help?Product details,page 262Standard Includes• Worksurface: laminate• Worksurface edge: vinyl default sides and vinyldefault torus edge on front• Cable scallops• Alignment plate package• Palletization of worksurfacesRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Laminate color number for worksurface3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurface • Open Line laminate +$60 cSee Surface Materials Reference ManualMaterials plus cost of laminate to specify.Related • End panels and off-module end panels cSee Montage Solutions SpecificationProductsGuide.• Cantilevers and end-of-run cantileverscSee Montage Solutions SpecificationGuide.• Side support bracketscSee Montage Solutions SpecificationGuide.• Off-module worksurface bracketcSee Montage Solutions SpecificationGuide.• Off-module tie platecSee Montage Solutions SpecificationGuide.• PedestalscSee Montage Solutions SpecificationGuide.• Off-module pedestalscSee Montage Solutions SpecificationGuide.Specification Information60", 66",72",or 78"24"45 1 /4"48"30"30"48"45 1 /4"24"60", 66",72",or 78"DDimensions DStyle DU.S.dA B C D dNumber dBased d dPriced d dLeft-Hand Worksurfaces30" 24" 60" 48" ZCV30246048 $ 81930" 24" 66" 48" ZCV30246648 $ 88630" 24" 72" 48" ZCV30247248 $ 95230" 24" 78" 48" ZCV30247848 $1021d d dRight-Hand Worksurfaces24" 30" 48" 60" ZCV24304860 $ 81924" 30" 48" 66" ZCV24304866 $ 88624" 30" 48" 72" ZCV24304872 $ 95224" 30" 48" 78" ZCV24304878 $1021d d dFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.290 Transitional Specification Guide

Bubble Visitor WorksurfacesBubble Visitor WorksurfacesStandard IncludesRequired to SpecifyWDTip: Pallets range between10–25 worksurfaces.cNeed help?Product details,page 266• Worksurface: laminate• Worksurface edge: vinyl default sides and vinyldefault torus edge on front• Cable scallops• Alignment plate package• Palletization of worksurfaces1 Style number2 Laminate color number for worksurface3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurface • Open Line laminate +$60 cSee Surface Materials Reference ManualMaterials plus cost of laminate to specify.Related • Cantilevers cSee Montage Solutions SpecificationProductsGuide.• Side support bracketscSee Montage Solutions SpecificationGuide.• Adjustable columncSee Montage Solutions SpecificationGuide.• Off-module worksurface bracketcSee Montage Solutions SpecificationGuide.• Off-module tie platecSee Montage Solutions SpecificationGuide.Specification Information30"DDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD W dNumber dBased d dPriced d dLeft-Hand Worksurfaces24" 30" ZBV2430L $38829"24"32 3 /4"35"30"32 3 /4"30"30" 30" ZBV3030L $402d d dRight-Hand Worksurfaces30"24" 30" ZBV2430R $38824" 29"32 3 /4"30"30" 35"30" 30" ZBV3030R $402d d d32 3 /4"MontageFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 291

Jetty WorksurfacesStandard IncludesRequired to SpecifyBCAcNeed help?Product details,page 266• Worksurface: laminate• Worksurface edge: vinyl default sides and vinyldefault torus edge on front• Cable scallops• Alignment plate package• Palletization of worksurfaces1 Style number2 Laminate color number for worksurface3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Tip: Pallets range between10–25 worksurfaces.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurface • Open Line laminate +$60 cSee Surface Materials Reference ManualMaterials plus cost of laminate to specify.Related • Cantilevers cSee Montage Solutions SpecificationProductsGuide.• Side support bracketscSee Montage Solutions SpecificationGuide.• Adjustable columncSee Montage Solutions SpecificationGuide.• Off-module worksurface bracketcSee Montage Solutions SpecificationGuide.• Off-module tie platecSee Montage Solutions SpecificationGuide.Specification InformationDDimensions DStyle DU.S.dA B C dNumber dBased d dPriced d dLeft-Hand Worksurfaces48"24" 48" 66" ZJ30246648L $74366"or78"24"24" 48" 78" ZJ30247848L $79430"48"30" 48" 66" ZJ30306648L $76866"or78"30"30" 48" 78" ZJ30307848L $821d d d30"Right-Hand Worksurfaces48"24" 48" 66" ZJ24304866R $74324"66",or78"24" 48" 78" ZJ24304878R $79430"48"30" 48" 66" ZJ30304866R $76830"66",or78"30" 48" 78" ZJ30304878R $821d d d30"292 Transitional Specification Guide

Bubble Jetty WorksurfacesBubble Jetty WorksurfacesCBATip: Pallets range between10–25 worksurfaces.cNeed help?Product details,page 266Standard Includes• Worksurface: laminate• Worksurface edge: vinyl default sides and vinyldefault torus edge on front• Cable scallops• Alignment plate package• Palletization of worksurfacesRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Laminate color number for worksurface3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurface • Open Line laminate +$60 cSee Surface Materials Reference ManualMaterials plus cost of laminate to specify.Related • Cantilevers cSee Montage Solutions SpecificationProductsGuide.• Side support bracketscSee Montage Solutions SpecificationGuide.• Adjustable columncSee Montage Solutions SpecificationGuide.• Off-module worksurface bracketcSee Montage Solutions SpecificationGuide.• Off-module tie platecSee Montage Solutions SpecificationGuide.Specification Information30"DDimensions DStyle DU.S.dA B C dNumber dBased d dPriced d dLeft-Hand Bubble Jetty Worksurfaces24" 30" 60" ZBJ243060L $73948"24"48"54"30"30"30" 30" 66" ZBJ303066L $697d d d48"Right-Hand Bubble Jetty Worksurfaces30"24" 30" 60" ZBJ243060R $73924"48"48"30"30"54"30" 30" 66" ZBJ303066R $697d d d48"MontageFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 293

Spanner and Fanned Spanner WorksurfacesWTip: Pallets range between10–25 worksurfaces.cNeed help?Product details,page 268Standard Includes• Worksurface: laminate• Worksurface edge: vinyl default sides and vinyldefault torus edge on front• Alignment plate package• Palletization of worksurfacesRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Laminate color number for worksurface3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurface • Open Line laminate +$60 cSee Surface Materials Reference ManualMaterials plus cost of laminate to specify.Related • Cantilevers cSee Montage Solutions SpecificationProductsGuide.• Adjustable columncSee Montage Solutions SpecificationGuide.Specification Information51"DWidth DStyle DU.S.d dNumber dBased d dPriced d dSpanner Worksurfaces51" ZSP51 $37736"36"36"63"51"63" ZSP63 $479d d dFanned Spanner Worksurfaces51" ZFS51 $47936"69"63"63" ZFS63 $580d d d81"For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.294 Transitional Specification Guide

Straight CountertopsStraight CountertopsTip: Straight countertops arenon-handed. You don’t needto specify left-hand or righthandversions.Tip: Countertops cannot bemounted off module.Tip: See Service Parts tospecify countertop bracketsrequired for frames manufacturedprior to June 11, 2001.cNeed help?Product details,page 270Standard Includes• Countertop: laminate• Countertop edge: vinyl default torus edge• Bracket: black paint onlyRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Laminate color number for countertopcSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurface • Open Line laminate +$60 cSee Surface Materials Reference ManualMaterials plus cost of laminate to specify.Specification InformationBoth Ends One End Both EndsRound Round StraightDFrame DStyle DStyle DStyle DU.S.dWidth dNumber dNumber dNumber dBased d d d dPriced d d d d24" ZSC24RR ZSC24RS ZSC24SS $26430" ZSC30RR ZSC30RS ZSC30SS $28836" ZSC36RR ZSC36RS ZSC36SS $31142" ZSC42RR ZSC42RS ZSC42SS $33448" ZSC48RR ZSC48RS ZSC48SS $35754" ZSC54RR ZSC54RS ZSC54SS $38060" ZSC60RR ZSC60RS ZSC60SS $38566" ZSC66RR ZSC66RS ZSC66SS $40872" ZSC72RR ZSC72RS ZSC72SS $43178" ZSC78RR ZSC78RS ZSC78SS $45584" ZSC84RR ZSC84RS ZSC84SS $47990" ZSC90RR* ZSC90RS ZSC90SS $50296" ZSC96RR* ZSC96RS* ZSC96SS $525d d d d d* Countertops are shipped in two piecesand assembled in the field.MontageFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 295

Corner CountertopsBoth Ends Round or Both Ends StraightTip: Countertops withstraight ends do not extendbeyond frame.Tip: See Service Parts tospecify countertop bracketsrequired for frames manufacturedprior to June 11, 2001.cNeed help?Product details,page 270Standard IncludesSpecification Information• Countertop: laminate• Countertop edge: vinyl default torus edge• Bracket: black paint onlyBoth EndsRoundBoth EndsStraightB C B CRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Laminate color number for countertopcSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.DDimensions of Frame DStyle DStyle DU.S.d dNumber dNumber dPricedB C d d d24" 24" ZCC24R24R ZCC24S24S $52824" 30" ZCC24R30R ZCC24S30S $55124" 36" ZCC24R36R ZCC24S36S $57524" 42" ZCC24R42R ZCC24S42S $59824" 48" ZCC24R48R ZCC24S48S $62130" 24" ZCC30R24R ZCC30S24S $55130" 30" ZCC30R30R ZCC30S30S $57530" 36" ZCC30R36R ZCC30S36S $59830" 42" ZCC30R42R ZCC30S42S $62130" 48" ZCC30R48R ZCC30S48S $64336" 24" ZCC36R24R ZCC36S24S $57536" 30" ZCC36R30R ZCC36S30S $59836" 36" ZCC36R36R ZCC36S36S $62136" 42" ZCC36R42R ZCC36S42S $64336" 48" ZCC36R48R ZCC36S48S $66942" 24" ZCC42R24R ZCC42S24S $59842" 30" ZCC42R30R ZCC42S30S $62142" 36" ZCC42R36R ZCC42S36S $64342" 42" ZCC42R42R ZCC42S42S $66942" 48" ZCC42R48R ZCC42S48S $69148" 24" ZCC48R24R ZCC48S24S $62148" 30" ZCC48R30R ZCC48S30S $64348" 36" ZCC48R36R ZCC48S36S $66948" 42" ZCC48R42R ZCC48S42S $69148" 48" ZCC48R48R ZCC48S48S $713d d d dFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.296 Transitional Specification Guide

Corner CountertopsLeft End Straight and Right End Round orLeft End Round and Right End StraightCorner CountertopsTip: Countertops withstraight ends do not extendbeyond frame.Tip: Countertops cannot bemounted off module.Tip: See Service Parts tospecify countertop bracketsrequired for frames manufacturedprior to June 11, 2001.cNeed help?Product details,page 270Standard IncludesSpecification Information• Countertop: laminate• Countertop edge: vinyl default torus edge• Bracket: black paint onlyLeft EndStraightLeft EndRoundB C B CDDimensions of Frame DStyle DStyle DU.S.d dNumber dNumber dPricedB C d d d24" 24" ZCC24S24R ZCC24R24S $52824" 30" ZCC24S30R ZCC24R30S $55124" 36" ZCC24S36R ZCC24R36S $57524" 42" ZCC24S42R ZCC24R42S $59824" 48" ZCC24S48R ZCC24R48S $62130" 24" ZCC30S24R ZCC30R24S $55130" 30" ZCC30S30R ZCC30R30S $57530" 36" ZCC30S36R ZCC30R36S $59830" 42" ZCC30S42R ZCC30R42S $62130" 48" ZCC30S48R ZCC30R48S $64336" 24" ZCC36S24R ZCC36R24S $57536" 30" ZCC36S30R ZCC36R30S $59836" 36" ZCC36S36R ZCC36R36S $62136" 42" ZCC36S42R ZCC36R42S $64336" 48" ZCC36S48R ZCC36R48S $66942" 24" ZCC42S24R ZCC42R24S $59842" 30" ZCC42S30R ZCC42R30S $62142" 36" ZCC42S36R ZCC42R36S $64342" 42" ZCC42S42R ZCC42R42S $66942" 48" ZCC42S48R ZCC42R48S $69148" 24" ZCC48S24R ZCC48R24S $62148" 30" ZCC48S30R ZCC48R30S $64348" 36" ZCC48S36R ZCC48R36S $66948" 42" ZCC48S42R ZCC48R42S $69148" 48" ZCC48S48R ZCC48R48S $713d d d dRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Laminate color number for countertopcSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.MontageFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 297

Adjustable-Height Worksurfaceswith CrankTip: Adjustable-height mechanismrequires assemblyand attachment to theworksurface.Tip: Extension-link worksurfacesmay be attachedonly to corner or bi-levelworksurfaces.cNeed help?Product details,page 274Standard Includes• Worksurface: laminate• Torus-edge front: vinyl (PVC) default• Side and back edges: vinyl (PVC) default• Adjustable-height column mechanism and base:paint price group 1• Crank handleRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Laminate color number for worksurface3 Paint color number for column and base4 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurface • Paint price group 1 No cost Specify paint color number.Materials • Paint price group 2 +$34 Specify paint color number.• Paint price group 3 +$58 Specify paint color number.• Accent laminate +$60 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.• Open Line laminate +$60 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.Tip: 48"W dual corner andbi-level corner worksurfacecan support both a keyboardand a mouse pad onthe same surface.For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.298 Transitional Specification Guide

Adjustable-HeightWorksurfacesSpecification InformationDDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD W dNumber dBased d dPriced d dCorner Worksurfaces22 1 ⁄4" 39 1 ⁄4" ZCKSC42 $173822 1 ⁄4" 45 1 ⁄4" ZCKSC48 $1787d d dDual Corner Worksurfaces22 1 ⁄4" 39 1 ⁄4" ZCKDC42 $238622 1 ⁄4" 45 1 ⁄4" ZCKDC48 $2435d d dBi-Level Corner Worksurfaces22 1 ⁄4" 39 1 ⁄4" ZCKBC42 $238622 1 ⁄4" 45 1 ⁄4" ZCKBC48 $2435d d dStraight Worksurfaces28 1 ⁄4" 40" ZCKSS42 $164028 1 ⁄4" 46" ZCKSS48 $1694d d dDual Straight Worksurfaces34 1 ⁄4" 40" ZCKDS42 $228834 1 ⁄4" 46" ZCKDS48 $2342d d dBi-Level Straight Worksurfaces34 1 ⁄4" 40" ZCKBS42 $228834 1 ⁄4" 46" ZCKBS48 $2342d d dTip: Gas cylinder packagecan be field installed tosingle and dual crankadjustableworksurfacesto provide additional lift.cSee Montage SolutionsSpecification Guide.MontageFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 299

Adjustable-Height Extension WorksurfacesCrank AdjustableTip: Extension-link worksurfacesmay be attachedonly to corner or bi-levelworksurfaces. They cannotbe attached to dualworksurfaces.Tip: Adjustable-height mechanismrequires assemblyand attachment to theworksurface.cNeed help?Product details,page 275Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurface • Paint price group 1 No cost Specify paint color number.Materials • Paint price group 2 +$17 Specify paint color number.• Paint price group 3 +$29 Specify paint color number.• Accent laminate +$60 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.• Open Line laminate +$60 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.Specification InformationDDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD W dNumber dBased d dPriced d dLeft-HandStandard Includes22 1 ⁄4" 24" ZCKEL24 $132922 1 ⁄4" 36" ZCKEL36 $1449d d d• Worksurface: laminate• Torus-edge front: vinyl (PVC) default• Side and back edges: vinyl (PVC) default• Adjustable-height mechanism• Leg shroud and foot: paint price group 1• Gas cylinderRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Laminate color number for worksurface3 Paint color number for leg shroudand foot4 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Right-Hand22 1 ⁄4" 24" ZCKER24 $132922 1 ⁄4" 36" ZCKER36 $1449d d dFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.300 Transitional Specification Guide

Adjustable-Height Worksurfaceswith Electrically Adjustable Column SupportAdjustable-HeightWorksurfacesTip: Adjustable-heightmechanism requiresattachment to the base andworksurface.cNeed help?Product details,page 276Standard Includes• Worksurface with 150-pound weight capacity: laminate• Torus-edge front: vinyl (PVC) default• Side and back edges: vinyl (PVC) default• Drawer-mounted two-button controller• Adjustable-height column mechanism and base:paint price group 1• 9' power cord: black vinyl only• Attachment hardwareRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Laminate color number for worksurface3 Paint color number for column and base4 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurface • Paint price group 1 No cost Specify paint color number.Materials • Paint price group 2 +$ 34 Specify paint color number.• Paint price group 3 +$ 58 Specify paint color number.• Accent laminate +$ 60 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.• Open Line laminate +$ 60 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.Programmable • Drawer-mounted six-button +$305 Specify with SSM.Memorycontroller with 3x3programmable memoryand soft-start/soft-stopHigh-Performance • 250-pound weight capacity +$713 Specify with 250SSM.Adjustable-Height and drawer-mountedWorksurface with six-button controller withProgrammable 3x3 programmable memoryMemoryand soft-start/soft-stopSpecification InformationDDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD W dNumber DBased d dPriced d dCorner Worksurfaces22 1 ⁄4" 39 1 ⁄4" ZECSC42 $209022 1 ⁄4" 45 1 ⁄4" ZECSC48 $2139d d dDual Corner Worksurfaces22 1 ⁄4" 39 1 ⁄4" ZECDC42 $273822 1 ⁄4" 45 1 ⁄4" ZECDC48 $2787d d dStraight Worksurfaces28 1 ⁄4" 40" ZECSS42 $199228 1 ⁄4" 46" ZECSS48 $2046d d dDual Straight Worksurfaces34 1 ⁄4" 40" ZECDS42 $264034 1 ⁄4" 46" ZECDS48 $2694d d dMontageTransitional Specification Guide 301

302 Transitional Specification Guide

SeatingSeatingWork ChairsDrive 461 Series Work Chairs Loop Arm Option 304Leap 462 Series Value Package Work Chairswith Arch Backframe 306Rapport 460 Series Work Chairs 312Sensor 458 Series Work Chairs 318Multipurpose/Guest ChairsTrilogy 421, 422, and 423 Series 326Transitional Specification Guide 303

Drive 461 Series Work Chairs Loop Arm Option GOptions U.S. Price Required to SpecifyLoop Arms • Independent height- –$21 Specify with height-adjustableadjustableloop arms.• Fixed height –$96 Specify with fixed loop arms.304 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

Drive 461 Series WorkChairs Loop Arm OptionSeatingTransitional Specification Guide 305

Leap 462 Series Value Package Work ChairsArch BackframeStandard UpholsteryTip: Value packagemodels are available withsurface material optionsonly.Tip: When specifyingDesigntex Graded-In orCOM fabric, you must usevalue package 10 or 12.Standard Includes• Upper back force• 5" pneumatic seat-height adjustment• Variable back stop• Lower back firmness• Rectilinear independent height-, width-, and pivotadjustablearms: black plastic• 3" adjustable seat depth and seat edge angle• Frame, seat shell, outer back, and five-arm base: plastic• Standard upholstery design: fabric price group 1• 3"-diameter, hard-composition, dual-wheel casters: black• 5" travel for additional lumbar supportRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Plastic color for frame, outer back,and base3 Fabric color number for upholsteryon seat and back4 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurfaceUpholsteryMaterials • Fabric price group 1 No cost Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 2 +$ 20 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 3 +$ 40 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 4 +$ 55 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 5 +$ 70 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 6 +$ 85 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 7 +$100 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 8 +$125 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 9 +$155 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 10 +$175 Specify fabric color number.• Customer’s Own Material No cost cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual(COM) on sewn upholsteryto specify.For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.306 Transitional Specification Guide

Leap 462 SeriesValue Package Work ChairsLeap Value Package 9Arch BackframeFull BackLumbar-Height AdjustmentSteelcase Classics or Designtex EnvironmentalImpact Collection Fabrics OnlyStandard Upholstery DesignLeap Value Package 10Arch BackframeFull BackLumbar-Height AdjustmentDesigntex Graded-In or COMwith Sewn Upholstery DetailStandard Upholstery DesignSeatingStyle Number 462LEAPL$1218 U.S. for Price Group 1Style Number 462LEAPLX$1248 U.S. for COMLeap Value Package 11Arch BackframeHigh BackLumbar-Height AdjustmentSteelcase Classics or Designtex EnvironmentalImpact Collection Fabrics OnlyStandard Upholstery DesignLeap Value Package 12Arch BackframeHigh BackLumbar-Height AdjustmentDesigntex Graded-In or COMwith Sewn Upholstery DetailStandard Upholstery DesignStyle Number 462LEAP1L$1268 U.S. for Price Group 1Style Number 462LEAP1LX$1298 U.S. for COMTransitional Specification Guide 307

Leap 462 Series Work ChairsArch BackframeStandard Upholstery on Back and SeatStandard IncludesRequired to Specify• Upper back force1 Style number• 5" pneumatic seat-height adjustment2 Plastic color for frame, seat shell, outer• Variable back stopback, and base• Lower back firmness3 Fabric color number for upholstery• Flexing front edge seaton seat• Rectilinear independent height-, width-, and pivotadjustablearms and soft arm caps, if selected: black plastic cSee Surface Materials in the electronic4 Options, if selected (see below)• Frame, seat shell, outer back, and five-arm base: plastic price list.• On adjustable seat models: 3" seat depth adjustmentand seat edge angle adjustment• Standard upholstery design: fabric price group 1• 3"-diameter, hard-composition, dual-wheel casters: blackTip: Use an X suffix whenspecifying COM orDesigntex Graded-In.There is a $30 U.S.upcharge plus the costof the fabric price groupselected.Tip: The Designtex EnvironmentalImpact collectiondoes not require an X suffixunless the sewn upholsterydetail is desired.Tip: Always add suffixes inalphabetical order whenspecifying options to Leapseating.Tip: Fire Code Seating(FCS) option is availablewith certain upholsteryfabric choices only.cSee Seating SpecificationGuide.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurfaceUpholsteryMaterials • Fabric price group 1 No cost Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 2 +$ 20 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 3 +$ 40 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 4 +$ 55 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 5 +$ 70 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 6 +$ 85 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 7 +$100 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 8 +$125 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 9 +$155 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 10 +$175 Specify fabric color number.• Customer’s Own Material (COM) +$ 30 Add suffix X to the style number.or Designtex Graded-IncSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.• Steelcase leather upholstery +$590 Add suffix S to the style number andspecify leather color number.• Steelcase vinyl +$299 Add suffix S to the style number andspecify vinyl color number.• Customer’s Own Leather (COL) +$299 Add suffix S to the style number andor Customer’s Own Vinyl (COV)specify leather or vinyl color number.cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.• Fire Code Seating (FCS) +$ 50 Add suffix F to the style number.• Soil-retardant treatment applied to +$ 17 Specify with soil-retardant treatment.upholstery fabricStitched Edge • Steelcase Classics Collection fabrics +$ 30 Add suffix X to the style number.Detailwith stitched edge detail on back onlyFixed-Height • Rectilinear soft arm caps –$125 Specify with rectilinear fixed soft arms.Arms • Rectilinear upholstered arm caps –$ 85 Specify with rectilinear fixed upholsteredarms.Independent • Rectilinear upholstered arm caps +$ 40 Specify with rectilinear height-, width-,Height-, Width-,and pivot-adjustable upholstered arms.and Pivot-Adjustable ArmsSeat Height • 7" pneumatic seat-height adjustment +$ 35 Specify with 7" pneumatic seatheightadjustment.Seat Depth • 3" seat depth adjustment: available –$ 50 Specify with seat depth adjustment only.on adjustable seat models onlyLumbar Height • 5" travel for additional lumbar support +$ 50 Specify with adjustable lumbar height.Casters • Soft, dual-wheel casters for use on +$ 18 Specify with soft casters.hard floorsFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.308 Transitional Specification Guide

Leap 462 SeriesWork ChairsSpecification InformationFull-Backwith Height-, Width-, and Pivot-Adjustable ArmsFull-Backwithout ArmsSeatingDStyle DU.S. DStyle DU.S.dNumber dBase dNumber dBased dPrice d dPriced d d dWithout Adjustable Seat (No Seat Depth or Seat Edge Angle)4621110 $1098 4621100 $ 873With Adjustable Seat (Seat Depth and Seat Edge Angle)4621210 $1198 4621200 $ 973d d d dHigh-Backwith Height-, Width-, and Pivot-Adjustable ArmsHigh-Backwithout ArmsDStyle DU.S. DStyle DU.S.dNumber dBase dNumber dBased dPrice d dPriced d d dWithout Adjustable Seat (No Seat Depth or Seat Edge Angle)4621111 $1148 4621101 $ 923With Adjustable Seat (Seat Depth and Seat Edge Angle)4621211 $1248 4621201 $1023d d d dFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 309

Leap 462 Series Full-Back StoolsArch BackframeStandard Upholstery on Back and SeatStandard Includes• Upper back force• 8" pneumatic seat-height adjustment• Variable back stop• Lower back firmness• Flexing front edge seat• Rectilinear independent height-, width-, and pivotadjustablearms and soft arm caps, if selected:black plastic• Frame, seat shell, outer back, five-arm base, and footring: plastic• Adjustable foot ring 4"• On adjustable seat models: 2 1 ⁄4" seat depth adjustmentand seat edge angle adjustment• Standard upholstery design: fabric price group 1• 2"-diameter, hard-composition, dual-wheel casters: blackRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Plastic color for frame, seat shell, outerback, and foot ring3 Fabric color number for upholsteryon seat4 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Tip: Use an X suffix whenspecifying COM orDesigntex Graded-In.There is a $30 U.S.upcharge plus the costof the fabric price groupselected.Tip: The Designtex EnvironmentalImpact collectiondoes not require an X suffixunless the sewn upholsterydetail is desired.Tip: Always add suffixes inalphabetical order whenspecifying options to Leapseating.Tip: Fire Code Seating(FCS) option is availablewith certain upholsteryfabric choices only.cSee Seating SpecificationGuide.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurfaceUpholsteryMaterials • Fabric price group 1 No cost Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 2 +$ 20 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 3 +$ 40 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 4 +$ 55 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 5 +$ 70 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 6 +$ 85 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 7 +$100 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 8 +$125 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 9 +$155 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 10 +$175 Specify fabric color number.• Customer’s Own Material (COM) +$ 30 Add suffix X to the style number.or Designtex Graded-IncSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.• Steelcase leather upholstery +$590 Add suffix S to the style number andspecify leather color number.• Steelcase vinyl +$299 Add suffix S to the style number andspecify vinyl color number.• Customer’s Own Leather (COL) +$299 Add suffix S to the style number andor Customer’s Own Vinyl (COV)specify leather or vinyl color number.cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.• Fire Code Seating (FCS) +$ 50 Add suffix F to the style number.• Soil-retardant treatment applied to +$ 17 Specify with soil-retardant treatment.upholstery fabricStitched Edge • Steelcase Classics Collection +$ 30 Add suffix X to the style number.Detailfabrics with stitched edge detailon back onlyFixed-Height • Rectilinear soft arm caps –$125 Specify with rectilinear fixed soft arms.Arms • Rectilinear upholstered arm caps –$ 85 Specify with rectilinear fixed upholsteredarms.Independent • Rectilinear upholstered arm caps +$ 40 Specify with rectilinear height-, width-,Height-, Width-,and pivot-adjustable upholstered arms.and Pivot-Adjustable ArmsSeat Depth • 2 1 ⁄4" seat depth adjustment: available –$ 50 Specify with seat depth adjustment only.on adjustable seat models onlyLumbar Height • 5" travel for additional lumbar support +$ 50 Specify with adjustable lumbar height.Casters • Soft, dual-wheel casters for use +$ 18 Specify with soft casters.on hard floorsFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.310 Transitional Specification Guide

Leap 462 SeriesFull-Back StoolsSpecification InformationFull-Backwith Height-, Width-, and Pivot-Adjustable ArmsFull-Backwithout ArmsSeatingDStyle DU.S. DStyle DU.S.dNumber dBase dNumber dBased dPrice d dPriced d d dWithout Adjustable Seat (No Seat Depth or Seat Edge Angle)4627110 $1275 4627100 $1050With Adjustable Seat (Seat Depth and Seat Edge Angle)4627210 $1375 4627200 $1150d d d dFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 311

Rapport 460 Series.Rapport is a high-performancechair offering highdesign. Its soft, residential,executive look combinedwith its adjustability providesa solution for thosewho sit for long periods andneed a chair that fits a highimage.Arm height adjustsindependently within a 4"range to help relieve upperback and shoulder fatigue.Seat depth adjusts withina 3" range to accommodatevariations in leg length andalleviate pressure behindthighs.Seat height adjustswithin a 5" range from16"H to 21"H and features apneumatic adjustmentmechanism. Meets ANSI/HFES standards.Five-arm base isstandard.Lumbar pillow adjustsup and down within a 4"range to help ensurehealthful back posture.Tip: The lumbar pillow isnot removable.Arm width adjustswithin a 4" range for eacharm to provide forearmsupport in neutral positionfor 5th to 95th percentileoffice workers.Arm caps can pivotindependently 14° in and21° out to accommodateindividual user preferences.Variable back stop isstandard on all Rapportchairs.Seat angle adjusts forward,upright, and reclinedto suit user.Casters have hard dualwheelsthat roll smoothlyon carpets. Soft dual-wheelcasters are available foruse on hard floors or chairmats.Adjustment FeaturesSeat Adjustments5"Seat height adjustspneumatically. To lower,hold handle up whileseated. To raise, hold handleup and lift your weightoff the chair.Seat angle adjusts bylifting handle up; shift bodyweight to desired angle.Release handle to lock.3"Seat depth adjusts bylifting up handle. Slide seatto preferred depth andrelease handle to lock...312 Transitional Specification Guide

Rapport 460 SeriesAdjustment FeaturesBack AdjustmentsArm Adjustments4"Lumbar adjusts bygrasping lumbar pillow andsliding up or down to adjust.4"4"Back tension adjustsby turning knob under thechair. Turn knob clockwiseto increase tension,counterclockwise todecrease.Variable back stop.Hold switch forward torecline. Lean back todesired back angle.Release switch to set tiltrange.Tip: To lock in upright position,remove weight fromback and release switch...Arm height adjustsindependently within arange of 4". Squeeze triggersin while moving armsup or down. Releasing triggerslocks arms in position.Arm width adjusts independentlyon chairs withthis option. Grasp arm andmove in or out. Arm willstay where positioned.Arms pivot independentlyon models with height-,width-, and pivot-adjustablearms. Grasp arm and pushfront to left or right. Pivotwidth adjustment is 14° inand 21° out.Arms are standard at8 1 ⁄2"H above seat. Independentheight-adjustable arms,independent height- andwidth-adjustable arms, andindependent height-, width-,and pivot-adjustable armsare optional..Surface MaterialscSee surface materials inthe electronic price list forspecific availability or referto the Surface MaterialsReference Manual for furtherinformation.Hard components(base, arms, arm caps,outer back shell, andcasters)• Monochromatic color fromlist of seating plastic colornumbers will apply to allhard components.Outer back• Plastic to match monochromaticcolor of other“hard components”• Fully upholstered backArms• Soft vinyl arm caps tomatch the monochromaticcolor of the other “hardcomponents”• Upholstered arm capsUpholstery• Fabric• Fabric with soil-retardanttreatment (option)• Leather• Vinyl (not available onfullyupholstered models)Tip: Lumbar pillow willmatch upholstery, or youcan choose the option thatallows you to specify adifferent fabric for thelumbar pillow.All Steelcase seatingwith standard upholsteryfabrics complieswith requirements of theBIFMA First Generation VoluntaryUpholstered FurnitureFlammability Standard,as well as the State of CaliforniaTechnical Bulletin117. All standard seating islabeled to be in compliancewith California TB117.Programs & ServicescSee the Surface MaterialsReference Manual for furtherdetail about programsand services offered forseating.The Customer’s OwnMaterial (COM) Programoffers the opportunity for customersto select fabrics thatare not offered through thestandard Steelcase surfacematerials program for use onSteelcase products. Throughthe COM program, Steelcasewill test your materials forapplication on Steelcaseproducts. Once approved,you can place your order.Steelcase will facilitate theentire ordering process andgive you a production schedule.Steelcase will order theCOM fabric directly from thetextile manufacturer. For upto-dateinformation regardingfabric test results for all COMfabrics and details regardingyardage requirements formost Seating lines, visit theCOM Web site. To locate theCOM Web site:• Visit www.steelcase.com• Click on “Services”• Select “Steelcase COM(Customer’s Own Materials)”from the pull-down menu• Click on the “Go” buttonSoil retardants are treatmentsthat provide long-termsoil and stain resistance to afabric without affecting theshade or the integrity of thefabric. The following SteelcaseTextiles are availablepre-treated with soil retardant.(You do not need toselect the soil-retardantoption for these fabrics andincur the $17 upcharge.)• Canzoné• Calvalcade• Jacks• Link• Regis• Roulette• Spyder• SweepstakesSoil-retardant treatment isavailable on all other seatingfabrics at an additional $17U.S. and $23 Canadian perseating unit. To order thisoption, please select “Soil-Retardant Treatment” under“Optional Accessories.”For soil-retardant treatmenton COMs, please select“Soil-Retardant Treatment”under “Optional Accessories.”Minimums or additionalyardage may berequired. Please contact thevendor directly for specificinformation.Extended lead times may benecessary for this service...Contact your SteelcaseSales Service representativeor contact Line 1 at1.888.STEELCASE(1.888.783.3522).Fire CodescSee Seating SpecificationGuide for upholstery fabricsavailable for use with FCSmodification. Rapport fullyupholstered models offerthe Fire Code Seatingoption on the followingupholstery fabrics only:Canzoné, Cavalcade,Hampstead, Jacks, Leather,Link, Regis, Roulette, Spyder,Sweepstakes, and Zoe.Steelcase offers FireCode Seating modification(FCS) on nearly all seatingmodels. The most rigorousfire codes in the nationhave been developed inCalifornia, and the SteelcaseFCS modification isdesigned to meet thosecodes. Fire Code Seating(FCS) indicates that a productis constructed to meetthe strict fire code requirementsof high public occupancyareas such astheaters, meeting rooms,and lobbies. The FCS standardswill meet both theState of California HomeFurnishing Technical Bulletin133 (Cal TB 133) andBoston Fire Code (BFC).Boston adopted the CaliforniaHome Furnishing TechnicalBulletin TB 133 teststandard in 1992.Local codes may havespecial requirements forupholstery.DimensionscPage 314ResourcesPrinted MaterialscRapport Brochure(S11348)Computer ToolscElectronic User Disk(S2340)—WindowscProduct Comparison CD(S10847).SeatingTransitional Specification Guide 313

DimensionsRapport 460 SeriesDFeatures DOverall DSeat DFunctional DSeat DSeat DBack DBackd dDepth Width Height dDepth dSeat dWidth dHeight dWidth dHeightd d d dDepth d dfrom d dfromd d d d d dFloor d dSeatd d d d d d d dd d d d d d d dd d d d d d d dRapport 460 SeriesFull-Back Work ChairsHigh-Back Work Chairs23 1 ⁄2"–26 1 ⁄2" 27 1 ⁄2" 37"–42" 19 1 ⁄2" 16 1 ⁄4"* 20" 16"–21" 21" 21"23 1 ⁄2"–26 1 ⁄2" 28 1 ⁄4" 41"–46" 19 1 ⁄2" 16 1 ⁄4"* 20" 16"–21" 21" 25"* Models with adjustable seat depth 151 ⁄4"–18 1 ⁄4".Overall width27 1 /2"W or 28 1 /4"WBack width21"WWidth between arms20"W: Fixed andheight-adjustablearms12"W to 20"W:Width-adjustable arms10 1 /2"W to 19 1 /4"H: Height-,width-, and pivot-adjustablearmsOverall depth24 1 /2"D: Fixed seat depth23 1 /2"D to 26 1 /2"D: Adjustable seat depthSeat-to-back angle97° to 122°Arm to floor25"H to 30"H: Chair with T-arms23"H to 32"H: Chair withheight-adjustable armsBack lumbar height6" to 10"HOverall height37"H to 42"H: Full-back chair41"H to 46"H: High-back chairSeat pan angle-2° to +9°Seat height16"H to 21"HSeat width20"W314 Transitional Specification Guide

DimensionsDBack DWidth DWidth DWidth DArm DArm DArm DSeat DAngledLumbar dBetween dBetween dBetween dto dHeight dCap dPan dBetweendHeight dFixed-Height dHeight- and dHeight-, dFloor dfrom dPivot dAngle dSeat andd dand dWidth- dWidth-, and d dSeat dRange d dBackd dHeight- dAdjustable dPivot- d d d d dd dAdjustable dArms dAdjustable d d d d dd dArms d dArms d d d d dSeatingFull-Back Work Chairs6"–10" 20" 12"–20" 10 1 ⁄2"–19 1 ⁄4" 23"–32" 7"–11" 35° -2°–+9° 97°–122°High-Back Work Chairs6"–10" 20" 12"–20" 10 1 ⁄2"–19 1 ⁄4" 23"–32" 7"–11" 35° -2°–+9° 97°–122°Transitional Specification Guide 315

Rapport 460 Series Work ChairsStandard Includes• Seat angle adjustment• Lumbar pillow adjustment• Variable back stop• Back tension adjustment• Fixed seat depth• Fixed-height arms, if selected: plastic colorwith 10" soft arm caps to match base• Outer back: plastic color• Upholstery: fabric price group 1• Five arm base: plastic color• 2 1 ⁄5"-diameter, hard-composition, dual wheel casters:plastic to match baseRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Plastic color number for base, outerback, arms, and casters3 Fabric or leather color number forupholstery4 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Tip: Fire Code Seating(FCS) option is availablewith certain upholsteryfabric choices only.cSee Seating SpecificationGuide.Tip: Always add suffixes inalphabetical order whenspecifying options toRapport seating.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurfaceUpholsteryMaterials • Fabric price group 1 No cost Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 2 +$ 40 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 3 +$ 85 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 4 +$125 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 5 +$155 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 6 +$185 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 7 +$215 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 8 +$265 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 9 +$350 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 10 +$400 Specify fabric color number.• Leather price group +$275 Specify leather color number• Customer’s Own Material/ +$ 30 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manualleather (COM/COL)to specify.• Fire Code Seating (FCS) +$ 50 Add suffix F to the style number.• Soil-retardant treatment +$ 17 Specify with soil-retardant treatment.applied to upholstery fabricFully upholstered• Fabric fully upholstered +$118 Add suffix U to the style number.outer back• Leather fully upholstered +$466 Add suffix U to the style number.outer backLumbar pillow• Alternative color for lumbar +$ 57 Specify alternate fabric or leather colorpillownumber for lumbar pillow.Fixed-Height • 10" soft arm caps No cost Specify style number with arms.ArmsTip: Adjustable arms areavailable on models witharms only.Independent • 10" soft arm caps +$ 68 Specify with height-adjustable arms.Height-AdjustableArmsIndependent • 10" soft arm caps +$125 Specify with height- and width-adjustableHeight-arms.and Width-AdjustableArmscDetailed dimensions, seeSeating Specification Guide.For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Independent • 10" soft arm caps +$153 Specify with height-, width-, and pivot-Height-, Width-,adjustable arms and soft arm caps.and Pivot-Adjustable ArmsAdjustable Seat • Depth adjustable +$ 85 Specify with adjustable seat depth.Casters • Soft, dual-wheel casters +$ 18 Specify with soft casters.for use on hard floors316 Transitional Specification Guide

Rapport 460 SeriesWork ChairsSpecification InformationHigh-Back with ArmsHigh-Back without ArmsSeatingU.S.U.S.DStyle DBase DStyle DBasedNumber dPrice dNumber dPriced d d dPneumatic4605331 $1159 4605301 $1029d d d dFull-Back with ArmsFull-Back without ArmsU.S.U.S.DStyle DBase DStyle DBasedNumber dPrice dNumber dPriced d d dPneumatic4605330 $1063 4605300 $ 933d d d dFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 317

Sensor 458 Series Size III High-Back Work Chairs GStandard Includes• Synchro-tilt mechanism• Outer back and outer seat: plastic color• Back tension adjustment• Upholstery: fabric price group 1• Five-arm base: plastic color• 2 1 ⁄5"-diameter, hard composition, dual-wheelcasters: plastic color to match baseRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Plastic color number for base, outerback, outer seat, and casters3 Fabric color number for upholstery4 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Tip: Always add suffixesin alphabetical order whenspecifying options to Sensorseating.Tip: Fire Code Seating(FCS) option is availablewith certain upholsteryfabric choices only.cSee Seating SpecificationGuide.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurfaceUpholsteryMaterials • Fabric price group 1 No cost Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 2 +$ 20 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 3 +$ 40 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 4 +$ 55 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 5 +$ 70 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 6 +$ 100 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 7 +$ 140 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 8 +$ 185 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 9 +$ 220 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 10 +$ 255 Specify fabric color number.• Customer’s Own Material +$ 30 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual(COM)to specify.• Steelcase leather +$ 815 Add suffix S to the style number andupholsteryspecify leather color number forupholstery.• Customer’s Own Leather +$ 549 Add suffix S to the style number.(COL)cSee Surface Materials Reference Manualto specify.• Fire Code Seating (FCS) +$ 50 Add suffix F to the style number.• Soil-retardant treatment +$ 17 Specify with soil-retardant treatment.applied to upholstery fabricFully upholstered• Fabric fully upholstered outer +$ 132 Add suffix U to the style number.back and outer seat• Steelcase leather fully +$1227 Add suffix SU to the style number andupholstered outer backspecify leather color number.and outer seat• Customer’s Own Leather +$ 841 Add suffix SU to the style number.(COL) fully upholsteredcSee Surface Materials Reference Manualouter back and outer seatto specify.Casters • Soft, dual-wheel casters +$ 18 Specify with soft casters.for use on hard floorscDetailed dimensions, seeSeating Specification Guide.For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.318 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

Sensor 458 Series Size IIIHigh-Back Work ChairsSpecification InformationHeight- and Width-Adjustable ArmsOmega ArmsSeatingDStyle DU.S. DStyle DU.S.dNumber dBase dNumber dBased dPrice d dPriced d d dSoft Arm CapsPneumatic4581235W G $1253 4581225 G $1096Pneumatic with Variable Back Stop4581435W G $1312 4581425 G $1155d d d dFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List319Last order entry November 18, 2005

Sensor 458 Series Size II Adjustable-Back Work ChairsWith Upholstered Arm Caps, Height-Adjustable Arms, and Fixed T-ArmsTip: Back height may beadjusted 3".Tip: Leather upholstery isavailable on Size IIadjustable-back models.Order through Specials.Tip: Fire Code Seating(FCS) option is availablewith certain upholsteryfabric choices only.cSee Seating SpecificationGuide.Tip: Always add suffixesin alphabetical order whenspecifying options to Sensorseating.Standard Includes• Synchro-tilt mechanism• Back tension adjustment• Arms, if selected: plastic color to match base• Outer back and outer seat: plastic color• Upholstery: fabric price group 1• Five-arm base: plastic color• 2 1 ⁄5"-diameter, hard composition, dual-wheelcasters: plastic color to match baseRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Plastic color number for base, outerback, outer seat, arms, and casters3 Fabric color number for upholstery4 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurfaceUpholsteryMaterials • Fabric price group 1 No cost Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 2 +$ 20 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 3 +$ 40 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 4 +$ 55 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 5 +$ 70 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 6 +$100 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 7 +$140 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 8 +$185 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 9 +$220 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 10 +$255 Specify fabric color number.• Customer’s Own Material +$ 30 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual(COM)to specify.• Fire Code Seating (FCS) +$ 50 Add suffix F to the style number.• Soil-retardant treatment +$ 17 Specify with soil-retardant treatment.applied to upholstery fabricFully upholstered• Fabric fully upholstered +$132 Add suffix U to the style number.outer back and outer seatCasters • Soft, dual-wheel casters +$ 18 Specify with soft casters.for use on hard floorsSpecification InformationHeight- and Width-Adjustable ArmsDStyledNumberddDU.S.dBasedPricedUpholstered Arm CapsPneumatic4581266W $1215Pneumatic with Variable Back Stop4581466W $1274ddFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.320 Transitional Specification Guide

Sensor 458 Series Size IIAdjustable-BackWork ChairsSeatingFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 321

Sensor 458 Series Size I Mid-Back Work ChairsTip: Leather upholstery isavailable on Size I mid-backmodels. Order throughSpecials.Tip: Fire Code Seating(FCS) option is availablewith certain upholsteryfabric choices only.Tip: Always add suffixesin alphabetical order whenspecifying options to Sensorseating.Standard Includes• Synchro-tilt mechanism• Arms, if selected: plastic color to match base• Back tension adjustment• Outer back and outer seat: plastic color• Upholstery: fabric price group 1• Five-arm base: plastic color• 2 1 ⁄5"-diameter, hard composition, dual-wheelcasters: plastic color to match baseRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Plastic color number for base, outerback, outer seat, arms, and casters3 Fabric color number for upholstery4 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurfaceUpholsteryMaterials • Fabric price group 1 No cost Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 2 +$ 20 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 3 +$ 40 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 4 +$ 55 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 5 +$ 70 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 6 +$100 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 7 +$140 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 8 +$185 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 9 +$220 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 10 +$255 Specify fabric color number.• Customer’s Own Material +$ 30 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual(COM)to specify.• Fire Code Seating (FCS) +$ 50 Add suffix F to the style number.• Soil-retardant treatment +$ 17 Specify with soil-retardant treatment.applied to upholstery fabricFully upholstered• Fabric fully upholstered +$132 Add suffix U to the style number.outer back and outer seatCasters • Soft, dual-wheel casters +$ 18 Specify with soft casters.for use on hard floorsSpecification InformationHeight- and Width-Adjustable ArmsDStyledNumberddSoft Arm CapsPneumaticDU.S.dBasedPriced4581231W $1075Pneumatic with Variable Back Stop4581431W $1134ddcSpecification Information, continuedFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.322 Transitional Specification Guide

Sensor 458 Series Size IMid-Back Work ChairscSpecification Information, continuedSpecification InformationOmega ArmsSeatingDStyledNumberddSoft Arm CapsPneumaticDU.S.dBasedPriced4581221 $918Pneumatic with Variable Back Stop4581421 $977ddDStyledNumberddWithout ArmsPneumaticDU.S.dBasedPriced4581201 $794Pneumatic with Variable Back Stop4581401 $853ddFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 323

Sensor 458 Series Size I Mid-Back High StoolsStandard Includes• Synchro-tilt mechanism• Back tension adjustment• Outer back and outer seat: plastic color• Upholstery: fabric price group 1• Five-arm base: plastic color• Foot ring: plastic color• 2 1 ⁄5"-diameter, hard composition, dual-wheelcasters: plastic color to match baseRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Plastic color number for base, outerback, outer seat, and casters3 Fabric color number for upholstery4 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Tip: Leather upholstery isavailable on Size I mid-backmodels. Order throughSpecials.Tip: Fire Code Seating(FCS) option is availablewith certain upholsteryfabric choices only.cSee Seating SpecificationGuide.Tip: Always add suffixesin alphabetical order whenspecifying options to Sensorseating.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurfaceUpholsteryMaterials • Fabric price group 1 No cost Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 2 +$ 20 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 3 +$ 40 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 4 +$ 55 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 5 +$ 70 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 6 +$100 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 7 +$140 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 8 +$185 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 9 +$220 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 10 +$255 Specify fabric color number.• Customer’s Own Material +$ 30 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual(COM)to specify.• Fire Code Seating (FCS) +$ 50 Add suffix F to the style number.• Soil-retardant treatment +$ 17 Specify with soil-retardant treatment.applied to upholstery fabricFully upholstered• Fabric fully upholstered +$132 Add suffix U to the style number.outer back and outer seatCasters • Soft, dual-wheel casters +$ 18 Specify with soft casters.for use on hard floorsSpecification InformationDStyledNumberddWithout ArmsPneumaticDU.S.dBasedPriced4588201 $1094Pneumatic with Variable Back Stop4588401 $1153ddcDetailed dimensions, seeSeating Specification Guide.cSpecification Information, continuedFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.324 Transitional Specification Guide

Sensor 458 Series Size IMid-Back High StoolscSpecification Information, continuedSpecification InformationHeight- and Width-Adjustable ArmsSeatingDStyledNumberddSoft Arm CapsPneumaticDU.S.dBasedPriced4588231W $1375Pneumatic with Variable Back Stop4588431W $1434ddOmega ArmsDStyledNumberddSoft Arm CapsPneumaticDU.S.dBasedPriced4588221 $1218Pneumatic with Variable Back Stop4588421 $1277ddTransitional Specification Guide 325

Trilogy 421 Series Sled-Base Multipurpose/Guest ChairsStandard Includes• Arm caps: black plastic• Upholstery: fabric price group 1• Frame and arms, if selected: 9201 Polished ChromeRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Fabric color number for upholstery3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Tip: Fire Code Seating(FCS) option is availablewith certain upholsteryfabric choices only.cSee Seating SpecificationGuide.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurfaceUpholsteryMaterials • Fabric price group 1 No cost Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 2 +$ 20 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 3 +$ 40 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 4 +$ 55 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 5 +$ 70 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 6 +$100 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 7 +$140 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 8 +$185 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 9 +$220 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 10 +$255 Specify fabric color number.• Leather price group +$450 Specify leather color number.• Customer’s Own Material +$ 30 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual(COM) or Customer’s Ownto specify.Leather (COL)• Fire Code Seating (FCS) +$ 50 Add suffix F to the style number.• Soil-retardant treatment +$ 17 Specify with soil-retardant treatment.applied to upholstery fabricFrame, base, and arms• Monochromatic color No cost Add suffix M to chair style number andindicate plastic color number.Specification InformationHigh Back Standard Back Standard BackDStyle DU.S. DStyle DU.S. DStyle DU.S.dNumber dBase dNumber dBase dNumber dBased dPrice d dPrice d dPriced d d d d dWith Plastic Arm CapsWithout Arms421492N $504 421482N $436 421480N $384d d d d d dcDetailed dimensions, seeSeating Specification Guide.For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.326 Transitional Specification Guide

Trilogy 422 Series Sled-Base Multipurpose/Guest ChairsTrilogy 422 SeriesSled-BaseMultipurpose/Guest ChairsStandard Includes• Upholstery: fabric price group 1• Arm caps: black plastic• Frame and arms, if selected: 9201 Polished ChromeRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Fabric color number for upholstery3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.SeatingTip: Fire Code Seating(FCS) option is availablewith certain upholsteryfabric choices only.cSee Seating SpecificationGuide.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurfaceUpholsteryMaterials • Fabric price group 1 No cost Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 2 +$ 20 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 3 +$ 40 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 4 +$ 55 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 5 +$ 70 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 6 +$100 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 7 +$140 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 8 +$185 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 9 +$220 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 10 +$255 Specify fabric color number.• Leather price group +$450 Specify leather color number.• Customer’s Own Material +$ 30 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual(COM) or Customer’s Ownto specify.Leather (COL)• Fire Code Seating (FCS) +$ 50 Add suffix F to the style number.• Soil-retardant treatment +$ 17 Specify with soil-retardant treatment.applied to upholstery fabricFrame and arms• Monochromatic color No cost Add suffix M to chair style number andindicate plastic color number.Specification InformationDStyledNumberddDU.S.dBasedPricedWith Plastic Arm Caps422482 $488ddcDetailed dimensions, seeSeating Specification Guide.For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 327

Trilogy 423 Series Sled-Base Multipurpose/Guest ChairsStandard Includes• Arm caps: black plastic• Upholstery: fabric price group 1• Frame and arms, if selected: 9201 Polished ChromeRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Fabric color number for upholstery3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Tip: Fire Code Seating(FCS) option is availablewith certain upholsteryfabric choices only.cSee Seating SpecificationGuide.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurfaceUpholsteryMaterials • Fabric price group 1 No cost Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 2 +$ 20 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 3 +$ 40 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 4 +$ 55 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 5 +$ 70 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 6 +$100 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 7 +$140 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 8 +$185 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 9 +$220 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 10 +$255 Specify fabric color number.• Leather price group +$450 Specify leather color number.• Customer’s Own Material +$ 30 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual(COM) or Customer’s Ownto specify.Leather (COL)• Fire Code Seating (FCS) +$ 50 Add suffix F to the style number.• Soil-retardant treatment +$ 17 Specify with soil-retardant treatment.applied to upholstery fabricFrame and arms• Monochromatic color No cost Add suffix M to chair style number andindicate plastic color number.Specification InformationDStyle DU.S. DStyle DBasedNumber dBase dNumber dPriced dPrice d dd d d dWith Plastic Arm CapsWithout Arms423482 $454 423480 $404d d d dcDetailed dimensions, seeSeating Specification Guide.For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.328 Transitional Specification Guide

SpecifyingSecant OptionsSecant OptionsWorksurface Supports 330Secant OptionsTransitional Specification Guide 329

Secant OptionsWorksurface SupportsStandard Includes• Supports: paint price group 1• Attachment hardware: 4793 Solar Black paint only• Vertical wire manager: 6653 Solar Black plastic only• Tether bracket: all paint price groups• Straight leg: 7098 Sterling and 7207 Black textured paintRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for support3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Tip: 23" C legs and intermediatesupports will support a29"D worksurface.Tip: Two maintenanceadjustableC legs maynot be applied to a 24"Wworksurface.Tip: Order a tie plate,when straight leg is placedhalfway back, to alignworksurfaces.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurfaceSupportsMaterials • Paint price group 1 No cost Specify paint color number.• Paint price group 2 +$17 Specify paint color number.• Paint price group 3 +$29 Specify paint color number.Glides • Skid glides +$30 Specify with skid glides.Palletizing • All supports except rear No cost Specify palletize.supports are packed on palletin multiples of 20. Rearsupports are packed onpallet in multiples of 20 to 40.Specification InformationDDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD W H dNumber dBased d dPriced d dC Legs23" 2" 27 1 ⁄4" GWS24C $342Left-Hand Maintenance-Adjustable23" 2" 26 1 ⁄2" to 41 1 ⁄2" GWS24CLA $449Right-Hand Maintenance-Adjustable23" 2" 26 1 ⁄2" to 41 1 ⁄2" GWS24CRA $449d d dShared C Legs23" 2" 27 1 ⁄4" GWS24CS $352Maintenance-Adjustable23" 2" 26 1 ⁄2" to 41 1 ⁄2" GWS24CSA $460d d dIntermediate Supports23" 2" 27 1 ⁄4" GWSI $ 98Maintenance-Adjustable23" 2" 26 1 ⁄2" to 41 1 ⁄2" GWSIA $205d d dcSpecification Information continued on next pageFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.330 Transitional Specification Guide

Secant OptionsWorksurface SupportscSpecification Information, continuedSpecification InformationDDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD W H dNumber dBased d dPriced d dEnd Panels23" 2" 27 1 ⁄4" GWS24EP $31429" 2" 27 1 ⁄4" GWS30EP $356d d dRear Supports6 3 ⁄4" 2" 27 1 ⁄4" GWSR $226Maintenance-Adjustable6 3 ⁄4" 2" 26 1 ⁄2" to 41 1 ⁄2" GWSRA $333d d dStraight LegMaintenance-AdjustableGWSSL $108d d dTie PlateGWSTIE $ 14d d dSecant OptionsFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 331

332 Transitional Specification Guide

Series 9000Conventional, Enhanced,and Options ProductsConventional and Enhanced PanelsConventional and Enhanced Panel and PanelDoor Dimensions 334Understanding Conventional PanelsTackable Acoustical Panels 336Panel Doors 338Accent Panels 340Panel Accessories 342Receptacle Locations 343Cable Capacities of Conventional Panels 344Specifying Conventional PanelsTackable Acoustical Panels 346Power Poles 348Panel Doors 349Corner Fillers 350Horizontal Accent Panels for Use AcrossPanel Width Only 351Horizontal Accent Panels for Use Across PanelWidth and One L- or T-Junction 352Horizontal Accent Panels for Use Across PanelWidth and Two L- or T-Junctions 353Accent Panel Accessories 354Panel Brackets 355Panel Accessories 356Panel Wiring and Cabling 357Vertical Wire Managers 359Specifying Enhanced PanelsSurface Impression Option 360TRI Panels 362Panel Doors 370Panel Wiring and Cabling 371Series 9000Conventional StorageMobile Pedestal Caps 374Storage Accessories 375Storage Brackets and Accessories 376Transitional Specification Guide 333

Conventional and Enhanced Panel and Panel Door DimensionsConventional Conventional Enhanced Panel DoorsTackable Acoustical Panel DoorsPanelsWidths availableStraight panels 20", 25", 30", 35", 36", 42", 35" 35"45", and 60"Heights availableStraight panels 42", 53", 61", 65", and 75" 65" and 75" 65" and 75"Top cap height 5 ⁄8", expanded top cap N.A. N.A.availableBase cover height 2 1 ⁄4" N.A. N.A.Tackable Yes No NoRemovable surfaces No No NoHorizontal cable routing Beneath optional expanded Yes, in threshold Yes, in thresholdcapabilitytop cap and in panel bootVertical cable routing No No NoAccommodates powerways Yes, in base cavity No NoAccommodates receptacles Yes, in base cover No NoAccommodates voice/data No N.A. N.A.receptacles in baseComponent attachment Yes No NoAccepts power or cable pole Yes No NoAccepts base power-in Yes No NoPanel surface Fabric Fabric FabricWood top cap available No No NoAccepts accent panels Yes No NoFabric application Stretched Adhesive Adhesive334 Transitional Specification Guide

Conventional Panel andPanel Door DimensionsSeries 9000Transitional Specification Guide 335

Conventional Tackable Acoustical PanelsConventional panelshave been in use since 1978and will remain available tosupport existing installations.cSpecifying, page 346Tackable acousticalpanel is made of highdensity fiberglass encasedby a steel frame.Tubular steel frame ininterior provides strength forpanel-supported components.Base cover is removableto allow access to cavity inpanel base.Leveling glides adjust toinstall panels on unevenfloors.2 1 /4"HConventional panels have a rounded top cap detailand a base height of 2 1 ⁄4"H.Actual DimensionsDepth (thickness) 2 1 ⁄4"Width 20", 25", 30", 35", 36", 42", 45", or 60"Height 42", 53", 61", 65", or 75"Top cap height7 ⁄16" or 1 1 ⁄4" (expanded)Base cover height 2 1 ⁄4". Leveling glide range 1 1 ⁄2"Top cap is removable.Expanded top cap is optionalto accommodate horizontalcable routing.Flexible reveal concealsslotted channel that acceptspanel-supported componentsin 1" increments.Base cavity accommodatesfactory- or field-installedpowerway.Invisible knockouts forreceptacles can be removedin the field.Panel boot accommodatesup to four 3 ⁄8"-diameter cables..Product DetailsExpanded top capis available for use on conventionalpanels only.It will accommodate up tosix 3 ⁄8"-diameter cables.Tip: Expanded top capcan replace standard topcap, and it increases theheight of the panel byapproximately 1".Transaction worksurfacescannot be used onconventional panels withexpanded top caps.Accent panels are availableto add visual interestand give new life to conventionalpanels.cPage 340Panel accessories,such as marker boards, coathooks, telephone plates, andtackboards, are available.cSee Series 9000 SystemsFurniture SpecificationGuide..336 Transitional Specification Guide

Conventional TackableAcoustical Panels.ConnectionsFlexible hinges, shippedwith every panel, connectpanels in straight-line, L-, T-,Y-, and X-configurationsPanels of differentheights can be joinedin-line or at an angle. Notrim pieces are needed forexposed panels ends.Panel-run stability recommendationsvary dependingon the length of the runand the use of panelsupportedcomponents andfreestanding furniture.cSee Series 9000 SystemsFurniture SpecificationGuide.Corner filler posts areavailable to fill the gap whenpanels are joined in L- andT-configurations.cPage 350.Expanded top caps concealthe junction when panelswith expanded top capsform X-configurations.cPage 350Wall-attachmentbracket is available to joina panel to an interior wall.It is available 42"H, 53"H,65"H, and 75"H to matchpanel heights.cPage 355.Wiring & CablingBase power-in bringspower to panel run by connectingat a designatedreceptacle location.cSee Series 9000 SystemsFurniture SpecificationGuide.Power and cablepoles bring power andcommunication cables fromthe ceiling.cSee Series 9000 SystemsFurniture SpecificationGuide.Powerways are factoryor field installed in the U.S.,but are field installed only inCanada. Three-circuit orfour-circuit (3+D) powerwaysare available.cSee Series 9000 SystemsFurniture SpecificationGuide.All panels are UL listedand CSA certified..Chicago, New YorkCity, and Los Angeleshave special requirements.cSee Series 9000 SystemsFurniture SpecificationGuide.Local electrical codesvary. Consult a qualifiedelectrical contractor or engineerfor proper installation ofelectrical equipment.Surface MaterialsTop cap• PaintTackable acousticalpanel surfaces• Vertical surface fabricDirectional fabricson panels may be orienteddifferently depending onpanel height. If you want,you can specify fabric directionto ensure that shortand tall panels in a singleinstallation match.cFor detailed advice seeSeries 9000 SystemsFurniture SpecificationGuide.End trim• PaintHinge and reveal• PlasticBase cover• PaintPanel boot• Black plastic only.PricingTo price a panel with fabricsin two different pricegroups, add the two pricestogether and divide by two.Application TopicsPanel CreepcSee Series 9000 SystemsFurniture SpecificationGuide.Wiring and CablingcSee Series 9000 SystemsFurniture SpecificationGuide..Series 9000Transitional Specification Guide 337

Conventional Panel Doors.Panel door can be addedto workstations to provideprivacy. Door is installed toswing in.cSpecifying, page 349Surface is non-tackableand does not accept panelsupportedcomponents.Door can be field installedso the latch plate is on theleft or right.Latch plate end coverreplaces the upright on theadjacent panel.Door pull is integral to itslatch plate.End covers havefield-installed uprights thatconnect to adjacent panels.Actual DimensionsDepth (thickness) 1 1 ⁄8"Width 35"Height 65"or 75"Hinges can be installed toan end cover or corner post.Door trimThreshold provides spacefor routing two 3 ⁄8"-diametercables..Product DetailsWidth of the doorframe meets barrier-freestandards.Corner post is includedwith doors for use in T- orfixed-wall applications.Tip: Corner post mustattach to the panel that runs90° from the door in cornerapplications.Wall-attachmentbracket must be orderedseparately for fixed-wallapplications.Tip: Wall-attachment bracketmust match the height of thepanel door..338 Transitional Specification Guide

Conventional Panel Doors.ConnectionsPanel doors can beinstalled in straight panelruns, in T configurations, orto fixed walls.Threshold has cups thataccept the leveling glides ofadjacent panels to help alignpanel runs.Conventional paneldoor attachment hardwareis designed to workon conventional panels only..Surface MaterialsDoor• Vertical surface fabricTip: Door surface mustalways be specified in thefollowing order:Surface one is the outsideof the door. Specify thissurface first. Surface two isthe inside of the door.Specify this surface second.Door trim• PaintEnd covers• PaintLatch plate• PaintHinges• Black onlyCorner post• PaintThreshold• Stainless steel only.PricingTo price a panel withfabrics in two different pricegroups, add the two pricestogether and divide by two..Application TopicsPanel door cannot beinstalled at the end of a run.45" maximumPanels adjacent to apanel door can be no morethan 45"W.Only one panel door canbe used in a T-configuration.Door frame cannot beused at the end or corner ofa panel run...Series 9000Transitional Specification Guide 339

Conventional Accent Panels.Conventional accentpanels attach to Series9000 Conventional panels toincrease acoustical performanceof conventional panels,to add visual interest toan office, or to cover damagedpanels or outdatedfabric.cSpecifying, pages 351–353Steel frame is surroundedby fiberglass or mineralboard.Surface is tackableacoustical.Actual DimensionsDepth (thickness) 3 ⁄4"Width 20", 25", 30", 35", 36", 42", 45", 60", 70",75", or 90"Height 10", 11", 12", or 15"Corners are slightlyradiused to conform tothe edges of conventionalpanels.Horizontal panels fitacross panels..Product DetailsSizes are available to spana single panel, a panel andan L- or T-junction, or a paneland two L- or T-junctions.One accent panel can alsobe specified wide enough tospan two or three panelsand all the connectionsbetween them.15"H and 18"H accentpanels with a “T” intheir style numbers are tackboards..340 Transitional Specification Guide

Conventional Accent Panels.ConnectionsHorizontal accent panelscan be combinedin different fabrics, sizes,and colors to create uniquedesigns.Brackets are factoryinstalled on the back of horizontalaccent panels. Theyhook into the slotted channelof panels..L- and T-junction kitsare available to finish theconnection between twoaccent panels that meet atan L- or T-junction. Accentpanels should not be used inan L- or T-configuration withouta junction kit.cPage 354Each kit includes topcap, light block, and basecover. One size fits all panelheights..Surface MaterialsAccent panels• Vertical surface fabricAttachment hardware• Black paint onlyApplication TopicsAccent panels areavailable only for useon conventional panels.Accent panels blockaccess to the slotted channelsof panels and preventpanel-support componentsfrom being installed.Warp direction of fabricis horizontal on all accentpanels.When you install accentpanels beneath transactionworksurfacesthat were installed beforeJuly 1989, the existing transactionworksurface hardwaremust be replaced with newhardware so that the accentpanels will fit flush againstthe panel.3".Horizontal panelseams will match if accentpanel heights correspond.The diagrams below showcombinations of accent panelheights that add up to theheight of conventional panels.10"12" 12"11" 11" 11"12" 12" 12" 12"12" 12" 12" 12"15" 15" 15" 15"11"11"12"12"12"42"H 53"H 65"H 75"H 61"H.Series 9000Transitional Specification Guide 341

Conventional Panel AccessoriesConventional PanelStabilizer FootcSpecifying, page 356.ApplicationIncreases the stabilityof panel runs when furnitureor perpendicular panels arenot available to providestability.Pairs provide the moststability.ConnectionsAttaches to all conventionalpanels. Non-handeddesign allows foot to attachto either side of the panel.Foot extends 16" from thebase of the panel.Surface MaterialsFoot• PaintApplication TopicsPanel stabilizer footmust not be used as the solesource of support for panels.Panel stabilizer footcannot be used with paneldoor.Stabilizes up to three panelsif the panel run doesn’texceed 12'.cSee Rules for PanelStability in the Series 9000Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.Actual DimensionsDepth 16"Width 2 3 ⁄4"Height 11 1 ⁄4".342 Transitional Specification Guide

Receptacle LocationsReceptacle Locations.Application Topics20"W base covers haveone larger-size receptacleknockout located in thecenter of the base cover.Because both base coveropenings are positionedback-to-back, power canonly be accessed on oneside of the panel.Conventional Panels1 /2"2 3 /4"W x 1 3 /8"H5 1 /4"W x 1 3 /8"H7 1 /4" 7 3 /4"25"W through 60"WSide 2 2"1 /2"5 1 /4"W x 1 3 /8"H7 3 /4"20"WConventional Panelsfor Chicago1 /2"2 3 /4"W x 1 3 /8"H2 3 /4"W x 1 3 /8"H9"5 1 /2"30"W through 60"WSide 1 2"1 Side 2/2"1 /2"2 3 /4"W x 1 3 /8"H 2 3 /4"W x 1 3 /8"H9" 5 20"W and 25"W 20"W and 25"W1 /2".2"2"2".Series 9000Transitional Specification Guide 343

Cable Capacities of Conventional PanelsTest and verify capacitiesfor your individual situation.We recommend thattesting be conducted usingyour specific cableas well as the furniture configurationyou are considering.Cable capacities inthis table are based on nonplenum-ratedcables installedby a cable contractorunder ideal conditions.Figures are approximations.Actual capacities may varyslightly depending on whichmanufacturer produced thecable and the specific fieldconditions.Cat 6 Test Cableså Avaya 1071OD=0.215"∫ Avaya 1081OD=0.250"ç Avaya 2071 PlenumOD=0.195"∂ Avaya 2081 PlenumOD=0.240"´ Belden Media Twist1872AOD=0.365" x 0.165"ƒ Belden Media Twist1874A PlenumOD=0.365" x 0.165"© Berk-TekLan-Mark 1000OD=0.230"˙ Berk-TekLan-Mark 1000PlenumOD=0.225"ˆ CommScopeUltraMediaOD=0.240"∆ General CableCommand LINX 6OD=0.250"˚ Mohawk GigaLANOD=0.240"¬ Nordx 4812LXOD=0.245"µ Nordx 4813XPlenumOD=0.230"Cat 5 Test Cables˜ Berk–Tek24 AWG CMR4-Pair UTP*OD=0.190"..StraightL, T, and XBootå ∫ ç ∂ ´ ƒ © ˙ ˆ ∆ ˚ ¬ µ ˜Cable routing22 22 27 23 25 25 20 20 21 23 20 22 24 28at top of panel 1Cable routing atbase of panel10 8 10 10 12 10 10 10 10 10 8 8 10 16with powerway 2(boot only)Cable routing at baseof panel without32 26 40 36 32 34 28 26 26 32 26 30 32 38power 3Straight through22 L 22 L 27 L 23 L 23 L 22 L 20 L 20 L 19 L 23 L 16 L 20 L 20 L 22 Lcable routing at top22 T 18 T 27 T 23 T 25 T 25 T 20 T 20 T 21 T 23 T 20 T 22 T 24 T 22 Tof panel 1 44 X 35 X 49 X 40 X 37 X 35 X 30 X 30 X 21 X 33 X 31 X 32 X 46 X 22 XCable routing at9 L 8 L 10 L 8 L 10 L 8 L 10 L 8 L 8 L 10 L 8 L 8 L 10 L 10 Lbase of panel with10 T 8 T 10 T 10 T 12 T 10 T 10 T 10 T 10 T 10 T 8 T 8 T 10 T 10 Tpowerway 2 20 X 14 X 20 X 20 X 24 X 20 X 20 X 18 X 20 X 20 X 14 X 16 X 20 X 10 XCable routing at base16 L 13 L 20 L 18 L 16 L 17 L 14 L 13 L 13 L 16 L 13 L 15 L 16 L 25 Lof panel without32 T 26 T 40 T 36 T 32 T 34 T 28 T 26 T 26 T 32 T 26 T 30 T 32 T 25 Tpowerway 3 34 X 23 X 38 X 36 X 16 X 40 X 30 X 28 X 26 X 32 X 24 X 44 X 32 X 25 XChange-of-heightcable routing at top20 15 20 17 20 20 17 16 14 13 18 15 15 24of panel 1Cable-routing10 8 10 10 12 10 10 10 10 10 8 8 10 16in panel boot 2Cable routing in34 28 34 30 32 33 28 30 26 24 29 27 30 50Grumman boot 2.344 Transitional Specification Guide

Cable Capacities ofConventional Panels.Power Pole and Cable Poleå ∫ ç ∂ ´ ƒ © ˙ ˆ ∆ ˚ ¬ µ ˜Cable routing from polewith power harness16 13 22 15 20 20 16 18 16 13 15 13 16 20into panel top cap 1Cable routing from pole16without power harness13 22 15 20 20 16 18 16 13 15 13 16 20into panel top cap 1Cable routing frompole into panel base10 8 10 10 12 10 10 10 10 10 8 8 10 16with powerway 2Cable routing frompole into panel base20 16 20 18 14 16 14 16 16 18 14 16 20 30without powerway 3Vertical Wire ManagerCable routing inside12 10 16 12 10 10 11 10 10 9 10 9 12 5vertical wire manager1 1 ⁄4"Boot1 ⁄2".1 1 ⁄2"Series 9000Conventional Panelwith Expanded Top CapCross Section7 ⁄8"Top Cap7 ⁄8"PowerwaySpaceNotes:1 = These capacity figuresare based on expanded topcaps.2 = These capacity figuresare for boot only.3 = These capacities applyto powerway space only.Additional capacity is availablein the boot..Series 9000Transitional Specification Guide 345

Conventional Tackable Acoustical PanelscNeed help?Product details,page 336Standard Includes• Panel with two surfaces: vertical surface fabricprice group 1• Top cap, end trim, and base covers with receptacleknockouts: all paint price groups• Hinge and reveal: vinylcSee additional hinge and reveal informationon page 347.Required to Specify1 Style number2 Fabric color number for surface 13 Fabric color number for surface 24 Paint color number for top cap, end trimand base covers5 Plastic color number for vinyl hingeand reveal6 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Tip: To price a panel withtwo surface materials indifferent price groups, addthe two fabric price groupoption prices together anddivide by 2; then add theresult to the panel baseprice.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurfacePanel surfaceMaterials • Fabric price group 1 No cost Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 2 +$ 32 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 3 +$ 80 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 4 +$128 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 5 +$200 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group COM +$ 30 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manualto specify.Fabric direction• Warp vertical on directional No cost Specify with warp vertical.fabricscSee Series 9000 Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.Expanded • Painted expanded top cap +$ 41 Specify with expanded top cap.Top Capexpanded top cap.Tip: For additional wiringand cabling information for:–Base Power-Ins–Receptacles–PowerwayscSee Series 9000 SystemsFurniture SpecificationGuide.ElectricalFactory-installed powerway (U.S. only)• 3-circuit powerway with +$134 Add suffix P3 to panel style number.shared neutral• 4-circuit (3+D) powerway +$158 Add suffix P4 to panel style number.Field-installed powerway• For use in New York City• For use in CanadaMust specify powerway for fieldinstallation only.cSee Series 9000 Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.Must specify powerway for fieldinstallation only.cSee Series 9000 Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.Factory-installed raceway• For use in Chicago with +$115 Add suffix W to panel style number.power base coversFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.346 Transitional Specification Guide

Conventional TackableAcoustical PanelsSpecification InformationDWidth DStyle DU.S. DStyle DU.S. DStyle DU.S.d dNumber dBase dNumber dBase dNumber dBased d dPrice d dPrice d dPriced d d d d d d42"H 53"H 61"H20" 98011 $ 525 98111 $ 566 98911 $ 64125" 98012 $ 525 98112 $ 566 98912 $ 64130" 98013 $ 577 98113 $ 617 98913 $ 73135" 98014 $ 633 98114 $ 674 98914 $ 79436" 98018 $ 633 98118 $ 674 98918 $ 79442" 98019 $ 717 98119 $ 758 98919 $ 87945" 98015 $ 717 98115 $ 758 98915 $ 87960" 98016 $ 862 98116 $ 902 98916 $1007d d d d d d d65"H 75"H20" 98211 $ 641 98311 $ 85725" 98212 $ 641 98312 $ 85730" 98213 $ 731 98313 $ 91435" 98214 $ 794 98314 $ 97136" 98218 $ 794 98318 $ 97142" 98219 $ 879 98319 $110745" 98215 $ 879 98315 $110760" 98216 $1007 N.A.d d d d dSeries 9000Panel hinge and reveal colors can bespecified to coordinate or contrast with the paintcolor that you select for the panel.For matching hinge and reveal color combinations,specify the following numbers:6660 Tan V2/Tan V2 Reveal6661 Grey V2/Grey V2 Reveal6662 Warm Brown V2/Warm Brown V2 Reveal6663 Warm White/Warm White Reveal.If no hinge color is specified, the Black reveal willbe used.RevealHingeConventional PanelsOnly Conventional panels have reveals—the smallrecessed slot that surrounds the panel surface.Transitional Specification Guide 347

Conventional Power PolescNeed help?Product details,page 337Standard Includes• Pole: all paint price groups• Ceiling trim plate: white paint only• Internal electrical harness with 3-circuit withshared neutral or 4-circuit 3+D• Junction box• Mounting brackets• Reveal: plasticRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for pole3 Plastic color number for revealcSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Specification InformationTip: For additional wiringand cabling information for:–Base Power-Ins–Receptacles–PowerwayscSee Series 9000 SystemsFurniture SpecificationGuide.Tip: Conventional powerpoles used with expandedtop caps require knockoutsto access cables in the topof panels.DPanel DStyle DU.S. DStyle DU.S.dHeight dNumber dPrice dNumber dPriced d d d d3-CircuitFor Use with Standard Top Cap4-Circuit (3+D)34 1 ⁄2" 98684B $387 986844B $42742" 98685B $387 986854B $42753" 98686B $387 986864B $42761" 98687B $387 986874B $42765" 98688B $387 986884B $42775" 98689B $387 986894B $427For Use with Expanded Top Cap42" 98685AB $387 986854AB $42753" 98686AB $387 986864AB $42761" 98687AB $387 986874AB $42765" 98688AB $387 986884AB $42775" 98689AB $387 986894AB $427d d d d dFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.348 Transitional Specification Guide

Conventional Panel DoorsConventional Panel DoorscNeed help?Product details,page 338Standard Includes• Panel door: vertical surface fabricprice group 1• Door trim and end covers: all paint price groups• Threshold: stainless steel only• Corner post, included in corner application version:all paint price groupsRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Fabric color number for surface 1 (inside)3 Fabric color number for surface 2(outside)4 Paint color number for door trim, endcovers, and corner post, if selected5 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Tip: To price a panel withtwo surface materials indifferent price groups, addthe two fabric price groupoption prices together anddivide by 2; then add theresult to the panel baseprice.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurfacePanel surfaceMaterials • Fabric price group 1 No cost Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 2 +$ 32 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 3 +$ 80 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 4 +$128 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 5 +$200 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group COM +$ 30 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manualto specify.Specification InformationDWidth DStyle DU.S. DStyle DU.S.d dNumber dBase dNumber dBased d dPrice d dPriced d d d dStraight Application65"H 75"H35" 9106A $1302 9107A $1430Corner Application35" 9106B $1385 9107B $1535d d d d dSeries 9000For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 349

Conventional Corner FillersCorner Filler PostscNeed help?Product details,page 337Standard Includes• Corner post with top cap: all paint price groupsRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for corner post3 Plastic color number for reveal onmodels with expanded top capcSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Specification InformationDPanel DStyle DU.S.dHeight dNumber dPriced d dWithout Knockouts for Use with Standard Top Cap34 1 ⁄2" 98676 $10142" 98677 $10753" 98678 $11161" 98679 $11865" 98680 $12275" 98681 $128d d dWith Knockouts for Use with Expanded Top Cap42" 98677A $12953" 98678A $13461" 98679A $13965" 98680A $14475" 98681A $153d d dExpanded Top CapTip: All panels must be thesame height regardless ofconfiguration.cNeed help?Product details,page 337Standard Includes• Top cap: all paint price groupsSpecification InformationDStyledNumberdDU.S.dPricedFor Use at X-Configuration Panel Junction98975X $23ddRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for top capcSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.350 Transitional Specification Guide

Conventional Horizontal Accent Panels Gfor Use Across Panel Width OnlyConventional HorizontalAccent PanelscNeed help?Product details,page 340Standard Includes• Accent panel: vertical surface fabricprice group 1• Attachment brackets: black paint onlyRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Fabric color number for accent panel3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifyPanel • Fabric price group 1 No cost Specify fabric color number.Surface • Fabric price group 2 +$ 12 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 3 +$ 46 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 4 +$ 62 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 5 +$100 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group COM +$ 15 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manualto specify.Specification InformationDWidth DStyle DU.S. DStyle DU.S. DStyle DU.S.d dNumber dBase dNumber dBase dNumber dBased d dPrice d dPrice d dPriced d d d d d d10"H 11"H 12"H20" 981020 G $ 99 981120 G $ 99 981220 G $ 9925" 981025 G $ 99 981125 G $ 99 981225 G $ 9930" 981030 G $ 99 981130 G $ 99 981230 G $ 9935" 981035 G $111 981135 G $111 981235 G $11136" 981036 G $111 981136 G $111 981236 G $11142" 981042 G $128 981142 G $128 981242 G $12845" 981045 G $128 981145 G $128 981245 G $12860" 981060 G $155 981160 G $155 981260 G $15570" 981070 G $184 981170 G $184 981270 G $18475" 981075 G $184 981175 G $184 981275 G $18490" 981090 G $211 981190 G $211 981290 G $211d d d d d d d15"H20" 981520 G $ 9925" 981525 G $ 9930" 981530 G $ 9935" 981535 G $11136" 981536 G $11142" 981542 G $12845" 981545 G $12860" 981560 G $15570" 981570 G $18475" 981575 G $18490" 981590 G $211d d dSeries 9000Transitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List351Last order entry November 18, 2005

Conventional Horizontal Accent Panels Gfor Use Across Panel Width and One L- or T-JunctioncNeed help?Product details,page 340Standard Includes• Accent panel: vertical surface fabricprice group 1• Attachment brackets: black paint onlyRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Fabric color number for accent panel3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Tip: Accent panel widthequals width of panel(s)plus 2 1 ⁄2".Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifyPanel • Fabric price group 1 No cost Specify fabric color number.Surface • Fabric price group 2 +$ 12 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 3 +$ 46 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 4 +$ 62 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 5 +$100 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group COM +$ 15 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manualto specify.Specification InformationDWidth DStyle DU.S. DStyle DU.S. DStyle DU.S.d dNumber dBase dNumber dBase dNumber dBased d dPrice d dPrice d dPriced d d d d d d10"H 11"H 12"H22 1 ⁄2" 981022 G $ 99 981122 G $ 99 981222 G $ 9927 1 ⁄2" 981027 G $ 99 981127 G $ 99 981227 G $ 9932 1 ⁄2" 981032 G $ 99 981132 G $ 99 981232 G $ 9937 1 ⁄2" 981037 G $111 981137 G $111 981237 G $11138 1 ⁄2" 981038 G $111 981138 G $111 981238 G $11144 1 ⁄2" 981044 G $128 981144 G $128 981244 G $12847 1 ⁄2" 981047 G $128 981147 G $128 981247 G $12862 1 ⁄2" 981062 G $155 981162 G $155 981262 G $15572 1 ⁄2" 981072 G $184 981172 G $184 981272 G $18477 1 ⁄2" 981077 G $184 981177 G $184 981277 G $18492 1 ⁄2" 981092 G $211 981192 G $211 981292 G $211d d d d d d d15"H22 1 ⁄2" 981522 G $ 9927 1 ⁄2" 981527 G $ 9932 1 ⁄2" 981532 G $ 9937 1 ⁄2" 981537 G $11138 1 ⁄2" 981538 G $11144 1 ⁄2" 981544 G $12847 1 ⁄2" 981547 G $12862 1 ⁄2" 981562 G $15572 1 ⁄2" 981572 G $18477 1 ⁄2" 981577 G $18492 1 ⁄2" 981592 G $211d d d352 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

Conventional Horizontal Accent Panels Gfor Use Across Panel Width and Two L- or T-JunctionsConventional HorizontalAccent PanelscNeed help?Product details,page 340Standard Includes• Accent panel: vertical surface fabricprice group 1• Attachment brackets: black paint onlyRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Fabric color number for accent panel3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Tip: Accent panel widthequals width of panel(s)plus 5".Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifyPanel • Fabric price group 1 No cost Specify fabric color number.Surface • Fabric price group 2 +$ 12 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 3 +$ 46 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 4 +$ 62 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 5 +$100 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group COM +$ 15 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manualto specify.Specification InformationDWidth DStyle DU.S. DStyle DU.S. DStyle DU.S.d dNumber dBase dNumber dBase dNumber dBased d dPrice d dPrice d dPriced d d d d d d10"H 11"H 12"H65" 981065 G $155 981165 G $155 981265 G $15580" 981080 G $184 981180 G $184 981280 G $18495" 981095 G $211 981195 G $211 981295 G $211d d d d d d d15"H65" 981565 G $15580" 981580 G $18495" 981595 G $211d d dSeries 9000For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List353Last order entry November 18, 2005

Conventional Accent Panel Accessories GAccent Panel L-Junction GcNeed help?Product details,page 341Standard Includes• Light block: black paint only• Top cap and base cover: all paint price groupsRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for top cap andbase covercSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Specification InformationDStyledNumberdDU.S.dPriced98L75 G $57ddAccent Panel T-Junction GcNeed help?Product details,page 341Standard Includes• Light block: black paint only• Top cap and base cover: all paint price groupsRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for top cap andbase covercSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Specification InformationTip: Accent panels are availableto span two panels anda junction.cPage 353DStyledNumberdDU.S.dPriced98T75 G $57ddFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.354 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

Conventional Panel BracketsConventional PanelBracketsWall-Attachment BracketscNeed help?Product details,page 337Standard Includes• Bracket: all paint price groupsRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for bracketcSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Specification InformationDHeight DStyle DU.S.d dNumber dPriced d dConventional Wall-Attachment Brackets42" 98714 $6453" 98715 $7361" 98940 $8065" 98716 $8275" 98717 $95d d dSeries 9000For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 355

Conventional Panel AccessoriesConventional Panel Stabilizer FootcNeed help?Product details,page 342Standard Includes• Panel foot: all paint price groupsRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for panel footcSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Specification InformationDStyledNumberdDU.S.dPriced98721 $107ddFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.356 Transitional Specification Guide

Conventional Panel Wiring and CablingConventional PanelWiring and CablingT-Base CoverStandard Includes• Carton of six T-base covers: all paint price groupsRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for base covercSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Specification InformationDStyledNumberdDU.S.dPriced98884 $94ddIn-Line Cable PostStandard IncludesRequired to SpecifySeries 9000• In-line cable post with top cap: all paint price groups1 Style number2 Paint color number for cable post andtop capcSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Specification InformationDPanel DPanel DStyle DU.S.dHeight dTop Cap dNumber dPriced dHeight d dd d d d65" Expanded 98892 $196d d d dFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide cConventional Panel Wiring and Cabling, continued 357

Conventional Panel Wiring and Cabling, continuedCorner Cable CoversStandard Includes• Carton of six corner cable covers: plasticRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Plastic color numbercSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Specification InformationDStyledNumberdDU.S.dPricedFor Use with Expanded Top Cap in L-Configuration98893 $27For Use with Expanded Top Cap in T-Configuration98897 $27ddFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.358 Transitional Specification Guide

Conventional Vertical Wire ManagersConventional VerticalWire ManagersStandard Includes• Vertical wire manager: vertical surface fabric or plastic• Cap for use when connecting with panel top cap,on applicable models: black plastic onlyRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Color number for wire managercSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Specification InformationDHeight DWith DStyle DU.S.d dCap dNumber dPriced d d dFor Conventional PanelsFabric Covered12" Yes 9886242A $5817 1 ⁄2" No 9886265 $5322 1 ⁄4" Yes 9886253A $5934 1 ⁄4" Yes 9886265A $60Plastic48" Yes 98862 $27d d d dSeries 9000For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 359

Surface Impression Option GTip: Surface impressionsappear most clearly definedon light fabric colors. Darkfabrics are not recommended.The following fabricsare not available withsurface impressions becauseof their thicker, multicoloryarns:• Belgrade• Cordial• WilshireOptions U.S. Price Required to SpecifyEnhancedSurface ImpressionsTackable • One side of panel +$27 Specify with surface impressionsAcoustical on surface 1 (or 2).Panels • Both sides of panel +$54 Specify with surface impressionson surface 1 and 2.EnhancedSurface ImpressionsTackable • One fabric side of panel +$27 Specify with surface impressionsAcoustical on surface 2.Panels withOne WoodSurfaceEnhancedSurface ImpressionsTRI Panels • One non-TRI side of panel +$27 Specify with surface impressionswith One TRI on surface 2.Surface andOne TRI Surfacewith Desk-HighPowerEnhancedSurface Impressions on Panels with 28 1 ⁄2"H and 42"H SillStraight • One side of panel +$27 Specify with surface impressionsTransparent on surface 1 (or 2).Panels • Both sides of panel +$54 Specify with surface impressionson surface 1 and 2.EnhancedSurface Impressions on Panels with 28 1 ⁄2"H SillOpen-Frame • One side of panel +$ 27 Specify with surface impressionsPanels on surface 1 (or 2).• Both sides of panel +$ 54 Specify with surface impressionson surface 1 and 2.360 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

Surface Impression OptionSeries 9000For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 361

Enhanced TRI Panelswith One TRI Surface GPanel surfaces:• Surface one:desk-high TRI belt• Surface two:tackable acousticalTip: To price a panel withtwo surface materials indifferent price groups, addthe two fabric price groupoption prices together anddivide by 2; then add theresult to the panel baseprice.Standard Includes• Panel with two surfaces: vertical surface fabricprice group 1:—surface 1: TRI surface—surface 2: non-TRI surface• Radius top cap, end trim, and base covers withreceptacle knockouts: all paint price groups• TRI belt: vertical surface fabric with black vinylaccess slot• Hinge: vinylRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Fabric color number for surface 13 Fabric color number for surface 24 Paint color number for top cap, end trim,and base covers5 Plastic color number for vinyl hinge6 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurfacePanel surfaceMaterials • Fabric price group 1 No cost Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 2 +$ 32 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 3 +$ 80 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 4 +$128 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 5 +$200 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group COM +$ 30 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manualto specify.Fabric direction• Warp vertical on directional No cost cSpecify with warp vertical.fabricscSee Series 9000 Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.Top Cap • Square metal top cap No cost Specify with square metal top cap.• Square wood top cap +$ 81 Specify with square wood top cap andselect wood color number.• Radius wood top cap +$ 81 Specify with radius wood top cap andselect wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood +$ 12 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.top capTip: Surface impressions areavailable on the non-TRIsurface of the panel only.Tip: Surface impressionsappear most clearly definedon light fabric colors. Darkfabrics are not recommended.The following fabricsare not available withsurface impressions becauseof their thicker, multicoloryarns:• Belgrade• Cordial• WilshireSurface • One non-TRI side of panel +$ 27 Specify with surface impressionsImpressions on surface 2.ElectricalFactory-installed powerwaycSee Series 9000 • 3-circuit powerway with +$134 Add suffix P3 to panel style number.Systems Furniture shared neutralSpecification • 3-circuit powerway with +$160 Add suffix P3 to panel style number andGuide separate neutrals specify with separate neutrals.• 4-circuit (3+D) powerway +$158 Add suffix P4 to panel style number.• 4-circuit (3I+1) powerway +$189 Add suffix P4 to panel style number andspecify with 3I+1 wiring.• 4-circuit (2+2) powerway +$189 Add suffix P4 to panel style number andspecify with 2+2 wiring.Field-installed powerway• For use in New York CitycMust specify powerway for fieldinstallation only.cSee Series 9000 Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.Without TRI belt access slot• For use in Los Angeles No cost Add suffix LA to panel style number.Related • Panel brackets cSee Series 9000 Systems FurnitureProductsSpecification Guide.• Panel accessoriescSee Series 9000 Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.• Panel wiring and cablingcSee Series 9000 Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.362 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

Enhanced TRI PanelsSpecification InformationDWidth DStyle DU.S. DStyle DU.S.d dNumber dBase dNumber dBased d dPrice d dPriced d d d d53"H 65"H30" 9ET5330 G $607 9ET6530 G $75335" 9ET5335 G $657 9ET6535 G $81036" 9ET5336 G $657 9ET6536 G $81042" 9ET5342 G $736 9ET6542 G $88345" 9ET5345 G $736 9ET6545 G $88360" 9ET5360 G $856 9ET6560 G $997d d d d dSeries 9000For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List363Last order entry November 18, 2005

Enhanced TRI Panelswith One TRI Surface and One Wood Surface GPanel surfaces:• Surface one:desk-high TRI belt• Surface two:woodTip: Surface impressions arenot available.Standard Includes• Panel with two surfaces:—surface 1: vertical surface fabric price group 1—surface 2: wood• Radius top cap and filler strip: wood• End trim and base covers with receptacle knockouts:all paint price groups• Hinge: vinylRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Fabric color number for frame surface 13 Wood color number for frame surface 2,top cap, and filler strip4 Paint color number for end trim and basecovers5 Plastic color number for hinge6 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurfacePanel surfaceMaterials • Fabric price group 1 No cost Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 2 +$ 16 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 3 +$ 40 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 4 +$ 64 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 5 +$100 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group COM +$ 15 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manualto specify.Fabric direction• Warp vertical on directional No cost cSpecify with warp vertical.fabricscSee Series 9000 Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.Wood panel surface and filler strip• Customiz stain on wood Prices at right cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.Top cap• Customiz stain on wood +$ 12 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.Top Cap • Square wood top cap No cost Specify with square wood top cap andselect wood color number.ElectricalFactory-installed powerwaycSee Series 9000 • 3-circuit powerway with +$134 Add suffix P3 to panel style number.Systems Furniture shared neutralSpecification • 3-circuit powerway with +$160 Add suffix P3 to panel style number andGuide separate neutrals specify with separate neutrals.• 4-circuit (3+D) powerway +$158 Add suffix P4 to panel style number.• 4-circuit (3I+1) powerway +$189 Add suffix P4 to panel style number andspecify with 3I+1 wiring.• 4-circuit (2+2) powerway +$189 Add suffix P4 to panel style number andspecify with 2+2 wiring.Field-installed powerway• For use in New York CitycMust specify powerway for fieldinstallation only.cSee Series 9000 Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.Factory-installed raceway• For use in Chicago with +$115 Add suffix W to panel style number.power base coversWithout TRI belt access slot• For use in Los Angeles No cost Add suffix LA to panel style number.For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Related • Panel brackets cSee Series 9000 Systems FurnitureProductsSpecification Guide.• Panel accessoriescSee Series 9000 Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.• Panel wiring and cablingcSee Series 9000 Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.364 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

Enhanced TRI PanelsSpecification InformationDWidth DStyle DU.S. DOption DStyle DU.S. DOptiond dNumber dBase d(Add $ to dNumber dBase d(Add $ tod d dPrice dBase Price) d dPrice dBase Price)d d d d d d dd d d dCustomiz Stain d d dCustomiz Staind d d don Wood d d don Woodd d d dSurface and d d dSurface andd d d dFiller d d dFiller53"H 65"H30" 9EW5330 G $ 919 +$60 9EW6530 G $1028 +$ 6035" 9EW5335 G $ 971 +$60 9EW6535 G $1087 +$ 6036" 9EW5336 G $ 971 +$60 9EW6536 G $1087 +$ 8442" 9EW5342 G $1052 +$60 9EW6542 G $1162 +$ 8445" 9EW5345 G $1052 +$84 9EW6545 G $1162 +$107d d d d d d dSeries 9000For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List365Last order entry November 18, 2005

Enhanced TRI Panelswith One TRI Surface with Desk-High Power and One Wood Surface GStandard Includes• Panel with two surfaces:—surface 1: vertical surface fabric price group 1—surface 2: wood• Radius top cap and filler strip: wood• End trim, and base covers with receptacle knockouts:all paint price groups• TRI belt: vertical surface fabric with black vinylaccess slot• TRI-belt receptacle frame: plastic• Hinge: vinyl• TRI-belt harness• 3-circuit powerway with shared neutralRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Fabric color number for surface 13 Fabric color number for surface 24 Paint color number for end trim and basecovers5 Plastic color number for receptacle frame6 Plastic color number for vinyl hinge7 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Tip: Surface impressions arenot available.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurfacePanel surfaceMaterials • Fabric price group 1 No cost Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 2 +$ 16 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 3 +$ 40 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 4 +$ 64 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 5 +$100 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group COM +$ 15 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manualto specify.Fabric direction• Warp vertical on directional No cost cSpecify with warp vertical.fabricscSee Series 9000 Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.Wood panel surface and filler strip• Customiz stain on wood Prices at right cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.Top cap• Customiz stain on wood +$ 12 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.Top Cap • Square wood top cap No cost Specify with square wood top cap andselect wood color number.ElectricalFactory-installed powerwaycSee Series 9000 • 3-circuit powerway with +$ 26 Specify with separate neutrals.Systems Furniture separate neutralsSpecification • 4-circuit (3+D) powerway +$ 24 Replace P3 in style number with P4.Guide • 4-circuit (3I+1) powerway +$ 55 Replace P3 in style number with P4and specify with 3I+1 wiring schematic.• 4-circuit (2+2) powerway +$ 55 Replace P3 in style number with P4and specify with 2+2 wiring schematic.Field-installed powerway• For use in New York CitycMust specify powerway for fieldinstallation only.cSee Series 9000 Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.Without TRI belt access slot• For use in Los Angeles No cost Add suffix LA to panel style number.Related • Panel brackets cSee Series 9000 Systems FurnitureProductsSpecification Guide.• Panel accessoriescSee Series 9000 Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.• Panel wiring and cablingcSee Series 9000 Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.366 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

Enhanced TRI PanelsSpecification InformationDWidth DStyle DU.S. DOption DStyle DU.S. DOptiond dNumber dBase d(Add $ to dNumber dBase d(Add $ tod d dPrice dBase Price) d dPrice dBase Price)d d d d d d dd d d dCustomiz Stain d d dCustomiz Staind d d don Wood d d don Woodd d d dSurface and d d dSurface andd d d dFiller d d dFiller53"H 65"H30" 9PW5330P3 G $1133 +$60 9PW6530P3 G $1242 +$ 6035" 9PW5335P3 G $1185 +$60 9PW6535P3 G $1301 +$ 6036" 9PW5336P3 G $1185 +$60 9PW6536P3 G $1301 +$ 8442" 9PW5342P3 G $1266 +$60 9PW6542P3 G $1376 +$ 8445" 9PW5345P3 G $1266 +$84 9PW6545P3 G $1376 +$107d d d d d d dSeries 9000For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List367Last order entry November 18, 2005

Enhanced TRI Panelswith TRI Surfaces Both Sides GPanel surfaces:• Both surfaces:desk-high TRI beltTip: To price a panel withtwo surface materials indifferent price groups, addthe two fabric price groupoption prices together anddivide by 2; then add theresult to the panel baseprice.Tip: Surface impressions arenot available.Standard Includes• Panel with two surfaces: vertical surface fabricprice group 1• Radius top cap, end trim, and base covers withreceptacle knockout: all paint price groups• TRI belt: vertical surface fabric with black vinylaccess slot• Hinge: vinylRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Fabric color number for surface 13 Fabric color number for surface 24 Paint color number for top cap, end trim,and base covers5 Plastic color number for vinyl hinge6 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurfacePanel surfaceMaterials • Fabric price group 1 No cost Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 2 +$ 32 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 3 +$ 80 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 4 +$128 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 5 +$200 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group COM +$ 30 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manualto specify.Fabric direction• Warp vertical on directional No cost cSpecify with warp vertical.fabricscSee Series 9000 Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.Top Cap • Square metal top cap No cost Specify with square metal top cap.• Square wood top cap +$ 81 Specify with square wood top cap andselect wood color number.• Radius wood top cap +$ 81 Specify with radius wood top cap andselect wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood +$ 12 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.top capElectricalFactory-installed powerwaycSee Series 9000 • 3-circuit powerway with +$134 Add suffix P3 to panel style number.Systems Furniture shared neutralSpecification • 3-circuit powerway with +$160 Add suffix P3 to panel style number andGuide separate neutrals specify with separate neutrals.• 4-circuit (3+D) powerway +$158 Add suffix P4 to panel style number.• 4-circuit (3I+1) powerway +$189 Add suffix P4 to panel style number andspecify with 3I+1 wiring.• 4-circuit (2+2) powerway +$189 Add suffix P4 to panel style number andspecify with 2+2 wiring.Field-installed powerway• For use in New York CitycMust specify powerway for fieldinstallation only.cSee Series 9000 Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.Without TRI belt access slot• For use in Los Angeles No cost Add suffix LA to panel style number.Related • Panel brackets cSee Series 9000 Systems FurnitureProductsSpecification Guide.• Panel accessoriescSee Series 9000 Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.• Panel wiring and cablingcSee Series 9000 Systems FurnitureSpecification Guide.For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.368 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

Enhanced TRI PanelsSpecification InformationDWidth DStyle DU.S. DStyle DU.S.d dNumber dBase dNumber dBased d dPrice d dPriced d d d d53"H 65"H30" 9EE5330 G $712 9EE6530 G $ 85835" 9EE5335 G $762 9EE6535 G $ 91536" 9EE5336 G $762 9EE6536 G $ 91542" 9EE5342 G $841 9EE6542 G $ 98845" 9EE5345 G $841 9EE6545 G $ 98860" 9EE5360 G $961 9EE6560 G $1102d d d d dSeries 9000For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List369Last order entry November 18, 2005

Enhanced Panel DoorsStandard Includes• Panel door: vertical surface fabricprice group 1• Door trim and end covers: all paint price groups• Threshold: stainless steel only• Corner post, included in corner application version:paintRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Fabric color number for surface 1 (inside)3 Fabric color number for surface 2(outside)4 Paint color number for door trim, endcovers, and corner post, if selected5 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Tip: To price a panel withtwo surface materials indifferent price groups, addthe two fabric price groupoption prices together anddivide by 2; then add theresult to the panel baseprice.Tip: When ordering a paneldoor, specify inside first,then outside. If not identified,first surface specified willbe inside.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurfacePanel surfaceMaterials • Fabric price group 1 No cost Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 2 +$ 32 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 3 +$ 80 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 4 +$128 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 5 +$200 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group COM +$ 30 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manualto specify.Specification InformationDWidth DStyle DU.S. DStyle DU.S.d dNumber dBase dNumber dBased d dPrice d dPriced d d d dStraight Application65"H 75"H35" 9FF65DRA $1126 9FF75DRA $1239Corner Application35" 9FF65DRB $1195 9FF75DRB $1325d d d d dFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.370 Transitional Specification Guide

Panel Wiring and CablingPanel Wiring and CablingShortened Top Caps (Field-Installed) for Enhanced PanelsStandard Includes• Shortened top cap: all paint price groups or woodRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Color number for top cap3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Tip: For use with cabledrop box.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurface • Customiz stain on wood +$12 Specify with Customiz stain.MaterialscSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.Top Cap • Square painted top cap Prices below Specify with square top cap.• Square wood top cap Prices below Specify wood top cap style number,indicate with square wood top cap, andselect wood color number.• Radius wood top cap Prices below Specify wood top cap style number,indicate with radius wood top cap, andselect wood color number.Specification InformationDWidth DStyle DU.S.d dNumber dBased d dPriced d dPainted Top Caps20" 9CTC20 $ 2725" 9CTC25 $ 2830" 9CTC30 $ 3135" 9CTC35 $ 3236" 9CTC36 $ 3242" 9CTC42 $ 3345" 9CTC45 $ 3660" 9CTC60 $ 42d d dWood Top Caps20" 9CTCW20 $ 9525" 9CTCW25 $10230" 9CTCW30 $11235" 9CTCW35 $12036" 9CTCW36 $12142" 9CTCW42 $13145" 9CTCW45 $13860" 9CTCW60 $166d d dSeries 9000For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide cPanel Wiring and Cabling, continued 371

Panel Wiring and Cabling, continuedCable Drop Boxes for Enhanced PanelsStandard Includes• Cable drop box: all vertical surface fabric pricegroups or wood• Top cap of cable drop box: all paint price groups• Carrier: black paint onlyRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Color number for drop box3 Color number for top cap of drop box4 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Tip: Specify shortened topcap separately for fieldinstallation.cSee Series 9000 SystemsFurniture SpecificationGuide.Options Price Required to SpecifySurfaceFabric directionMaterials • Warp vertical on directional fabrics No cost Specify with warp vertical,cSee Surface Materials, Series 9000 SystemsFurniture Specification Guide.Cable drop box cover• Customiz stain on wood drop box No cost cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.coverTop cap of cable drop box• Wood top cap +$70 Specify with wood top cap and select woodcolor number.• Customiz stain on wood top cap +$70 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.Top Cap • Square metal top cap No cost Specify with square top cap.• Square wood top cap +$70 Specify with square wood top cap and selectwood color number.• Radius wood top cap +$70 Specify with radius wood top cap and selectwood color number.For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.372 Transitional Specification Guide

Panel Wiring and CablingSpecification InformationDHigher DLower DCable DStyle DU.S.dPanel dPanel dDrop Box dNumber dBasedHeight dHeight dHeight d dPriced d d d dFabric-Covered Cable Drop Boxes42" 34 1 ⁄2" 7 1 ⁄2" 9CDB4234 $ 7553" 34 1 ⁄2" 18 1 ⁄2" 9CDB5334 $ 7553" 42" 11" 9CDB5342 $ 7561" 34 1 ⁄2" 26 1 ⁄2" 9CDB6134 $ 7561" 42" 19" 9CDB6142 $ 7561" 53" 9" 9CDB6153 $ 7565" 34 1 ⁄2" 30 1 ⁄2" 9CDB6534 $ 7565" 42" 23" 9CDB6542 $ 7565" 53" 12" 9CDB6553 $ 7575" 34 1 ⁄2" 40 1 ⁄2" 9CDB7534 $ 7575" 42" 33" 9CDB7542 $ 7575" 53" 22" 9CDB7553 $ 7575" 61" 14" 9CDB7561 $ 7575" 65" 10" 9CDB7565 $ 75d d d d dWood Cable Drop Boxes42" 34 1 ⁄2" 7 1 ⁄2" 9WCDB4234 $18453" 34 1 ⁄2" 18 1 ⁄2" 9WCDB5334 $18453" 42" 11" 9WCDB5342 $18461" 34 1 ⁄2" 26 1 ⁄2" 9WCDB6134 $18461" 42" 19" 9WCDB6142 $18461" 53" 9" 9WCDB6153 $18465" 34 1 ⁄2" 30 1 ⁄2" 9WCDB6534 $18465" 42" 23" 9WCDB6542 $18465" 53" 12" 9WCDB6553 $18475" 34 1 ⁄2" 40 1 ⁄2" 9WCDB7534 $18475" 42" 33" 9WCDB7542 $18475" 53" 22" 9WCDB7553 $18475" 61" 14" 9WCDB7561 $18475" 65" 10" 9WCDB7565 $184d d d d dSeries 9000For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 373

Mobile Pedestal Caps GField-Installed KitStandard Includes• Cushion upholstery: fabric price group 1• Retractable handle: 9201 Polished Chrome only• Template for installationRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Fabric color number for cushionupholstery3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurfaceUpholsteryMaterials • Fabric price group 1 No cost Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 2 +$ 10 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 3 +$ 33 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 4 +$ 41 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 5 +$ 50 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 6 +$ 72 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 7 +$ 85 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 8 +$125 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 9 +$160 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 10 +$195 Specify fabric color number.• Leather price group +$500 Specify leather color number.c See Surface Materials, Series 9000Systems Furniture Specification Guide.• Customer’s Own Material +$ 15 c See Surface Materials Reference Manual(COM) or Customer’s Ownto specify.Leather (COL)Specification InformationDDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD W dNumber dBased d dPriced d dFor Use with Series 9000 Box File Mobile Pedestal25" 15" CAP1525 G $315d d dFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.374 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

Storage Accessories GReference Shelf GStandard Includes• Reference shelf: black plastic only• Shelf insert: clear plastic onlyRequired to SpecifyStyle numberSpecification InformationDDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD W H dNumber dPriced d d9 1 ⁄2" 13 3 ⁄16" 3 ⁄8" 2256P G $26d d dSeries 9000For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List375Last order entry November 18, 2005

Conventional Storage Brackets and Accessories GPedestal Adapter Package GStandard Includes• Pair of brackets: black paint onlyRequired to SpecifyStyle numberTip: When pre-2004 25"Dpedestals are used on a30"D worksurface, you mustspecify a pedestal adapterpackage for each pedestalspecified.Specification InformationDStyledNumberdDU.S.dPriced99239 G $55ddCompressor for Pedestal File Drawers GStandard Includes• Compressor: black paint onlyRequired to SpecifyStyle numberSpecification InformationTip: Compressor can beordered for use in pre-2004Series 9000 pedestals,desks, returns, and credenzaswith pedestals.DDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD W H dNumber dPriced d d7 ⁄8" 11 7 ⁄8" 9" BPC G $31d d dConvenience Tray GStandard Includes• Convenience tray: black plastic onlyRequired to SpecifyStyle numberSpecification InformationDDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD W H dNumber dPriced d d7 1 ⁄4" 13 1 ⁄8" 1 5 ⁄8" 99465 G $23d d dFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.376 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

Storage ProductsWhen ordered and installedin accordance withSteelcase specification andinstallation guidelines,Storage Products meetapplicable ANSI/BIFMAstandards.Universal Storage ProductsStacked Lateral Files 378Fixed Pedestals 384Fixed to Freestanding Pedestal Conversion Kits 3881 1 ⁄2"H Base Option for Use with Universal Storage Products 389Steel Bases 390Accessories for Universal Storage 391FirstFile 100 and 200 Series Lateral Files100 Series Lateral Files with Roll-Out Shelves 392100 Series Lateral Files with Drawers 394200 Series Lateral Files with Roll-Out Shelves 396800 and 900 Series Lateral FilesBuildup Tips and Examples 398800 Series Lateral Files with Roll-Out Shelves and Lock 400900 Series Lateral Files with Roll-Out Shelves and Lock 402Cabinets for 800 Series Lateral File Buildups with Lock 404800 Series Drawers 406800 Series Receding Doors 408Fixed Shelves 409Hang-On Acoustical Panels 410800 and 900 Series Vertical Files800 Series Cabinets 412900 Series Cabinets 414Storage ProductsTransitional Specification Guide 377

Stacked Lateral Fileswith Flush Steel FrontStandard Includes• Lateral file with integral pulls: paint price group 1• 1"H top and 3"H base: paint to match file• Lift-up door with fixed shelf, if selected: paint to match file• Drawer body: black only• One label holder per drawer: clear plastic• Drawer suspensions: black only• Two rails per drawer on 24"D units• Lock, keyed random: 9201 Polished Chrome• Four adjustable leveling glidesRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for file3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurface28"H or 40"H filesMaterials • Paint price group 1 No cost Specify paint color number.• Paint price group 2 +$ 46 Specify paint color number.• Paint price group 3 +$ 78 Specify paint color number.52"H or 65 1 ⁄2"H files• Paint price group 1 No cost Specify paint color number.• Paint price group 2 +$ 65 Specify paint color number.• Paint price group 3 +$112 Specify paint color number.Tip: Security top reducesoverall height byapproximately 1".Tip: Laminate and woodveneer tops are 3 ⁄16" tallerthan other tops and will add3⁄16" to overall case height.Tops • Security top for use on No cost Specify with security top.28"H or 40"H lateral files onlyNo top• On 24"D x 30"W file –$ 80 Specify with no top.• On 24"D x 36"W file –$ 86 Specify with no top.Laminate top• Square edge laminate top +$186 Specify with laminate top and indicatelaminate color number for top and plasticcolor number for edges.• Accent laminate on +$ 60 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.laminate top• Open Line laminate on +$ 60 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.laminate topplus cost of laminateWood veneer top• Wood veneer top +$309 Specify with wood veneer top andindicate wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood +$ 12 Specify with Customiz stain.veneer topcSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.Bases • 1 1 ⁄2"H base No cost Specify with 1 1 ⁄2" base.Drawer • Front-to-back divider package Prices at right Specify with front-to-back dividerInteriorspackage.Side-to-side divider package• On files with two drawers +$ 54 Specify with side-to-side divider package.• On files with three drawers +$ 81 Specify with side-to-side divider package.• On files with four drawers +$108 Specify with side-to-side divider package.Tip: Roll-out shelf doesnot include accessories.Hanging folder bars and railscan be ordered separately.Lift-Up Door 65 1 ⁄2"H files onlyWith Roll-Out • On 24"D files +$ 76 Specify with roll-out shelf.ShelfcOptions, continued on next pageFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.378 Transitional Specification Guide

Stacked Lateral Files withFlush Steel FrontTip: Counterweight packagesare recommendedbased on case size andinterior options.cSee SpecificationInformation below.Tip: Counterweight optionshould be specified if thecabinet is not ganged toadjacent cabinets or boltedto the floor or wall.Tip: Counterweights shipseparately from case andmust be installed on site.Tip: 65 1 ⁄2"H files withindividual lock option do nothave a lock in the lift-updoor. Lift-up door is lockedby the drawer below.cOptions, continued from previous pageOptions U.S. Price Required to SpecifyCounter- • Package 1 +$ 19 Specify with counterweight.weights • Package 2 +$ 40 Specify with counterweight.• Package 3 +$ 60 Specify with counterweight.Lock andLockKeying • Ember Chrome No cost Specify with 9250 Ember Chrome lock.Individual locking drawers on 24"D file• With two drawers +$113 Specify with individual lock.• With three drawers +$226 Specify with individual lock.• With four drawers +$340 Specify with individual lock.Keying• Factory- and field-installed keyingcSee Storage Specification Guide.Related • Accessories cSee Storage Specification Guide.Products • Shelf bookends cSee Storage Specification Guide.• Details containerscSee Details Specification Guide.• Field-installed topscSee Storage Specification Guide.• Field-installed basescSee Storage Specification Guide.• CounterweightscSee Storage Specification Guide.Tip: Height dimensionincludes standard 1"H top.Specification InformationDDimensions DRecommended DStyle DU.S. DOptiondD W H dCounterweight dNumber dBase d(Add $ tod dPackage d dPrice dBase Price)d d d d dd d d d dFront-to-Backd d d d dDivider PkgTwo 12"H Drawers23 1 ⁄8" 30" 28" Package 2 RLS243024F $1001 +$ 6423 1 ⁄8" 36" 28" Package 3 RLS243624F $1137 +$ 64d d d d dStorage ProductsThree 12"H Drawers23 1 ⁄8" 30" 40" Package 1 RLS243036F $1342 +$ 9623 1 ⁄8" 36" 40" Package 1 RLS243636F $1524 +$ 96d d d d dFour 12"H Drawers23 1 ⁄8" 30" 52" N.A. RLS243048F $1796 +$12823 1 ⁄8" 36" 52" Package 1 RLS243648F $2042 +$128d d d d dFour 12"H Drawers and One 13 1 /2"H Lift-Up Door with Fixed Shelf23 1 ⁄8" 30" 65 1 ⁄2" N.A. RLS243061F $2182 +$12823 1 ⁄8" 36" 65 1 ⁄2" N.A. RLS243661F $2479 +$128d d d d dTransitional Specification Guide 379

Stacked Lateral Fileswith Proud Steel or Wood FrontStandard Includes• Lateral file: paint price group 1• Contemporary pulls: metal• 1"H top on unit with proud steel front: paint to match file• Drawer fronts and 1"H top on unit with proud wood front:wood veneer• 3"H base: paint to match file• Lift-up door with fixed shelf on unit with proud steel front,if selected: paint to match file• Lift-up door with fixed shelf on unit with proud wood front,if selected: wood veneer• Drawer body: black only• One label holder per drawer: clear plastic• Drawer suspensions: black only• Two rails per drawer on 24"D units• Lock, keyed random: 9201 Polished Chrome• Four adjustable leveling glidesRequired to Specify1 Style number with appropriate front stylesuffix in the space providedP Proud steel frontW Proud wood front2 Paint color number for file3 Wood color number for drawer fronts andtop, if proud wood front selected4 Metal color number for pulls:0835 Black9201 Polished Chrome9211 Nickel9212 Silver5 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurface28"H or 40"H filesMaterials • Paint price group 1 No cost Specify paint color number.• Paint price group 2 +$ 46 Specify paint color number.• Paint price group 3 +$ 78 Specify paint color number.• Customiz stain on proud +$ 32 Specify with Customiz stain.wood fronts and topcSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.52"H or 65 1 ⁄2"H files• Paint price group 1 No cost Specify paint color number.• Paint price group 2 +$ 65 Specify paint color number.• Paint price group 3 +$112 Specify paint color number.• Customiz stain on proud +$ 42 Specify with Customiz stain.wood fronts and topcSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.Tip: Security top reducesoverall height byapproximately 1".Tip: Laminate and woodveneer tops are 3 ⁄16" tallerthan other tops and will add3 ⁄16" to overall case height.Tops with • Security top for use on 28"H No cost Specify with security top.Proud Steel or 40"H lateral files onlyFrontNo top• On 24"D x 30"W file –$ 80 Specify with no top.• On 24"D x 36"W file –$ 86 Specify with no top.Laminate top• Square edge laminate top +$186 Specify with laminate top and indicatelaminate color number for top and plasticcolor number for edges.• Accent laminate on +$ 60 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.laminate top• Open Line laminate on +$ 60 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.laminate topplus cost of laminatecOptions, continued on next pageWood veneer top• Wood veneer top +$309 Specify with wood veneer top andindicate wood color number.• Customiz stain on wood +$ 12 Specify with Customiz stain.veneer topcSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.380 Transitional Specification Guide

Stacked Lateral Files withProud Steel or Wood FrontTip: Security top reducesoverall height byapproximately 1".Tip: Laminate and wood topsare 3 ⁄16" taller than other topsand will add 3 ⁄16" to overallcase height.cOptions, continued from previous pageOptions U.S. Price Required to SpecifyTops with • Security top for use on 28"H –$309 Specify with security top.Proud Wood or 40"H lateral files onlyFrontNo top• On 24"D x 30"W file –$389 Specify with no top.• On 24"D x 36"W file –$395 Specify with no top.Laminate top• Square edge laminate top –$123 Specify with laminate top and indicatelaminate color number for top and plasticcolor number for edges.• Accent laminate on +$ 60 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.laminate top• Open Line laminate on +$ 60 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.laminate topplus cost of laminateBases • 1 1 ⁄2"H base No cost Specify with 1 1 ⁄2" base.Drawer • Front-to-back divider package Prices on next Specify with front-to-back dividerInteriors page package.Side-to-side divider package• On files with two drawers +$ 54 Specify with side-to-side divider package.• On files with three drawers +$ 81 Specify with side-to-side divider package.• On files with four drawers +$108 Specify with side-to-side divider package.Pulls • Handle No cost Specify with handle pull.• Jazz +$ 15 per pull Specify with jazz pull.• Bar +$ 20 per pull Specify with bar pull.Tip: Counterweight packagesare recommendedbased on case size andinterior options.cSee SpecificationInformation on next page.Tip: Counterweight optionshould be specified if thecabinet is not ganged toadjacent cabinets or boltedto the floor or wall.Tip: Counterweights shipseparately from case andmust be installed on site.Tip: 65 1 ⁄2"H files withindividual lock option do nothave a lock in the lift-updoor. Lift-up door is lockedby the drawer below.Counter- • Package 1 +$ 19 Specify with counterweight.weights • Package 2 +$ 40 Specify with counterweight.• Package 3 +$ 60 Specify with counterweight.Lock andLockKeying • Ember Chrome No cost Specify with 9250 Ember Chrome lock.Individual locking drawers on 24"D file• With two drawers +$113 Specify with individual lock.• With three drawers +$226 Specify with individual lock.• With four drawers +$340 Specify with individual lock.Keying• Factory- and field-installed keyingcSee Storage Specification Guide.Related • Accessories cSee Storage Specification Guide.Products • Shelf bookends cSee Storage Specification Guide.• Details containerscSee Details Specification Guide.• Field-installed topscSee Storage Specification Guide.• Field-installed basescSee Storage Specification Guide.• CounterweightscSee Storage Specification Guide.cSpecification Information on next pageStorage ProductsFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide cStacked Lateral Files, continued 381

Stacked Lateral Files with Proud Steel or Wood Front, continuedTip: Height dimensionincludes standard 1"H top.Tip: Your specification isnot complete until you adda suffix to the style numberto define the front style (forexample, RTB24244LA__becomes RTB24244LAP forproud steel front).Specification InformationDDimensions DRecommended DStyle DU.S. Base PricesdD W H dCounterweight dNumber dd dPackage d dProud dProud DOptiond d d dSteel dWood d(Add $ tod d d dFront dFront dBase Price)d d d d d dd d d dSuffix P dSuffix W dFront-to-Backd d d d d dDivider PkgTwo 12"H Drawers24" 30" 28" Package 2 RLS243024__ $1001 $1795 +$ 6424" 36" 28" Package 3 RLS243624__ $1137 $1931 +$ 64d d d d d dThree 12"H Drawers24" 30" 40" Package 1 RLS243036__ $1342 $2136 +$ 9624" 36" 40" Package 1 RLS243636__ $1524 $2318 +$ 96d d d d d dFour 12"H Drawers24" 30" 52" N.A. RLS243048__ $1796 $2661 +$12824" 36" 52" Package 1 RLS243648__ $2042 $2907 +$128d d d d d dFour 12"H Drawers and One 13 1 /2"H Lift-Up Door with Fixed Shelf24" 30" 65 1 ⁄2" N.A. RLS243061__ $2300 $3047 +$12824" 36" 65 1 ⁄2" N.A. RLS243661__ $2598 $3344 +$128d d d d d dFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.382 Transitional Specification Guide

Stacked Lateral Files withProud Steel or Wood FrontStorage ProductsFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 383

Fixed Pedestalswith Flush Steel FrontStandard Includes• Pedestal and filler, if selected: paint price group 1• Removable drawer fronts with integral pulls:paint to match pedestal• Full drawer interiors: black only– Full-depth drawer bodies– Full-extension drawer suspensions– One pencil tray per box/box/file and box drawer dividers• Lock, keyed random: 9201 Polished Chrome• Mounting hardware• Four adjustable leveling glidesRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for pedestal and filler,if selected3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurface • Paint price group 1 No cost Specify paint color number.Materials • Paint price group 2 +$ 38 Specify paint color number.• Paint price group 3 +$ 65 Specify paint color number.Pulls • Full-width wood veneer pull +$116 Specify with wood pull and indicatewood color number.• Customiz stain on wood +$ 12 Specify with Customiz stain.veneer pullcSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.Basic Drawer 18"D, 24"D, and 30"D box/box/file pedestalsInteriors • Full-depth drawers, box –$ 35 Specify with basic drawers.drawers with full extensions,and no drawer accessoriesLock andLockKeying • Ember Chrome No cost Specify with 9250 Ember Chrome lock.• No lock –$ 51 Specify with no lock.Individual locking drawers• File/file pedestals only +$ 95 Specify with individual drawer lock.Keying• Factory- and field-installed keyingcSee Storage Specification Guide.Related • Pedestal conversion kits cSee Storage Specification Guide.Products • Drawer accessories cSee Storage Specification Guide.Specification InformationTip: Use 25 1 ⁄2"H pedestals toalign with Universal Storagewith 1 1 ⁄2" base. 25 1 ⁄2"Hpedestals support worksurfacesat 27"H or conversionkit is available for freestandingapplications underworksurfaces installed at28 1 ⁄2"H.Tip: Only 22 5 ⁄8"D and28 5 ⁄8"D pedestals canaccommodate legal-sizefiling.DDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD W H dNumber dBased d dPriced d d25 1 ⁄2"H Fixed Pedestals with 1 1 ⁄2" BaseTwo Box Drawers and One File Drawer17 1 ⁄2" 15" 25 1 ⁄2" RPF1825AF $44122 5 ⁄8" 15" 25 1 ⁄2" RPF2425AF $47828 5 ⁄8" 15" 25 1 ⁄2" RPF3025AF $570Two File Drawers17 1 ⁄2" 15" 25 1 ⁄2" RPF1825BF $35322 5 ⁄8" 15" 25 1 ⁄2" RPF2425BF $39028 5 ⁄8" 15" 25 1 ⁄2" RPF3025BF $482d d d384 Transitional Specification Guide

Fixed Pedestalswith Flush Steel FrontStorage ProductsFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 385

Fixed Pedestalswith Proud Steel or Wood FrontStandard Includes• Pedestal and filler, if selected: paint price group 1• Removable drawer fronts: paint to match pedestal orwood veneer if proud wood front selected• Contemporary pulls: metal• Full drawer interiors: black only– Full-depth drawer bodies– Full-extension drawer suspensions– One pencil tray per box/box/file and box drawer dividers• Lock, keyed random: 9201 Polished Chrome• Mounting hardware• Four adjustable leveling glidesRequired to Specify1 Style number with appropriate front stylesuffix in the space providedP Proud steel frontW Proud wood front2 Paint color number for pedestal and filler,if selected3 Wood color number for drawer fronts,if proud wood front selected4 Metal color number for pulls:0835 Black9201 Polished Chrome9211 Nickel9212 Silver5 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurface • Paint price group 1 No cost Specify paint color number.Materials • Paint price group 2 +$38 Specify paint color number.• Paint price group 3 +$65 Specify paint color number.• Customiz stain on proud +$12 Specify with Customiz stain.wood drawer frontscSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.Pulls • Handle pull No cost Specify with handle pull.• Jazz pull +$41 Specify with jazz pull.• Bar pull +$51 Specify with bar pull.Basic Drawer 18"D, 24"D, and 30"D box/box/file pedestalsInteriors • Full-depth drawers, box –$35 Specify with basic drawers.drawers with full extensions,and no drawer accessoriesLock andLockKeying • Ember Chrome No cost Specify with 9250 Ember Chrome lock.• No lock –$51 Specify with no lock.Individual locking drawers• File/file pedestals only +$95 Specify with individual drawer lock.Keying• Factory- and field-installed keyingcSee Storage Specification Guide.Related • Pedestal conversion kits cSee Storage Specification Guide.Products • Drawer accessories cSee Storage Specification Guide.For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.386 Transitional Specification Guide

Fixed Pedestalswith Proud Steel orWood FrontSpecification InformationTip: Use 25 1 ⁄2"H pedestals toalign with Universal Storagewith 1 1 ⁄2" base. 25 1 ⁄2"Hpedestals support worksurfacesat 27"H or a conversionkit is available for freestandingapplications under worksurfacesinstalled at 28 1 ⁄2"H.Tip: Only 23 1 ⁄2"D and29 1 ⁄2"D pedestals canaccommodate legal-sizefiling.DDimensions DStyle DU.S. Base PricesdD W H dNumber dd d dProud dProudd d dSteel dWoodd d dFront dFrontd d d dd d dSuffix P dSuffix W25 1 ⁄2"H Fixed Pedestals with 1 1 ⁄2" BaseTwo Box Drawers and One File Drawer18 3 ⁄8" 15" 25 1 ⁄2" RPF1825A__ $441 $62523 1 ⁄2" 15" 25 1 ⁄2" RPF2425A__ $478 $66229 1 ⁄2" 15" 25 1 ⁄2" RPF3025A__ $570 $754Two File Drawers18 3 ⁄8" 15" 25 1 ⁄2" RPF1825B__ $353 $53723 1 ⁄2" 15" 25 1 ⁄2" RPF2425B__ $390 $57429 1 ⁄2" 15" 25 1 ⁄2" RPF3025B__ $482 $666d d d dStorage ProductsFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 387

Fixed to Freestanding Pedestal Conversion KitsStandard Includes• 1 ⁄8"H steel top: all paint price groups• Counterweight package• Installation hardwareRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for topcSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Tip: Flush and proud frontpedestals require differentconversion kits. Be sure toorder the correct stylenumber for your application.Tip: When converting afile/file pedestal withindividual drawer locks, aninterlocking bar is requiredto provide stability to unit.Order Service Part Number1043924SR.Specification InformationDDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD H dNumber dPriced d dFor 25 1 /2"H Proud Steel or Proud Wood Front Pedestals18 3 ⁄8" 25 1 ⁄2" RPXCK2518P $13423 1 ⁄2" 25 1 ⁄2" RPXCK2524P $14929 1 ⁄2" 25 1 ⁄2" RPXCK2530P $165d d dFor 25 1 /2"H Flush Steel Front Pedestals17 1 ⁄2 " 25 1 ⁄2" RPXCK2518F $13422 5 ⁄8 " 25 1 ⁄2" RPXCK2524F $14928 5 ⁄8 " 25 1 ⁄2" RPXCK2530F $165d d dFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.388 Transitional Specification Guide

1 1 ⁄2"H Base Option for Use with Universal Storage ProductsOn Full Front Towers, Open Side Towers, Vertical Drawer Towers, Workstation Verticals,Lockers, Stacked Lateral Files, Lateral Files, Stacked/Rotated Lateral Files,Combination Cabinets, Wardrobe Cabinets, and Stack-Ups1 1 ⁄2"H Base Optionfor Use with UniversalStorage ProductsStandard IncludescSee Storage Specification Guide.Required to SpecifycSee Storage Specification Guide.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifyBases • 1 1 ⁄2"H base No cost Specify with 1 1 ⁄2" base.Storage ProductsFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 389

Steel BasesTip: Bases are for fieldinstallationonly.Standard Includes• Base: all paint price groups• Attachment hardware• Four adjustable leveling glidesSpecification InformationDDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD W dNumber dPriced d d1 1 /2"H Steel Bases15" 24" RXBS152401 $ 9715" 30" RXBS153001 $10315" 36" RXBS153601 $10615" 42" RXBS154201 $11618" 18" RXBS181801 $ 9718" 24" RXBS182401 $10018" 30" RXBS183001 $10618" 36" RXBS183601 $11618" 42" RXBS184201 $13024" 9" RXBS240901 $ 9324" 15" RXBS241501 $ 9724" 18" RXBS241801 $10024" 24" RXBS242401 $11324" 30" RXBS243001 $12224" 36" RXBS243601 $13930" 9" RXBS300901 $ 9330" 15" RXBS301501 $10330" 24" RXBS302401 $126d d dRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for basecSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.390 Transitional Specification Guide

Accessories for Universal StorageAccessories for UniversalStorageHanging Folder BarsStandard Includes• Hanging folder bar: black onlyRequired to SpecifyStyle numberSpecification InformationDWidth DStyle DU.S.d dNumber dPriced d dFor Use with File Frames36" RXAFHFB36 $1142" RXAFHFB42 $11d d dWire ManagersStandard Includes• Wire manager: black onlyRequired to SpecifyStyle numberTip: Plastic extrusion canbe cut to size in the field.Specification InformationDHeight DStyle DU.S.d dNumber dPriced d d34" RXAWM34 $2759 1 ⁄2" RXAWM59 $33d d dStorage ProductsTip: Wire manager cannotbe used in stacked orstacked and rotated lateralfiles.For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 391

FirstFile 100 Series Lateral Fileswith Roll-Out ShelvescSee Storage SpecificationGuide for details aboutpreventing files from tippingand causing personal injury.Tip: When you choose anoptional shelf interior, itwill apply to all the shelvesin the cabinet. Order shelfinterior components forfield installation separately.cSee Storage SpecificationGuide.Tip: To ensure cabinetstability, field installcounterweight packagesfor lateral files that are notganged to another case,attached to a worksurface,or bolted to the floor orwall. Counterweightpackages are orderedseparately.cSee Storage SpecificationGuide.Standard Includes• Lateral file: paint price group 1• One snap-on label holder per door: clear plastic only• Shelf suspensions: black only• Shelf body: black only• Two hanging file folder frames per shelf• Recessed door pulls: 6623 Metallic plastic only• Lock, keyed random: 9201 Polished Chrome• Adjustable leveling glidesRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for file3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurface • Paint price group 1 No cost Specify paint color number.Materials • Paint price group 2 +$ 65 Specify paint color number.• Paint price group 3 +$112 Specify paint color number.Interiors • Three dividers per shelf +$ 18 Specify with dividers.each shelf• Two rails per shelf +$ 22 Specify with rails.(Front-to-back filing)each shelfKeying • Factory- and field-installed keying cSee Storage Specification Guide.Related • Tops cSee Storage Specification Guide.Products • Overfiles cSee Storage Specification Guide.• AccessoriescSee Storage Specification Guide.• Counterweight packagescSee Storage Specification Guide.For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.392 Transitional Specification Guide

FirstFile 100 Series Lateral Fileswith Roll-Out ShelvesSpecification InformationDDimensions DRecommended DStyle DU.S.dD W H dCounterweight dNumber dBased dStyle Number d dPriced d d dLateral Files with Two 12"H Roll-Out Shelves and Receding Doors18" 30" 27" 847CW 130211 $ 57618" 36" 27" 858CW 136211 $ 65418" 42" 27" 858CW 142211 $ 748d d d dLateral Files with Three 12"H Roll-Out Shelves and Receding Doors18" 30" 39" 837CW 130311 $ 75418" 36" 39" 847CW 136311 $ 86318" 42" 39" 858CW 142311 $ 975d d d dLateral Files with Four 12"H Roll-Out Shelves and Receding Doors18" 30" 51 5 ⁄8" 827CW 130411 $ 95118" 36" 51 5 ⁄8" 837CW 136411 $109318" 42" 51 5 ⁄8" 847CW 142411 $1242d d d dLateral Files with Five 12"H Roll-Out Shelves and Receding Doors18" 30" 63 19 ⁄32" 827CW 130511 $115818" 36" 63 19 ⁄32" 827CW 136511 $132518" 42" 63 19 ⁄32" 827CW 142511 $1498d d d dStorage ProductsFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 393

FirstFile 100 Series Lateral Fileswith DrawerscSee Safe Use of StorageProducts in StorageSpecification Guide forinformation about preventingfiles from tipping andcausing personal injury.Tip: When you choose anoptional interior, it willapply to all the openings inthe cabinet. Order interiorcomponents for fieldinstallation separately.cSee Storage SpecificationGuide.Tip: To ensure cabinetstability, field installcounterweight packagesfor lateral files that are notganged to another case,attached to a worksurface,or bolted to the floor orwall. Counterweightpackages are orderedseparately.cSee Storage SpecificationGuide.Standard Includes• Lateral file: paint price group 1• One snap-on label holder per drawer: clear plastic only• Drawer suspensions: black only• Drawer body: black only• Two hanging file folder frames per opening• Recessed drawer pulls: 6623 Metallic plastic only• Lock, keyed random: 9201 Polished Chrome• Adjustable leveling glidesRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for file3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurface • Paint price group 1 No cost Specify paint color number.Materials • Paint price group 2 +$ 65 Specify paint color number.• Paint price group 3 +$112 Specify paint color number.Interiors • Three dividers per drawer +$ 18 Specify with dividers.or shelfeach drawer or shelf• Two rails per drawer or shelf +$ 22 Specify with rails.(Front-to-back filing)each drawer or shelfKeying • Factory- and field-installed keying cSee Storage Specification Guide.Related • Tops cSee Storage Specification Guide.Products • Overfiles cSee Storage Specification Guide.• AccessoriescSee Storage Specification Guide.• Counterweight packagescSee Storage Specification Guide.For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.394 Transitional Specification Guide

FirstFile 100 Series Lateral Fileswith DrawersSpecification InformationDDimensions DRecommended DStyle DU.S.dD W H dCounterweight dNumber dBased dStyle Number d dPriced d d dLateral Files with Two 12"H Drawers18" 30" 27" 847CW 130261 $ 52818" 36" 27" 858CW 136261 $ 59218" 42" 27" 858CW 142261 $ 681d d d dLateral Files with Three 12"H Drawers18" 30" 39" 837CW 130361 $ 68718" 36" 39" 847CW 136361 $ 78218" 42" 39" 858CW 142361 $ 885d d d dLateral Files with Four 12"H Drawers18" 30" 51 5 ⁄8" 827CW 130461 $ 86618" 36" 51 5 ⁄8" 837CW 136461 $ 99218" 42" 51 5 ⁄8" 847CW 142461 $1125d d d dLateral Files with Four 12"H Drawers and One 12"H Roll-Out Shelf with Receding Door18" 30" 63 19 ⁄32" 827CW 130561 $105018" 36" 63 19 ⁄32" 827CW 136561 $120318" 42" 63 19 ⁄32" 827CW 142561 $1361d d d dStorage ProductsFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 395

FirstFile 200 Series Lateral Fileswith Roll-Out ShelvescSee Safe Use of StorageProducts in StorageSpecification Guide forinformation about preventingfiles from tipping andcausing personal injury.Tip: When you choose anoptional shelf interior, itwill apply to all the shelvesin the cabinet. Order shelfinterior components forfield installation separately.cSee Storage SpecificationGuide.Tip: To ensure cabinetstability, field installcounterweight packagesfor lateral files that are notganged to another case,attached to a worksurface,or bolted to the floor orwall. Counterweightpackages are orderedseparately.cSee Storage SpecificationGuide.Standard Includes• Lateral file with full-width pull: paint price group 1• One snap-in label holder per door: clear plastic only• Shelf suspensions: black only• Shelf body: black only• Two hanging file folder frames per shelf• Lock, keyed random: 9201 Polished Chrome• Adjustable leveling glidesRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for file3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurface • Paint price group 1 No cost Specify paint color number.Materials • Paint price group 2 +$ 65 Specify paint color number.• Paint price group 3 +$112 Specify paint color number.Interiors • Three dividers per shelf +$ 18 Specify with dividers.each shelf• Two rails per shelf +$ 22 Specify with rails.(Front-to-back filing)each shelfKeying • Factory- and field-installed keying cSee Storage Specification Guide.Related • Tops cSee Storage Specification Guide.ProductscSee Storage Specification Guide.• AccessoriescSee Storage Specification Guide.• Counterweight packagescSee Storage Specification Guide.For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.396 Transitional Specification Guide

FirstFile 200 Series LateralFiles with Roll-Out ShelvesSpecification InformationDDimensions DRecommended DStyle DU.S.dD W H dCounterweight dNumber dBased dStyle Number d dPriced d d dLateral Files with Two 12"H Roll-Out Shelves and Receding Doors18" 30" 27" 847CW 230211 $ 54418" 36" 27" 858CW 236211 $ 61118" 42" 27" 858CW 242211 $ 700d d d dLateral Files with Three 12"H Roll-Out Shelves and Receding Doors18" 30" 39" 837CW 230311 $ 70618" 36" 39" 847CW 236311 $ 80618" 42" 39" 858CW 242311 $ 911d d d dLateral Files with Four 12"H Roll-Out Shelves and Receding Doors18" 30" 51 5 ⁄8" 827CW 230411 $ 88918" 36" 51 5 ⁄8" 837CW 236411 $102218" 42" 51 5 ⁄8" 847CW 242411 $1162d d d dLateral Files with Five 12"H Roll-Out Shelves and Receding Doors18" 30" 63 19 ⁄32" 827CW 230511 $108418" 36" 63 19 ⁄32" 827CW 236511 $123918" 42" 63 19 ⁄32" 827CW 242511 $1400d d d dStorage ProductsFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 397

Buildup Tips and Examples.Specifying StepsStep 1Choose buildup stylenumber.cCabinets for factoryassembledbuildups,see Storage SpecificationGuide.Tip: Alignment base optioncan be selected on 3-highcases for factoryassembledbuildups.For field-assembledbuildups, drop theBLDUP suffix from thestyle number you areordering.cSee specification pagesfor field-assembled pricedeductions.800 Series buildups havecabinet style numbers thatbegin with an 8 and 900Series buildups havecabinet style numbers thatbegin with a 9..Step 2Specify the storagecomponents that will fillthe cabinet in order fromtop to bottom. When areceding door will coverone or more roll-outshelves, specify the doorfirst and then the storagecomponents that arebehind it.Tip: When calculating thetotal height of the storagecomponents in the cabinet,include the height of thedoors, but don’t add in theheight of the storage componentsthat are behindthe door. Remember,doors are not standardwith roll-out shelves butare required. You mustspecify them.cSee Storage SpecificationGuide.Step 3Choose theappropriate stylenumber to indicate thedrawer or shelf interior thatyou want.Step 4Specify paint colorStep 5Specify acounterweightpackage to preventaccidental tipping inapplications where lateralfiles are not ganged..Example 1800 SeriesQuantityStyle Number with Description1 83636LBLDUP 36"H Cabinet1 836D12 12"H Receding Door1 836SWDV6 6"H Roll-Out Shelf withThree Dividers2 836PD3 3"H Drawer with ThreeDividers1 836DWDV6 6"H Drawer with ThreeDividers1 836DWHF12 12"H Drawer with OneHanging File Folder Frame1 858CW Counterweight package36" Total height of componentsTip: Following cabinetdescription, list componentsin order from top to bottom..398 Transitional Specification Guide

Buildup Tips and ExamplesExample 2900 SeriesTip: Specify door and thenlist components behind thedoor in order from top tobottom.Quantity Style Number with Description1 93648LBLDUP 48"H Cabinet with Lock1 936D12 12"H Receding Door2 836SWDV6 6"H Roll-Out Shelves with Three Dividerseach1 936D12 12"H Receding Door1 836SWDV12 12"H Roll-Out Shelf with Three Dividers andOne Hanging File Folder Frame1 936D9 9"H Receding Door1 836SWDV6 6"H Roll-Out Shelf with Three Dividers1 936DWHF15 15"H Drawer with One Hanging File FolderFrame48" Total height of componentsNote: This cabinet will be anchored to a wall.No counterweight package will be specified..Example 3800 SeriesQuantity Style Number with Description1 83660LBLDUP 60"H Cabinet with Lock1 936FSSD12 12"H Fixed Shelf with Sliding Doors1 836D12 12"H Receding Door1 836SWDV12 12"H Roll-Out Shelf with Three Dividers andOne Hanging File Folder Frame1 836D12 12"H Receding Door1 836SWDV12 12"H Roll-Out Shelf with Three Dividers andOne Hanging File Folder Frame1 836D9 9"H Receding Door1 836SWDV6 6"H Roll-Out Shelf with Three Dividers1 836PD3 3"H Drawer with Three Dividers1 836DWRW12 12"H Drawer with Two Rails1 858CW Counterweight package60" Total height of components..Storage ProductsTransitional Specification Guide 399

800 Series Lateral Fileswith Roll-Out Shelves and LockTip: Your specification isnot complete until you add asuffix to define the shelfinteriors.Standard Includes• Lateral file with 12"H roll-out shelves with receding doors:paint price group 1• One label holder per door: clear plastic only• Shelf suspensions: black only• Shelf body: black only• 800 Series or Avenir-style pulls• Lock, keyed random: 9201 Polished Chrome• Adjustable leveling glidesRequired to Specify1 Style number with appropriate suffix:DV = Three dividers and one hangingfile folder frame per shelfCW = One compressor and one hangingfile folder frame per shelfHF = Two hanging file folder framesper shelf2 Paint color number for file3 Pull style and color number (see below)4 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.cSee Safe Use of StorageProducts in StorageSpecification Guide forinformation about preventingfiles from tipping andcausing personal injury.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurface • Paint price group 1 No cost Specify paint color number.Materials • Paint price group 2 +$ 65 Specify paint color number.• Paint price group 3 +$112 Specify paint color number.Posting ShelfReplaces posting-shelf filler on 52 3 ⁄8"H and 64 11 ⁄16"H files• With all paint price groups30"W +$ 59 Specify with 830PS posting shelf.36"W +$ 64 Specify with 836PS posting shelf.42"W +$ 72 Specify with 842PS posting shelf.Pulls • 800 Series pulls: No cost Specify with 9201 Polished Chrome9201 Polished Chrome 800 Series pulls.• 800 Series pulls: paint No cost Specify with painted 800 Series pulls andselect paint color number.• Avenir-style pulls: paint No cost Specify with Avenir-style pulls andselect paint color number.Lock andLockKeying • Ember Chrome No cost Specify with 9250 Ember Chrome lock.Keying• Factory- and field-installed keyingcSee Storage Specification Guide.Related • Counterweight packages cSee Storage Specification Guide.Products • Tops cSee Storage Specification Guide.• OverfilescSee Storage Specification Guide.• AccessoriescSee Storage Specification Guide.For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.400 Transitional Specification Guide

800 Series Lateral Files withRoll-Out Shelves and LockSpecification InformationDDimensions DRecommended DStyle DU.S.dD W H dCounterweight dNumber dBased dStyle Number d dPriced d d dLateral Files with Two 12"H Roll-Out Shelves with Receding Doors18" 30" 27" 847CW 8302117__ $ 67218" 36" 27" 847CW 8362117__ $ 77718" 42" 27" 858CW 8422117__ $ 86218" 30" 28 1 ⁄4" 847CW 830211__ $ 67218" 36" 28 1 ⁄4" 847CW 836211__ $ 77718" 42" 28 1 ⁄4" 858CW 842211__ $ 862d d d dLateral Files with Three 12"H Roll-Out Shelves with Receding Doors18" 30" 41 1 ⁄4" 847CW 830311__ $ 92618" 36" 41 1 ⁄4" 847CW 836311__ $105518" 42" 41 1 ⁄4" 858CW 842311__ $1175d d d dLateral Files with Four 12"H Roll-Out Shelves with Receding Doors18" 30" 52 3 ⁄8" 827CW 830411__ $117218" 36" 52 3 ⁄8" 827CW 836411__ $137418" 42" 52 3 ⁄8" 827CW 842411__ $1529d d d dLateral Files with Five 12"H Roll-Out Shelves with Receding Doors18" 30" 64 11 ⁄16" 827CW 830511__ $141618" 36" 64 11 ⁄16" 827CW 836511__ $163318" 42" 64 11 ⁄16" 827CW 842511__ $1841d d d dStorage ProductscTo align bases of cabinetsof different heights, seeStorage Specification Guide.For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 401

900 Series Lateral Fileswith Roll-Out Shelves and LockTip: Your specification isnot complete until you adda suffix to define the shelfinteriors.cSee Safe Use of StorageProducts in StorageSpecification Guide forinformation about preventingfiles from tipping andcausing personal injury.Standard Includes• Lateral file with 12"H roll-out shelves with receding doorsand integral door pulls: paint price group 1• One label holder per door: clear plastic only• Shelf suspensions: black only• Shelf body: black only• Lock, keyed random: 9201 Polished Chrome• Adjustable leveling glidesRequired to Specify1 Style number with appropriate suffix:DV = Three dividers and one hangingfile folder frame per shelfCW = One compressor and one hangingfile folder frame per shelfHF = Two hanging file folder framesper shelf2 Paint color number for filecSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurface • Paint price group 1 No cost Specify paint color number.Materials • Paint price group 2 +$ 65 Specify paint color number.• Paint price group 3 +$112 Specify paint color number.Posting ShelfReplaces posting-shelf filler on 52 3 ⁄8"H and 64 11 ⁄16"H files• With all paint price groups30"W +$ 59 Specify with 830PS posting shelf.36"W +$ 64 Specify with 836PS posting shelf.42"W +$ 72 Specify with 842PS posting shelf.Lock andLockKeying • Ember Chrome No cost Specify with 9250 Ember Chrome lock.Keying• Factory- and field-installed keyingcSee Storage Specification Guide.Related • Counterweight packages cSee Storage Specification Guide.Products • Tops cSee Storage Specification Guide.• OverfilescSee Storage Specification Guide.• AccessoriescSee Storage Specification Guide.For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.402 Transitional Specification Guide

900 Series Lateral Files withRoll-Out Shelves and LockSpecification InformationDDimensions DRecommended DStyle DU.S.dD W H dCounterweight dNumber dBased dStyle Number d dPriced d d dLateral Files with Two 12"H Roll-Out Shelves18" 30" 27" 847CW 9302117__ $ 66218" 36" 27" 847CW 9362117__ $ 76718" 42" 27" 858CW 9422117__ $ 83518" 30" 28 1 ⁄4" 847CW 930211__ $ 66218" 36" 28 1 ⁄4" 847CW 936211__ $ 76718" 42" 28 1 ⁄4" 858CW 942211__ $ 835d d d dLateral Files with Three 12"H Roll-Out Shelves18" 30" 41 1 ⁄4" 847CW 930311__ $ 91118" 36" 41 1 ⁄4" 847CW 936311__ $104018" 42" 41 1 ⁄4" 858CW 942311__ $1157d d d dLateral Files with Four 12"H Roll-Out Shelves18" 30" 52 3 ⁄8" 827CW 930411__ $115218" 36" 52 3 ⁄8" 827CW 936411__ $135418" 42" 52 3 ⁄8" 827CW 942411__ $1505d d d dLateral Files with Five 12"H Roll-Out Shelves18" 30" 64 11 ⁄16" 827CW 930511__ $139118" 36" 64 11 ⁄16" 827CW 936511__ $162318" 42" 64 11 ⁄16" 827CW 942511__ $1811d d d dStorage ProductscTo align bases of cabinetsof different heights, seeStorage Specification Guide.For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 403

Cabinets for 800 Series Lateral File Buildups with LockFactory-AssembledStandard Includes• Cabinet only: paint price group 1• Lock, keyed random: 9201 Polished Chrome• Adjustable leveling glidesRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for cabinet3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.cSee Safe Use of StorageProducts in StorageSpecification Guide forinformation about preventingfiles from tipping andcausing personal injury.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurface • Paint price group 1 No cost Specify paint color number.Materials • Paint price group 2 +$ 65 Specify paint color number.• Paint price group 3 +$112 Specify paint color number.Posting ShelfReplaces posting-shelf filler on 52 3 ⁄8"H and 64 11 ⁄16"H files• With all paint price groups30"W +$ 59 Specify with 830PS posting shelf.36"W +$ 64 Specify with 836PS posting shelf.42"W +$ 72 Specify with 842PS posting shelf.Lock andLockKeying • Ember Chrome No cost Specify with 9250 Ember Chrome lock.Keying• Factory- and field-installed keyingcSee Storage Specification Guide.Related • Counterweight packages cSee Storage Specification Guide.Products • Tops cSee Storage Specification Guide.• OverfilescSee Storage Specification Guide.• AccessoriescSee Storage Specification Guide.For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.404 Transitional Specification Guide

Cabinets for 800 Series LateralFile Buildups with LockTip: To achieve componentalignment with 27", 52 3 ⁄8", or64 11 ⁄16"high cabinets, beginby selecting a three-highcabinet BLDUP stylenumber and select the casealignmentbase option.Specification InformationDDimensions DRecommended DStyle DU.S.dD W H dCounterweight dNumber dBased dStyle Number d dPriced d d dCabinets with 24"H Interior18" 30" 27" 858CW 830247LBLDUP $33918" 36" 27" 871CW 836247LBLDUP $38218" 42" 27" 871CW 842247LBLDUP $43418" 30" 28 1 ⁄4" 858CW 83024LBLDUP $33918" 36" 28 1 ⁄4" 871CW 83624LBLDUP $38218" 42" 28 1 ⁄4" 871CW 84224LBLDUP $434d d d dCabinets with 36"H Interior18" 30" 41 1 ⁄4" 847CW 83036LBLDUP $41918" 36" 41 1 ⁄4" 858CW 83636LBLDUP $45518" 42" 41 1 ⁄4" 871CW 84236LBLDUP $563d d d dCabinets with 48"H Interior18" 30" 52 3 ⁄8" 847CW 83048LBLDUP $50618" 36" 52 3 ⁄8" 858CW 83648LBLDUP $58418" 42" 52 3 ⁄8" 871CW 84248LBLDUP $703d d d dStorage ProductsCabinets with 60"H Interior18" 30" 64 11 ⁄16" 847CW 83060LBLDUP $59118" 36" 64 11 ⁄16" 858CW 83660LBLDUP $65318" 42" 64 11 ⁄16" 871CW 84260LBLDUP $801d d d dFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 405

800 Series DrawersTip: Specify buildupsequence in order from topto bottom of cabinet.cSee Storage SpecificationGuide for buildup information.Standard Includes• Drawer front: all paint price groups• 800 Series or Avenir-style pulls• Drawer suspensions: black only• Drawer body: black onlyRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for drawer front3 Pull style and color number (see below)4 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifyPulls • 800 Series pulls: No cost Specify with 9201 Polished Chrome9201 Polished Chrome 800 Series pulls.• 800 Series pulls: paint No cost Specify with painted 800 Series pulls andselect paint color number.• Avenir-style pulls: paint No cost Specify with Avenir-style pulls andselect paint color number.Related • Accessories cSee Storage Specification Guide.ProductsSpecification InformationDWidth DStyle DU.S.d dNumber dPriced d d15"H DrawersOne Compressor and One Hanging File Folder Frame30" 830DWCW15 $20436" 836DWCW15 $22342" 842DWCW15 $234One Hanging File Folder Frame30" 830DWHF15 $20436" 836DWHF15 $22342" 842DWHF15 $234Two Rails30" 830DWRW15 $20436" 836DWRW15 $22342" 842DWRW15 $234d d dFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.406 Transitional Specification Guide

800 Series DrawersSpecification InformationTip: Dividers do notextend the full depthof drawers.Tip: Only four 3"H drawerscan be used in a singlecabinet.DWidth DStyle DU.S.d dNumber dPriced d d12"H DrawersThree Dividers and One Hanging File Folder Frame30" 830DWDV12 $16336" 836DWDV12 $18942" 842DWDV12 $198One Compressor and One Hanging File Folder Frame30" 830DWCW12 $16336" 836DWCW12 $18942" 842DWCW12 $198One Hanging File Folder Frame30" 830DWHF12 $16336" 836DWHF12 $18942" 842DWHF12 $198Two Rails30" 830DWRW12 $16336" 836DWRW12 $18942" 842DWRW12 $198d d d9"H DrawersThree Dividers30" 830DWDV9 $15236" 836DWDV9 $17342" 842DWDV9 $178d d d6"H DrawersThree Dividers30" 830DWDV6 $13736" 836DWDV6 $15942" 842DWDV6 $171d d d3"H DrawersConvenience Tray and Three Dividers30" 830PD3 $14336" 836PD3 $16542" 842PD3 $170d d dStorage ProductsFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 407

800 Series Receding DoorsTip: Specify buildupsequence in order from topto bottom of cabinet.cSee Storage SpecificationGuide for buildup information.Standard Includes• Receding door: all paint price groups• 800 Series or Avenir-style pullsRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for door3 Pull style and color number (see below)4 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifyPulls • 800 Series pulls: No cost Specify with 9201 Polished Chrome9201 Polished Chrome 800 Series pulls.• 800 Series pulls: paint No cost Specify with painted 800 Series pulls andselect paint color number.• Avenir-style pulls: paint No cost Specify with Avenir-style pulls andselect paint color number.Specification InformationDWidth DStyle DU.S.d dNumber dPriced d d15"H Receding Doors30" 830D15 $10336" 836D15 $11942" 842D15 $121d d d12"H Receding Doors30" 830D12 $ 8936" 836D12 $10142" 842D12 $106d d d9"H Receding Doors30" 830D9 $ 8736" 836D9 $ 9242" 842D9 $ 97d d d6"H Receding Doors30" 830D6 $ 8536" 836D6 $ 8842" 842D6 $ 93d d dFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.408 Transitional Specification Guide

Fixed ShelvesFixed ShelvesStandard Includes• Fixed shelf, if selected: all paint price groups• Fixed shelf with doors, if selected: paint• Three dividers: black only• 800 Series or Avenir-style pullsRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for shelves anddoors, if selected3 Pull style and color number (see below)4 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Tip: Specify buildupsequence in order from topto bottom of cabinet.cSee Storage SpecificationGuide for buildup information.Tip: Fixed shelves are factoryinstalled to accommodatelegal-size documents. Forshelves in a forward positionto accommodate letter-sizedocuments, order a bracketpackage through ServiceParts. Field installed only.Tip: A counterweightpackage cannot be installedbehind a fixed shelf in thebottom opening. Files musteither be ganged or boltedto the floor or wall, or a fixedshelf package may not bespecified in the bottom openingof a freestanding file.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifyPulls • 800 Series pulls: No cost Specify with 9201 Polished Chrome9201 Polished Chrome 800 Series pulls.• 800 Series pulls: paint No cost Specify with painted 800 Series pulls andselect paint color number.• Avenir-style pulls: paint No cost Specify with Avenir-style pulls andselect paint color number.Related • Accessories cSee Storage Specification Guide.ProductsSpecification InformationDOutside DInside Clear DStyle DU.S.dDimensions dDimensions dNumber dPricedW H dD W H d dd d d dFixed Shelves with 800 Series Receding DoorsFor Use in Any Opening30" 15" 16 1 ⁄2" 28 1 ⁄2" 13 5 ⁄8" 830FSD15 $25136" 15" 16 1 ⁄2" 34 1 ⁄2" 13 5 ⁄8" 836FSD15 $27842" 15" 16 1 ⁄2" 40 1 ⁄2" 13 5 ⁄8" 842FSD15 $29630" 12" 16 1 ⁄2" 28 1 ⁄2" 10 5 ⁄8" 830FSD12 $20236" 12" 16 1 ⁄2" 34 1 ⁄2" 10 5 ⁄8" 836FSD12 $22242" 12" 16 1 ⁄2" 40 1 ⁄2" 10 5 ⁄8" 842FSD12 $232d d d dStorage ProductsFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 409

Hang-On Acoustical Panels GStandard Includes• Panel for use on 64 11 ⁄16"H lateral file:fabric price group 1Required to Specify1 Style number2 Fabric color number for panel3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Tip: 36"W hang-onacoustical panel can also beused on the side of twolateral files used back-toback.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurface • Fabric price group 1 No cost Specify fabric color number.Materials • Fabric price group 2 +$ 12 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 3 +$ 46 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 4 +$ 62 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 5 +$100 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group COM +$ 15 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manualto specify.Specification InformationDDimensions DStyle DU.S.dW H dNumber dBased d dPriced d dFor Use on the Back of Lateral Files30" 62 3 ⁄8" 99561 G $38536" 62 3 ⁄8" 99562 G $42942" 62 3 ⁄8" 99563 G $468d d dFor Use on the Side of Lateral Files18" 62 3 ⁄8" 99560 G $258d d dFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.410 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

Hang-On Acoustical PanelsStorage ProductsFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide 411

800 Series Cabinets Gwithout LocksStandard Includes• Cabinet only: paint price group 1• Self-edge laminate tops on applicable models: laminate• Cradle drawer suspensions: black onlyRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for cabinet and top3 Laminate color number for top, if selected4 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Tip: Drawers may befactory or field installed. Forfactory-installed drawers,specify a cabinet stylenumber and one full-heightdrawer per opening in thedesired locations. Numberdrawer locations from thetop down.cSee Storage SpecificationGuide for cabinet stylenumbers.cSee Storage SpecificationGuide for buildup rules.Tip: For factory-assembledbuildups, you MUST add“BLDUP” to the stylenumber.30"D29 3 /8"HTip: To achieve 29 3 ⁄4"H files,order a field-installed floorsupport kit for use under29 3 ⁄8"H files.cSee Storage SpecificationGuide.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurface • Paint price group 1 No cost Specify paint color number.Materials • Paint price group 2 +$42 Specify paint color number.• Paint price group 3 +$72 Specify paint color number.Factory- • Cabinets with two full-height +$30 Add suffix BLDUP to cabinet styleAssembled openings number.Buildups • Cabinets with three full-height +$45 Add suffix BLDUP to cabinet styleopeningsnumber.• Cabinets with four full-height +$61 Add suffix BLDUP to cabinet styleopeningsnumber.• Cabinets with five full-height +$76 Add suffix BLDUP to cabinet styleopeningsnumber.Related • Accessories cSee Storage Specification Guide.Products • Floor support kit cSee Storage Specification Guide.Specification InformationDDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD W H dNumber dBased d dPriced d dCabinets with Two Full-Height Openings with Steel TopsLetter-Size without Cabinet Lock30" 14 7 ⁄8" 29 3 ⁄8" 8002 G $301Legal-Size without Cabinet Lock30" 17 7 ⁄8" 29 3 ⁄8" 80012 G $361d d dcSpecification Information, continued on next pageFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.412 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

800 Series Cabinets without Locks28 9 /16"D28 9 /16"D28 9 /16"DcSpecification Information, continuedSpecification InformationDDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD W H dNumber dBased d dPriced d dCabinets with Three Full-Height Openings with Steel TopsLetter-Size without Cabinet Lock28 9 ⁄16" 14 7 ⁄8" 41 1 ⁄4" 8003 G $330Legal-Size without Cabinet Lock28 9 ⁄16" 17 7 ⁄8" 41 1 ⁄4" 80013 G $391d d dCabinets with Four Full-Height Openings with Steel TopsLetter-Size without Cabinet Lock28 9 ⁄16" 14 7 ⁄8" 52 3 ⁄8" 8004 G $357Legal-Size without Cabinet Lock28 9 ⁄16" 17 7 ⁄8" 52 3 ⁄8" 80014 G $416d d dCabinets with Five Full-Height Openings with Steel TopsLetter-Size without Cabinet Lock28 9 ⁄16" 14 7 ⁄8" 58 5 ⁄8" 8005 G $388Legal-Size without Cabinet Lock28 9 ⁄16" 17 7 ⁄8" 58 5 ⁄8" 80015 G $449d d dStorage ProductsFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List413Last order entry November 18, 2005

900 Series Cabinets Gwithout LocksStandard Includes• Cabinet only: paint price group 1• Self-edge laminate tops on applicable models: laminate• Cradle drawer suspensions: black onlyRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for cabinet and top3 Laminate color number for top, if selected4 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Tip: Drawers may befactory or field installed. Forfactory-installed drawers,specify a cabinet stylenumber and one full-heightdrawer per opening in thedesired locations. Numberdrawer locations from thetop down.cSee Storage SpecificationGuide for cabinet stylenumbers.cSee Storage SpecificationGuide for buildup rules.Tip: For factory-assembledbuildups, you MUST add“BLDUP” to the stylenumber.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurface • Paint price group 1 No cost Specify paint color number.Materials • Paint price group 2 +$42 Specify paint color number.• Paint price group 3 +$72 Specify paint color number.Factory- • Cabinets with two full-height +$30 Add suffix BLDUP to cabinet styleAssembled openings number.Buildups • Cabinets with three full-height +$45 Add suffix BLDUP to cabinet styleopeningsnumber.• Cabinets with four full-height +$61 Add suffix BLDUP to cabinet styleopeningsnumber.• Cabinets with five full-height +$76 Add suffix BLDUP to cabinet styleopeningsnumber.Related • Half-height and full-height cSee Storage Specification Guide.Productsdrawers• AccessoriescSee Storage Specification Guide.• Floor support kitcSee Storage Specification Guide.Specification Information30"D29 3 /8"HTip: To achieve 29 3 ⁄4"H files,order a field-installed floorsupport kit for use under29 3 ⁄8"H files.cSee Storage SpecificationGuide.DDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD W H dNumber dBased d dPriced d dCabinets with Two Full-Height Openings with Steel TopsLetter-Size without Cabinet Lock30" 14 7 ⁄8" 29 3 ⁄8" 9002 G $301Legal-Size without Cabinet Lock30" 17 7 ⁄8" 29 3 ⁄8" 90012 G $361d d dcSpecification Information, continued on next pageFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.414 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

900 Series Cabinets without Locks28 9 /16"D28 9 /16"D28 9 /16"DcSpecification Information, continuedSpecification InformationDDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD W H dNumber dBased d dPriced d dCabinets with Three Full-Height Openings with Steel TopsLetter-Size without Cabinet Lock28 9 ⁄16" 14 7 ⁄8" 41 1 ⁄4" 9003 G $330Legal-Size without Cabinet Lock28 9 ⁄16" 17 7 ⁄8" 41 1 ⁄4" 90013 G $391d d dCabinets with Four Full-Height Openings with Steel TopsLetter-Size without Cabinet Lock28 9 ⁄16" 14 7 ⁄8" 52 3 ⁄8" 9004 G $357Legal-Size without Cabinet Lock28 9 ⁄16" 17 7 ⁄8" 52 3 ⁄8" 90014 G $416d d dCabinets with Five Full-Height Openings with Steel TopsLetter-Size without Cabinet Lock28 9 ⁄16" 14 7 ⁄8" 59 1 ⁄2" 9005 G $388Legal-Size without Cabinet Lock28 9 ⁄16" 17 7 ⁄8" 59 1 ⁄2" 90015 G $449d d dStorage ProductsFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List415Last order entry November 18, 2005

416 Transitional Specification Guide

Turnstone FurnitureKickFabric Panel Inserts 418Panel Accessories 419Data Duct with Trestle 420Data Duct Screens 421Storage2100 Series Lateral Files 4232100 Series Lateral File Accessories 424Value Pedestals 426SeatingSpringboard Fixed Manager Arm Option andHeight-Adjustable Manager Arm Option 427Springboard Manager Chairs 428Turnstone FurnitureTransitional Specification Guide 417

Fabric Panel Inserts GStandard Includes• Fabric insert• Four jamb blocks: 6000 Black plastic only• Tube frame: blackRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Fabric color number for fabric insert:T203 WhiteT204 GreySpecification InformationDCorresponding DStyle DU.S.dFrame Width dNumber dPriced d d42"H24" TSAPNF4224 G $12130" TSAPNF4230 G $12636" TSAPNF4236 G $13742" TSAPNF4242 G $15448" TSAPNF4248 G $16260" TSAPNF4260 G $186d d d54"H24" TSAPNF5424 G $12730" TSAPNF5430 G $14036" TSAPNF5436 G $15042" TSAPNF5442 G $17248" TSAPNF5448 G $18460" TSAPNF5460 G $200d d d66"H24" TSAPNF6624 G $13030" TSAPNF6630 G $14736" TSAPNF6636 G $15742" TSAPNF6642 G $17848" TSAPNF6648 G $19560" TSAPNF6660 G $221d d dFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.418 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

Panel Accessories GPanel Accessories12"H Fabric Panel Top Screens GStandard Includes• Screen: fabric• Bracket: 7207 Black Texture• Tube frame: blackRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Fabric color number for fabric panel topscreen:T203 WhiteT204 GreySpecification InformationDWidth DStyle DU.S.d dNumber dPriced d d23" TSAMSF24 G $13029" TSAMSF30 G $14035" TSAMSF36 G $14741" TSAMSF42 G $15547" TSAMSF48 G $16159" TSAMSF60 G $180d d d12"H Translucent Panel Top Screens GStandard Includes• Screen: 6625 Translucent• Supports: 4798 SterlingRequired to SpecifyStyle numberSpecification InformationDWidth DStyle DU.S.d dNumber dPriced d d21 1 ⁄2" TSAMS24 G $12127 1 ⁄2" TSAMS30 G $13033 1 ⁄2" TSAMS36 G $13639 1 ⁄2" TSAMS42 G $14345 1 ⁄2" TSAMS48 G $15057 1 ⁄2" TSAMS60 G $166d d dTurnstone FurnitureFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List419Last order entry November 18, 2005

Data Duct with Trestle GStandard Includes• Data duct: 6625 Translucent• Trestle: paintRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for trestle:4798 Sterling7207 Black TextureSpecification InformationDHeight DWidth DStyle DU.S.d d dNumber dPriced d d d24" 24" TSADT2424 G $13124" 30" TSADT2430 G $14524" 36" TSADT2436 G $15724" 42" TSADT2442 G $17124" 48" TSADT2448 G $18324" 60" TSADT2460 G $197d d d dFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.420 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

Data Duct Screens GData Duct ScreensFabric Data Duct Screens GStandard Includes• Screen: fabric• Tube frame: blackRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Fabric color number for screen:T203 WhiteT204 GreySpecification InformationDWidth DStyle DU.S.d dNumber dPriced d d12"H24" TSADSF1224 G $13030" TSADSF1230 G $14036" TSADSF1236 G $14742" TSADSF1242 G $15548" TSADSF1248 G $16160" TSADSF1260 G $180d d d24"H24" TSADSF2424 G $16230" TSADSF2430 G $17536" TSADSF2436 G $18442" TSADSF2442 G $19348" TSADSF2448 G $20260" TSADSF2460 G $225d d dTurnstone FurnitureFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling ListcData Duct Screens, continued 421Last order entry November 18, 2005

Data Duct Screens, continuedTranslucent Data Duct Screens GStandard Includes• Screen: translucentRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Color number for translucent screen:6505 Frosted White6506 Frosted Blue6507 Frosted GreenSpecification InformationTip: Translucent screens arenot available for order inCanada.DWidth DStyle DU.S.d dNumber dPriced d d12"H24" TSADST1224 G $14330" TSADST1230 G $15436" TSADST1236 G $16142" TSADST1242 G $17148" TSADST1248 G $17860" TSADST1260 G $198d d d24"H24" TSADST2424 G $17930" TSADST2430 G $19236" TSADST2436 G $20242" TSADST2442 G $21248" TSADST2448 G $22160" TSADST2460 G $246d d dFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.422 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

2100 Series Lateral Files G2100 Series Lateral FilesTip: To ensure cabinetstability, field install counterweightpackages for lateralfiles that are not ganged toanother case, attached to aworksurface, or bolted tothe floor. Counterweightpackages are orderedseparately.Standard Includes• Lateral file with full-width pulls: paint price group 1• Integral pulls: paint to match file• One label holder per drawer: clear plastic• Drawer suspensions: black• Half-height drawer body: black• Two hanging file folder frames per drawer: black paint• Lock face ring with plastic plug to accommodatelock cylinder: 9201 Polished Chrome• Adjustable leveling glidesRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for lateral file3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Tip: Remember to specify lock cylinderand key.cSee Lock Cylinders, in TurnstoneFurniture Specification Guide.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurface • Paint price group 1 No cost Specify paint color number.Materials • Paint price group 2 +$65 Specify paint color number.Related • Hanging file folder frames cSee Turnstone Furniture SpecificationProductsGuide.• DividerscSee Turnstone Furniture SpecificationGuide.• Adjustable railscSee Turnstone Furniture SpecificationGuide.• Counterweight packagescSee Turnstone Furniture SpecificationGuide.Specification InformationDDimensions DStyle DCounterweight DU.S.dD W H dNumber dNeeded if Not dBased d dBeing Ganged dPriced d d dLateral Files with Two Drawers18" 30" 28 5 ⁄8" TS210230L G TS200847CW $ 44918" 36" 28 5 ⁄8" TS210236L G TS200858CW $ 49418" 42" 28 5 ⁄8" TS210242L G TS200858CW $ 568d d d dLateral Files with Three Drawers18" 30" 40 5 ⁄8" TS210330L G TS200837CW $ 58118" 36" 40 5 ⁄8" TS210336L G TS200847CW $ 65218" 42" 40 5 ⁄8" TS210342L G TS200858CW $ 748d d d dLateral Files with Four Drawers18" 30" 53 1 ⁄4" TS210430L G TS200827CW $ 72818" 36" 53 1 ⁄4" TS210436L G TS200837CW $ 81018" 42" 53 1 ⁄4" TS210442L G TS200847CW $ 942d d d dTurnstone FurnitureLateral Files with Four Drawers and One Roll-Out Shelf with Door18" 30" 65 1 ⁄4" TS210530L G TS200827CW $ 83618" 36" 65 1 ⁄4" TS210536L G TS200827CW $ 93618" 42" 65 1 ⁄4" TS210542L G TS200827CW $1109d d d dTransitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List423Last order entry November 18, 2005

2100 Series Lateral File Accessories GHanging File Folder Frames Gfor Use on Lateral FilesStandard Includes• Hanging file folder frame: black paint onlyRequired to SpecifyStyle numberSpecification InformationDDrawer DStyle DU.S.dWidth dNumber dPriced d d30" TS200130HF G $1036" TS200136HF G $1042" TS200142HF G $10d d dDividers GStandard Includes• Carton of three dividers: black paint onlyRequired to SpecifyStyle numberSpecification InformationDStyledNumberdDU.S.dPricedTS200DV12 G $18ddAdjustable Rails GStandard Includes• Pair of adjustable rails to accommodate front-to-backfiling: black paint onlyRequired to SpecifyStyle numberSpecification InformationDStyledNumberdDU.S.dPricedTS200RW G $21ddFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.424 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

2100 Series Lateral FileAccessoriesCounterweight Packages GStandard Includes• Front and back counterweight plates• Attachment hardware• Installation directionsRequired to SpecifyStyle numberSpecification InformationTip: To ensure cabinetstability, field install counterweightpackages for lateralfiles that are not ganged toanother case, attached to aworksurface, or bolted tothe floor. Counterweightpackages are orderedseparately.DCabinet DStyle DU.S.dWidth dNumber dPriced d dFor Use in 28 5 ⁄8"H (2-Drawer) Lateral Files30" TS200847CW G $11036" or 42" TS200858CW G $122For Use in 40 5 ⁄8"H (3-Drawer) Lateral Files30" TS200837CW G $10036" TS200847CW G $11042" TS200858CW G $122For Use in 53 1 ⁄4"H (4-Drawer) Lateral Files30" TS200827CW G $ 8836" TS200837CW G $10042" TS200847CW G $110For Use in 65 1 ⁄4"H (4-Drawer with One Roll-Out Shelf and Door) Lateral Files30" TS200827CW G $ 8836" TS200827CW G $ 8842" TS200827CW G $ 88d d dTurnstone FurnitureFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List425Last order entry November 18, 2005

Turnstone Value PedestalsStandard Includes• Pedestal: paint price group 1• Handle drawer pulls: 0835 Black or 9211 Nickel• Lock face ring with plastic plug to accommodatelock cylinder: 9201 Polished Chrome• Attachment hardware• Adjustable glides: black plastic• Pencil tray, if selected: black plasticRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color number for pedestal3 Paint color number for handle pulls:0835 Black9211 Nickel4 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Tip: Remember to specify lock cylinderand key.cSee Lock Cylinders, in TurnstoneFurniture Specification Guide.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurface • Paint price group 1 No cost Specify paint color number.Materials • Paint price group 2 +$38 Specify paint color number.Specification InformationDDimensions DFile DStyle DU.S.dD W H dDrawers dNumber dBased d d dPriced d d d22" 15 1 ⁄4" 27" File, File TS2VP22FF $30822" 15 1 ⁄4" 27" Box, Box, File TS2VP22BBF $32328" 15 1 ⁄4" 27" File, File TS2VP28FF $33928" 15 1 ⁄4" 27" Box, Box, File TS2VP28BBF $354d d d dTip: For legal or side-to-sidefiling on 28"D pedestals, use15" universal storage rails,style number RXADRL15.Tip: For box drawer dividers,use RXADV1606 from theUniversal Storage Collection.For file drawer dividers,use RXADV1212 from theUniversal Storage Collection.Pedestal Fillerfor Use with Turnstone Value PedestalsStandard Includes• Filler: paint• Attachment hardwareRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Paint color numbercSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Tip: When using a TurnstoneValue Pedestal to anchor theend of a panel run, you mustuse a pedestal filler.Specification InformationDDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD H dNumber dPriced d d2 5 ⁄8" 27" TSPFTAK $46d d d426 Transitional Specification Guide

Springboard Fixed Manager Arm Option andHeight-Adjustable Manager Arm Option GSpringboard Fixed ManagerArm Option andHeight-Adjustable ManagerArm OptionStandard IncludescSee Turnstone Furniture Specification Guide.Required to SpecifycSee Turnstone Furniture SpecificationGuide.Options U.S. Price Required to Specify• Fixed manager arms +$ 92 Specify with fixed manager arms.• Height-adjustable manager +$166 Specify with height-adjustablearmsmanager arms.Fixed manager armsHeight-adjustablemanager armsTurnstone FurnitureTransitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List427Last order entry November 18, 2005

Springboard Manager Chairs GTip: Arms are not includedwith Springboard chairsunless you specify one ofthe arm options.Standard Includes• Synchro-tilt mechanism• Lumbar height adjustment• Pneumatic height adjustment• Tilt tension• High-back (squared)• Upholstered seat and back: fabric price group 1• Outer back:—TS38004 and TS38005 models: plastic—TS38006 model: fabric• Five-arm base: reinforced plastic• Hard dual-wheel casters: plastic color to match base• Shipped fully assembled• Meets Cal. 116 and 117 requirementsRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Plastic color number for outer back,base, casters, and arms, if selected:6205 Black6256 Graphite3 Fabric color number for upholstery4 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Arm OptionsFixed task armsHeight-adjustabletask armsOptions U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurfaceUpholsteryMaterials • Fabric price group 1 No cost Specify fabric color number.cSee Turnstone • Fabric price group 2 +$ 20 Specify fabric color number.Furniture • Fabric price group 3 +$ 40 Specify fabric color number.Specification • Fabric price group 4 +$ 55 Specify fabric color number.Guide • Fabric price group 5 +$ 70 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 6 +$ 85 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 7 +$100 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 8 +$125 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 9 +$155 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 10 +$175 Specify fabric color number.• Customer’s Own Material +$ 30 cSee Understanding Customer’s Own(COM)Material (COM), see TurnstoneFurniture Specification Guide.• Fire Code Seating (FCS) +$100 Add suffix F to the style number.• Soil-retardant treatment +$ 10 Specify with soil-retardant treatment.applied to upholstery fabricArms • Fixed task arms +$ 92 Specify with fixed task arms.• Height-adjustable task arms +$130 Specify with height-adjustable task arms.• Height- and width-adjustable +$166 Specify with height- and width-adjustabletask armstask arms.• Fixed manager arms +$ 92 Specify with fixed manager arms.• Height-adjustable manager arms +$166Specify with height-adjustablemanager arms.Seat • Adjustable seat depth +$ 58 Specify with adjustable seat depth.Height- and widthadjustabletask armsCasters • Soft dual-wheel casters for use +$ 25 Specify with soft casters.on hard floorsSpecification InformationFixed manager armsHeight-adjustablemanager armsDFeatures DStyle DU.S.d dNumber dBased d dPriced d dUpholstered Outer BackUpright Back Lock TS38006 G $702d d dPlastic Outer BackUpright Back Lock TS38005 G $620Without Upright Back Lock TS38004 G $525d d d428 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

Wood Casegoodsand Tables—Stow DavisBecause of the formal proportions of thedesign, the Richard Meier Collection willbe available as standard product from theestablished Statement of Line only. Nospecials will be quoted, and componentswill be finished in natural maple withmatte black hardware only.The Richard Meier Collection GDesks with Glass Top 430Desks 431Desks with Return 432Reception Desks 433Reception Desks with Return 434Credenzas 435A-Series Pedestals 436B-Series Pedestals 437C-Series Pedestals 438D-Series Pedestals 439E-Series Pedestals 440Workwalls 442Seating 444Wood Casegoodsand TablesTransitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List429Last order entry November 18, 2005

The Richard Meier CollectionDesks with Glass Top GDAStandard Includes• Glass top: 3 ⁄4" clear, tempered glass with polished edgesand etched and sealed undersideException: Glass is not etched above the legs but remainsclear to express the position of these supports.• Sub top and back panel: quarter-cut maple veneer withAmber Maple stain• Legs: quarter-cut maple veneer with 40 Black paint only• Adjustable leveling glidesRequired to SpecifyStyle numberRelated Products• A-series pedestals cPage 436• D-series pedestals cPage 439Specification InformationDDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD W H dNumber dPriced d dDesks with Glass TopLeft-Hand36" 91 1 ⁄2" 30 1 ⁄4" RMGL3691 G $9697ADRight-Hand36" 91 1 ⁄2" 30 1 ⁄4" RMGR3691 G $9697d d dA DADSymbols show positionspedestals can occupy andwhich type of pedestal to use.430 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

The Richard Meier CollectionDesks GDesksStandard Includes• Top and back panel: quarter-cut maple veneer withAmber Maple stain• Legs: quarter-cut maple veneer with 40 Blackpaint only• One non-locking personal drawer• Non-locking pencil drawers with integral pencil trays:–One pencil drawer on 78"W desk–Two pencil drawers on 91 1 ⁄2"W desk• Two grommets concealed in surface inlays:black aluminum• Concealed vertical cable routing channels in legsbeneath grommets• Concealed horizontal cable-management traybeneath worksurface• Adjustable leveling glidesRequired to SpecifyStyle numberRelated Products• A-series pedestals cPage 436• B-series pedestals cPage 437Specification InformationDDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD W H dNumber dPriced d dDesksLeft-Hand36" 78" 30 1 ⁄4" RMDL3678 G $580836" 91 1 ⁄2" 30 1 ⁄4" RMDL3691 G $5895BARight-Hand36" 78" 30 1 ⁄4" RMDR3678 G $5808A36" 91 1 ⁄2" 30 1 ⁄4" RMDR3691 G $5895d d dBBWood Casegoodsand TablesASymbols show positionspedestals can occupy andwhich type of pedestal to use.For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List431Last order entry November 18, 2005

The Richard Meier CollectionDesks with Return GStandard Includes• Tops and back panels: quarter-cut maple veneer withAmber Maple stain• Legs: quarter-cut maple veneer with 40 Blackpaint only• One non-locking personal drawer on return• Non-locking pencil drawers with integral pencil trays:–One pencil drawer on 78"W desk (88 5 ⁄8"W overall)–Two pencil drawers on 91 1 ⁄2"W desk (102"W overall)• Four grommets concealed in surface inlays:black aluminum• Concealed vertical cable routing channels in legsbeneath grommets• Concealed horizontal cable-management tray beneathworksurfaces• Adjustable leveling glidesRequired to SpecifyStyle numberRelated Products• A-series pedestals cPage 436• B-series pedestals cPage 437Specification InformationDDimensions DStyle DU.S.dA B C D Height dNumber dPriced d dDesksLeft-Hand36" 30" 88 5 ⁄8" 102" 30 1 ⁄4" RMLL8802 G $836736" 30" 102" 102" 30 1 ⁄4" RMLL0202 G $8454CRMLL0202Left Hand Large DeskReturn on RightDReturn forRMLL0202AABBRight-Hand36" 30" 88 5 ⁄8" 102" 30 1 ⁄4" RMLR8802 G $836736" 30" 102" 102" 30 1 ⁄4" RMLR0202 G $8454d d dDCBBAAABSymbols show positionspedestals can occupy andwhich type of pedestal to use.432 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

The Richard Meier CollectionReception Desks GReception DesksRMDL13900Left Hand Reception DeskStandard Includes• Worksurface, primary transaction top, secondarytransaction top, and back panel: quarter-cut maple veneerwith Amber Maple stain• Legs: quarter-cut maple veneer with 40 Black paint only• One non-locking personal drawer• Two non-locking pencil drawers with integral pencil trays• Paper management shelf and cubby• Two grommets concealed in surface inlays:black aluminum• Concealed vertical cable routing channels in legs beneathgrommets• Concealed horizontal cable-management tray beneathworksurface• Adjustable leveling glidesRequired to SpecifyStyle numberRelated Products• A-series pedestals cPage 436• B-series pedestals cPage 437Specification InformationRMDL13900Left Hand Reception DeskDDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD W H dNumber dPriced d dDesksLeft-Hand39" 100 1 ⁄2" 40 3 ⁄4" RMDL3900 G $9541BARMDR13900Right Hand Reception DeskRight-Hand39" 100 1 ⁄2" 40 3 ⁄4" RMDR3900 G $9541d d dABB AWood Casegoodsand TablesSymbols show positionspedestals can occupy andwhich type of pedestal to use.For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List433Last order entry November 18, 2005

The Richard Meier CollectionReception Desks with Return GStandard Includes• Worksurfaces, primary transaction top, secondarytransaction top, and back panel: quarter-cut maple veneerwith Amber Maple stain• Legs: quarter-cut maple veneer with 40 Black paint only• One non-locking personal drawer on return• Two non-locking pencil drawers with integral pencil trays• Paper management shelf and cubby• Four grommets concealed in surface inlays:black aluminum• Concealed vertical cable routing channels in legsbeneath grommets• Concealed horizontal cable-management tray beneathworksurfaces• Adjustable leveling glidesRequired to SpecifyStyle numberRelated Products• A-series pedestals cPage 436• B-series pedestals cPage 437Specification InformationDDimensions DStyle DU.S.dA B C D Height dNumber dPriced d dDesksLeft-Hand39" 30" 102" 105" 40 3 ⁄4" RMDL0802 G $12,100CRMDL0802Left Hand Reception Deskwith Return RightDReturn forRMDL0802ABABRight-Hand39" 30" 102" 105" 40 3 ⁄4" RMDR0802 G $12,100d d dDCRight Hand Reception DeskReturn forRMDR0802RMDR0802with Return on LeftBBAAABSymbols show positionspedestals can occupy andwhich type of pedestal to use.434 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

The Richard Meier CollectionCredenzas GCredenzasRMLL3091Left Hand CredenzaStandard Includes• Top and back panel: quarter-cut maple veneer withAmber Maple stain• Legs: quarter-cut maple veneer with 40 Blackpaint only• Two grommets concealed in surface inlays:black aluminum• Concealed vertical cable routing channels in legsbeneath grommets• Concealed horizontal cable-management traybeneath worksurface• Adjustable leveling glidesRequired to SpecifyStyle numberRelated Products• A-series pedestals cPage 436• C-series pedestals cPage 438• D-series pedestals cPage 439• E-series pedestals cPage 440Specification InformationDDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD W H dNumber dPriced d dFull-Height CredenzasRMLL3091Left Hand CredenzaC3 CLeft-Hand30" 91 1 ⁄2" 30 1 ⁄4" RMCL3091 G $3905ARMLR3091Right Hand Low CredenzaARight-Hand30" 91 1 ⁄2" 30 1 ⁄4" RMCR3091 G $3905d d dC C6RMLL3091Left Hand CredenzaD E3 ERMLR3091Right Hand Low CredenzaE E6DLow-Height CredenzasLeft-Hand30" 91 1 ⁄2" 24 1 ⁄4" RMLL3091 G $3740Right-Hand30" 91 1 ⁄2" 24 1 ⁄4" RMLR3091 G $3740d d dWood Casegoodsand TablesABSymbols show positionspedestals can occupy andwhich type of pedestal to use.Transitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List435Last order entry November 18, 2005

The Richard Meier CollectionA-Series Pedestals GTip: See specification pagesof desks and credenzas forindications of the positionsA-Series pedestals canoccupy.cPages 430–435Tip: Pedestal doors do notlock.Standard IncludesOptionsRequired to Specify• Pedestal fully finished on all sides: quarter-cut maple 1 Style numberveneer with Amber Maple stain2 Options, if selected (see below)• Pulls: 0835 Black only• Lock for drawers in side of pedestal or inside hinged-doorspace, keyed random between key numbers 101–110:9250 Ember Chrome only• Full-extension, heavy-duty ball-bearing glide drawersuspensions• One partition per box drawer• One hanging file system per file drawer to accommodateside-to-side filing of letter-size, legal-size, orA4 international-size file folders• 1 1 ⁄2"H recessed base• Adjustable leveling glidesRequired to SpecifyKeying • Factory-installed keying options cSee Wood Casegoods and TablesSpecification Guide.Specification InformationRMPA1 RMPA2 RMPA3RMPA4 RMPA5 RMPA6RMPA7 RMPA8 RMPA9RMPA10 RMPA11 RMPA12DConfiguration DDimensions DStyle DU.S.d dD W H dNumber dBased d d dPriced d d dA-Series PedestalsFor Use with Left-Hand Desks and Credenzas or Right-Hand Desks with Glass TopFour box drawers 25 1 ⁄2" 25 3 ⁄8" 27 1 ⁄8" RMPA1 G $5833Two box and one file drawer 25 1 ⁄2" 25 3 ⁄8" 27 1 ⁄8" RMPA2 G $5709Two file drawers 25 1 ⁄2" 25 3 ⁄8" 27 1 ⁄8" RMPA3 G $5170One door and two box and one file drawer 25 1 ⁄2" 25 3 ⁄8" 27 1 ⁄8" RMPA4 G $6133One door and two file drawers 25 1 ⁄2" 25 3 ⁄8" 27 1 ⁄8" RMPA5 G $5891Two doors 25 1 ⁄2" 25 3 ⁄8" 27 1 ⁄8" RMPA6 G $4673For Use with Right-Hand Desks and Credenzas or Left-Hand Desks with Glass TopFour box drawers 25 1 ⁄2" 25 3 ⁄8" 27 1 ⁄8" RMPA7 G $5833Two box and one file drawer 25 1 ⁄2" 25 3 ⁄8" 27 1 ⁄8" RMPA8 G $5709Two file drawers 25 1 ⁄2" 25 3 ⁄8" 27 1 ⁄8" RMPA9 G $5170One door and two box and one file drawer 25 1 ⁄2" 25 3 ⁄8" 27 1 ⁄8" RMPA10 G $6133One door and two file drawers 25 1 ⁄2" 25 3 ⁄8" 27 1 ⁄8" RMPA11 G $5891Two doors 25 1 ⁄2" 25 3 ⁄8" 27 1 ⁄8" RMPA12 G $4673d d d dFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.436 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

The Richard Meier CollectionB-Series Pedestals GB-Series PedestalsTip: See specification pagesof desks and credenzas forindications of the positionsB-Series pedestals canoccupy.cPages 431–435Standard IncludesRequired to Specify• Pedestal fully finished on all sides: quarter-cut maple 1 Style numberveneer with Amber Maple stain2 Options, if selected (see below)• Pulls: 0835 Black only• Lock for drawers in side of pedestal or inside hinged-doorspace, keyed random between key numbers 101–110:9250 Ember Chrome only• Full-extension, heavy-duty ball-bearing glide drawersuspensions• One partition per box drawer• One hanging file system per file drawer to accommodateside-to-side filing of letter-size, legal-size, orA4 international-size file folders• 1 1 ⁄2"H recessed base• Adjustable leveling glidesTip: Pedestal doors do notlock.OptionsRequired to SpecifyKeying • Factory-installed keying options cSee Wood Casegoods and TablesSpecification Guide.RMPB1RMPB3RMPB5RMPB7RMPB2RMPB4RMPB6RMPB8Specification InformationDConfiguration DDimensions DStyle DU.S.d dD W H dNumber dBased d d dPriced d d dB-Series PedestalsFor Use with Left-Hand Desks and Left-Hand Kneespace Workwalls with Run-Off TableThree box drawers 19 1 ⁄2" 28 3 ⁄8" 21 1 ⁄8" RMPB1 G $5453One box and one file drawer 19 1 ⁄2" 28 3 ⁄8" 21 1 ⁄8" RMPB2 G $4480One door and one box and one file drawer 19 1 ⁄2" 28 3 ⁄8" 21 1 ⁄8" RMPB3 G $5473Two doors 19 1 ⁄2" 28 3 ⁄8" 21 1 ⁄8" RMPB4 G $4370For Use with Right-Hand Desks and Right-Hand Kneespace Workwalls with Run-Off TableThree box drawers 19 1 ⁄2" 28 3 ⁄8" 21 1 ⁄8" RMPB5 G $5453One box and one file drawer 19 1 ⁄2" 28 3 ⁄8" 21 1 ⁄8" RMPB6 G $4480One door and one box and one file drawer 19 1 ⁄2" 28 3 ⁄8" 21 1 ⁄8" RMPB7 G $5473Two doors 19 1 ⁄2" 28 3 ⁄8" 21 1 ⁄8" RMPB8 G $4370d d d dWood Casegoodsand TablesFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List437Last order entry November 18, 2005

The Richard Meier CollectionC-Series Pedestals GTip: See specification pageof credenzas for indicationsof the positions C-Seriespedestals can occupy.cPage 435Tip: Pedestal doors do notlock. Pedestals RMPC1 andRMPC4 do not lock.Standard Includes• Pedestal fully finished on all sides: quarter-cut mapleveneer with Amber Maple stain• Pulls: 0835 Black only• Lock for drawers in side of pedestal (if pedestal hasmore than one drawer) or inside hinged-door space,keyed random between key numbers 101–110: 9250Ember Chrome only• Full-extension, heavy-duty ball-bearing glide drawersuspensions• One partition per box drawer• One hanging file system per file drawer to accommodateside-to-side filing of letter-size, legal-size, orA4 international-size file folders• 1 1 ⁄2"H recessed base• Adjustable leveling glidesOptionsRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Options, if selected (see below)Required to SpecifyKeying • Factory-installed keying options cSee Wood Casegoods and TablesSpecification Guide.Specification InformationRMPC1 RMPC2DConfiguration DDimensions DStyle DU.S.d dD W H dNumber dBased d d dPriced d d dC-Series PedestalsFor Use with Left-Hand CredenzaOne box drawer and one door 19 1 ⁄2" 19 3 ⁄8" 27 1 ⁄8" RMPC1 G $4403Two file drawers 19 1 ⁄2" 19 3 ⁄8" 27 1 ⁄8" RMPC2 G $5094For Use in Center of Left-Hand CredenzaTwo doors and two box and one file drawer 19 1 ⁄2" 43 1 ⁄4" 27 1 ⁄8" RMPC3 G $6607RMPC3For Use with Right-Hand CredenzaOne box drawer and one door 19 1 ⁄2" 19 3 ⁄8" 27 1 ⁄8" RMPC4 G $4403RMPC4 RMPC5Two file drawers 19 1 ⁄2" 19 3 ⁄8" 27 1 ⁄8" RMPC5 G $5094For Use in Center of Right-Hand CredenzaTwo doors and two box and one file drawer 19 1 ⁄2" 43 1 ⁄4" 27 1 ⁄8" RMPC6 G $6607d d d dRMPC6For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.438 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

The Richard Meier CollectionD-Series Pedestals GD-Series PedestalsTip: See specification pagesof desks with glass top andlow-height credenzas forindications of the positionsD-Series pedestals canoccupy.cPages 430 and 435Tip: Pedestal doors do notlock.Standard Includes• Pedestal fully finished on all sides: quarter-cut mapleveneer with Amber Maple stain• Pulls: 0835 Black only• Lock for drawers in side of pedestal or inside hingeddoorspace, keyed random between key numbers101–110: 9250 Ember Chrome only• Full-extension, heavy-duty ball-bearing glide drawersuspensions• One partition per box drawer• One hanging file system per file drawer to accommodateside-to-side filing of letter-size, legal-size, orA4 international-size file folders• 1 1 ⁄2"H recessed base• Adjustable leveling glidesOptionsRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Options, if selected (see below)Required to SpecifyKeying • Factory-installed keying options cSee Wood Casegoods and TablesSpecification Guide.Specification InformationDConfiguration DDimensions DStyle DU.S.d dD W H dNumber dBased d d dPriced d d dD-Series PedestalsFor Use with Left-Hand Low-Height Credenza and Left-Hand Desk with Glass TopThree box drawers 25 1 ⁄2" 25 3 ⁄8" 21 1 ⁄8" RMPD1 G $5240RMPD1RMPD2One box and one file 25 1 ⁄2" 25 3 ⁄8" 21 1 ⁄8" RMPD2 G $5086One door and one box and one file drawer 25 1 ⁄2" 25 3 ⁄8" 21 1 ⁄8" RMPD3 G $5488Two doors 25 1 ⁄2" 25 3 ⁄8" 21 1 ⁄8" RMPD4 G $4505RMPD3RMPD4For Use with Right-Hand Low-Height Credenza and Right-Hand Desk with Glass TopThree box drawers 25 1 ⁄2" 25 3 ⁄8" 21 1 ⁄8" RMPD5 G $5240RMPD5RMPD6One box and one file 25 1 ⁄2" 25 3 ⁄8" 21 1 ⁄8" RMPD6 G $5086One door and one box and one file drawer 25 1 ⁄2" 25 3 ⁄8" 21 1 ⁄8" RMPD7 G $5488RMPD7RMPD8Two doors 25 1 ⁄2" 25 3 ⁄8" 21 1 ⁄8" RMPD8 G $4505d d d dWood Casegoodsand TablesFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Transitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List439Last order entry November 18, 2005

The Richard Meier CollectionE-Series Pedestals GTip: See specification pageof low-height credenzas forindications of the positionsE-Series pedestals canoccupy.cPage 435Tip: Pedestal doors do notlock.Standard Includes• Pedestal fully finished on all sides: quarter-cut mapleveneer with Amber Maple stain• Pulls: 0835 Black only• Lock for drawers in side of pedestal or inside hingeddoorspace, keyed random between key numbers101–110: 9250 Ember Chrome only• Full-extension, heavy-duty ball-bearing glide drawersuspensions• One partition per box drawer• One hanging file system per file drawer to accommodateside-to-side filing of letter-size, legal-size, orA4 international-size file folders• 1 1 ⁄2"H recessed base• Adjustable leveling glidesRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Options, if selected (see below)OptionsRequired to SpecifyKeying • Factory-installed keying options cSee Wood Casegoods and TablesSpecification Guide.Specification InformationRMPE1 RMPE2DConfiguration DDimensions DStyle DU.S.d dD W H dNumber dBased d d dPriced d d dE-Series PedestalsFor Use with Left-Hand Low-Height CredenzaOne box and one file 19 1 ⁄2" 19 3 ⁄8" 21 1 ⁄8" RMPE1 G $4550One door 19 1 ⁄2" 19 3 ⁄8" 21 1 ⁄8" RMPE2 G $3917For Use in Center of Left-Hand Low-Height CredenzaTwo doors and one box and file drawer 19 1 ⁄2" 43 1 ⁄4" 21 1 ⁄8" RMPE3 G $6037RMPE3For Use with Right-Hand Low-Height CredenzaRMPE4 RMPE5One box and one file 19 1 ⁄2" 19 3 ⁄8" 21 1 ⁄8" RMPE4 G $4550One door 19 1 ⁄2" 19 3 ⁄8" 21 1 ⁄8" RMPE5 G $3917For Use in Center of Right-Hand Low-Height CredenzaRMPE6Two doors and one box and file drawer 19 1 ⁄2" 43 1 ⁄4" 21 1 ⁄8" RMPE6 G $6037d d d dFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.440 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

The Richard Meier CollectionE-Series PedestalsWood Casegoodsand TablesTransitional Specification Guide 441

The Richard Meier CollectionWorkwalls GStandard Includes• Workwall fully finished on all sides: quarter-cut mapleveneer with Amber Maple stain• Pulls: 0835 Black only• Lock, keyed random between key numbers 101–110:9250 Ember Chrome only• Full-extension, heavy-duty ball-bearing glidedrawer suspensions• One hanging file system per file drawer toaccommodate side-to-side filing of letter-size,legal-size, or A4 international-size file folders• Low-voltage halogen light with built-in transformerand 8-foot power cord• Tackboard: vertical surface fabric price group 1• Two grommets concealed in surface inlay:black aluminum• Two removable stationery boxes in workwall withsecretary: wood with felt underside• Concealed cable routing space behind back panel• 1 1 ⁄2"H recessed base• Adjustable leveling glidesRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Fabric color number for tackboard3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurfaceTackboardsMaterials • Fabric price group 1 No cost Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 2 +$ 12 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 3 +$ 46 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 4 +$ 62 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 5 +$100 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group COM +$ 15 Specify fabric color number.Tip: When workwall withrun-off table is configuredwith a desk to form a U-shapearrangement, the personaldrawer on the desk will needto be removed in the field.Keying • Factory-installed keying options cSee Wood Casegoods and TablesSpecification Guide.Tip: The workwall withsecretary does not have atackboard surface.For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.442 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

The Richard Meier CollectionWorkwallsSpecification InformationRMWL0293Workwall with Run-Off on Leftwith Overhead ShelfDDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD W H dNumber dBased d dPriced d dWorkwall with SecretaryLeft-Hand19 1 ⁄2" 85 1 ⁄2" 81 1 ⁄4" RMWL1985 G $24,949Left-Hand without Overhead Shelf19 1 ⁄2" 85 1 ⁄2" 66 1 ⁄4" RMWL11985 G $24,656Right-Hand19 1 ⁄2" 85 1 ⁄2" 81 1 ⁄4" RMWR1985 G $24,949Right-Hand without Overhead Shelf19 1 ⁄2" 85 1 ⁄2" 66 1 ⁄4" RMWR11985 G $24,656d d dWorkwall with KneespaceLeft-Hand27" 91 1 ⁄2" 81 1 ⁄4" RMWL2791 G $26,817Left-Hand without Overhead Shelf27" 91 1 ⁄2" 66 1 ⁄4" RMWL12791 G $26,522Right-Hand27" 91 1 ⁄2" 81 1 ⁄4" RMWR2791 G $26,817Right-Hand without Overhead Shelf27" 91 1 ⁄2" 66 1 ⁄4" RMWR12791 G $26,522d d dWorkwall with Kneespace and Run-Off TableLeft-Hand with Run-Off Table at Right102" 93" 81 1 ⁄4" RMWL0293 G $27,929Left-Hand without Overhead Shelf with Run-Off Table at Right102" 93" 66 1 ⁄4" RMWL10293 G $27,634Right-Hand with Run-off Table at Left102" 93" 81 1 ⁄4" RMWR0293 G $27,929Right-Hand without Overhead Shelf with Run-Off Table at Left102" 93" 66 1 ⁄4" RMWR10293 G $27,634ddWood Casegoodsand TablesTransitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List443Last order entry November 18, 2005

The Richard Meier CollectionSeating GStandard Includes• Upholstery: Tulsa RS4999 Black leather only withleather-covered button tufting• Surfaces: quarter-cut maple veneer with Ambermaple stain• Legs: quarter-cut maple veneer with 40 Blackpaint only• Adjustable leveling glidesRequired to SpecifyStyle numberSpecification InformationDDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD W H dNumber dPriced d dChairsLeft-Hand30 1 ⁄8" 60" 24 1 ⁄4" RMHL3060 G $7057Right-Hand30 1 ⁄8" 60" 24 1 ⁄4" RMHR3060 G $7057d d dSofasLeft-Hand30 1 ⁄8" 114" 24 1 ⁄4" RMFL3014 G $7977Right-HandRMFR3014Right Hand Sofa30 1 ⁄8" 114" 24 1 ⁄4" RMFR3014 G $7977d d dBenchesLeft-Hand16 3 /4"H 30" 84" 16 3 ⁄4" RMNL3096 G $3743Right-Hand30" 84" 16 3 ⁄4" RMNR3096 G $3743d d dFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.444 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

Wood SeatingLoungeGroove Chairs with Block Back 446Groove Chairs with Sail Back 447Groove Ottomans 448Groove Tables 449Additional Groove Components 450Wood SeatingTransitional Specification Guide 445

Groove Chairs with Block Back GStandard Includes• Base: wood veneer• Seat cushion and padded block back upholstery:fabric price group 1• Legs, if selected: 9201 Polished Chrome only• Casters, if selected: black plastic onlyRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Wood color number for base3 Fabric color number for cushion and back4 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurfaceUpholsteryMaterials • Fabric price group 1 No cost Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 2 +$ 30 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 3 +$ 99 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 4 +$123 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 5 +$170 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 6 +$216 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 7 +$255 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 8 +$375 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 9 +$480 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 10 +$585 Specify fabric color number.• Leather price group +$835 Specify leather color number.• Customer’s Own Material +$ 45 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.(COM) or Customer’s OwnLeather (COL)• Fire Code Seating (FCS) +$ 81 Specify with fire code seating.on applicable modelscSee Wood Seating Specification Guide.• Soil-retardant treatment +$ 17 Specify with soil-retardant treatment.applied to upholstery fabricBase• Customiz stain on wood +$ 24 Specify with Customiz stain.cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.Specification InformationChair with Block Back and CastersDStyledNumberddDU.S.dBasedPricedGVCHBLM G $1157ddFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.446 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

Groove Chairs with Sail Back GGroove Chairswith Sail BackStandard Includes• Base: wood veneer• Back: 7032 Sandbar plastic only• Seat cushion and back pillow upholstery:fabric price group 1• Legs, if selected: 9201 Polished Chrome only• Casters, if selected: black plastic onlyRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Wood color number for base3 Fabric color number for cushion andpillow4 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurfaceUpholsteryMaterials • Fabric price group 1 No cost Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 2 +$ 30 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 3 +$ 99 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 4 +$123 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 5 +$170 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 6 +$216 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 7 +$255 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 8 +$375 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 9 +$480 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 10 +$585 Specify fabric color number.• Leather price group +$835 Specify leather color number.• Customer’s Own Material +$ 45 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.(COM) or Customer’s OwnLeather (COL)• Fire Code Seating (FCS) +$ 81 Specify with fire code seating.on applicable modelscSee Wood Seating Specification Guide.• Soil-retardant treatment +$ 17 Specify with soil-retardant treatment.applied to upholstery fabricBase• Customiz stain on wood +$ 24 Specify with Customiz stain.cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.Specification InformationChair with Sail Back and CastersDStyledNumberddDU.S.dBasedPricedGVCHSLM G $1370ddFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Wood SeatingTransitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List447Last order entry November 18, 2005

Groove Ottomans G50%Standard Includes• Base: wood veneer• Seat cushion upholstery: fabric price group 1• Casters: black plastic onlyRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Wood color number for base3 Fabric color number for cushion4 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurfaceUpholsteryMaterials • Fabric price group 1 No cost Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 2 +$ 20 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 3 +$ 45 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 4 +$ 70 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 5 +$100 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 6 +$144 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 7 +$170 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 8 +$250 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 9 +$320 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 10 +$390 Specify fabric color number.• Leather price group +$375 Specify leather color number.• Customer’s Own Material +$ 26 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.(COM) or Customer’s OwnLeather (COL)• Fire Code Seating (FCS) +$ 81 Specify with fire code seating.on applicable modelscSee Wood Seating Specification Guide.• Soil-retardant treatment +$ 17 Specify with soil-retardant treatment.applied to upholstery fabricBase• Customiz stain on wood +$ 24 Specify with Customiz stain.cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.Specification InformationOttoman with CastersDStyledNumberddDU.S.dBasedPricedGVOTTM G $853ddFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.448 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

Groove Tables GGroove TablesStandard Includes• Base: wood veneer• Table top, if selected: clear acrylic• Table top and shelf, if selected: clear acrylic• Table top support tubes: 9201 Polished Chrome only• Grommet sleeves, if table with grommets selected:9201 Polished Chrome only• Grommet caps, if table with grommets selected:9201 Polished Chrome only• Casters: black plastic onlyRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Wood color number for base3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifyBase • Customiz stain on wood +$24 Specify with Customiz stain.cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.Specification InformationTable with CastersTable with Topand CastersDDimensions DStyle DU.S. DDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD W H dNumber dBase dD W H dNumber dBased d dPrice d d dPriced d d d d d25 1 ⁄4" 32 1 ⁄4" 7 3 ⁄4" GVTBLM G $548 25 1 ⁄4" 32 1 ⁄4" 15 1 ⁄8" GVTBLTOPM G $1188d d dTable with Grommetsand CastersTable with Top, Shelf, and CastersDDimensions DStyle DU.S. DDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD W H dNumber dBase dD W H dNumber dBased d dPrice d d dPriced d d d d d25 1 ⁄4" 32 1 ⁄4" 7 3 ⁄4" GVTBLGRM G $639 25 1 ⁄4" 32 1 ⁄4" 21 7 ⁄8" GVTBSHFM G $1523d d d d d dTip: Table with grommets isused as a base to createchair, ottoman, and tablebuildups.For Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Wood SeatingTransitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List449Last order entry November 18, 2005

Additional Groove Components GBack Kits GStandard Includes• Sail back, if selected: 7032 Sandbar plastic only• Padded block back upholstery, if selected:fabric price group 1• Back support: 9201 Polished Chrome onlyRequired to Specify1 Style number2 Fabric color number for back, if selected3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurfaceUpholstery for block back kitMaterials • Fabric price group 1 No cost Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 2 +$ 20 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 3 +$ 45 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 4 +$ 70 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 5 +$ 85 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 6 +$100 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 7 +$125 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 8 +$160 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 9 +$200 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 10 +$260 Specify fabric color number.• Leather price group +$200 Specify leather color number.• Customer’s Own Material +$ 15 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.(COM) or Customer’s OwnLeather (COL)• Fire Code Seating (FCS) +$ 81 Specify with fire code seating.on applicable modelscSee Wood Seating Specification Guide.• Soil-retardant treatment +$ 17 Specify with soil-retardant treatment.applied to upholstery fabricSpecification InformationBlock Back KitSail Back Kit30%DStyle DU.S. DStyle DU.S.dNumber dBase dNumber dBased dPrice d dPriced d d dGVBLKIT G $305 GVSLKIT G $426d d d dFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.450 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

Additional Groove ComponentsPillow for Use with Sail Back GStandard Includes• Back pillow upholstery: fabric price group 1Required to Specify1 Style number2 Fabric color number for pillow3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurfaceUpholsteryMaterials • Fabric price group 1 No cost Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 2 +$ 20 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 3 +$ 45 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 4 +$ 70 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 5 +$ 85 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 6 +$100 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 7 +$125 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 8 +$160 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 9 +$200 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 10 +$260 Specify fabric color number.• Leather price group +$200 Specify leather color number.• Customer’s Own Material +$ 15 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.(COM) or Customer’s OwnLeather (COL)• Fire Code Seating (FCS) +$ 81 Specify with fire code seating.on applicable modelscSee Wood Seating Specification Guide.• Soil-retardant treatment +$ 17 Specify with soil-retardant treatment.applied to upholstery fabricSpecification InformationDStyledNumberddDU.S.dBasedPricedGVPLW G $91ddFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Wood SeatingTransitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List cAdditional Groove Components, continued 451Last order entry November 18, 2005

Additional Groove Components, continuedCushion GStandard Includes• Seat cushion upholstery: fabric price group 1Required to Specify1 Style number2 Fabric color number for back3 Options, if selected (see below)cSee Surface Materials in the electronicprice list.Options U.S. Price Required to SpecifySurfaceUpholsteryMaterials • Fabric price group 1 No cost Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 2 +$ 20 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 3 +$ 45 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 4 +$ 70 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 5 +$100 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 6 +$144 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 7 +$170 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 8 +$250 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 9 +$320 Specify fabric color number.• Fabric price group 10 +$390 Specify fabric color number.• Leather price group +$375 Specify leather color number.• Customer’s Own Material +$ 26 cSee Surface Materials Reference Manual.(COM) or Customer’s OwnLeather (COL)• Fire Code Seating (FCS) +$ 81 Specify with fire code seating.on applicable modelscSee Wood Seating Specification Guide.• Soil-retardant treatment +$ 17 Specify with soil-retardant treatment.applied to upholstery fabricSpecification InformationDStyledNumberddDU.S.dBasedPricedGVCUSH G $213ddFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.452 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

Additional Groove ComponentsTable Tops and Support Kit G21"Standard Includes• Table top, if selected: clear acrylic• Table top support tubes, if selected:9201 Polished Chrome onlyRequired to SpecifyStyle numberSpecification Information21"DDimensions DStyle DU.S.dD W dNumber dPriced d dTable Top for Use with Shelf21" 32" GVSMACR G $396d d d25"Table Top for Use without Shelf25" 32" GVLGACR G $457d d dTable Top Support KitGVTBSUPP G $122d d dShelf Kit GStandard Includes• Shelf: clear acrylic• Shelf support: 9201 Polished Chrome onlyRequired to SpecifyStyle numberSpecification InformationDStyledNumberdDU.S.dPricedGVSHLF G $365ddFor Canadian PricingMultiply U.S. Price by 1.38.cSee page 1 for details.Wood SeatingTransitional Specification Guide G = On the 2005 Culling List cAdditional Groove Components, continued 453Last order entry November 18, 2005

Additional Groove Components, continuedLegs GStandard Includes• Set of four legs: 9201 Polished Chrome onlyRequired to SpecifyStyle numberSpecification InformationDStyledNumberdDU.S.dPricedGVLEG G $244ddCasters GStandard Includes• Set of four locking casters: black plasticRequired to SpecifyStyle numberSpecification InformationDStyledNumberdDU.S.dPricedGVCSTR G $244dd454 G = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

Surface MaterialsSurface MaterialsThis section containsTransitional surface materials.Select surface materials havebeen removed from specificationguides, but can be foundon the electronic price list.Textured Paint 456Paint 456Architectural Plastics 456Metallic Paint 456Fiber Laminate 456Patina Laminate 456Pulp Laminate 456Speckled Laminate 456Striae Laminate 456Watermark Laminate 456Woodgrain Laminate 456Systems Plastic 456Seating Plastic 456Seating Coating 456Vertical Surface Fabric 456Seating Upholstery 456Transitional Specification Guide 455

Surface MaterialsPaintPrice Group 1Textured Paint7200 Woodrose B7201 Driftwood B7202 Smoke B7206 Warm White B7208 Coffee B7209 Grotto7212 Warm Brown V2 B7213 Tan V2 B7214 Grey V2 B7215 Grey V57222 Tungsten7223 Titanium7224 Solar Black7226 TantalumPrice Group 2Paint0835 Black B4600 Dawn B4601 Woodrose B4604 Driftwood B4606 Mist B4607 Smoke B4650 Tan V1 B4682 Grey V1 B4686 Warm Brown V1 B4700 Warm White B4701 Russet B4718 Grotto B4719 Shale B4761 Coffee B4762 Cream B4763 Graphite B4773 Baltic B4775 Mulled Berry B4790 Sodium B4791 Tungsten B4792 Titanium B4793 Solar Black B4794 Vanadium B4795 Tantalum B.ArchitecturalPlastics G6140 Aspen G6141 Phoenix G6142 Portland G6143 Bar Harbor G6144 Racine G6145 Helena G6146 Manhattan G6147 Houston G6148 Big Sur G6149 Providence GPrice Group 3Metallic Paint4776 Quarry B4779 Mushroom B4789 Willow Bark BLaminateFiber Laminate2853 Cristine Fiber2856 Leaf Fiber2858 Cork FiberPatina Laminate2874 Enlightened GrottoPatinaPulp Laminate2766 Warm Brown V1 B2782 Grey V1 B..Speckled Laminate2817 Sierra Speckle2818 Bramble Speckle2819 Viola Speckle2821 Black and WhiteSpeckleStriae Laminate2833 Driftwood Striae B2835 Smoke Striae BWatermark Laminate2837 Woodrose Pattern B2839 Driftwood Pattern B2841 Smoke Pattern BWoodgrain Laminate2411 Natural Cherry G2421 Medium Cherry G2711 Natural Walnut G2763 Light Oak2764 Dark Oak2771 Medium Mahoganyon Walnut GPlasticSystems Plastic6006 Sierra6007 Viola6602 Tan V26605 Tan V5 B6607 Woodrose6608 Driftwood6609 Smoke6617 Warm Brown V26620 Warm Brown V56650 SodiumSeating Plastic6255 Warm White B G6257 Grotto B6304 Shale BSeating Coating7012 Grotto7017 Warm White G7053 ShaleVertical Surface FabricPrice Group 1AbacusP120 Architrave BP121 Capital BBariolageG229 Presto BG232 Encore BBedford (Entire Line)B800 Saffron BB801 Dusk BB804 Watercolor BB805 Shadow BCorniceP130 Pinnacle BPrice Group 2Amiranté5663 French Cream B5667 Carmello B5681 Blackpine B5683 Quince BAshanti5675 River Rock BCirrostratus (EntireLine)5482 Virga B5486 Icicle B5487 Crystal B5488 Moonlight B5492 Frost BCirrus (Entire Line)5403 Orange B5410 Blue (MediumIntensity) B5422 Red Orange B5425 Yellow B5430 Blue (LowIntensity) B5432 Blue Violet B5439 Red Red Violet BFrescoG008 Poplar BG009 Vista BG011 Raven BG012 Caraibe BG014 Zephyr BG015 Piquant BG018 Sumac B.MilanoN006 Pinecone BMordezza (Entire Line)Z003 Sandstone BZ005 Platinum BZ007 Charcoal BZ019 Slate BZ020 Cobalt BZ022 Granite BWilshire5853 Blue Value 4 B5854 Violet Value 4 B5869 Cattail BSeating UpholsteryPrice Group 1Vail (Entire Line)5A64 Oxford Blue BPrice Group 2Regis5R04 Redclover B5R05 Teasel B5R10 Nutshell B..456 B = In the Express12 quick delivery programG = On the 2005 Culling ListTransitional Specification GuideLast order entry November 18, 2005

ResourcesStyle Number Index 458ResourcesTransitional Specification Guide 457

Style Number IndexStyleNumber Page Description130211 393 FF100 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs130261 395 FF100 Lateral Files w/Drawers130311 393 FF100 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs130361 395 FF100 Lateral Files w/Drawers130411 393 FF100 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs130461 395 FF100 Lateral Files w/Drawers130511 393 FF100 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs130561 395 FF100 Lateral Files w/Drawers136211 393 FF100 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs136261 395 FF100 Lateral Files w/Drawers136311 393 FF100 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs136361 395 FF100 Lateral Files w/Drawers136411 393 FF100 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs136461 395 FF100 Lateral Files w/Drawers136511 393 FF100 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs136561 395 FF100 Lateral Files w/Drawers142211 393 FF100 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs142261 395 FF100 Lateral Files w/Drawers142311 393 FF100 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs142361 395 FF100 Lateral Files w/Drawers142411 393 FF100 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs142461 395 FF100 Lateral Files w/Drawers142511 393 FF100 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs142561 395 FF100 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs2256P 46, 151, 375 Reference Shelf230211 397 FF200 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs230311 397 FF200 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs230411 397 FF200 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs230511 397 FF200 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs236211 397 FF200 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs236311 397 FF200 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs236411 397 FF200 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs236511 397 FF200 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs242211 397 FF200 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs242311 397 FF200 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs242411 397 FF200 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs242511 397 FF200 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs421480N 326 Trilogy Guest Chair421482N 326 Trilogy Guest Chair421492N 326 Trilogy Guest Chair422482 327 Trilogy Guest Chair423480 328 Trilogy Guest Chair423482 328 Trilogy Guest Chair4581201 323 Sensor Mid-Back Work Chair4581221 323 Sensor Mid-Back Work Chair4581225 319 Sensor High-Back Work Chair4581231W 322 Sensor Mid-Back Work Chair4581235W 319 Sensor High-Back Work Chair4581266W 320 Sensor Adjustable-Back Chair4581401 323 Sensor Mid-Back Work Chair4581421 323 Sensor Mid-Back Work Chair4581425 319 Sensor High-Back Work Chair4581431W 322 Sensor Mid-Back Work Chair4581435W 319 Sensor High-Back Work Chair. 4581466W 320 Sensor Adjustable-Back ChairStyleNumber Page Description4588201 324 Sensor Mid-Back High Stool4588221 325 Sensor Mid-Back High Stool4588231W 325 Sensor Mid-Back High Stool4588401 324 Sensor Mid-Back High Stool4588421 325 Sensor Mid-Back High Stool4588431W 325 Sensor Mid-Back High Stool4605300 317 Rapport 460 Work Chair4605301 317 Rapport 460 Work Chair4605330 317 Rapport 460 Work Chair4605331 317 Rapport 460 Work Chair4621100 309 Leap 462 Work Chair4621101 309 Leap 462 Work Chair4621110 309 Leap 462 Work Chair4621111 309 Leap 462 Work Chair4621200 309 Leap 462 Work Chair4621201 309 Leap 462 Work Chair4621210 309 Leap 462 Work Chair4621211 309 Leap 462 Work Chair4627100 311 Leap 462 Full-Back Stool4627110 311 Leap 462 Full-Back Stool4627200 311 Leap 462 Full-Back Stool4627210 311 Leap 462 Full-Back Stool462LEAP1L 307 Leap 462 Value Pkg Work Chair462LEAP1LX 307 Leap 462 Value Pkg Work Chair462LEAPL 307 Leap 462 Value Pkg Work Chair462LEAPLX 307 Leap 462 Value Pkg Work Chair80012 412 800 Cabinet80013 413 800 Cabinet80014 413 800 Cabinet80015 413 800 Cabinet8002 412 800 Cabinet8003 413 800 Cabinet8004 413 800 Cabinet8005 413 800 Cabinet830211_ 401 800 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs and Lock8302117_ 401 800 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs and Lock830247LBLDUP 405 Cabinet for 800 Buildup w/Lock83024LBLDUP 405 Cabinet for 800 Buildup w/Lock830311_ 401 800 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs and Lock83036LBLDUP 405 Cabinet for 800 Buildup w/Lock830411_ 401 800 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs and Lock83048LBLDUP 405 Cabinet for 800 Buildup w/Lock830511_ 401 800 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs and Lock83060LBLDUP 405 Cabinet for 800 Buildup w/Lock830D12 408 800 Receding Drawer830D15 408 800 Receding Drawer830D6 408 800 Receding Drawer830D9 408 800 Receding Drawer830DWCW12 407 800 Drawer830DWCW15 406 800 Drawer830DWDV12 407 800 Drawer830DWDV6 407 800 Drawer830DWDV9 407 800 Drawer830DWHF12 407 800 Drawer. 830DWHF15 406 800 Drawer.458 Transitional Specification Guide

Style Number IndexStyleNumber Page Description830DWRW12 407 800 Drawer830DWRW15 406 800 Drawer830FSD12 409 Fixed Shelf830FSD15 409 Fixed Shelf830PD3 407 800 Drawer836211_ 401 800 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs and Lock8362117_ 401 800 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs and Lock836247LBLDUP 405 Cabinet for 800 Buildup w/Lock83624LBLDUP 405 Cabinet for 800 Buildup w/Lock836311_ 401 800 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs and Lock83636LBLDUP 405 Cabinet for 800 Buildup w/Lock836411_ 401 800 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs and Lock83648LBLDUP 405 Cabinet for 800 Buildup w/Lock836511_ 401 800 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs and Lock83660LBLDUP 405 Cabinet for 800 Buildup w/Lock836D12 408 800 Receding Drawer836D15 408 800 Receding Drawer836D6 408 800 Receding Drawer836D9 408 800 Receding Drawer836DWCW12 407 800 Drawer836DWCW15 406 800 Drawer836DWDV12 407 800 Drawer836DWDV6 407 800 Drawer836DWDV9 407 800 Drawer836DWHF12 407 800 Drawer836DWHF15 406 800 Drawer836DWRW12 407 800 Drawer836DWRW15 406 800 Drawer836FSD12 409 Fixed Shelf836FSD15 409 Fixed Shelf836PD3 407 800 Drawer842211_ 401 800 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs and Lock8422117_ 401 800 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs and Lock842247LBLDUP 405 Cabinet for 800 Buildup w/Lock84224LBLDUP 405 Cabinet for 800 Buildup w/Lock842311_ 401 800 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs and Lock84236LBLDUP 405 Cabinet for 800 Buildup w/Lock842411_ 401 800 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs and Lock84248LBLDUP 405 Cabinet for 800 Buildup w/Lock842511_ 401 800 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs and Lock84260LBLDUP 405 Cabinet for 800 Buildup w/Lock842D12 408 800 Receding Drawer842D15 408 800 Receding Drawer842D6 408 800 Receding Drawer842D9 408 800 Receding Drawer842DWCW12 407 800 Drawer842DWCW15 406 800 Drawer842DWDV12 407 800 Drawer842DWDV6 407 800 Drawer842DWDV9 407 800 Drawer842DWHF12 407 800 Drawer842DWHF15 406 800 Drawer842DWRW12 407 800 Drawer842DWRW15 406 800 Drawer. 842FSD12 409 Fixed ShelfStyleNumber Page Description842FSD15 409 Fixed Shelf842PD3 407 800 Drawer90012 414 900 Cabinet90013 415 900 Cabinet90014 415 900 Cabinet90015 415 900 Cabinet9002 414 900 Cabinet9003 415 900 Cabinet9004 415 900 Cabinet9005 415 900 Cabinet9106A 349 S9 C Power Pole9106B 349 S9 C Panel Door9107A 349 S9 C Panel Door9107B 349 S9 C Panel Door930211_ 403 900 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs and Lock9302117_ 403 900 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs and Lock930311_ 403 900 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs and Lock930411_ 403 900 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs and Lock930511_ 403 900 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs and Lock936211_ 403 900 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs and Lock9362117_ 403 900 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs and Lock936311_ 403 900 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs and Lock936411_ 403 900 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs and Lock936511_ 403 900 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs and Lock942211_ 403 900 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs and Lock9422117_ 403 900 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs and Lock942311_ 403 900 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs and Lock942411_ 403 900 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs and Lock942511_ 403 900 Lateral File w/RO Shlvs and Lock98011 347 S9 C Tackable Acoustical Panel98012 347 S9 C Tackable Acoustical Panel98013 347 S9 C Tackable Acoustical Panel98014 347 S9 C Tackable Acoustical Panel98015 347 S9 C Tackable Acoustical Panel98016 347 S9 C Tackable Acoustical Panel98018 347 S9 C Tackable Acoustical Panel98019 347 S9 C Tackable Acoustical Panel981020 351 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981022 352 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981025 351 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981027 352 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981030 351 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981032 352 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981035 351 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981036 351 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981037 352 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981038 352 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981042 351 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981044 352 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981045 351 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981047 352 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981060 351 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981062 352 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981065 353 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel. 981070 351 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel.ResourcesTransitional Specification Guide cStyle Number Index, continued 459

Style Number Index, continuedStyleNumber Page Description981072 352 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981075 351 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981077 352 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981080 353 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981090 351 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981092 352 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981095 353 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel98111 347 S9 C Tackable Acoustical Panel98112 347 S9 C Tackable Acoustical Panel981120 351 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981122 352 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981125 351 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981127 352 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel98113 347 S9 C Tackable Acoustical Panel981130 351 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981132 352 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981135 351 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981136 351 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981137 352 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981138 352 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel98114 347 S9 C Tackable Acoustical Panel981142 351 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981144 352 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981145 351 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981147 352 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel98115 347 S9 C Tackable Acoustical Panel98116 347 S9 C Tackable Acoustical Panel981160 351 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981162 352 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981165 353 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981170 351 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981172 352 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981175 351 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981177 352 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel98118 347 S9 C Tackable Acoustical Panel981180 353 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel98119 347 S9 C Tackable Acoustical Panel981190 351 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981192 352 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981195 353 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981220 351 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981222 352 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981225 351 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981227 352 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981230 351 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981232 352 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981235 351 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981236 351 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981237 352 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981238 352 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981242 351 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981244 352 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981245 351 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981247 352 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel. 981260 351 S9 C Horizontal Accent PanelStyleNumber Page Description981262 352 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981265 353 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981270 351 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981272 352 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981275 351 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981277 352 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981280 353 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981290 351 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981292 352 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981295 353 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981520 351 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981522 352 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981525 351 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981527 352 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981530 351 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981532 352 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981535 351 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981536 351 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981537 352 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981538 352 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981542 351 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981544 352 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981545 351 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981547 352 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981560 351 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981562 352 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981565 353 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981570 351 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981572 352 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981575 351 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981577 352 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981580 353 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981590 351 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981592 352 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel981595 353 S9 C Horizontal Accent Panel98211 347 S9 C Tackable Acoustical Panel98212 347 S9 C Tackable Acoustical Panel98213 347 S9 C Tackable Acoustical Panel98214 347 S9 C Tackable Acoustical Panel98215 347 S9 C Tackable Acoustical Panel98216 347 S9 C Tackable Acoustical Panel98218 347 S9 C Tackable Acoustical Panel98219 347 S9 C Tackable Acoustical Panel98311 347 S9 C Tackable Acoustical Panel98312 347 S9 C Tackable Acoustical Panel98313 347 S9 C Tackable Acoustical Panel98314 347 S9 C Tackable Acoustical Panel98315 347 S9 C Tackable Acoustical Panel98318 347 S9 C Tackable Acoustical Panel98319 347 S9 C Tackable Acoustical Panel98676 350 S9 C Corner Filler Post98677 350 S9 C Corner Filler Post98677A 350 S9 C Corner Filler Post98678 350 S9 C Corner Filler Post. 98678A 350 S9 C Corner Filler Post.460 Transitional Specification Guide

Style Number IndexStyleNumber Page Description98679 350 S9 C Corner Filler Post98679A 350 S9 C Corner Filler Post98680 350 S9 C Corner Filler Post98680A 350 S9 C Corner Filler Post98681 350 S9 C Corner Filler Post98681A 350 S9 C Corner Filler Post986844B 348 S9 C Power Pole98684B 348 S9 C Power Pole986854AB 348 S9 C Power Pole986854B 348 S9 C Power Pole98685AB 348 S9 C Power Pole98685B 348 S9 C Power Pole986864AB 348 S9 C Power Pole986864B 348 S9 C Power Pole98686AB 348 S9 C Power Pole98686B 348 S9 C Power Pole986874AB 348 S9 C Power Pole986874B 348 S9 C Power Pole98687AB 348 S9 C Power Pole98687B 348 S9 C Power Pole986884AB 348 S9 C Power Pole986884B 348 S9 C Power Pole98688AB 348 S9 C Power Pole98688B 348 S9 C Power Pole986894AB 348 S9 C Power Pole986894B 348 S9 C Power Pole98689AB 348 S9 C Power Pole98689B 348 S9 C Power Pole98714 355 S9 C Wall-Attachment Brkt98715 355 S9 C Wall-Attachment Brkt98716 355 S9 C Wall-Attachment Brkt98717 355 S9 C Wall-Attachment Brkt98721 356 S9 C Panel Stabilizer Foot98769 143 Anchor Bracket98862 359 S9 C Vertical Wire Manager9886242A 359 S9 C Vertical Wire Manager9886253A 359 S9 C Vertical Wire Manager9886265 359 S9 C Vertical Wire Manager9886265A 359 S9 C Vertical Wire Manager98884 357 S9 C T-Base Cover98892 357 S9 C In-Line Cable Post98893 358 S9 C Corner Cable Cover98897 358 S9 C Corner Cable Cover98911 347 S9 C Tackable Acoustical Panel98912 347 S9 C Tackable Acoustical Panel98913 347 S9 C Tackable Acoustical Panel98914 347 S9 C Tackable Acoustical Panel98915 347 S9 C Tackable Acoustical Panel98916 347 S9 C Tackable Acoustical Panel98918 347 S9 C Tackable Acoustical Panel98919 347 S9 C Tackable Acoustical Panel98940 355 S9 C Wall-Attachment Brkt98975X 350 S9 C Corner Filler Post98L75 354 S9 C Accent Panel L-Junction. 98T75 354 S9 C Accent Panel T-JunctionStyleNumber Page Description99239 376 Ped Adapter Package99465 45, 151, 376 Convenience Tray99560 410 Hang-On Acoustical Panel99561 410 Hang-On Acoustical Panel99562 410 Hang-On Acoustical Panel99563 410 Hang-On Acoustical Panel9CDB4234 373 S9 Cable Drop Box9CDB5334 373 S9 Cable Drop Box9CDB5342 373 S9 Cable Drop Box9CDB6134 373 S9 Cable Drop Box9CDB6142 373 S9 Cable Drop Box9CDB6153 373 S9 Cable Drop Box9CDB6534 373 S9 Cable Drop Box9CDB6542 373 S9 Cable Drop Box9CDB6553 373 S9 Cable Drop Box9CDB7534 373 S9 Cable Drop Box9CDB7542 373 S9 Cable Drop Box9CDB7553 373 S9 Cable Drop Box9CDB7561 373 S9 Cable Drop Box9CDB7565 373 S9 Cable Drop Box9CTC20 371 S9 Shortened Top Cap9CTC25 371 S9 Shortened Top Cap9CTC30 371 S9 Shortened Top Cap9CTC35 371 S9 Shortened Top Cap9CTC36 371 S9 Shortened Top Cap9CTC42 371 S9 Shortened Top Cap9CTC45 371 S9 Shortened Top Cap9CTC60 371 S9 Shortened Top Cap9CTCW20 371 S9 Shortened Top Cap9CTCW25 371 S9 Shortened Top Cap9CTCW30 371 S9 Shortened Top Cap9CTCW35 371 S9 Shortened Top Cap9CTCW36 371 S9 Shortened Top Cap9CTCW42 371 S9 Shortened Top Cap9CTCW45 371 S9 Shortened Top Cap9CTCW60 371 S9 Shortened Top Cap9EE5330 369 S9 Enhanced TRI Panel9EE5335 369 S9 Enhanced TRI Panel9EE5336 369 S9 Enhanced TRI Panel9EE5342 369 S9 Enhanced TRI Panel9EE5345 369 S9 Enhanced TRI Panel9EE5360 369 S9 Enhanced TRI Panel9EE6530 369 S9 Enhanced TRI Panel9EE6535 369 S9 Enhanced TRI Panel9EE6536 369 S9 Enhanced TRI Panel9EE6542 369 S9 Enhanced TRI Panel9EE6545 369 S9 Enhanced TRI Panel9EE6560 369 S9 Enhanced TRI Panel9ET5330 363 S9 Enhanced TRI Panel9ET5335 363 S9 Enhanced TRI Panel9ET5336 363 S9 Enhanced TRI Panel9ET5342 363 S9 Enhanced TRI Panel9ET5345 363 S9 Enhanced TRI Panel9ET5360 363 S9 Enhanced TRI Panel. 9ET6530 363 S9 Enhanced TRI Panel.ResourcesTransitional Specification Guide cStyle Number Index, continued 461

Style Number Index, continuedStyleNumber Page Description9ET6535 363 S9 Enhanced TRI Panel9ET6536 363 S9 Enhanced TRI Panel9ET6542 363 S9 Enhanced TRI Panel9ET6545 363 S9 Enhanced TRI Panel9ET6560 363 S9 Enhanced TRI Panel9EW5330 365 S9 Enhanced TRI Panel9EW5335 365 S9 Enhanced TRI Panel9EW5336 365 S9 Enhanced TRI Panel9EW5342 365 S9 Enhanced TRI Panel9EW5345 365 S9 Enhanced TRI Panel9EW6530 365 S9 Enhanced TRI Panel9EW6535 365 S9 Enhanced TRI Panel9EW6536 365 S9 Enhanced TRI Panel9EW6542 365 S9 Enhanced TRI Panel9EW6545 365 S9 Enhanced TRI Panel9FF65DRA 370 S9 E Panel Door9FF65DRB 370 S9 E Panel Door9FF75DRA 370 S9 E Panel Door9FF75DRB 370 S9 E Panel Door9PW5330P3 367 S9 Enhanced TRI Panel9PW5335P3 367 S9 Enhanced TRI Panel9PW5336P3 367 S9 Enhanced TRI Panel9PW5342P3 367 S9 Enhanced TRI Panel9PW5345P3 367 S9 Enhanced TRI Panel9PW6530P3 367 S9 Enhanced TRI Panel9PW6535P3 367 S9 Enhanced TRI Panel9PW6536P3 367 S9 Enhanced TRI Panel9PW6542P3 367 S9 Enhanced TRI Panel9PW6545P3 367 S9 Enhanced TRI Panel9WCDB4234 373 S9 Cable Drop Box9WCDB5334 373 S9 Cable Drop Box9WCDB5342 373 S9 Cable Drop Box9WCDB6134 373 S9 Cable Drop Box9WCDB6142 373 S9 Cable Drop Box9WCDB6153 373 S9 Cable Drop Box9WCDB6534 373 S9 Cable Drop Box9WCDB6542 373 S9 Cable Drop Box9WCDB6553 373 S9 Cable Drop Box9WCDB7534 373 S9 Cable Drop Box9WCDB7542 373 S9 Cable Drop Box9WCDB7553 373 S9 Cable Drop Box9WCDB7561 373 S9 Cable Drop Box9WCDB7565 373 S9 Cable Drop BoxBCW3624 33 AV Corner WksfBCW3630 33 AV Corner WksfBCW4224 33 AV Corner WksfBCW4230 33 AV Corner WksfBPC 45, 64, 376 CompressorBPR 45 RailBPW6030 34 AV PS TableBPW6630 34 AV PS TableBPW7230 34 AV PS TableBTP 36 AV Tie PlateBTT30 35 AV Transact Wksf. BTT36 35 AV Transact WksfStyleNumber Page DescriptionBTT42 35 AV Transact WksfBTT48 35 AV Transact WksfBTT60 35 AV Transact WksfBU24BBF 39 AV Freestanding PedBU24BBFL 39 AV Freestanding PedBU24FF 39 AV Freestanding PedBU24FFL 39 AV Freestanding PedBU30BBF 39 AV Freestanding PedBU30BBFL 39 AV Freestanding PedBU30FF 39 AV Freestanding PedBU30FFL 39 AV Freestanding PedBUF24BBF 39 AV Freestanding PedBUF24FF 39 AV Freestanding PedBUF30BBF 39 AV Freestanding PedBUF30FF 39 AV Freestanding PedBUP24BFL 43 AV Mobile PedBUPF24BF 40 AV Worksurface PedBUPF30BF 40 AV Worksurface PedBUPP24BF 40 AV Worksurface PedBUPP24BFL 40 AV Worksurface PedBUPP30BF 40 AV Worksurface PedBUPP30BFL 40 AV Worksurface PedBW3024 32 AV Rect WorksurfaceBW3030 32 AV Rect WorksurfaceBW3624 32 AV Rect WorksurfaceBW3630 32 AV Rect WorksurfaceBW4224 32 AV Rect WorksurfaceBW4230 32 AV Rect WorksurfaceBW4824 32 AV Rect WorksurfaceBW4830 32 AV Rect WorksurfaceBW6024 32 AV Rect WorksurfaceBW6030 32 AV Rect WorksurfaceBW6624 32 AV Rect WorksurfaceBW6630 32 AV Rect WorksurfaceBW7224 32 AV Rect WorksurfaceBW7230 32 AV Rect WorksurfaceBWF24 36 AV Wksf FillerBWF30 36 AV Wksf FillerCAP1520 24 AN Mobile Ped CapCAP1522 25 AN Mobile Ped CapCAP1524 44 Moblile Ped CapCAP1525 374 Mobile Ped CapE90098 144 Base Power-InE90108 144 Base Power-InE90153 149 Duplex Power ReceptacleE90160 149 Duplex Power ReceptacleE90177 149 Duplex Power ReceptacleE90256 147 Chicago Pnl-to-Pnl ConnectorE90263 147 Chicago Pnl-to-Pnl ConnectorE91147 149 Single Power ReceptacleE91240 144 Breakaway Base Power-InE91800 150 Vertical Wire ManagerE91817 150 Vertical Wire ManagerE91831 150 Vertical Wire Manager. E91934 146 Chicago Junction Box.462 Transitional Specification Guide

Style Number IndexStyleNumber Page DescriptionE95000B 146 PowerwayE95017B 146 PowerwayE95024B 146 PowerwayE95031B 146 PowerwayE95048B 146 PowerwayE95055B 146 PowerwayE95062B 146 PowerwayE95079B 146 PowerwayEE30209 142 Shortened Top CapEE30216 142 Shortened Top CapEE30223 142 Shortened Top CapEE30230 142 Shortened Top CapEE30247 142 Shortened Top CapEE30254 142 Shortened Top CapEE30261 142 Shortened Top CapEE30278 142 Shortened Top CapEE30302 142 Shortened Top CapEE30319 142 Shortened Top CapEE30326 142 Shortened Top CapEE30333 142 Shortened Top CapEE30340 142 Shortened Top CapEE30357 142 Shortened Top CapEE30364 142 Shortened Top CapEE30371 142 Shortened Top CapEE31203 142 Shortened Top CapEE31217 142 Shortened Top CapEE31224 142 Shortened Top CapEE31231 142 Shortened Top CapEE31248 142 Shortened Top CapEE31255 142 Shortened Top CapEE31262 142 Shortened Top CapEE31279 142 Shortened Top CapEE31303 142 Shortened Top CapEE31310 142 Shortened Top CapEE31327 142 Shortened Top CapEE31334 142 Shortened Top CapEE31341 142 Shortened Top CapEE31358 142 Shortened Top CapEE31365 142 Shortened Top CapEE31372 142 Shortened Top CapEE40031 141 In-Line COH TrimEE40048 141 In-Line COH TrimEE40055 141 In-Line COH TrimEE40062 141 In-Line COH TrimEE40079 141 In-Line COH TrimEE40141A 148 Cable Drop BoxEE40158A 148 Cable Drop BoxEE40165A 148 Cable Drop BoxEE40172A 148 Cable Drop BoxEE40196A 148 Cable Drop BoxEE40206 140 End-of-Run TrimEE40213 124 L-JunctionEE40220 125 T-JunctionEE40237 126 X-Junction. EE40244 129 L-JunctionStyleNumber Page DescriptionEE40251 129 L-JunctionEE40268 129 L-JunctionEE40275 129 L-JunctionEE40299 129 L-JunctionEE40309 140 End-of-Run TrimEE40316 124 L-JunctionEE40323 125 T-JunctionEE40330 126 X-JunctionEE40347 129 L-JunctionEE40354 129 L-JunctionEE40361 129 L-JunctionEE40378 129 L-JunctionEE40392 129 L-JunctionEE40402 140 End-of-Run TrimEE40419 124 L-JunctionEE40426 125 T-JunctionEE40433 126 X-JunctionEE40440 129 L-JunctionEE40457 129 L-JunctionEE40464 129 L-JunctionEE40495 129 L-JunctionEE40505 140 End-of-Run TrimEE40512 124 L-JunctionEE40529 125 T-JunctionEE40536 126 X-JunctionEE40543 129 L-JunctionEE40550 129 L-JunctionEE40598 129 L-JunctionEE40608 140 End-of-Run TrimEE40615 124 L-JunctionEE40622 125 T-JunctionEE40639 126 X-JunctionEE40646 129 L-JunctionEE40656 129 L-JunctionEE40701 140 End-of-Run TrimEE40718 124 L-JunctionEE40725 125 T-JunctionEE40732 126 X-JunctionEE40781 129 L-JunctionEE40804 140 End-of-Run TrimEE40811 124 L-JunctionEE40828 125 T-JunctionEE40835 126 X-JunctionEE40938 141 In-Line COH TrimEE40945 141 In-Line COH TrimEE40952 141 In-Line COH TrimEE40969 141 In-Line COH TrimEE40976 141 In-Line COH TrimEE41032 141 In-Line COH TrimEE41049 141 In-Line COH TrimEE41056 141 In-Line COH TrimEE41063 141 In-Line COH TrimEE41070 141 In-Line COH TrimEE41135 141 In-Line COH Trim. EE41142 141 In-Line COH Trim.ResourcesTransitional Specification Guide cStyle Number Index, continued 463

Style Number Index, continuedStyleNumber Page DescriptionEE41159 141 In-Line COH TrimEE41166 141 In-Line COH TrimEE41173 141 In-Line COH TrimEE42040 131 T-JunctionEE42057 131 T-JunctionEE42064 131 T-JunctionEE42071 131 T-JunctionEE42136 135 T-JunctionEE42143 137 T-JunctionEE42150 137 T-JunctionEE42167 137 T-JunctionEE42174 137 T-JunctionEE42246 135 T-JunctionEE42253 135 T-JunctionEE42260 135 T-JunctionEE42277 135 T-JunctionEE42332 131 T-JunctionEE42334 133 T-JunctionEE42349 133 T-JunctionEE42356 133 T-JunctionEE42363 133 T-JunctionEE42370 133 T-JunctionEE42435 137 T-JunctionEE42442 138 X-JunctionEE42459 138 X-JunctionEE42466 138 X-JunctionEE42473 138 X-JunctionEE42538 139 X-JunctionEE42545 139 X-JunctionEE42552 139 X-JunctionEE42569 139 X-JunctionEE42576 139 X-JunctionEE42734 138 X-JunctionEE42735 138 X-JunctionEE43034 133 T-JunctionEE43041 131 T-JunctionEE43058 131 T-JunctionEE43065 131 T-JunctionEE43072 131 T-JunctionEE43137 135 T-JunctionEE43144 137 T-JunctionEE43151 137 T-JunctionEE43168 137 T-JunctionEE43175 137 T-JunctionEE43247 135 T-JunctionEE43254 135 T-JunctionEE43261 135 T-JunctionEE43278 135 T-JunctionEE43333 131 T-JunctionEE43335 131 T-JunctionEE43340 133 T-JunctionEE43357 133 T-JunctionEE43364 133 T-JunctionEE43371 133 T-Junction. EE43436 137 T-JunctionStyleNumber Page DescriptionEE43443 138 X-JunctionEE43450 138 X-JunctionEE43467 138 X-JunctionEE43474 138 X-JunctionEE43539 139 X-JunctionEE43546 139 X-JunctionEE43553 139 X-JunctionEE43560 139 X-JunctionEE43577 139 X-JunctionEE44035 133 T-JunctionEE44042 131 T-JunctionEE44059 131 T-JunctionEE44066 131 T-JunctionEE44138 135 T-JunctionEE44145 137 T-JunctionEE44152 137 T-JunctionEE44169 137 T-JunctionEE44248 135 T-JunctionEE44255 135 T-JunctionEE44262 135 T-JunctionEE44334 131 T-JunctionEE44341 133 T-JunctionEE44358 133 T-JunctionEE44365 133 T-JunctionEE44437 137 T-JunctionEE44444 138 X-JunctionEE44451 138 X-JunctionEE44468 138 X-JunctionEE44530 139 X-JunctionEE44547 139 X-JunctionEE44554 139 X-JunctionEE44561 139 X-JunctionEE44736 138 X-JunctionEE45036 133 T-JunctionEE45043 131 T-JunctionEE45050 131 T-JunctionEE45139 135 T-JunctionEE45146 137 T-JunctionEE45153 137 T-JunctionEE45249 135 T-JunctionEE45256 135 T-JunctionEE45342 133 T-JunctionEE45359 133 T-JunctionEE45438 137 T-JunctionEE45445 138 X-JunctionEE45452 138 X-JunctionEE45531 139 X-JunctionEE45548 139 X-JunctionEE45555 139 X-JunctionEE45737 138 X-JunctionEE46044 131 T-JunctionEE46051 131 T-JunctionEE46147 137 T-JunctionEE46154 137 T-Junction. EE46240 135 T-Junction.464 Transitional Specification Guide

Style Number IndexStyleNumber Page DescriptionEE46257 135 T-JunctionEE46343 133 T-JunctionEE46350 133 T-JunctionEE46446 138 X-JunctionEE46453 138 X-JunctionEE46549 139 X-JunctionEE46556 139 X-JunctionEE47083 131 T-JunctionEE47180 137 T-JunctionEE47287 135 T-JunctionEE47384 133 T-JunctionEE47481 138 X-JunctionEE47588 139 X-JunctionEE90232 145 Top Power-InEE90335 145 Top Power-InEE90438 145 Top Power-InEE90445 145 Top Power-InEE90634 145 Top Power-InEE90665 145 Top Power-InEE90830 145 Top Power-InEEP3820 119 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP3825 119 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP3830 119 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP3835 119 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP3836 119 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP3842 119 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP3845 119 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP3860 119 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP4520 119 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP4525 119 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP4530 119 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP4535 119 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP4536 119 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP4542 119 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP4545 119 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP4560 119 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP5320 119 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP5325 119 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP5330 119 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP5335 119 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP5336 119 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP5342 119 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP5345 119 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP5360 119 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP6020 119 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP6025 119 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP6030 119 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP6035 119 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP6036 119 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP6042 119 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP6045 119 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP6060 119 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP6820 121 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP6825 121 Tack Acoustical Panel. EEP6830 121 Tack Acoustical PanelStyleNumber Page DescriptionEEP6835 121 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP6836 121 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP6842 121 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP6845 121 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP6860 121 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP7520 121 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP7525 121 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP7530 121 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP7535 121 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP7536 121 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP7542 121 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP7545 121 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP8320 121 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP8325 121 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP8330 121 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP8335 121 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP8336 121 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP8342 121 Tack Acoustical PanelEEP8345 121 Tack Acoustical PanelEEPST6825 123 Transparent PanelEEPST6830 123 Transparent PanelEEPST6835 123 Transparent PanelEEPST6845 123 Transparent PanelEEPST7525 123 Transparent PanelEEPST7530 123 Transparent PanelEEPST7535 123 Transparent PanelEEPST7545 123 Transparent PanelEEPST8325 123 Transparent PanelEEPST8330 123 Transparent PanelEEPST8335 123 Transparent PanelEEPST8345 123 Transparent PanelEEWAB38 143 Wall-Attachment BracketEEWAB45 143 Wall-Attachment BracketEEWAB53 143 Wall-Attachment BracketEEWAB60 143 Wall-Attachment BracketEEWAB68 143 Wall-Attachment BracketEEWAB75 143 Wall-Attachment BracketEEWAB83 143 Wall-Attachment BracketGI1BPI12X 253 I-Line Base Pwr InfeedGI1HHX 255 I-Line ConnectorGI1MHAX 255 I-Line Mdlr HarnessGI1MHBX 255 I-Line Mdlr HarnessGI1MHCX 255 I-Line Mdlr HarnessGI1PIH24X 254 I-Line Multipurp InfeedGI1PIM24X 254 I-Line Multipurp InfeedGI1PIN24X 254 I-Line Multipurp InfeedGI1PIT24X 254 I-Line Multipurp InfeedGI1PKA24NYX 257 I-Line ADA-Hgt PwrkitGI1PKA30NYX 257 I-Line ADA-Hgt PwrkitGI1PKA36NYX 257 I-Line ADA-Hgt PwrkitGI1PKA40NYX 257 I-Line ADA-Hgt PwrkitGI1PKA42NYX 257 I-Line ADA-Hgt PwrkitGI1PKA48NYX 257 I-Line ADA-Hgt PwrkitGI1PKA60NYX 257 I-Line ADA-Hgt Pwrkit. GI1PKBNYX 256 I-Line Base Powerkit.ResourcesTransitional Specification Guide cStyle Number Index, continued 465

Style Number Index, continuedStyleNumber Page DescriptionGI1PKD24NYX 258 I-Line Desk-Hgt PwrkitGI1PKD30NYX 258 I-Line Desk-Hgt PwrkitGI1PKD36NYX 258 I-Line Desk-Hgt PwrkitGI1PKD40NYX 258 I-Line Desk-Hgt PwrkitGI1PKD42NYX 258 I-Line Desk-Hgt PwrkitGI1PKD48NYX 258 I-Line Desk-Hgt PwrkitGI1PKD60NYX 258 I-Line Desk-Hgt PwrkitGI1R1IGHX 252 I-Line ReceptacleGI1R1IGX 252 I-Line ReceptacleGI1R1SGHX 252 I-Line ReceptacleGI1R1SGX 252 I-Line ReceptacleGI1R2IGHX 252 I-Line ReceptacleGI1R2IGX 252 I-Line ReceptacleGI1R2SGHX 252 I-Line ReceptacleGI1R2SGX 252 I-Line ReceptacleGI1R3IGHX 252 I-Line ReceptacleGI1R3IGX 252 I-Line ReceptacleGI1R3SGHX 252 I-Line ReceptacleGI1R3SGX 252 I-Line ReceptacleGI1R4IGHX 252 I-Line ReceptacleGI1R4IGX 252 I-Line ReceptacleGI1R4SGHX 252 I-Line ReceptacleGI1R4SGX 252 I-Line ReceptacleGI2BPI12Y 253 I-Line Base Pwr InfeedGI2HHY 255 I-Line ConnectorGI2MHAY 255 I-Line Mdlr HarnessGI2MHBY 255 I-Line Mdlr HarnessGI2MHCY 255 I-Line Mdlr HarnessGI2PIH24Y 254 I-Line Multipurp InfeedGI2PIM24Y 254 I-Line Multipurp InfeedGI2PIN24Y 254 I-Line Multipurp InfeedGI2PIT24Y 254 I-Line Multipurp InfeedGI2PKA24NYY 257 I-Line ADA-Hgt PwrkitGI2PKA30NYY 257 I-Line ADA-Hgt PwrkitGI2PKA36NYY 257 I-Line ADA-Hgt PwrkitGI2PKA40NYY 257 I-Line ADA-Hgt PwrkitGI2PKA42NYY 257 I-Line ADA-Hgt PwrkitGI2PKA48NYY 257 I-Line ADA-Hgt PwrkitGI2PKA60NYY 257 I-Line ADA-Hgt PwrkitGI2PKBNYY 256 I-Line Base PowerkitGI2PKD24NYY 258 I-Line Desk-Hgt PwrkitGI2PKD30NYY 258 I-Line Desk-Hgt PwrkitGI2PKD36NYY 258 I-Line Desk-Hgt PwrkitGI2PKD40NYY 258 I-Line Desk-Hgt PwrkitGI2PKD42NYY 258 I-Line Desk-Hgt PwrkitGI2PKD48NYY 258 I-Line Desk-Hgt PwrkitGI2PKD60NYY 258 I-Line Desk-Hgt PwrkitGI2R1IGHY 252 I-Line ReceptacleGI2R1IGY 252 I-Line ReceptacleGI2R1SGHY 252 I-Line ReceptacleGI2R1SGY 252 I-Line ReceptacleGI2R2IGHY 252 I-Line ReceptacleGI2R2IGY 252 I-Line ReceptacleGI2R2SGHY 252 I-Line Receptacle. GI2R2SGY 252 I-Line ReceptacleStyleNumber Page DescriptionGI2R3IGHY 252 I-Line ReceptacleGI2R3IGY 252 I-Line ReceptacleGI2R3SGHY 252 I-Line ReceptacleGI2R3SGY 252 I-Line ReceptacleGI2R4IGHY 252 I-Line ReceptacleGI2R4IGY 252 I-Line ReceptacleGI2R4SGHY 252 I-Line ReceptacleGI2R4SGY 252 I-Line ReceptacleGI3BPI12Z 253 I-Line Base Pwr InfeedGI3HHZ 255 I-Line ConnectorGI3MHAZ 255 I-Line Mdlr HarnessGI3MHBZ 255 I-Line Mdlr HarnessGI3MHCZ 255 I-Line Mdlr HarnessGI3PIH24Z 254 I-Line Multipurp InfeedGI3PIM24Z 254 I-Line Multipurp InfeedGI3PIN24Z 254 I-Line Multipurp InfeedGI3PIT24Z 254 I-Line Multipurp InfeedGI3PKA24NYZ 257 I-Line ADA-Hgt PwrkitGI3PKA30NYZ 257 I-Line ADA-Hgt PwrkitGI3PKA36NYZ 257 I-Line ADA-Hgt PwrkitGI3PKA40NYZ 257 I-Line ADA-Hgt PwrkitGI3PKA42NYZ 257 I-Line ADA-Hgt PwrkitGI3PKA48NYZ 257 I-Line ADA-Hgt PwrkitGI3PKA60NYZ 257 I-Line ADA-Hgt PwrkitGI3PKBNYZ 256 I-Line Base PowerkitGI3PKD24NYZ 258 I-Line Desk-Hgt PwrkitGI3PKD30NYZ 258 I-Line Desk-Hgt PwrkitGI3PKD36NYZ 258 I-Line Desk-Hgt PwrkitGI3PKD40NYZ 258 I-Line Desk-Hgt PwrkitGI3PKD42NYZ 258 I-Line Desk-Hgt PwrkitGI3PKD48NYZ 258 I-Line Desk-Hgt PwrkitGI3PKD60NYZ 258 I-Line Desk-Hgt PwrkitGI3R1IGHZ 252 I-Line ReceptacleGI3R1IGZ 252 I-Line ReceptacleGI3R1SGHZ 252 I-Line ReceptacleGI3R1SGZ 252 I-Line ReceptacleGI3R2IGHZ 252 I-Line ReceptacleGI3R2IGZ 252 I-Line ReceptacleGI3R2SGHZ 252 I-Line ReceptacleGI3R2SGZ 252 I-Line ReceptacleGI3R3IGHZ 252 I-Line ReceptacleGI3R3IGZ 252 I-Line ReceptacleGI3R3SGHZ 252 I-Line ReceptacleGI3R3SGZ 252 I-Line ReceptacleGIAFE 248 I-Line End AdapterGIAL 248 I-Line L-AdapterGIAP 245 I-Line Acoustic PackingGIAPE 248 I-Line Panel EndGIAT 248 I-Line T-AdapterGIAX 248 I-Line X-AdapterGICBT 244 I-Line Contin Base TrimGICTB 243 I-Line Ceil Trk Bipass CvrGICTF 242 I-Line Ceiling TrackGICTLR 242 I-Line L Ceiling Track. GICTLS 242 I-Line L Ceiling Track.466 Transitional Specification Guide

Style Number IndexStyleNumber Page DescriptionGICTS 242 I-Line Ceiling TrackGICTT 243 I-Line Ceil Trk T-ClipGICTV 242 I-Line V Ceiling TrackGIDBH3 238 I-Line Butt HingesGIDBH3P 238 I-Line Butt HingesGIDBH4 238 I-Line Butt HingesGIDBH4P 238 I-Line Butt HingesGIDCLA 237 I-Line Passage SetGIDCLO 237 I-Line Cylindrical LocksetGIDDFS 239 I-Line Door Floor StopGIDMLA 237 I-Line Passage SetGIDMLO 237 I-Line Mortise LocksetGIDMWS 239 I-Line Magnetic Wall StopGIDPBF 228 I-Line Door FrameGIDPBT 228 I-Line Door FrameGIDPHS 238 I-Line Pivot HingesGIDPHSP 238 I-Line Pivot HingesGIDPPF 231 I-Line Door FrameGIDPPT 231 I-Line Door FrameGIDSBF 228 I-Line Door FrameGIDSBS 239 I-Line Screw-In Base StopGIDSBT 228 I-Line Door FrameGIDSD1 240 I-Line Double SwitchGIDSG80 241 I-Line Slider DoorGIDSG96 241 I-Line Slider DoorGIDSPF 231 I-Line Door FrameGIDSPFS 232 I-Line Door FrameGIDSPT 231 I-Line Door FrameGIDSPTS 232 I-Line Door FrameGIDSS1 240 I-Line Single SwitchGIDSS3 240 I-Line Single SwitchGIFS 245 I-Line Feature StripGIFS1 245 I-Line Feature StripGIFTE3 244 I-Line Flr Trk ExtenderGIFTE6 244 I-Line Flr Trk ExtenderGIGCM08 225 I-Line Clerstry Wall PnlGIGCM20 225 I-Line Clerstry Wall PnlGIGCM24 225 I-Line Clerstry Wall PnlGIGCM30 225 I-Line Clerstry Wall PnlGIGCM36 225 I-Line Clerstry Wall PnlGIGCM40 225 I-Line Clerstry Wall PnlGIGCM42 225 I-Line Clerstry Wall PnlGIGCM48 225 I-Line Clerstry Wall PnlGIGCM60 225 I-Line Clerstry Wall PnlGIGCS06 225 I-Line Clerstry Wall PnlGIGCS08 225 I-Line Clerstry Wall PnlGIGCS20 225 I-Line Clerstry Wall PnlGIGCS24 225 I-Line Clerstry Wall PnlGIGCS30 225 I-Line Clerstry Wall PnlGIGCS36 225 I-Line Clerstry Wall PnlGIGCS40 225 I-Line Clerstry Wall PnlGIGCS42 225 I-Line Clerstry Wall PnlGIGCS48 225 I-Line Clerstry Wall PnlGIGCS60 225 I-Line Clerstry Wall Pnl. GIGM08 221 I-Line Glass Wall PanelStyleNumber Page DescriptionGIGM20 221 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGM24 221 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGM2DL08 224 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGM2DL20 224 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGM2DL24 224 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGM2DL30 224 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGM2DL36 224 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGM2DL40 224 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGM2DL42 224 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGM2DL48 224 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGM2DL60 224 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGM30 221 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGM36 221 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGM40 221 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGM42 221 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGM48 221 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGM4EL08 222 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGM4EL20 222 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGM4EL24 222 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGM4EL30 222 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGM4EL36 222 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGM4EL40 222 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGM4EL42 222 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGM4EL48 222 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGM4EL60 222 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGM4L08 223 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGM4L20 223 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGM4L24 223 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGM4L30 223 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGM4L36 223 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGM4L40 223 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGM4L42 223 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGM4L48 223 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGM4L60 223 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGM60 221 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGS06 221 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGS08 221 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGS20 221 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGS24 221 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGS2DL06 224 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGS2DL08 224 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGS2DL20 224 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGS2DL24 224 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGS2DL30 224 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGS2DL36 224 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGS2DL40 224 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGS2DL42 224 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGS2DL48 224 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGS2DL60 224 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGS30 221 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGS36 221 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGS40 221 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGS42 221 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGS48 221 I-Line Glass Wall Panel. GIGS4EL06 222 I-Line Glass Wall Panel.ResourcesTransitional Specification Guide cStyle Number Index, continued 467

Style Number Index, continuedStyleNumber Page DescriptionGIGS4EL08 222 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGS4EL20 222 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGS4EL24 222 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGS4EL30 222 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGS4EL36 222 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGS4EL40 222 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGS4EL42 222 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGS4EL48 222 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGS4EL60 222 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGS4L06 223 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGS4L08 223 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGS4L20 223 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGS4L24 223 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGS4L30 223 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGS4L36 223 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGS4L40 223 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGS4L42 223 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGS4L48 223 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGS4L60 223 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGIGS60 221 I-Line Glass Wall PanelGILGSBF40 229 I-Line Door LeafGILGSBT40 230 I-Line Door LeafGILGSPF40 233 I-Line Door LeafGILGSPF42 235 I-Line Door LeafGILGSPT40 234 I-Line Door LeafGILGSPT42 236 I-Line Door LeafGILSPBF76 229 I-Line Door LeafGILSPBT76 230 I-Line Door LeafGILSPPF80 233 I-Line Door LeafGILSPPT80 234 I-Line Door LeafGILSSBF40 229 I-Line Door LeafGILSSBT40 230 I-Line Door LeafGILSSPF40 233 I-Line Door LeafGILSSPF42 235 I-Line Door LeafGILSSPT40 234 I-Line Door LeafGILSSPT42 236 I-Line Door LeafGIME3 246 I-Line Mini EndGIME4 246 I-Line Mini EndGIME5 246 I-Line Mini EndGIPI 251 I-Line In-Line PostGIPLR 250 I-Line L-PostGIPLS 250 I-Line L-PostGIPT 250 I-Line T-PostGIPV 251 I-Line V-PostGIPX 251 I-Line X-PostGIPY 251 I-Line Y-PostGIRP 256 I-Line Filler CoverGISM08 220 I-Line Solid Wall PanelGISM20 220 I-Line Solid Wall PanelGISM24 220 I-Line Solid Wall PanelGISM30 220 I-Line Solid Wall PanelGISM36 220 I-Line Solid Wall PanelGISM40 220 I-Line Solid Wall PanelGISM42 220 I-Line Solid Wall Panel. GISM48 220 I-Line Solid Wall PanelStyleNumber Page DescriptionGISM60 220 I-Line Solid Wall PanelGISS06 220 I-Line Solid Wall PanelGISS08 220 I-Line Solid Wall PanelGISS20 220 I-Line Solid Wall PanelGISS24 220 I-Line Solid Wall PanelGISS30 220 I-Line Solid Wall PanelGISS36 220 I-Line Solid Wall PanelGISS40 220 I-Line Solid Wall PanelGISS42 220 I-Line Solid Wall PanelGISS48 220 I-Line Solid Wall PanelGISS60 220 I-Line Solid Wall PanelGIWC1 247 I-Line Wall ChannelGIWC2 247 I-Line Wall ChannelGIWC4 247 I-Line Wall ChannelGIWCC 247 I-Line Cut Panel KitGVBLKIT 450 Groove Back KitGVCHBLM 446 Groove Chair w/Block BackGVCHSLM 447 Groove Chair w/Sail BackGVCSTR 454 Groove CastersGVCUSH 452 Groove CushionGVLEG 454 Groove LegsGVLGACR 453 Groove Table TopGVOTTM 448 Groove OttomanGVPLW 451 Groove PillowGVSHLF 453 Groove Shelf KitGVSLKIT 450 Groove Back KitGVSMACR 453 Groove Table TopGVTBLGRM 449 Groove TableGVTBLM 449 Groove TableGVTBLTOPM 449 Groove TableGVTBSHFM 449 Groove TableGVTBSUPP 453 Groove Table Support KitGWS24C 330 C LegGWS24CLA 330 C LegGWS24CRA 330 C LegGWS24CS 330 Shared C LegGWS24CSA 330 Shared C LegGWS24EP 331 End PanelGWS30EP 331 End PanelGWSI 330 Intermediate SupportGWSIA 330 Intermediate SupportGWSR 331 Rear SupportGWSRA 331 Rear SupportGWSSL 331 Straight LegGWSTIE 331 Tie PlateMPHAM6518 31 AV High-Perf Acous PanelMPHAM6524 31 AV High-Perf Acous PanelMPHAM6530 31 AV High-Perf Acous PanelMPHAM6536 31 AV High-Perf Acous PanelMPHAM6542 31 AV High-Perf Acous PanelMPHAM6548 31 AV High-Perf Acous PanelMPHAM6560 31 AV High-Perf Acous PanelMPHAM8024 31 AV High-Perf Acous PanelMPHAM8030 31 AV High-Perf Acous Panel. MPHAM8036 31 AV High-Perf Acous Panel.468 Transitional Specification Guide

Style Number IndexStyleNumber Page DescriptionMPHAM8042 31 AV High-Perf Acous PanelMPHAM8048 31 AV High-Perf Acous PanelMTK24 46 Ped Top Conv KitMTK30 46 Ped Top Conv KitMTP4 46 Ped Top Conv KitMULR18B 57 AV Mobile PedestalMULR242 57 AV Mobile PedestalMULR243 57 AV Mobile PedestalMULS18B 55 AV Mobile PedestalMULS242 55 AV Mobile PedestalMUPM24BF 52 AV WS PedestalMUPM24BFL 52 AV WS PedestalMUPM30BF 52 AV WS PedestalMUPM30BFL 52 AV WS PedestalMUSR18B 57 AV Mobile PedestalMUSR242 57 AV Mobile PedestalMUSR243 57 AV Mobile PedestalMUSS18B 55 AV Mobile PedestalMUSS242 55 AV Mobile PedestalMWTB3015 58 AV TackboardMWTB3615 58 AV TackboardMWTB4215 58 AV TackboardMWTB4815 58 AV TackboardMWTB6015 58 AV TackboardPCWS90M24 50 AV Corner WksfPCWS90N24 50 AV Corner WksfPCWS90N30 50 AV Corner WksfPCWS90W24 50 AV Corner WksfPCWS90W30 50 AV Corner WksfPTWR3017 51 AV Transaction WksfPTWR3617 51 AV Transaction WksfPTWR4217 51 AV Transaction WksfPTWR4817 51 AV Transaction WksfPTWR6017 51 AV Transaction WksfPUR242 53 AV FS PedestalPUR242L 53 AV FS PedestalPUR243 53 AV FS PedestalPUR243L 53 AV FS PedestalPUR302 53 AV FS PedestalPUR302L 53 AV FS PedestalPUR303 53 AV FS PedestalPUR303L 53 AV FS PedestalPWS3024 49 AV Rect WorksurfacePWS3030 49 AV Rect WorksurfacePWS3624 49 AV Rect WorksurfacePWS3630 49 AV Rect WorksurfacePWS4224 49 AV Rect WorksurfacePWS4230 49 AV Rect WorksurfacePWS4824 49 AV Rect WorksurfacePWS4830 49 AV Rect WorksurfacePWS6024 49 AV Rect WorksurfacePWS6030 49 AV Rect WorksurfacePWS7224 49 AV Rect WorksurfacePWS7230 49 AV Rect Worksurface. RLS243024_ 380 Stacked Lateral FileStyleNumber Page DescriptionRLS243024F 379 Stacked Lateral FileRLS243036_ 380 Stacked Lateral FileRLS243036F 379 Stacked Lateral FileRLS243048_ 380 Stacked Lateral FileRLS243048F 379 Stacked Lateral FileRLS243061_ 380 Stacked Lateral FileRLS243061F 379 Stacked Lateral FileRLS243624_ 380 Stacked Lateral FileRLS243624F 379 Stacked Lateral FileRLS243636_ 380 Stacked Lateral FileRLS243636F 379 Stacked Lateral FileRLS243648_ 380 Stacked Lateral FileRLS243648F 379 Stacked Lateral FileRLS243661_ 380 Stacked Lateral FileRLS243661F 379 Stacked Lateral FileRMCL3091 435 RM Full-Height CredenzaRMCR3091 435 RM Full-Height CredenzaRMDL0802 434 RM Reception Desk w/ReturnRMDL3678 431 RM DeskRMDL3691 431 RM DeskRMDL3900 433 RM Reception DeskRMDR0802 434 RM Reception Desk w/ReturnRMDR3678 431 RM DeskRMDR3691 431 RM DeskRMDR3900 433 RM Reception DeskRMFL3014 444 RM SofaRMFR3014 444 RM SofaRMGL3691 430 RM Desk with Glass TopRMGR3691 430 RM Desk with Glass TopRMHL3060 444 RM ChairRMHR3060 444 RM ChairRMLL0202 432 RM Desk w/ReturnRMLL3091 435 RM Low-Height CredenzaRMLL8802 432 RM Desk w/ReturnRMLR0202 432 RM Desk w/ReturnRMLR3091 435 RM Low-Height CredenzaRMLR8802 432 RM Desk w/ReturnRMNL3096 444 RM BenchRMNR3096 444 RM BenchRMPA1 436 RM A-Series PedestalRMPA10 436 RM A-Series PedestalRMPA11 436 RM A-Series PedestalRMPA12 436 RM A-Series PedestalRMPA2 436 RM A-Series PedestalRMPA3 436 RM A-Series PedestalRMPA4 436 RM A-Series PedestalRMPA5 436 RM A-Series PedestalRMPA6 436 RM A-Series PedestalRMPA7 436 RM A-Series PedestalRMPA8 436 RM A-Series PedestalRMPA9 436 RM A-Series PedestalRMPB1 437 RM B-Series PedestalRMPB2 437 RM B-Series PedestalRMPB3 437 RM B-Series Pedestal. RMPB4 437 RM B-Series Pedestal.ResourcesTransitional Specification Guide cStyle Number Index, continued 469

Style Number Index, continuedStyleNumber Page DescriptionRMPB5 437 RM B-Series PedestalRMPB6 437 RM B-Series PedestalRMPB7 437 RM B-Series PedestalRMPB8 437 RM B-Series PedestalRMPC1 438 RM C-Series PedestalRMPC2 438 RM C-Series PedestalRMPC3 438 RM C-Series PedestalRMPC4 438 RM C-Series PedestalRMPC5 438 RM C-Series PedestalRMPC6 438 RM C-Series PedestalRMPD1 439 RM D-Series PedestalRMPD2 439 RM D-Series PedestalRMPD3 439 RM D-Series PedestalRMPD4 439 RM D-Series PedestalRMPD5 439 RM D-Series PedestalRMPD6 439 RM D-Series PedestalRMPD7 439 RM D-Series PedestalRMPD8 439 RM D-Series PedestalRMPE1 440 RM E-Series PedestalRMPE2 440 RM E-Series PedestalRMPE3 440 RM E-Series PedestalRMPE4 440 RM E-Series PedestalRMPE5 440 RM E-Series PedestalRMPE6 440 RM E-Series PedestalRMWL0293 443 RM WorkwallRMWL10293 443 RM WorkwallRMWL11985 443 RM WorkwallRMWL12791 443 RM WorkwallRMWL1985 443 RM WorkwallRMWL2791 443 RM WorkwallRMWR0293 443 RM WorkwallRMWR10293 443 RM WorkwallRMWR11985 443 RM WorkwallRMWR12791 443 RM WorkwallRMWR1985 443 RM WorkwallRMWR2791 443 RM WorkwallRPF1825A_ 387 Fixed PedestalRPF1825AF 384 Fixed PedestalRPF1825B_ 387 Fixed PedestalRPF1825BF 384 Fixed PedestalRPF2425A_ 387 Fixed PedestalRPF2425AF 384 Fixed PedestalRPF2425B_ 387 Fixed PedestalRPF2425BF 384 Fixed PedestalRPF3025A_ 387 Fixed PedestalRPF3025AF 384 Fixed PedestalRPF3025B_ 387 Fixed PedestalRPF3025BF 384 Fixed PedestalRPXCK2518F 388 Pedestal Conversion KitRPXCK2518P 388 Pedestal Conversion KitRPXCK2524F 388 Pedestal Conversion KitRPXCK2524P 388 Pedestal Conversion KitRPXCK2530F 388 Pedestal Conversion KitRPXCK2530P 388 Pedestal Conversion Kit. RXAFHFB36 391 Hanging Folder BarStyleNumber Page DescriptionRXAFHFB42 391 Hanging Folder BarRXAWM34 391 Wire ManagerRXAWM59 391 Wire ManagerRXBS152401 390 Steel BaseRXBS153001 390 Steel BaseRXBS153601 390 Steel BaseRXBS154201 390 Steel BaseRXBS181801 390 Steel BaseRXBS182401 390 Steel BaseRXBS183001 390 Steel BaseRXBS183601 390 Steel BaseRXBS184201 390 Steel BaseRXBS240901 390 Steel BaseRXBS241501 390 Steel BaseRXBS241801 390 Steel BaseRXBS242401 390 Steel BaseRXBS243001 390 Steel BaseRXBS243601 390 Steel BaseRXBS300901 390 Steel BaseRXBS301501 390 Steel BaseRXBS302401 390 Steel BaseTS200130HF 424 TS Hanging File Folder FrameTS200136HF 424 TS Hanging File Folder FrameTS200142HF 424 TS Hanging File Folder FrameTS200827CW 425 TS Counterweight PackageTS200837CW 425 TS Counterweight PackageTS200847CW 425 TS Counterweight PackageTS200858CW 425 TS Counterweight PackageTS200DV12 424 TS DividersTS200RW 424 TS Adjustable RailsTS210230L 423 TS 2100 Lateral FileTS210236L 423 TS 2100 Lateral FileTS210242L 423 TS 2100 Lateral FileTS210330L 423 TS 2100 Lateral FileTS210336L 423 TS 2100 Lateral FileTS210342L 423 TS 2100 Lateral FileTS210430L 423 TS 2100 Lateral FileTS210436L 423 TS 2100 Lateral FileTS210442L 423 TS 2100 Lateral FileTS210530L 423 TS 2100 Lateral FileTS210536L 423 TS 2100 Lateral FileTS210542L 423 TS 2100 Lateral FileTS2VP22BBF 426 TS Value PedestalTS2VP22FF 426 TS Value PedestalTS2VP28BBF 426 TS Value PedestalTS2VP28FF 426 TS Value PedestalTS38004 428 TS Springboard Mgr ChairTS38005 428 TS Springboard Mgr ChairTS38006 428 TS Springboard Mgr ChairTS70WPC 21 AN Worksurface SupportTS71224WG 12 AN Glass Window KitTS71224WP 13 AN Pass-Thru Window KitTS71230WG 12 AN Glass Window KitTS71230WP 13 AN Pass-Thru Window Kit. TS71236WG 12 AN Glass Window Kit.470 Transitional Specification Guide

Style Number IndexStyleNumber Page DescriptionTS71236WP 13 AN Pass-Thru Window KitTS71242WG 12 AN Glass Window KitTS71242WP 13 AN Pass-Thru Window KitTS71248WG 12 AN Glass Window KitTS71248WP 13 AN Pass-Thru Window KitTS71260WG 12 AN Glass Window KitTS71260WP 13 AN Pass-Thru Window KitTS71272WG 12 AN Glass Window KitTS71272WP 13 AN Pass-Thru Window KitTS71636TC 17 AN Transaction CtopTS71642TC 17 AN Transaction CtopTS71648TC 17 AN Transaction CtopTS71660TC 17 AN Transaction CtopTS72424WG 12 AN Glass Window KitTS72424WP 13 AN Pass-Thru Window KitTS72430WG 12 AN Glass Window KitTS72430WP 13 AN Pass-Thru Window KitTS72436WG 12 AN Glass Window KitTS72436WP 13 AN Pass-Thru Window KitTS72442WG 12 AN Glass Window KitTS72442WP 13 AN Pass-Thru Window KitTS72448WG 12 AN Glass Window KitTS72448WP 13 AN Pass-Thru Window KitTS724FLR 26 AN FillerTS72626LK 20 AN Crvd Link WorksurfaceTS72632LK 20 AN Crvd Link WorksurfaceTS72648APK 18 AN Angled Penin WksfTS72660APK 18 AN Angled Penin WksfTS73042BR 14 AN Bridge WorksurfaceTS73048BR 14 AN Bridge WorksurfaceTS73096SP 15 AN Scoop WorksurfaceTS730FLR 26 AN FillerTS73226LK 20 AN Crvd Link WorksurfaceTS73232LK 20 AN Crvd Link WorksurfaceTS73248APK 18 AN Angled Penin WksfTS73260APK 18 AN Angled Penin WksfTS73624WG 12 AN Glass Window KitTS73624WP 13 AN Pass-Thru Window KitTS73630WG 12 AN Glass Window KitTS73630WP 13 AN Pass-Thru Window KitTS73636WG 12 AN Glass Window KitTS73636WP 13 AN Pass-Thru Window KitTS73642WG 12 AN Glass Window KitTS73642WP 13 AN Pass-Thru Window KitTS73648WG 12 AN Glass Window KitTS73648WP 13 AN Pass-Thru Window KitTS73684WV 16 AN Wave WorksurfaceTS73696WV 16 AN Wave WorksurfaceTS74824WG 12 AN Glass Window KitTS74830WG 12 AN Glass Window KitTS74836WG 12 AN Glass Window KitTS74842WG 12 AN Glass Window KitTS74848WG 12 AN Glass Window KitTS750HRK 19 AN Spanner Worksurface. TS762HRK 19 AN Spanner WorksurfaceStyleNumber Page DescriptionTS772RC 21 AN Worksurface SupportTS7BDPT 28 AN Pencil TrayTS7CST 23 AN Cable Storage TrayTS7MPP 22 AN Ped-to-Mod Pnl FillerTSADSF1224 421 TS Fabric Data Duct ScreenTSADSF1230 421 TS Fabric Data Duct ScreenTSADSF1236 421 TS Fabric Data Duct ScreenTSADSF1242 421 TS Fabric Data Duct ScreenTSADSF1248 421 TS Fabric Data Duct ScreenTSADSF1260 421 TS Fabric Data Duct ScreenTSADSF2424 421 TS Fabric Data Duct ScreenTSADSF2430 421 TS Fabric Data Duct ScreenTSADSF2436 421 TS Fabric Data Duct ScreenTSADSF2442 421 TS Fabric Data Duct ScreenTSADSF2448 421 TS Fabric Data Duct ScreenTSADSF2460 421 TS Fabric Data Duct ScreenTSADST1224 422 TS Translucent Data Duct ScreenTSADST1230 422 TS Translucent Data Duct ScreenTSADST1236 422 TS Translucent Data Duct ScreenTSADST1242 422 TS Translucent Data Duct ScreenTSADST1248 422 TS Translucent Data Duct ScreenTSADST1260 422 TS Translucent Data Duct ScreenTSADST2424 422 TS Translucent Data Duct ScreenTSADST2430 422 TS Translucent Data Duct ScreenTSADST2436 422 TS Translucent Data Duct ScreenTSADST2442 422 TS Translucent Data Duct ScreenTSADST2448 422 TS Translucent Data Duct ScreenTSADST2460 422 TS Translucent Data Duct ScreenTSADT2424 420 TS Data Duct with TrestleTSADT2430 420 TS Data Duct with TrestleTSADT2436 420 TS Data Duct with TrestleTSADT2442 420 TS Data Duct with TrestleTSADT2448 420 TS Data Duct with TrestleTSADT2460 420 TS Data Duct with TrestleTSAMS24 419 TS Translucent Panel Top ScrnTSAMS30 419 TS Translucent Panel Top ScrnTSAMS36 419 TS Translucent Panel Top ScrnTSAMS42 419 TS Translucent Panel Top ScrnTSAMS48 419 TS Translucent Panel Top ScrnTSAMS60 419 TS Translucent Panel Top ScrnTSAMSF24 419 TS Fabric Panel Top ScrnTSAMSF30 419 TS Fabric Panel Top ScrnTSAMSF36 419 TS Fabric Panel Top ScrnTSAMSF42 419 TS Fabric Panel Top ScrnTSAMSF48 419 TS Fabric Panel Top ScrnTSAMSF60 419 TS Fabric Panel Top ScrnTSAPNF4224 418 TS Fabric Panel InsertTSAPNF4230 418 TS Fabric Panel InsertTSAPNF4236 418 TS Fabric Panel InsertTSAPNF4242 418 TS Fabric Panel InsertTSAPNF4248 418 TS Fabric Panel InsertTSAPNF4260 418 TS Fabric Panel InsertTSAPNF5424 418 TS Fabric Panel InsertTSAPNF5430 418 TS Fabric Panel Insert. TSAPNF5436 418 TS Fabric Panel Insert.ResourcesTransitional Specification Guide cStyle Number Index, continued 471

Style Number Index, continuedStyleNumber Page DescriptionTSAPNF5442 418 TS Fabric Panel InsertTSAPNF5448 418 TS Fabric Panel InsertTSAPNF5460 418 TS Fabric Panel InsertTSAPNF6624 418 TS Fabric Panel InsertTSAPNF6630 418 TS Fabric Panel InsertTSAPNF6636 418 TS Fabric Panel InsertTSAPNF6642 418 TS Fabric Panel InsertTSAPNF6648 418 TS Fabric Panel InsertTSAPNF6660 418 TS Fabric Panel InsertTSPFTAK 426 TS Pedestal FillerUAAS30 8 AP Adjustable ShelfUAC2224 5 AP 34"H CartUAC3040 6 AP Cart with WorksurfaceUAC3040L 6 AP Cart with WorksurfaceUAC3053 7 AP Cart with Slatwall PnlUAC3065 7 AP Cart with Slatwall PnlUAC4840 6 AP Cart with WorksurfaceUAC4840L 6 AP Cart with WorksurfaceUALS30 9 AP Lockable StorageUAT2442N 4 AP Personal TableUATOTE 8 AP ToteUPF24OM 27 AN Pathways FillerUPF30OM 27 AN Pathways FillerX2AA2465A1 60 Vertical CabinetX2AA2465B7 60 Vertical CabinetX2AA2468A5 60 Vertical CabinetX2AA2468B6 60 Vertical CabinetX2AD24000 68 Adjustable ShelfX2AF2468A0 60 Vertical CabinetX2AF2468B1 60 Vertical CabinetX2B023658 63 Storage TowerX2B02365A9 63 Storage TowerX2B02365B2 63 Storage TowerX2B02365C0 63 Storage TowerX2B023757 63 Storage TowerX2B02375A7 63 Storage TowerX2B02375B8 63 Storage TowerX2B02375C9 63 Storage TowerX2B032659 63 Storage TowerX2B03265A4 63 Storage TowerX2B03265B8 63 Storage TowerX2B03265C6 63 Storage TowerX2B032753 63 Storage TowerX2B03275A3 63 Storage TowerX2B03275B4 63 Storage TowerX2B03275C5 63 Storage TowerX2IA00001 66 File FrameX2IB00004 66 File FrameX2IC00007 67 File FrameX2IE00003 68 Adjustable Shelf w/ Ctr HookX2IF00006 67 DividersX2IG00009 67 DividersX5AA00004 64 6" Media TrayX5AB00007 65 12" Media Tray. X5AC00000 65 Bi-Level TrayStyleNumber Page DescriptionX5AE00006 64 Convenience TrayX5BD00004 65 Tray DividersX5CV00009 66 Vert Stationery TrayZAF2024 279 MT Acoustic FillerZAF2030 279 MT Acoustic FillerZAF2036 279 MT Acoustic FillerZAF2042 279 MT Acoustic FillerZAF2048 279 MT Acoustic FillerZBJ243060L 293 MT Bubble Jetty WksfZBJ243060R 293 MT Bubble Jetty WksfZBJ303066L 293 MT Bubble Jetty WksfZBJ303066R 293 MT Bubble Jetty WksfZBV2430L 291 MT Bubble Vstr WksfZBV2430R 291 MT Bubble Vstr WksfZBV3030L 291 MT Bubble Vstr WksfZBV3030R 291 MT Bubble Vstr WksfZCC24R24R 296 MT Cnr CountertopZCC24R24S 297 MT Cnr CountertopZCC24R30R 296 MT Cnr CountertopZCC24R30S 297 MT Cnr CountertopZCC24R36R 296 MT Cnr CountertopZCC24R36S 297 MT Cnr CountertopZCC24R42R 296 MT Cnr CountertopZCC24R42S 297 MT Cnr CountertopZCC24R48R 296 MT Cnr CountertopZCC24R48S 297 MT Cnr CountertopZCC24S24R 297 MT Cnr CountertopZCC24S24S 296 MT Cnr CountertopZCC24S30R 297 MT Cnr CountertopZCC24S30S 296 MT Cnr CountertopZCC24S36R 297 MT Cnr CountertopZCC24S36S 296 MT Cnr CountertopZCC24S42R 297 MT Cnr CountertopZCC24S42S 296 MT Cnr CountertopZCC24S48R 297 MT Cnr CountertopZCC24S48S 296 MT Cnr CountertopZCC30R24R 296 MT Cnr CountertopZCC30R24S 297 MT Cnr CountertopZCC30R30R 296 MT Cnr CountertopZCC30R30S 297 MT Cnr CountertopZCC30R36R 296 MT Cnr CountertopZCC30R36S 297 MT Cnr CountertopZCC30R42R 296 MT Cnr CountertopZCC30R42S 297 MT Cnr CountertopZCC30R48R 296 MT Cnr CountertopZCC30R48S 297 MT Cnr CountertopZCC30S24R 297 MT Cnr CountertopZCC30S24S 296 MT Cnr CountertopZCC30S30R 297 MT Cnr CountertopZCC30S30S 296 MT Cnr CountertopZCC30S36R 297 MT Cnr CountertopZCC30S36S 296 MT Cnr CountertopZCC30S42R 297 MT Cnr CountertopZCC30S42S 296 MT Cnr Countertop. ZCC30S48R 297 MT Cnr Countertop.472 Transitional Specification Guide

Style Number IndexStyleNumber Page DescriptionZCC30S48S 296 MT Cnr CountertopZCC36R24R 296 MT Cnr CountertopZCC36R24S 297 MT Cnr CountertopZCC36R30R 296 MT Cnr CountertopZCC36R30S 297 MT Cnr CountertopZCC36R36R 296 MT Cnr CountertopZCC36R36S 297 MT Cnr CountertopZCC36R42R 296 MT Cnr CountertopZCC36R42S 297 MT Cnr CountertopZCC36R48R 296 MT Cnr CountertopZCC36R48S 297 MT Cnr CountertopZCC36S24R 297 MT Cnr CountertopZCC36S24S 296 MT Cnr CountertopZCC36S30R 297 MT Cnr CountertopZCC36S30S 296 MT Cnr CountertopZCC36S36R 297 MT Cnr CountertopZCC36S36S 296 MT Cnr CountertopZCC36S42R 297 MT Cnr CountertopZCC36S42S 296 MT Cnr CountertopZCC36S48R 297 MT Cnr CountertopZCC36S48S 296 MT Cnr CountertopZCC42R24R 296 MT Cnr CountertopZCC42R24S 297 MT Cnr CountertopZCC42R30R 296 MT Cnr CountertopZCC42R30S 297 MT Cnr CountertopZCC42R36R 296 MT Cnr CountertopZCC42R36S 297 MT Cnr CountertopZCC42R42R 296 MT Cnr CountertopZCC42R42S 297 MT Cnr CountertopZCC42R48R 296 MT Cnr CountertopZCC42R48S 297 MT Cnr CountertopZCC42S24R 297 MT Cnr CountertopZCC42S24S 296 MT Cnr CountertopZCC42S30R 297 MT Cnr CountertopZCC42S30S 296 MT Cnr CountertopZCC42S36R 297 MT Cnr CountertopZCC42S36S 296 MT Cnr CountertopZCC42S42R 297 MT Cnr CountertopZCC42S42S 296 MT Cnr CountertopZCC42S48R 297 MT Cnr CountertopZCC42S48S 296 MT Cnr CountertopZCC48R24R 296 MT Cnr CountertopZCC48R24S 297 MT Cnr CountertopZCC48R30R 296 MT Cnr CountertopZCC48R30S 297 MT Cnr CountertopZCC48R36R 296 MT Cnr CountertopZCC48R36S 297 MT Cnr CountertopZCC48R42R 296 MT Cnr CountertopZCC48R42S 297 MT Cnr CountertopZCC48R48R 296 MT Cnr CountertopZCC48R48S 297 MT Cnr CountertopZCC48S24R 297 MT Cnr CountertopZCC48S24S 296 MT Cnr CountertopZCC48S30R 297 MT Cnr Countertop. ZCC48S30S 296 MT Cnr CountertopStyleNumber Page DescriptionZCC48S36R 297 MT Cnr CountertopZCC48S36S 296 MT Cnr CountertopZCC48S42R 297 MT Cnr CountertopZCC48S42S 296 MT Cnr CountertopZCC48S48R 297 MT Cnr CountertopZCC48S48S 296 MT Cnr CountertopZCIFICLIP 278 MT InterfaceZCIFINESR 278 MT InterfaceZCIFLATSR 278 MT InterfaceZCIFLCLIP 278 MT InterfaceZCITEG 278 MT InterfaceZCKBC42 299 MT Adj-Ht Wksf w/CrkZCKBC48 299 MT Adj-Ht Wksf w/CrkZCKBS42 299 MT Adj-Ht Wksf w/CrkZCKBS48 299 MT Adj-Ht Wksf w/CrkZCKDC42 299 MT Adj-Ht Wksf w/CrkZCKDC48 299 MT Adj-Ht Wksf w/CrkZCKDS42 299 MT Adj-Ht Wksf w/CrkZCKDS48 299 MT Adj-Ht Wksf w/CrkZCKEL24 300 MT Adj-Ht Ext WksfZCKEL36 300 MT Adj-Ht Ext WksfZCKER24 300 MT Adj-Ht Ext WksfZCKER36 300 MT Adj-Ht Ext WksfZCKSC42 299 MT Adj-Ht Wksf w/CrkZCKSC48 299 MT Adj-Ht Wksf w/CrkZCKSS42 299 MT Adj-Ht Wksf w/CrkZCKSS48 299 MT Adj-Ht Wksf w/CrkZCT24244242 284 MT Corner WksfZCT24244848 284 MT Corner WksfZCT24244854 289 MT Ext Corner WksfZCT24244860 289 MT Ext Corner WksfZCT24244866 289 MT Ext Corner WksfZCT24244872 289 MT Ext Corner WksfZCT24244878 289 MT Ext Corner WksfZCT24245448 287 MT Ext Corner WksfZCT24246048 287 MT Ext Corner WksfZCT24246648 287 MT Ext Corner WksfZCT24247248 287 MT Ext Corner WksfZCT24247848 287 MT Ext Corner WksfZCT24304848 284 MT Corner WksfZCT24304854 289 MT Ext Corner WksfZCT24304860 289 MT Ext Corner WksfZCT24304866 289 MT Ext Corner WksfZCT24304872 289 MT Ext Corner WksfZCT24304878 289 MT Ext Corner WksfZCT24305448 287 MT Ext Corner WksfZCT24306048 287 MT Ext Corner WksfZCT24306648 287 MT Ext Corner WksfZCT24307248 287 MT Ext Corner WksfZCT24307848 287 MT Ext Corner WksfZCT30244848 284 MT Corner WksfZCT30244854 289 MT Ext Corner WksfZCT30244860 289 MT Ext Corner WksfZCT30244866 289 MT Ext Corner Wksf. ZCT30244872 289 MT Ext Corner Wksf.ResourcesTransitional Specification Guide cStyle Number Index, continued 473

Style Number Index, continuedStyleNumber Page DescriptionZCT30244878 289 MT Ext Corner WksfZCT30245448 287 MT Ext Corner WksfZCT30246048 287 MT Ext Corner WksfZCT30246648 287 MT Ext Corner WksfZCT30247248 287 MT Ext Corner WksfZCT30247848 287 MT Ext Corner WksfZCT30304848 284 MT Corner WksfZCT30304854 289 MT Ext Corner WksfZCT30304860 289 MT Ext Corner WksfZCT30304866 289 MT Ext Corner WksfZCT30304872 289 MT Ext Corner WksfZCT30304878 289 MT Ext Corner WksfZCT30305448 287 MT Ext Corner WksfZCT30306048 287 MT Ext Corner WksfZCT30306648 287 MT Ext Corner WksfZCT30307248 287 MT Ext Corner WksfZCT30307848 287 MT Ext Corner WksfZCTTEGUSR 278 MT InterfaceZCV24304860 290 MT Ext Cor Cove WksfZCV24304866 290 MT Ext Cor Cove WksfZCV24304872 290 MT Ext Cor Cove WksfZCV24304878 290 MT Ext Cor Cove WksfZCV30246048 290 MT Ext Cor Cove WksfZCV30246648 290 MT Ext Cor Cove WksfZCV30247248 290 MT Ext Cor Cove WksfZCV30247848 290 MT Ext Cor Cove WksfZD4886 281 MT DoorZDF4886 280 MT Door FrameZECDC42 301 MT E-A Adj-Ht WksfZECDC48 301 MT E-A Adj-Ht WksfZECDS42 301 MT E-A Adj-Ht WksfZECDS48 301 MT E-A Adj-Ht WksfZECSC42 301 MT E-A Adj-Ht WksfZECSC48 301 MT E-A Adj-Ht WksfZECSS42 301 MT E-A Adj-Ht WksfZECSS48 301 MT E-A Adj-Ht WksfZFS51 294 MT Fan Spanner WksfZFS63 294 MT Fan Spanner WksfZJ24304866R 292 MT Jetty WorksurfaceZJ24304878R 292 MT Jetty WorksurfaceZJ30246648L 292 MT Jetty WorksurfaceZJ30247848L 292 MT Jetty WorksurfaceZJ30304866R 292 MT Jetty WorksurfaceZJ30304878R 292 MT Jetty WorksurfaceZJ30306648L 292 MT Jetty WorksurfaceZJ30307848L 292 MT Jetty WorksurfaceZSC24RR 295 MT Str CountertopZSC24RS 295 MT Str CountertopZSC24SS 295 MT Str CountertopZSC30RR 295 MT Str CountertopZSC30RS 295 MT Str CountertopZSC30SS 295 MT Str CountertopZSC36RR 295 MT Str CountertopZSC36RS 295 MT Str Countertop. ZSC36SS 295 MT Str CountertopStyleNumber Page DescriptionZSC42RR 295 MT Str CountertopZSC42RS 295 MT Str CountertopZSC42SS 295 MT Str CountertopZSC48RR 295 MT Str CountertopZSC48RS 295 MT Str CountertopZSC48SS 295 MT Str CountertopZSC54RR 295 MT Str CountertopZSC54RS 295 MT Str CountertopZSC54SS 295 MT Str CountertopZSC60RR 295 MT Str CountertopZSC60RS 295 MT Str CountertopZSC60SS 295 MT Str CountertopZSC66RR 295 MT Str CountertopZSC66RS 295 MT Str CountertopZSC66SS 295 MT Str CountertopZSC72RR 295 MT Str CountertopZSC72RS 295 MT Str CountertopZSC72SS 295 MT Str CountertopZSC78RR 295 MT Str CountertopZSC78RS 295 MT Str CountertopZSC78SS 295 MT Str CountertopZSC84RR 295 MT Str CountertopZSC84RS 295 MT Str CountertopZSC84SS 295 MT Str CountertopZSC90RR 295 MT Str CountertopZSC90RS 295 MT Str CountertopZSC90SS 295 MT Str CountertopZSC96RR 295 MT Str CountertopZSC96RS 295 MT Str CountertopZSC96SS 295 MT Str CountertopZSP51 294 MT Spanner WksfZSP63 294 MT Spanner WksfZST2424 283 MT Straight WksfZST2430 283 MT Straight WksfZST2436 283 MT Straight WksfZST2442 283 MT Straight WksfZST2448 283 MT Straight WksfZST2454 283 MT Straight WksfZST2460 283 MT Straight WksfZST2466 283 MT Straight WksfZST2472 283 MT Straight WksfZST3024 283 MT Straight WksfZST3030 283 MT Straight WksfZST3036 283 MT Straight WksfZST3042 283 MT Straight WksfZST3048 283 MT Straight WksfZST3054 283 MT Straight WksfZST3060 283 MT Straight WksfZST3066 283 MT Straight WksfZST3072 283 MT Straight Wksf..474 Transitional Specification Guide

Style Number IndexResourcesTransitional Specification Guide 475

Trademark List.® The following registered trademarks are usedunder license from Steelcase DevelopmentCorporation: Accelerate, Ally, Answer,Anthem, Arrondi, Avenir, Ballet, Bix, BraytonInternational Collection, Brayton TextileCollection, Breton, Canto, Chancellor,Collegium, Company, Concentrx, Context,Criterion, Crushed Can, Decorum, Designtex,Details, Drive, Elective Elements, Ellipse,Ember Chrome, Emerge, Etude, ExclamationMark, Firstfile, Gentry, Ginkgo, Ginkgo Biloba,Hardwear, Ideo, Internode, Jersey, Kart, Kick,LaCosta, Latour, Leap, Let’s B, Lucy, Lyra,Lytyn, Manhattan Product Configuration, Max-Stacker, Media Dock, Metro, Migrations, Miko,Montage, Oriana, Parade, Pathways, PerfectMatch, Player, Power Pincher, Portal, Protégé,Raf System, Rally, Rapport, Relevant, Reply,Sensor, Series 9000, Springboard, Steelcase,Steelcase Design Partnership, SteelcaseWorkplace Performance, Stow Davis,TeamWork, Technique, Texpress, Treehouse,Trilogy, Turnstone, Vecta, Vectaflex, Werndl,Wizard, and Workflo.® The following is a registered trademark ofByrne Electrical, Rockford, Michigan: Interport.® The following is a registered trademark ofGenlyte Thomas Company, Louisville, KY:Lightolier.® The following is a registered trademark ofLeviton Manufacturing Company, Little Neck,NY: Decora.® The following is a registered trademark ofMicrosoft Corporation, Redmond, WA:Microsoft.® The following is a registered trademark ofPanduit Corporation, Lockport, IL: Panduit.® The following is a registered trademark ofTrav (Press), Cuneo, Italy: Assisa.® The following is a registered trademark ofVirtual Ink Corporation: mimioActive.® The following registered trademarks are underlicense from Wilkhahn Furniture Products:Avera, Confair, Senzo, Versal, and WilkhahnFS.. The following trademarks are used underlicense from Steelcase DevelopmentCorporation: 4 o’clock, à la carte,Active/Passive Shelf, Activity Products, Adia,Alcove, Alerion, Alexander Street Collection,Aliso, Allegro, Alongside, American Elect,American Tradition, Anson, Arbor,Archipelago, Archive Collection, Arriva, Ascot,Astor, Austin, Avalon, Bira, Bonn, Boomerang,Bradbury, Breadbox, Brio, Buxton, Cachet,Callahan, Camber, Canopy, Cappucino,Catalina, CbP, Chester, Chorus, Chronos,Ciao, Clarendon, Classic Rectangular,Collaboration, Collins, Cologne, Colorbox,Common (Shelf), Commons, Community,Community based Planning CbP, Convene,Convey, Cortex, Cosima, Croix, Cubby, Cubis,Cushion, Customiz, Dataduct, Datum, Deck,Dedoes, Déjà, Detour, Detriana, DNA,Domain, Donovan, Dorchester, Downspout,Drop Top Hutch, Duospace, Eastlake,Eastridge, Eco, Ella, Elsa, Emmy, Encounter,Enea, EnSync, Ensemble, Entourage,Environmental Impact Collection, Equinox,Escapade, Et Al, E-Table, Exponents,Express12, Extreme Conditions, Fillmore, FlatTop, Fling, Flip Top, Footnote, Fortuna,Frontier, Fuji, Futu, Galilei, Galveston,Garland, Ginger, Glenwood, Go Wall, Greco,Greenbrier, Grip, Groove, Groupwork,Hannah, Hatch, Hatchback, Hatteras, HealthDesign, Hitch, Huddleboard, Impact,Incognito, Indy, InfoWizard, InterAct, IOS,I-Solve, Jacket, Jenny, Jetty, Juice, Kendo,Kiana, L’Attitude, Lazlo, Lean Too, Lemon,Lift-N-Slide, Lotus, Lyric, M/O, Malibu,Manhatten, Mansfield, Martini, Masque,Mingle, Monteray, Montreal, MyWizard, Nadia,Nickel, Nine, Ontrak, Onyx, Outlook, Paloma,Parliament, Parts Advantage, Pasio,Passarelle, Patriarch, Patterson, Payback,Peek, Pendio, Personal Border, Pier Top,Pipe, Pisa, Playback, Portal, Progeny, Radio,Rag Top, Rei, Reunion, Rhine, Rialto, Ricetta,Riser, Rizzi Arc, Rocco, RoomWizard, Rover,Runaround, Runner, Satellite, Scribe,Shadow, Shield, Shortbed, Skinny, Sidebar,Sidewalk, Sieste, Sine, Smoke, Snug,Softwork, Spinz, Sportswear, St. Clair,Stationkits, Stiletto, Stuttgart, Super Shelf,Surprise!, Switch, Template, Terrazzo,Tessare, Theorem, Think, Topaz, Topo, TopSpin, Touchdown, Train, Trolly, T-Wall,Umbrella, Underline, Unison, Uno, Utility Bar,Venetia, Walden, Warehouse, Whittier,Windsor, Wizard WebSigns, Your Profile, YourPower, and Your Preference. The following is a trademark of MicrosoftCorporation, Redmond, WA: Windows. The following is a trademark of Ultrafabrics,LLC, Elmsford, NY: Ultraleather. The following trademarks are used underlicense from Wilkhahn Furniture: Cana, Linus,Logon, Picto, Range, Stitz, Thema, Timetable,and Tubis...